02 1 155478 152 A 00 en

APR: Wülbern, Stefan // DES: CIBS Gesellschaft fü, // 04.12.
2007 16:13
CLAUDIUS PETERS
RAW MEAL SILO MC 26
Technical Documentation
Operation and Maintenance Manual
Client : ISHIKAWAJIMA-HARIMA HEAVY

INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
Installation site : BIM SON, VIETNAM
CPP key word : IHI FOR BIM SON II
CPP order no. : 02-1/155.478/572
Year of construction : 2007
Date : 04.12.2007
Document file no. : 02-1-155478-152-A-00.en
Suppliers : Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

Schanzenstraße 40
D-21614 Buxtehude
Telefon: +49 4161 706-0
Telefax: +49 4161 706-270
Mail@claudiuspeters.com
Project manager : Mr. I. Fuss
Telefon. +49 4161 706-434
Ingo.Fuss@claudiuspeters.com
Assembly / commissioning : Mr. J. Müller
Telefon: +49 4161 706-470
Jochen.Mueller@claudiuspeters.com
Spare parts : Mr. S. Oehme
Telefon: +49 4161 706-258
Stephan.Oehme@claudiuspeters.com
1
APR: Wülbern, Stefan // DES: CIBS Gesellschaft fü, // 03.12.2007 13:01
TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION: OPERATION
Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date
0 TABLE OF CONTENTS
0 R 1 TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 02-1/155478-153/A-00.en 00 30.11.2007
1 PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES 596.0009.1000A/06.en 00 30.11.2007
2 SPARE PARTS MANAGEMENT 596.0021.0021A/00.en 00 30.11.2007
3 PROCESS DESCRIPTION
3 R 1 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, FLOWSHEET 02-1/155478-100/E-05 00 30.11.2007
3 R 2 CONSUMER LIST RAW MEAL SILO MC26 AND CEMENT SILO 1-2 IC24 02-1/155478-951/A-04 00 30.11.2007
3 R 3 INSTRUMENT LIST RAW MEAL SILO MC26 AND CEMENT SILO 1-2 IC24 02-1/155478-952/A-04 00 30.11.2007
4 GENERAL LISTS, CERTIFICATES, DOCUMENTS
4 Z 1 SPECIFICATION 02-1/155478-866/A-03.en 00 30.11.2007
4 R 2 SUPPLY LIST 02-1/155478-150/B-02.en 00 30.11.2007
4 R 3 CROSS REFERENCE LIST 02-1/155478-151/B-00.en 00 30.11.2007
4 R 4 LUBRICATION LIST 02-1/155478-863/A-01.en 00 30.11.2007
5 PLANT DRAWINGS
5 R 1 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, CONTROL AIR SCHEME 02-1/155478-105/E-03 00 30.11.2007
5 R 2 ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS
5 R 2 1 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 02-1/155478-110/E-04 00 30.11.2007
5 R 2 2 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, SILO FEEDING ARRANGEMENT 02-1/155478-113/E-03 00 30.11.2007
5 R 2 3 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, SILO FEEDING OPENINGS AND LOADS 02-1/155478-114/D-03 00 30.11.2007
5 R 2 4 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, SILO DISCHARGE 02-1/155478-115/E-02 00 30.11.2007
5 R 2 5 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, SILO AERATION 02-1/155478-116/E-03 00 30.11.2007
5 R 2 6 AERATION FOR FEED BOX 1XFLOW-CONTROL-GATE 02-1/155478-117/B-01 00 30.11.2007
5 R 2 7 RAW MEAL SILO MC26, BLOWERROOM 02-1/155478-118/E-03 00 30.11.2007
6 ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTS
6 R 1 GENERAL DOCUMENTS RAW MEAL SILO MC26
6 R 1 1 SILO PROCESS DESCRIPTION - TYPICAL OF LOGIC SEQUENCE AND CHAMBER PRESSURE 619.0000.0021A/02.ED 00 30.11.2007
CONTROL
6 R 1 2 SILO PROCESS CONTROL OPERATING INSTRUCTION TYPICAL WITH MCC 619.0009.1000/A03.en 00 30.11.2007
6 R 2 SUB CONTROL PANEL 2510100 SCP01 (SILO PROCESS CONTROL SPC0)
6 R 2 1 COVER SHEET 02-1/155478-900/A-03 00 30.11.2007
6 R 2 2 DIRECTORY 02-1/155478-900/A-03 00 30.11.2007
6 R 2 3 ONE LINE DIAGRAM, CONCEPT OF OPERATION AND CONTROL; INTERFACE SIGNALS 02-1/155478-901/A-03 00 30.11.2007
6 R 2 4 SWITCHBOARD 02-1/155478-905/A-03 00 30.11.2007
6 R 2 5 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 02-1/155478-906/A-03 00 30.11.2007
6 R 2 6 TERMINAL DIAGRAM 02-1/155478-907/A-03 00 30.11.2007
7 EQUIPMENT
7 R 1 MC SILO
7 R 1 1 FUNCTIONS DIMENSIONS MC26, SHEET 1 619.0260.0023E/04.00.01 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 2 FUNCTIONS DIMENSIONS MC26, SHEET 2 619.0260.0023E/04.00.02 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 3 INSTALLATION PLAN MC26, SHEET 1 619.0260.0024E/03.00.01 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 4 INSTALLATION PLAN MC26, SHEET 2 619.0260.0024E/03.00.02 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 5 SILO BOTTOM EQUIPMENT MC26, PART LIST 619.0260.0024S/03 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 6 DIMENSION SHEET: DIMENSIONS AND CAPACITY 619.0000.1100A/03.ED 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 7 GENERAL RECOMMENDATION FOR THE OPERATION 619.0009.1001A/01.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 8 MIXING CHAMBER - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 619.0009.1100A/03.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 9 PRESSURE MEASURING UNIT 617.0015.0001A/04.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 10 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION FOR CLAUDIUS PETERS 619.0015.0021A/01.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 11 SILO WITH INVERTED CONE, PRINCIPLE FUNCTION AND BASIC STRUCTURE 619.0015.0022A/02.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 12 SILO WITH INVERTED CONE, DIRECTION OF CIVIL CONSTRUCTION OF THE SILO PLANT 619.0015.0023A/00.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 1 13 CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA GENERAL INFORMATION ON SILO CONCRETE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE 619.0015.0024A/00.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 FLOW CONTROL GATE - TYPE PCD

7 R 2 1 DIMENSION SHEET: FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 PCD 682.0000.1077A/05.ED 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTION: FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 PCD, DRIVE PNEU CONTROL 682.0009.1077A/06.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTION: LIMIT SWITCH UNIT 697.0009.0023A/02.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 4 OPERATING INSTRUCTION: PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR 698.0026.0021A/07.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTION: ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC POSITIONER 697.0026.0022A/08.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 6 SPARE PART DRAWING: FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 PCD 682.0010.1077A/07.SV 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 7 CONNECTION DIAGRAM: FLOW CONTROL GATE 2000.1 PCD 682.0017.1077A/07.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 2 8 CONNECTION DIAGRAM: LIMIT SWITCH UNIT 697.0017.0035A/05.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 AEROSLIDE AND ELEMENTS
7 R 3 1 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS AEROSLIDE 621.0009.0000A/04.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 2 FABRIC FOR AERATION ELEMENTS 621.0009.0022A/10.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 3 AEROSLIDE TYPE 1+3
7 R 3 3 1 DIMENSION SHEET 661.0000.0006A/02.ED 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 3 3 SPARE PARTS 661.0010.0006A/00.SV 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 4 AEROSLIDE TYPE 2
7 R 3 5 AEROSLIDE FEED UNIT
7 R 3 5 2 SPARE PARTS 621.0010.1043A/01.SV 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 6 INSPECTION COVER
7 R 3 6 1 DIMENSION SHEET 639.0000.1029A/01.SV 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 6 2 SPARE PARTS 639.0010.1029A/01.SV 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 7 DISTRIBUTOR F. SILO FEEDING
7 R 3 7 2 SPARE PARTS 660.0010.1020A/00.SV 00 30.11.2007
7 R 3 8 FEED BOX TYPE 09 CPL.
7 R 4 SILO MANHOLE SIZE 800X1000, HORIZONTAL
7 R 4 1 DIMENSION SHEET 639.0000.1026A/01.ED 00 30.11.2007
7 R 4 2 SPARE PARTS 639.0010.1026A/02.ED 00 30.11.2007
7 R 5 FLAT SHUT- OFF GATE
7 R 5 1 DIMENSION SHEET 412.0000.0011A/04.ED 00 30.11.2007
7 R 5 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 412.0009.0014A/03.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 5 3 SPARE PART DRAWING 412.0010.0011A/02.SV 00 30.11.2007
7 R 6 ROTARY PISTON BLOWERS
7 R 6 1 BLOWER
7 R 6 1 1 DATA SHEETS
7 R 6 1 1 1 BLOWER GM 7L-G5 Aerzen 61-235536-00 00 30.11.2007
7 R 6 1 2 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER UNIT: OPERATING AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Aerzen G4-006 C EN 00 30.11.2007
7 R 6 1 3 STORAGE- AND PRESERVATION REGULATIONS Aerzen TNO 1175 A XA 00 30.11.2007

7 R 6 1 4 DRAWINGS
7 R 6 1 4 1 DELTA BLOWER GENERATION FIVE: G5-GM30L/35S/50L AERZEN 1ZG-5454-MC26- 00 30.11.2007
CP01
7 R 6 1 4 2 DELTA BLOWER GENERATION FIVE DN80 G5-GM4S/7L/10S: DRAWING Aerzen 2ZG-9164-MC26-CP01 00 30.11.2007
7 R 6 1 5 BLOWER STAGE 3SG-4647/ 48: SPARE PARTS Aerzen 3SG-4647 00 30.11.2007
02-1-155478-153-A-00.en.xls 1/2 03.12.2007

2
TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION: OPERATION
Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date
7 R 6 2 MOTOR
7 R 6 2 1 DATA SHEETS
7 R 6 2 1 1 MOTOR DATA SHEET 11 KW Aerzen 00 30.11.2007
7 R 6 2 1 2 MOTOR DATA SHEET 37 KW Aerzen 00 30.11.2007
7 R 6 2 2 DRIVE MOTOR: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Aerzen M4-001 C XT 00 30.11.2007
7 R 7 RADIAL FANS
7 R 7 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Reitz 00 30.11.2007
7 R 7 2 OPERATION MANUAL SINGLE STAGE RADIAL FAN DESIGN MXE Reitz 00 30.11.2007
7 R 7 3 FAN TYPES - RADIAL FAN 31 M3/MIN, TYPE MXE
7 R 7 3 1 DRAWING Reitz M231219-000-023668 00 30.11.2007
7 R 7 3 2 SERIAL NO. 231219
7 R 7 3 2 1 FAN DATA SHEET Reitz 00 30.11.2007
7 Z 7 3 2 2 FAN DATA Reitz 00 30.11.2007
7 Z 7 3 2 3 FAN CHARACTERISTIC CURVE Reitz 00 30.11.2007
7 Z 7 3 2 4 SOUND DATA Reitz 00 30.11.2007
7 R 7 3 2 5 SPARE PARTS LIST Reitz 00 30.11.2007
7 R 8 MOTOR FOR RADIAL FANS
7 R 8 1 DATA SHEETS
7 R 8 1 1 MOTOR DATA SHEET 7,5 KW Siemens 00 30.11.2007
7 R 8 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Siemens 00 30.11.2007
7 R 8 3 INFORMATION ON SAFETY AND COMMISSIONING Siemens 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 SHUT-OFF FLAPS
7 R 9 1 PNEUMATIC OPERATION
7 R 9 1 1 SHUT-OFF FLAP
7 R 9 1 1 1 TECHNICAL DATA CP-001-ZP-DT-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 2 PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
7 R 9 1 2 1 TECHNICAL DATA CP-001-PS-DT-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 2 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CP-001-PS-BW-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 2 3 SPARE PARTS CP-001-PS-ES-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 2 4 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CP-001-PS-KO-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 2 5 EUROPEAN COMMUNITY MANUFACTURER´S DECLARATION CP-001-PS-HE-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 3 SOLENOID VALVE
7 R 9 1 3 1 TECHNICAL DATA CP-001-MV-DT-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 3 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CP-001-MV-BW-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 3 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CP-001-MV-KO-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 4 SWITCH CONTROL
7 R 9 1 4 1 TECHNICAL DATA CP-001-ER-DT-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 4 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CP-001-ER-BW-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 4 3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 442.0017.0031A/06.en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 4 4 SPARE PARTS CP-001-ER-ES-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 4 5 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CP-001-ER-KO-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 4 6 EUROPEAN COMMUNITY MANUFACTURER´S DECLARATION CP-001-ER-HE-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 5 POSITIONER
7 R 9 1 5 1 TECHNICAL DATA CP-001-SR-DT-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 1 5 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE Siemens A5E00074600-05 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 2 MANUAL OPERATION
7 R 9 2 1 SHUT-OFF FLAP
7 R 9 2 1 1 TECHNICAL DATA CP-001-ZH-DT-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 2 2 SWITCH CONTROL
7 R 9 2 2 1 TECHNICAL DATA CP-001-ER-DT-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 2 2 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CP-001-ER-BW-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 2 2 3 SPARE PARTS CP-001-ER-ES-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 2 2 4 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CP-001-ER-KO-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 9 2 2 5 EUROPEAN COMMUNITY MANUFACTURER´S DECLARATION CP-001-ER-HE-en 00 30.11.2007
7 R 10 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
7 R 10 1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, MODEL ECO-1 00 30.11.2007
7 R 10 1 1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, MODEL ECO-1: TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION WIKA PE8114 00 30.11.2007
7 R 10 1 2 SILO PROCESS CONTROL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER: CONNECTION DIAGRAM 619.0017.1000A/03 00 30.11.2007
7 R 10 2 PRESSURE SWITCH PTC31: OPERATING MANUAL Endress + Hauser 00 30.11.2007
KA225P/00/en/10.05
02-1-155478-153-A-00.en.xls 2/2 03.12.2007

3
CHAPTER 1
PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES
4
Claudius Peters
Principal safety references
596.0009.1000A/06.en
5
Contents
1 Preface to the Safety Instructions .............................................................................................. 3
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in Accordance with DIN ISO 16016 3
3 Basic Safety Instructions............................................................................................................ 4
3.1 Warning Signs and Symbols ...................................................................................................... 4
3.2 Principle / Correct Intended Use ................................................................................................ 5
3.3 Organisational Procedures......................................................................................................... 5
3.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities ........................................ 7
3.5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases................................................................ 8
3.5.1 Normal Operation ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.5.2 Maintenance and Other Special Work ....................................................................................... 9
3.6 References to Particular Dangers .............................................................................................. 10
3.6.1 Electrical Energy ........................................................................................................................ 10
3.6.2 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke....................................................................................................... 10
3.6.3 Hydraulics / Pneumatics............................................................................................................. 11
3.6.4 Noise .......................................................................................................................................... 11
3.6.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials .................................................................................... 11
3.7 Transport / Assembly / Commissioning of Plant Sections / Machines....................................... 12
3.7.1 Transport .................................................................................................................................... 12
3.7.2 Assembly.................................................................................................................................... 13
3.7.3 Commissioning........................................................................................................................... 15
3.8 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment ............................................... 17
3.8.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 17
3.8.2 Safety from Coal Dust Explosions.............................................................................................. 18
3.8.3 Explosion Protection................................................................................................................... 19
3.8.3.1 Primary Explosion Protection ..................................................................................................... 19
3.8.3.2 Secondary Explosion Protection ................................................................................................ 19
3.8.3.3 Tertiary Explosion Protection ..................................................................................................... 19
3.8.4 Division into Zones ..................................................................................................................... 20
3.8.5 Surface Temperature ................................................................................................................. 20
3.8.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo ..................................................................................................... 21
3.8.7 Electrical Equipment................................................................................................................... 21
3.8.8 Health Hazards........................................................................................................................... 22
3.8.9 The Workplace ........................................................................................................................... 22
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 2 of 22
6
1 Preface to the Safety Instructions
These Basic Safety Instructions apply to all Claudius Peters Technologies products, as described more
precisely in individual operating instructions.
These Basic Safety Instructions will make it easier to operate the plant or machine safely, correctly and
economically.
Like the relevant operating instructions for Claudius Peters Technologies plant and machines, these Basic
Safety Instructions contain important information. Observing them will help to avoid risks, to minimise repair
costs and downtime, and to increase the reliability and service life of the plant or machine.
These Basic Safety Instructions are to be supplemented by further instructions based on national regulations
for accident prevention and for environment protection.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be permanently available at the place of operation of the plant or
machine.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be read and used by every person charged with working with or on the
plant or machine, e.g.:
• operation
• including setting-up, fault rectification during the course of work, removal of production waste, care,
disposal of operating and auxiliary materials
• maintenance (servicing, inspection, repair)
and/or
• transport.
In addition to these Basic Safety Instructions, the following must also be observed:
• the accident prevention regulations mandatory in the country of use and at the place of operation of the
plant or machine
• the generally recognised and applicable technical rules for safe and professional work in the country of
use and at the place of operation of the plant or machine.
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in

Accordance with DIN ISO 16016
Copying this document or giving it to others, along with the use or communication of its contents, are
forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable for the payment of damages. All rights are reserved
in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 3 of 22
7
3 Basic Safety Instructions
3.1 Warning Signs and Symbols
Particularly important information is identified in the operating instructions relevant to the plant or machine as
follows:
Danger!
Information, orders or prohibitions to protect persons and to protect

against extensive damage to property!
Observe these "DANGER" instructions, and behave with particular care under the relevant circumstances.
Also inform other users of all safety instructions. General safety and accident prevention regulations must
also be observed in addition to the instructions provided in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the
Claudius Peters Technologies operating instructions.
Attention
Special information, orders or prohibitions to prevent damage!
"Attention" is printed at those locations in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the Claudius Peters
Technologies operating instructions that call for particular attention in order to satisfy guidelines, regulations,
instructions and working procedures, and in order to prevent damage to or destruction of the machine and/or
other parts of the plant
Note
Special information regarding economical operation of the plant or machine!
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 4 of 22
8
3.2 Principle / Correct Intended Use
Equipment and machines from Claudius Peters Technologies are constructed in accordance with up-to-date
good technical practice and the recognised technical rules for safety. Nevertheless, their operation may
cause damage or injury to the user or third persons, or damage to the plant, machine or other property.
Only use the plant or machine when in proper technical condition, according to its intended purpose,
conscious of safety and possible danger, and in accordance with the instruction manual. Functional
disorders that would prejudice safety, in particular, must be removed immediately.
The plant or machine is only to be used in accordance with the "Intended Purpose" section of the relevant
operating instructions. Any use differing from or exceeding the purpose of the plant or machine is considered
to contravene the intended purpose. Claudius Peters Technologies will not be liable for any damage
resulting from misuse of the product. The risk is borne entirely by the user.
Use in accordance with its intended purpose also includes observation of the operating instructions
belonging to the plant on machine, maintenance of the inspection and servicing conditions, and the use of
original spare parts.
3.3 Organisational Procedures

Keep the instruction manual and these Basic Safety Instructions permanently on hand at place of operation
of the plant or machine (in the tool box or in the box provided for this purpose).
In addition to the instruction manual, observe and provide instructions covering generally applicable legal
and other mandatory regulations governing accident prevention and protection of the environment.
Such responsibilities may also involve, for example, the handling of dangerous materials, the provision and
wearing of personal protection equipment, or traffic regulations.
The instruction manual is to be supplemented by instructions including obligatory control, supervision and
reporting relevant to features specific to the company, e.g. with respect to work organisation, work flow and
personnel.
Before starting work, the personnel in charge of any activities relating to the use of the plant or machine must
have read and understood the instruction manual, and in particular the chapter covering "Safety
Instructions".
It will be too late to do so once work has begun.
This applies in particular to personnel who only occasionally work with the plant or machine, e.g. during
setting-up or servicing.
It is necessary to check that personnel are working in a safety-conscious manner, aware of risks, and in
observance of the operating instructions.
Personnel must not allow long hair to hang open, and must not wear loose clothing or jewellery, including
rings. There is a risk of injury if such items become caught up or drawn into the machinery.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 5 of 22
9
Ensure that the working area at and around the machine is clear and clean.
Any personal protective equipment that is required must be used, in particular when this is called for by
regulations.
Safety equipment must never be dismantled or taken out of operation.
Observe and follow any safety or danger signs at the plant or machine.
All safety and danger signs at the plant or machine must be complete and maintained in a legible condition.
In the event of safety-related modifications to the plant or machine, or if the behaviour of the plant or
machine in operation is changed, immediately stop the plant or machine using the main command
equipment and notify the responsible body or person of the malfunction.
Changes, additions and modifications to the plant or machine must not be carried out without the approval of
Claudius Peters Technologies. This also includes the fitting and adjustment of safety devices and safety
valves, and to welding at supporting structures.
Spare parts must meet Claudius Peters Technologies' technical specifications. Conformity is only
guaranteed in the case of original spare parts.
Do not change plant or machine programs (software) for programmable control systems without contacting
the supplier.
Replace hydraulic hoses at the stated times, or at appropriate short intervals, even if no faults that could
endanger safety are visible.
Keep to the timetable of recurring tests and inspections specified or indicated in the instruction manual.
Regular servicing is the precondition for reliable operation of the machine or plant.
It is essential that the appropriate workshop equipment is used in order to carry out maintenance or repair
work.
Make the location and method of use of fire extinguishers known. Note what facilities exist for raising a fire
alarm and for fire fighting.
Hazardous areas are to be marked and guarded by a barrier. Only authorised personnel may enter such
areas.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 6 of 22
10
3.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities
Any work on the plant or machine must only be performed by reliable and qualified personnel. Observe the
minimum legally permitted age.
The safety instructions applicable in the country of use must be observed. These include the regulations
governing social insurance against occupational accidents, operational safety decrees, various EU
guidelines and implementation thereof within the framework of national legislation.
Only use trained or instructed personnel. Make sure that the responsibilities of the personnel for operating,
setting up, servicing and repair are clearly specified.
Make sure that only personnel who have been charged with the job carry out work at the plant or machine.
Clearly specify the responsibilities of the operator of the plant or machine, and make it possible for him to
decline instructions from third parties that conflict with safety.
Personnel who are being trained, or are in the process of learning or being instructed, or who are involved in
general education may only work at the plant or machine under the constant supervision of an experienced
person.
Work on the plant or machine's electrical equipment must only be performed by an electrician or by
instructed persons under the guidance and supervision of an electrician, in accordance with electrical
engineering regulations.
Work on gas appliances (gas consumption equipment) must only be performed by specially trained
personnel.
Only persons with special knowledge and experience in hydraulics and pneumatics may work on the
hydraulic or pneumatic equipment.
Work on plant equipment in contact with / in explosive areas may only be performed by persons who are
authorised in accordance with the operational safety decrees or performed under supervision of such
persons. Such work must be co-ordinated from ONE responsible point; any requisite approvals of work must
be granted by this area (e.g. fire permit). If necessary, fire hunters must be organised.
Personnel who are operating coal grinding or coal dispensing equipment must immediately report any
changes in the fine coal system that could have an effect on safety to the works management.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 7 of 22
11
3.5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases
3.5.1 Normal Operation

Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety.
Take measures to ensure that the plant or machine is only operated only in a safe and properly functioning
condition.
Only operate the plant or machine if all safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g. removable guards,
emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place and operative.
Danger!
Only switch the plant or machine on when it has been properly installed
and when the safety equipment has been fitted!
Open inlets, outlets or inspection openings are extremely dangerous
locations when the machine is running!
If local rules or requirements from the operator make further safety procedures necessary, these must also
be implemented.
Check the plant or machine for externally detectable damage or defects at least once per shift. Notify the
responsible body or person immediately of any changes (including any deviations from the operating
behaviour). If necessary, stop and safeguard the plant or machine immediately.
In case of malfunction, stop and safeguard the plant or machine immediately. Have the malfunction rectified
immediately.
Observe monitoring indicators and the starting and stopping procedures in accordance with the operating
instructions.
The operator may only start the machine up when he has assured himself that it is in proper condition, that
there is nobody in the hazardous area, and that nobody can be put at risk when the plant or machine starts.
The selector switch must be positioned to NORMAL OPERATION and must be locked.
Do not switch off or remove vacuum or ventilation equipment during operation of plant or machine.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 8 of 22
12
3.5.2 Maintenance and Other Special Work
The timetable of adjustment, servicing and inspection tasks specified in the operating instructions must be
maintained. Observe the instructions on the exchange of parts or equipment sections. Only specialist staff
may carry out this work.
Inform operating staff before starting to carry out special and maintenance work. Nominate those responsible
for supervision.
In any work related to the operation, adaptation to manufacture, conversion or adjustment of the plant or
machine and its safety equipment, and for maintenance work, it is necessary to observe the procedures for
switching the equipment on and off in accordance with the operating instructions. Instructions must again be
followed. The procedures for switching on and for switching off and to be considered equally significant
during inspection, servicing, maintenance or repair.
Inasmuch as it may be necessary, secure plenty of room around the area where maintenance work will take
place.
If the plant or machine is completely switched off during maintenance and repair work, it must be
safeguarded against unexpectedly being switched on:
• lock the main command equipment and withdraw the keys
and/or
• affix a warning sign at the main switch.
During replacement, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully
attached to lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically
appropriate lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity. Do not enter or work in the
area underneath a suspended load.
Only charge skilled personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor must
keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
For any assembly work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise appropriately safe. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out maintenance work at greater heights.
Keep all handles, steps, side rails, platforms, stages and ladders free from dirt and from snow and ice.
Clean oil, fuel or maintenance agents off the plant or machine, in particular off cable connections and
screwed joints, prior to carrying out maintenance or repair work. Do not use aggressive cleaning agents. Use
lint-free cleaning rags.
Before cleaning the plant or machine with water, steam jet (high-pressure cleaners) or other cleansers, cover or
glue up all openings into which, for reasons of either safety or function, water, steam or cleanser must not
penetrate. Electric motors and control cabinets are at particular risk.
When cleaning the machine cabin, make sure that temperature sensors in the fire detection and
extinguishing appliance do not come into contact with the hot cleanser. Otherwise the fire extinguisher might
be activated.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 9 of 22
13
Completely remove covers and glue after cleaning.
After cleaning, check all fuel, motor oil or hydraulic oil hoses for leaks, loose joints, chafing or other damage.
Repair any faults discovered immediately.
After maintenance or repair work, always firmly tighten screwed joints that have been undone.
Should setup, servicing or repair make it necessary for safety appliances to be dismantled, the re-assembly
and checking of these safety appliances must follow as soon as the servicing and repair work has been
completed.
Make sure that operating materials, auxiliary materials and spare parts are disposed of safely and in an
environmentally friendly manner.
3.6 References to Particular Dangers
3.6.1 Electrical Energy

Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating. In case of malfunctions in the electrical energy
supply, switch off the plant or machine immediately.
Any work on the electrical plant, machines or operating material must only be performed by an electrical
specialist or under the guidance and supervision of an electrical specialist in accordance with the electrical
Plant or machine parts on which inspection, maintenance and repair is being performed, must, if so
specified, be disconnected from the electrical power. First check that the isolated parts are not live, then
connect to earth and attach circuit shorts, as well as isolating neighbouring live parts.
The electrical equipment of a plant or machine must be inspected and checked at regular intervals. Defects
such as loose connections or scorched cables must be repaired immediately.
If work on live parts does become necessary, call in a second person who can actuate the emergency or
main switch in case of emergency. Block off the working area with a red and white safety chain and a danger
sign. Only use electrically isolated tools.
When carrying out work on high voltage assemblies, connect the supply cable to ground after isolation from
the supply, and short circuit components such as capacitors using an earthing rod.
3.6.2 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke

Only perform welding, torch or grinding work on the plant or machine if this has been explicitly approved. A
risk of fire or explosion can arise.
Before welding, burning or grinding, clean dust and combustible materials from the plant or machine and its
surroundings, and provide sufficient ventilation (explosion hazard).
When working in small and narrow spaces, observe any national regulations that may apply.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 10 of 22
14
3.6.3 Hydraulics / Pneumatics
Check all conduits, hoses and screwed joints for leaks and externally visible defects at regular intervals.
Repair defects immediately. Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.
Depressurise any parts of the system and pressure pipes (hydraulic, compressed air) that will have to be
opened, in accordance with the description of the relevant assemblies, before starting any repair work.
Lay and assemble hydraulic and compressed-air piping in a proper manner. Do not mix up connections.
Fittings and the length and quality of the hose pipes must satisfy the relevant requirements.
A check must be made to see that all relevant blocking units are appropriately switched or secured before
switching on or starting up individual parts of the plant (components). Safety valves must be fitted at the
prescribed positions.
Under no circumstances may safety equipment be blocked and/or bridged and/or made ineffective.
Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).
3.6.4 Noise
Sound insulation appliances at the plant or machine must be in their protective position during operation.
Wear prescribed ear muffs.
3.6.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials

When using oil, grease and other chemical materials, observe the safety regulations relevant to each
product.
Be careful when using hot process materials (burning or scalding hazard).
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 11 of 22
15
3.7 Transport / Assembly / Commissioning of Plant Sections / Machines
3.7.1 Transport
Danger!
Do not enter or work in the area underneath a suspended load!
Attention
During transport it is important to ensure that components reach the

assembly location without having been twisted or deformed through the use
of unsuitable carrying devices or attachment methods!
Only use transport vehicles, lifting gear and load supporting equipment that is in proper technical condition
and has sufficient loading capacity for loading and unloading work.
Secure the load reliably. Use appropriate attachment points.
Nominate an experienced instructor for the lifting work.
Only charge experienced personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor
must keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
Closed boxes should be kept closed for as long as possible, and should be transported as close as possible
to the fitting location.
Only lift plant components or machines using professional lifting equipment in accordance with the
instruction manual (attachment points for load suspension devices, etc.).
Secure plant components or machines against unintentional changes in position, using recommended or
supplied equipment, prior to or immediately after completing the loading work. Affix relevant warning signs.
Even if a change in its position is very small, isolate the plant component or machine from every external
source of energy. Before commencing operation again, reconnect the plant component or machine properly
to the mains.
Before starting operation again, carefully dismantle any items that have been attached for transport
purposes. Before restarting operation, carefully remount any items that have been detached for transport
purposes. Carefully remove any auxiliary equipment before starting operation again.
Proceed only in accordance with the instruction manual to restart operation.
It can be used as a stop device for fluidised bulk materials in air slide plants.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 12 of 22
16
3.7.2 Assembly
Any time that plant or machine parts are transported, raised or lowered, the work must only be done whilst
observing the basic safety instructions in accordance with Section 3.7.1.
During fitting, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully attached to
lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically correct
lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity. Do not enter or work in the area
underneath a suspended load.
areas.
be installed.
Observe any applicable national regulations, particularly when working in restricted spaces.
For any assembly work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out assembly work at greater heights.
Before welding, burning or grinding, clean dust and combustible materials from the plant or machine and its
surroundings, and provide sufficient ventilation (explosion hazard).
Lay and assemble hydraulic and compressed-air piping in a proper manner. Do not mix up connections.
Fittings and the length and quality of the hose pipes must satisfy the relevant requirements.
Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).
Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.
product.
Work at gas engineering appliances (gas consumption equipment) must only be performed by specially
trained personnel.
Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 13 of 22
17
Clean oil, fuel or other maintenance materials from connections and screwed joints. Do not use aggressive
cleaning agents. Use lint-free cleaning rags.
Before cleaning the plant or machine with water, steam jet (high-pressure cleaners) or other cleansers, cover or
glue up all openings into which, for reasons of either safety or function, water, steam or cleanser must not
penetrate. Electric motors and control cabinets are at particular risk.
The following regulations must be observed for assembly in the Ex area:
a. Work may only be performed in emergencies. A check must always be made first to examine whether
the explosive atmosphere can be avoided.
b. Written job approvals must be available.
c. Only low-spark tools may be used in the vicinity of the IIC explosion group.
d. Tools and equipment made of aluminium may not be used.
e. Sufficient fire-extinguishing equipment must be available.
f. Escape routes must be clearly marked and workers must be familiar with them.
g. Workers must be familiarised with the local regulations governing conduct.
h. Fire permits must be available where necessary.
i. A fire hunter must be co-ordinated with the fire brigade where necessary.
j. Sufficient measuring instruments for monitoring concentration in the workplace must be available.
k. All motorised and/or electric devices and auxiliary materials must be certified for the respective local
zone as well as being in impeccable conditions.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 14 of 22
18
3.7.3 Commissioning
Commissioning should be carried out under the leadership of a commissioning engineer from Claudius
Peters Technologies.
Before commissioning, the manufacturer's operating manuals for all the drive units and the data on the type
plates must be observed.
areas.
Under no circumstances must safety equipment be prevented from operating.
Observe and follow any safety or danger signs at the plant or machine.
be taken into account and implemented.
Observe any applicable national regulations, particularly when working in restricted spaces.
In addition to the instruction manual, observe generally applicable legal and other mandatory regulations
governing accident prevention and protection of the environment.
Before starting work, the personnel in charge of commissioning the plant or machine must have read and
understood the instruction manual, and in particular the chapter covering "Safety Instructions".
It will be too late to do so once work has begun.
For any work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have been
provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb on.
Wear safety devices to prevent falling when working at greater heights.
Any personal protective equipment that is required must be used, in particular when this is called for by
regulations.
Only commence operation of the plant or machine if all safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g.
removable guards, emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place, operative and linked
into the control system.
Observe monitoring indicators and the starting and stopping procedures in accordance with the operating
instructions.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 15 of 22
19
The operator may only start the machine up when he has convinced himself that it is in proper condition, that
there is nobody in the hazardous area, and that nobody can be put at risk when the plant or machine starts.
Danger!
Only switch the plant or machine on when it has been properly installed
and when the safety equipment has been fitted!
Open inlets, outlets or inspection openings are extremely dangerous
locations when the machine is running!
If the plant or machine is completely switched off during commissioning, it must be safeguarded against
being switched on again unexpectedly:
• lock the main command equipment and withdraw the keys
and/or
• affix a warning sign at the main switch.
Always properly tighten screwed joints that have been loosened during commissioning work.
If it is necessary to dismantle safety equipment in the course of the commissioning work, then refitting and
inspection of the safety equipment must be carried out immediately this work has been completed.
Spare parts must meet Claudius Peters Technologies' technical specifications. Conformity is only
guaranteed in the case of original spare parts.
Make sure that operating materials, auxiliary materials and spare parts are disposed of safely and in an
environmentally friendly manner.
Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.
product.
Work at gas engineering appliances (gas consumption equipment) must only be performed by specially
trained personnel.
Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 16 of 22
20
3.8 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment
3.8.1 General
Coal dust that is stirred up into the air presents a risk of fire and explosion. Coal dust should never therefore
be agitated.
Fires in coal dust stored in bunkers or heaps must not be fought with a water jet, but only using a suitable
extinguishing procedure. Appropriate involvement of the responsible fire service is necessary.
Even small quantities of accumulated coal dust tend to ignite spontaneously; such dust must be removed
with an appropriate vacuum cleaner.
Some types of coal release gases that are intoxicating and that present a risk of explosion.
Never open manholes or explosion flaps in the grinding and bunkering equipment during operation, because
the entry of air into the partially pressurised system can create an explosively hazardous mixture of dust and
air. For the same reasons, any leaks that might arise in containers or pipelines must be rectified immediately.
Never enter bunkers full of coal dust; only enter bunkers that have been emptied after obtaining approval
from the works management, after sufficient ventilation, and in the presence of a second person. Persons
who enter must be attached to ropes, and oxygen equipment must be kept ready.
And any kind of work (such as welding, fire permit) on pipes that carry coal dust is only permitted when the
equipment is switched off, after thorough cleaning, and whilst taking strict safety precautions. Approval must
be obtained from the works management.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 17 of 22
21
3.8.2 Safety from Coal Dust Explosions
Dust is created industrially through grinding procedures (flour, sugar, paint, plastic or coal), or may arise as a
waste product (abrasion, grinding). If the material is combustible, i.e. if it reacts exothermically with oxygen,
the powder product is referred to as "combustible dust".
Combustible dust has a tendency to ignite spontaneously when heated. Particular safety regulations must be
observed in order to avoid explosion or fire.
The following points in particular must be taken account when designing transport equipment for coal or coal
dust, coal grinding equipment, or storage silos for coal dust:
SR Coal Dust (SR-Kohlestaub)

TRD 413
VDI 2263, 3676
VDE 0165
AD Instruction Leaflets (AD-Merkblätter)
The circumstances that make a dust explosion likely are present when the three following conditions are
simultaneously present:
1. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
2. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
3. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
A dust explosion can not occur if even one of these preconditions is absent – this decision can however
seldom be made by the worker independently.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 18 of 22
22
3.8.3 Explosion Protection
A distinction is made between primary, secondary and tertiary explosion protection.
3.8.3.1 Primary Explosion Protection

Secondary explosion protection permits and explosion to occur. What is done, in this case, is that the effects
of the explosion are prevented from presenting a danger to the life or health of persons. Secondary
explosion protection can be achieved through appropriate construction (a method of construction, for
instance, that is resistant to blast) or through explosion suppression.
Primary explosion protection implies that the occurrence of an explosion is prevented. An explosion can be
reliably prevented if any one of the three following conditions is absent:
A. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
B. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
C. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
to A. Combustible dust that is sufficiently fine is generally present within the parts of the metering
equipment. Condition A is therefore always present.
to B. To a large extent, sources of ignition with sufficient energy can be avoided by taking specific measures
(see the electrical and mechanical engineering documentation). It is not, however, possible to avoid
some residual risk. Care must be taken to see that all pipes that carry coal dust are always grounded, so
that electrostatic discharges are avoided, and that any insulation locations are bridged by an earth strap.
to C. An inert atmosphere is maintained in all parts of the equipment in which coal dust is transported or
stored under all operating conditions. The oxygen concentration is maintained below the critical limit.
This reliably prevents a coal dust explosion.
If the equipment is operated and maintained in accordance with regulations using the available techniques,
the occurrence of a coal dust explosion can be ruled out as far as it is humanly possible to judge.
3.8.3.2 Secondary Explosion Protection

When the combustible dust and a requisite oxygen percentage can not be excluded, all electrical and
mechanical operating materials must have the same method of construction which is resistant to blast.
In combination with additional measures, e.g. proper installation, regular maintenance and preventive
servicing, the possible ignition sources can be controlled to such an extent that no ignition arises in the case
of designated operation. If however, ignition does arise, the operating materials, e.g. compression-proof
metal protection, are designed for the respective requirements preventing it from being emitted from the
device.
3.8.3.3 Tertiary Explosion Protection

In the case of tertiary explosion protection, an explosion is permitted. Precautions must however be taken to
prevent the effects of the explosion posing a danger for the life and health of people. Tertiary explosion
protection can be achieved by means of constructive measures (for example, pressure shock-resistant
design) or via explosion prevention or by means of explosive pressure relief.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 19 of 22
23
3.8.4 Division into Zones
In order to estimate the extent of the measures that need to be taken, areas at risk of explosion are divided
into zones [see ATEX 118 (137)].
For combustible dusts, these are:
Zone 20 A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is
present continuously, or for long periods or frequently.
likely to occur in normal operation occasionally.
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only.
3.8.5 Surface Temperature

The maximum permissible surface temperature of plant components is specified according to the
• smouldering temperature of the accumulated coal dust, TGI
or the
• ignition temperature of the coal dust, TZ
For stored coal dust, the max. permissible surface temperature is (TGI – 75)°C.
Attention
The examples outlined below merely represent an 80% regulation for

atmospheric conditions. Under special conditions – or in the case of special
types of coal – these values may not be reached.
The real values are indicated in the data sheets available on site.
For hard coal dust, the lowest smouldering temperature of a layer of dust 5 mm thick is: TGI,min = 245°C.
The permissible surface temperature for a layer of dust 5 mm thick is therefore 170 °C. If the layer of dust is
thicker, the permissible surface temperature must be further reduced.
For dust that has been stirred up, the max. permissible surface temperature is: 2/3 of the ignition
temperature TZ.
For hard coal dust, the lowest ignition temperature is given by TZ,min = 550°C.
This means that the permissible surface temperature for hard coal dust that has been stirred up is 367°C.
Usually, this value may not be reached on the operating materials as coal dust can be deposited practically
anywhere. In this case, a limit of 170 °C applies from the calculation of the smouldering temperature outlined
above.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 20 of 22
24
3.8.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo
The measures outlined here represent recommendations; the operator (employer) must include, explain and
monitor these measures (and more) in his documents governing explosion protection.
• Monitoring the internal atmosphere inside the coal dust silo through continuous measurement of the
oxygen concentration.
• Monitoring for the development of smouldering within the coal dust silo through continuous measurement
of the CO concentration.
• Monitoring the temperature in the upper part of the coal dust silo through continuous temperature
measurement.
• Supplementary injection of CO2 into the coal dust silo if a specified limit for the CO concentration within
the silo is exceeded.
3.8.7 Electrical Equipment

The measures outlined here represent recommendations; the operator (employer) must include, explain and
monitor these measures (and more) in his documents governing explosion protection.
• Implemented to meet protection class IP 65
• The zones on site are outlined in the employer’s documents governing explosion protection; the
electrical (and mechanical) operating materials must be designed with explosion protection features for
the requirements arising on site.
• Within parts of the plant that carry coal dust the implementation is protected against explosion.
• Surface temperatures of drives less than 120 °C.
• All parts of the plant that carry coal dust are earthed.
• Select and dimension cables and lines in accordance with the requirements.
• Observe the specifications governing set-up, e.g. EN 60079-14.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 21 of 22
25
3.8.8 Health Hazards
Incorrect operation, servicing, assembly or conversion of the coal grinding and metering equipment can give
rise to the following hazards to personnel:
• Burns through heat radiation, through touching a hot surfaces, or through the emergence of hot materials
• Hearing loss through medium to high noise emission
• Risk of fire or explosion through the emergence of coal dust, gas or oil
• Electrical hazards through shorts to ground, short circuits or capacitative discharge
• A risk of slipping, stumbling or falling presented by pools of oil, dust or coal, or through inadequate
lighting
• Breathing in gases or coal dust released through faulty seals
• Risks of being crushed or struck by parts of the machine, or resulting from missing protective equipment
or warnings
3.8.9 The Workplace

Throughout the entire coal grinding and metering area, work places, in the sense of workplace guidelines,
are the particularly identified, closed rooms such as control and operating rooms as well as other offices and
workshops that are not classified as being under the immediate influence of the coal grinding and metering
equipment, and which therefore must be protected from noise and dust.
596.0009.1000A/06.en
Release 6: 18.06.2007
Page 22 of 22
26
CHAPTER 2
SPARE PARTS MANAGEMENT
27
Spare Parts Management
The storage of key spare and wear parts at the plant site is an important prerequisite for
the continuous functioning and availability of the plant and the Claudius Peters equipment.
Only original spare parts delivered by Claudius Peters are subject to:
• guarantee commitment
• material and quality control
• technical improvements and upgrades
• Full replacement capability for 10 to 20 years
• DIN ISO 9001
We would like to emphasize that spare parts and accessories can only be claimed, which
have been delivered by Claudius Peters. The installation and/or the use of
non-original spare parts may have a negative influence on strength and static properties of
the equipment and/or the installation, which can considerably impair the active and/or
passive safety of the installation.
Claudius Peters does not accept any liability nor does it guarantee for damages caused by
the use of spare parts and accessories, which are non-original.
Please note that Claudius Peters often has special manufacturing specifications for its
products, and therefore will only offer spare parts, which are state-of-the-art and according
to latest legal and technical regulations.
For spare parts orders please provide the following information for correct identification of
parts:
• designation [description] of the equipment and its type
• Claudius Peters order-confirmation number
• spare parts drawing number
• Claudius Peters part no (OPTIONAL)
Any spare part requirement can then be processed correctly and without delay.
Please contact:
We will try our utmost to satisfy your spare parts requirements as soon as possible!
Please contact:
Claudius Peters Projects GmbH
After Market Department
596.0021.0021A/00.en Rev.2006-06-22
Schanzenstr. 40
D - 21614 Buxtehude
Telefon: 04161 – 706 - 0
Fax.: 04161 – 706 - 219
01.06 CPPNOT1
E-Mail: projects@claudiuspeters.com
Page 1/1
28
CHAPTER 3
PROCESS DESCRIPTION
29
30
Item no. Tag No. Service name Type of Power Voltage rpm Motor Protection Type of InsulationC Type of Starting Type of Direction of Speed Load GD2 T.B. Accessories/E Power Frame Make of Scope of
feeder (KW/KVA/ type class cooling lass/Temp mounting method coupling rotation variation position DG supply supply size Motor supply
VA) Rise /Remarks feeding(MCC
/SCP)
IC 22 / Silo 1
!
" # $ % & ' ! ( ) *+ * , -* &

!
01! *+
. . /" & ' ' ! ( ) )*& * , ( &
Aeration Silo 1
( 2 +
& ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , ( 4
( 2 - "
% & ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , ( 4
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
Discharge Silo 1
')' 71, (' &+7 - $89 % * 9 8 8

* 2 7 89 8
31
/SCP)
! 2 /
63 & % & 3 ' :60% :6& &
! 2 /
63 & % & 3 ' &
! 2 /
63 & % & 3 ' &
! ;
& & . $ $ & 3 ' &
! 2 /
# 63 & % & 3 ' :60% :6& &
! 2 /
# 63 & % & 3 ' &
! 2 /
# 63 & % & 3 ' &
! ;
# & & . $ $ & 3 ' &
! 2 /
/ 63 & % & 3 ' :60% :6& &
! 2 /
/ 63 & % & 3 ' &
! 2 /
/ 63 & % & 3 ' &
! ;
/ & & . $ $ & 3 ' &
( /< 5
SCP Silo 1
& !
IC 22 / Silo 2
! == %
" # $ % & ' ! ( ) *+ * ,
! % 01! *+
. % . /" & ' ' ! ( ) )*& * , ( &
( 2 +
& ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , ( 4
( 2 - "
% & ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , ( 4
Aeration Silo 2
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
')' 71, (' &+7 - $89 % * 9 8 8

* 2 7 89 8
32
/SCP)
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
& +- & % 3 ' 6& &
Discharge Silo 2
! 2 /
63 & % & 3 ' :60% :6& &
! 2 /
63 & % & 3 ' &
! 2 /
63 & % & 3 ' &
! ;
& & . $ $ & 3 ' &
! 2 /
# 63 & % & 3 ' :60% :6& &
! 2 /
# 63 & % & 3 ' &
! 2 /
# 63 & % & 3 ' &
! ;
# & & . $ $ & 3 ' &
! 2 /
/ 63 & % & 3 ' :60% :6& &
! 2 /
/ 63 & % & 3 ' &
! 2 /
/ 63 & % & 3 ' &
! ;
/ & & . $ $ & 3 ' &
& ( /< 5
& & ! 1
Stand by Blower
IC 22 / Silo 1 + 2
" ( 2 . #> % & ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , (
Raw Meal Silo MC26
! %
01! *+
8 a & . % & ' ' ! ( ) )*& * , ( &
')' 71, (' &+7 - $89 % * 9 8 8

* 2 7 89 8
33
/SCP)
8 ( 2 /" # & ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , ( 4
8 # ( 2 . #> & ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , ( 4
8 / ( 2 & ' ! ( ) *+ 3 , ( 4
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % +- & % 3 ' 6& &
8
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
')' 71, (' &+7 - $89 % * 9 8 8

* 2 7 89 8
34
/SCP)
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
&" 5
8 & % ) & % 3 ' 6& &
" # 5 /
8 & 5 & % 3 ' 6& &
" # 5 /
8 & 5 & % 3 ' 6& &
" # 5 /
8 & 5 & % 3 ' 6& &
? /< / $ $ %
6 3 & ! 2 /
8 >5 * & 3 ' &
? /< / $ $ %
6 3 & ! 2 /
8 >5 * & 3 ' &
@A - $
7 9
7+019 &11 +0)1- &)110 B 1;17* B'7 0)'& 1C 1 !' 1 !+- D 1;17* D 0+ !' E * 0
')' 71, (' &+7 - $89 % * 9 8 8

* 2 7 89 8
35
Item Equipment Tag Service Name Unit Data type Signal Process data Range Alarm Signal source Aux. Power supply Scope of Remarks
No. No. Reporting Supply
to CCR/SCP
Digita Analog Min Max Nor LL L H HH Open Close ON Sensor type Manufa- V VA from MCC/SCP
l cturer
IC 22 / Silo 1
" ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
! % #
% " ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
! % #
( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23
! * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
5 " ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
!#6 % #
5 % " ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
!#6 % #
5 ( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23
!#6 * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
Aeration Silo 1
/ 7 " # # % 2
%
8 / ##!9 # # % $ #
! #& 8 # %
##! "
:; 5;
8 # $ #
8 # %
"
:; 5;
/ / 8 # # $
% 3 3
#< %
/ / 8 , (4 %= # # $
% 3 3
#< %
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!/ "
/ / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!/ "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
36
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!5 "
/ / 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!5 "
/ / ? " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!? "
/ / ? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!? "
/ / : " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!: "
/ / : % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!: "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
/ / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
37
/
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! 5 "
/ / 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! 5 "
/ / ? " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! ? "
/ / ? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! ? "
/ / : " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! : "
/ / : % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! : "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
38
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
/ / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
/ / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
/ / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
/ / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
Discharge Silo 1
< " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< % " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
/ ? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< @ @ % &4 * " # @ # # $ %
@ 6 (
, # 0 #
4 < " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %

, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < % " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
/ ? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < @ @ % &4 * " # @ # $ %
@ 6 (
, # 0 #
% < / " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %

, # 0 / "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
% < / % " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 /7 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
% < / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 / "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
39
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
% < / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 / "
/ ? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
% < /@ @ % &4 * " # @ # $ %
@ 6 (
, # 0 / #
IC 22 / Silo 2
" ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
% #
!
% " ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
% #
!
( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23
! * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
5 " ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
% #
!#6
5 % " ##! I I $ % %& # $ ' &
% #
!#6
5 ( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23
!#6 * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
Aeration Silo 2
5 PS50003 7 " # 2
%
PT50014 # # % $ #
! #& 8 # %
##! "
:; 5;
PT50016 # $ #
8 # %
"
:; 5;
5 5000325ZT01 # # $
% 3 3
#< %
5 5000325ZT02 , (4 %= # # $
% 3 3
#< %
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!/ "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
40
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
5 5 / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!/ "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!5 "
5 5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!5 "
5 5 ? " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!? "
5 5 ? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!? "
5 5 : " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!: "
5 5 : % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!: "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
41
5
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
5 5 / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! 5 "
5 5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! 5 "
5 5 ? " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! ? "
5 5 ? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! ? "
5 5 : " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! : "
5 5 : % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! : "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
42
?
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
5 5 / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
5 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
5 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
Discharge Silo 2
< " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< % " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
/ ? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
< @ @ % &4 * " # @ # # $
@ 9 %
, # 0
4 < " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %

, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < % " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 "
/ ? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
4 < @ @ % &4 * " # @ # $
@ 9 %
, # 0
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
43
:
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
% < / " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 / "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
% < / % " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 / "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
% < / / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 / "
? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
% < / ( " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 / "
/ ? ; 5; 5:
9 ;2"
% < /@ @ % &4 * " # @ # $
@ 9 %
, # 0 /
Stand by Blower
IC 22 / Silo 1 + 2
& ? " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &
8 ! % #
& ? % " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &

8 ! % #
& ? / " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &

8 !#6 % #
& ? % " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &

8 !#6 % #
& ? " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &

8 ! % #
& ? % " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &

8 ! % #
& ? 5 " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &

8 !#6 % #
& ? ? % " ##! I $ % %& # $ ' &

8 !#6 % #
& ? ( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23

8 * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
Raw Meal Silo MC26
; 4 " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &
8 ! % #
; 4 % " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &

8 ! % #
; 4 / " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &

8 #6 % #
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
44
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
; 4 % " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &
8 #6 % #
; 4 ( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23

8 * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
; % / " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &
! % #
; % / % " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &
! % #
; % / ( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23
! * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
; " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &
#6 % #
; % " ##! $ % %& # $ ' &
#6 % #
; ( " ##! ) * +, $## $ 23
#6 * -. / 01 -
( 4* #
Aeration
Raw Meal Silo
; / 7 " # 2
%
; / 8 # ##! $ #
#& 4 8 # %
"
:; 5;
; / 8 # $ #
8 # %
"
:; 5;
; / / 8 # A B # $
% 3 3
#< %
; / / 8 , (4 %= # A B # $
% 3 3
#< %
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!/ "
; / / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!/ "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
45
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!5 "
; / / 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!5 "
; / / ? " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!? "
; / / ? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!? "
; / / : " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!: "
; / / : % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
!: "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
46
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
; / / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! 5 "
; / / 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! 5 "
; / / ? " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! ? "
; / / ? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! ? "
; / / : " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! : "
; / / : % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! : "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
47
/
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
; / / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! / "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
! "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / / " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / / % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / / 5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 / "
; / / 5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 / "
; / / ? " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / / ? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / / : " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / / : % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 5 "
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
48
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
; / // % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 5 "
; / // " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 ? "
; / // % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 ? "
; / /// " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 : "
; / /// % " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 : "
; / // " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / // % " # $ % %& # $ # # %
#6 "
; / //5 " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 "
; / //5 % " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 "
; / //? " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 "
; / //? % " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 "
; / //: " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 / "
; / //: % " # $ % %& # $ # # %

#6 / "
Discharge
Raw Meal Silo
; # ##! A B #" # $ # # %
7 , "
% #" ' 6 !8 ? 5; 5; 55
9 ;2"
; % 3 ##! A B #" # $ # # %
7 , "
% #" ' ? 5; 5; 55
9 ;2"
; #< " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 #" "
:5; 5; /
9 ;2"
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
49
to CCR/SCP
l cturer
; #< % " ##! $ % %& # $ # # %
, # 0 #" "
:5; 5; /
9 ;2"
; 4 # ##! A B #" # $ # # %
7 , "
% #" ' 6 !8 ? 5; 5; 55
9 ;2"
; 4 % 3 ##! A B #" # $ # # %
7 , "
% #" ' ? 5; 5; 55
9 ;2"
; 4 #< " ##!9 # $ % %& # $ - (
, # 0 #"
; 4 #< % " ##! $ % %& # $ - (

, # 0 #"
- > CD ! 3
6 -2' $ - ! 3;> 7 " > :; 5; 5 " - ;> 5? :
50
CHAPTER 4
GENERAL LISTS, CERTIFICATES,

DOCUMENTS
51
APR: Wülbern, Stefan // DES: Niewrzella, Marion // 09.07.2007 14:45
SPECIFICATION
IHI
for BIM SON II
1 Claudius Peters Raw Meal Silo Type MC 26

for a Mixing/Storage Capacity of 25,000 t
Our Project No.: 02- 5/155.477/512- Rev 3
Official in Charge
- Technical Mr. Ingo Fuss Tel.: (+49)-4161-706 434
- Commercial Michael Hoffmann Tel.: (+49)-4161-706 569
Buxtehude 06.07.2007
S155477-03.doc3
52
IHI for Bim Son II, 1 Silo MC 26 for 25,000 t Page 2

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. Design data
II. Remarks regarding distribution of supplies
III. Technical specification
IV. CP engineering
V. Delivery exclusion
VI. General technical conditions of supply

09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
53

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
I. Design data
Installation data:
Location BIM Son / Vietnam

Altitude < 500 m a.s.l.
Ambient temperature max. 41 °C
min. 5 °C
∅ 23,7 °C
Relative humidity max. 100 %
Power supply:
Operating voltage ± 5% 380 V AC

Frequency 50 Hz
Control voltage ± 5% 220 V AC
Frequency 50 Hz
Signal voltage 24 V DC
Digital signal
Analog signal 4 -20 mA
(Details of power supply to be referred to S7100-2061)
Material data:
Material raw meal

Bulk density according to DIN EN 459-2 (Boehme) 900 kg/m³
Bulk density, aerated 650 kg/m³
Assumed density stored in the silo (non-aerated, solely to be 900 kg/m³
used for determination of the storage capacity of the silo)
Specific surface (Blaine) 4000 cm²/g
Particle density 2800 kg/m³
Average grain size 0.030 mm
Max. grain size 0.700 mm
Residue on 90 µm ≤ 12 %
Material moisture content ≤ 1.0 %
Material temperature max. 100 °C
Density for the calculation of the construction measurements like

width of walls, foundation etc. is to be determined by the statical
engineer ordered by the customer.
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
54

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
II. Remarks regarding distribution of supplies
For all positions marked "CP“ – Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

will supply the specified components.
For all positions marked "WD“ – Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

will supply the workshop drawings for the specified components according
to CP standard.
For all positions marked "TD" – Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

will supply the general technical data.
For all positions marked “CS” – the customer

will supply the specified components.
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
55

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
III. Technical specification
25.1-01 Blending Silo

1. 1 PETERS Mixing Silo MC
with mixing chamber
material to be blended raw meal

interior silo diameter 26 m
silo height, total 83.0 m
filling level, effective 53.7 m
silo volume, effective 27,778 m³
silo content, effective 25,000 t
silo feed nominal 540 t/h
silo feed maximal/design 900 t/h
silo discharge 450 t/h
blending ratio 1 : 10
1.1 1 Silo body in reinforce concrete CS
24.1-40 Multi-flow System

1.2 1 PETERS Multi-flow feed system
consisting of:
1.2.1 1 Distributor for silo feeding

according to dimension sheet 660.0000.1020 A
consisting of:
- aeroslide pot, pot diameter 1050 mm WD

- 1 inlet socket CS
- 8 outlet socket for aeroslide size 1-200 WD
- aeration bottom temperature resistant up to 140 °C CP
- 1 access lid size 200 x 300 CP
- gaskets, bolts and nuts CP
- support WD
1.3 60 m Aeroslide casing size 1-200 WD

including accessories consisting of:
- inspection cover CP
- access lid CP
- air connecting socket size 80 CP
- weld-in throttle valve size 65 CP
60 m Aeroslide fabric size 200 CP

incl.
- sealing compound, special and normal bolts, nuts
for complete aeroslide assembly
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
56

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
1.4 8 Discharge spout with vent duct and size 200 WD

connecting flange
24.1-40a Air Slide Fan

1.5 1 Radial fan CP
preliminary technical data at 20°C, 1 bar

Suction volume [m³/min] 31
Differential pressure [mbar] 63
Fan speed [min-1] 3,000
Required motor [kW] 7.5
Motor speed [min-1] 3,000
Protection type / insulation class IP 55 / F/B
Incl. Terminal box with bridge connection CP
Motor supplier CP
2414001M01
Fan consisting of:

- casing in steel plate construction
- impeller mounted on motor shaft
- suction filter with U-pipe pressure gauge
- flexible connection on pressure side
- installation vibration damped
- motor with cable gland
1.6 1 Compressed air pipe TD

consisting of:
nec. m pipe DN 50/65/150

pipe holder
including bends,
1.6 8 set of flange connection for aeration air DN 80 CP

consisting of:
- 1 flanges, gaskets, screws and nuts
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
57

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
25.1-03 Aeration unit

1.7 1 PETERS fluidization system in module technique
for aeration of the silo bottom
consisting of:
916 m casing for aeroslide type 2-200 WD
1010 m fabric for aeroslide type 2-200 CP
1 set of aeroslide accessories CP

consisting of:
- sealing compound, special and normal bolts, nuts
for complete aeroslide assembly
- dowel and screws for complete bottom fastening of aeroslides.
2510301>39
41 shut-off flap with el.-pneu. Drive DN 80/150 CP
PCV25111
1 shut-off flap with el.-pneu. Drive DN 50 CP
with controller
1 shut-off flap with hand lever DN 150 CP
47 set of flange connection for flaps DN 50/65/100/150 CP

consisting of:
- 2 flanges, gaskets,screws and nuts
61 ball cock with hand lever CP
PT25111/PT25112
2 pressure transmitter CP
2 pressure gauges CP
1 set system labelling CP
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
58

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
25.1-05a/05b/05c
1.8 1 Set rotary piston blower in compact design CP
preliminary technical data at 20°C, 1 bar

Outer ring Chamber
25.1-05c 25.1-05a
25.1-05b
Number 1 2 incl. 1 as
stand-by
Suction volume [m³/min] 5,31 28
Pressure difference [mbar] 500 500
Power consumption at shaft [kW] 6,49 30,9
blower speed [min-1] 3420 4020
Compressed air end temperature [°C ] 76 67
Sound level without sound absorbing [dB(A)] 92 97
hood
Sound level with sound-absorbing [dB(A)] 74 78
hood
Required motor, type of construction [kW] 11 37
B3
Motor speed [min-1] 3000 3000
Protection type / insulation class IP 55 / F/B IP 55 / F/B
Motor supplier CP CP
2510503M01 2510501M01
2510502M01
including:
- belt drive with belt guard including

- belt pulley at motor side
- maintenance indicator
- pressure gauge
- sound absorbing hood for motor and blower
for installation inside
(forced aeration by impeller mounted on blower shaft)
- support for movement detector
- speed monitor switch (electronic unit by IHI)
- support, striker and other necessary parts for speed monitor
- amplifier for movement detector CS
- motor assembly
- with oil filling
1.8.1 4 shut-off flap with hand lever DN 65/150 CP

with limit switches
for blower selection
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
59

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
1.9 1 Set pipes on silo bottom TD

including fastening material as well as
between silo bottom, air distribution manifold
and blowers
distance blower to air distribution manifold max. 20 m
including:
- mountings
- pipe support
1.9.1 1 Set pipe accessories for silo bottom aeration CP

including:
- pipe bends,
- pipe caps
- ½ taper nipple R1”
- L-union pieces
- straight union pieces
- sealing material
- elbows
- flange connections for the aeration pipe and manifold
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
60

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
25.1-04a/04b Silo Discharge

1.10 2 PETERS Shut-off and flow control facility
for bottom discharge, consisting of:
1.10.1 1 Overflow Pipe DN 500 TD
1.10.2 2 Flat shut-off gate size 500 CP

hand operated, closed design
1.10.3 2 Feed box size 500 WD

including:
- aeration bottom CP
- 1 discharge socket size 500 WD
- access lid CP
ZV25111, ZV25112
1.10.4 2 Peters Flow control gate PCD-500 CP
drive pneumatic
consisting of:
- steel casing
- roller, roller function: controlling
- roller packing in cassette
- aeration bottom, temperature resistant up to 140 °C
- seals and screws
- pneumatic actuator infinitely variable

by electro-pneumatic adjusting
programmable controller
with rapid lock function, closing time < 2 s
in case of power failure or on operational request
auxiliary power 220 V AC
or 24 V DC
input signal (2-wire-technique) 0/4-20 mA
compressed air 6 bar, requirement in
ambient condition 23 l/stroke
closing time adjustable for 100 % aperture angle 20-400 s
- local manual operation
- local visualisation (input / output signal)
- programming via operating keys and display
- Iy-Modul for positioning signal (4-20 mA)
- Alarm module with binary output for fault signal and additional binary input
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
61

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
1.10.5 1 Aeration accessories for silo discharge (Flow control gate and feed box) CP
consisting of:
- ball cock with hand lever DN 15
1.10.6 2 Discharge spout size 500 WD

1.10.7 2 Sealing incl. bolts and nuts for the aeroslide CP

connection
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
62

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
1.11. 1 Level gauge for silo CS

consisting of:
1.11.1 1 level limit switch for vertical installation

as "full" indicator type capacitive
consisting of:
- nivotester as built-in element

power consumption 4 VA
type of protection IP 40
- measuring transducer for installation
at the probe head
ambient temperature max. 100 °C
- bar probe, partially isolated with

probe weight
ambient temperature max. 120 °C
length of probe approx. 1500 mm
type of protection IP 66
1.11.2 1 Electromechanical silo pilot

for intermittent measurement of silo content
in solid construction
consisting of:
- installation socket with counterflange

- probe weight
- measuring tape made of spring steel
- tape minimum fail-safe mode
- tape-break alarm
- ambient temperature max. 60 °C
- type of protection IP 55
separate controller for

- automatic start-up
- digital display of silo level
- output signal 4 ... 20 mA
- weather protection cover
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
63

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
1.12 1 Electrical equipment for silo process control
1.12.1 1 PETERS Control system for CP

the aeration of the silo bottom
The following groups are monitored and controlled:
- aeration flaps
- outer ring blower
- chamber blower
- chamber pressure
consisting of:
2510100SCP01
1 Control panel (SCP)
operating voltage, single phase 220 V AC

control voltage (PLC and external sensors) 24 V DC
solenoid voltage 24 V DC
220 V AC
ambient temperature 0...+45 °C
Control as PLC (Simatic S7-300).

Power contactors for drives are not included
in the control panel.
Signal interface with central control via
potential-free contacts.
All components installed in the switchboard are
completely assembled and wired ready for
connection
IP 55
Space heater
Not included are installation and wiring outside

the control panel
1.12.2 1 Power panel (MCC) CS
for the power switchgears of the silo blower

with unfused 3-pole motor starter combination
in chassis design not withdrawable type
Local control switches for blowers
All components installed in the switchboard are
completely assembled and wired ready for
connection
Not included are installation and wiring outside
the control panel
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
64

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
1.13 1 Set of silo accessories, consisting of:
1 Installation frame for vertical manhole WD
1 Silo manhole for vertical installation size 700 x 1000 WD
1 Silo manhole for horizontal installation size 800 x 1000 WD
20 m Dedusting pipe inside the silo DN 250 TD
2 set of flange connection for flaps DN 250 CP

consisting of:
- 2 flanges, gaskets,screws and nuts
7 Installation plate for pipe supports WD
7 Support for the dedusting pipe WD
1 Bottom plate for centre discharge WD
1 Installation frame bin connection WD
24 Installation frame for pipe connection WD
24 Pipe connection plate WD
8 Silo inlet socket size 200 WD
2 Socket for silo level measuring device WD
1 Installation frame for pressure compensation flap WD
1 Under and over pressure flap for protection of the silo CS
This unit has to design from the filter supplier

09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
65

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
IV. CP engineering
- Dimension sheets
- Operation and maintenance manuals
- Spare part lists
- Arrangement drawings for the CP scope of supply
- Flow sheet for the CP scope of supply
- Functional dimension drawing for the silo body
- Silo operation description
V. Delivery exclusions
Beside the positions marked with “WD“ and “TD“ in the technical specification,
there are still following general positions belonging to the customer’s supply:
- All concrete works and buildings incl. static calculations and construction drawings
as e.g. foundations, silos, machine houses, weather protections and so on.
- All support constructions, cat walks and bridges incl. static calculations
and construction drawings, if not offered as CP scope of supply
- All cable, cable installation, lighting, earthing and lightning, motor starter (MCC) and
control equipment if not offered as CP scope of supply
- Portable programmer if not offered as CP scope of supply
- All electrical motors if not offered as CP scope of supply
- All dedusting equipment as e.g. filter, dedusting pipes,

exhaust air fan and so on
dedusting air quantity for the silo top excluding feeding to
the multi flow distributor approx. 96 m³/min
dedusting air quantity for the silo discharge approx. 58 m³/min
- Control air supply incl. piping and accessories
This list does not claim to be complete

09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
66

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
VI. GENERAL TECHNICAL TERMS
1. Standards
All our supplies and services shall be performed in compliance with the
applicable DIN-, VDE- and ISO-Standards as well as the applicable
official German regulations. Our prices include all costs resulting from
inspection in manufacturers works by the German TÜV (association for
technical supervision) or other official inspection institutions if inspection
is required by these regulations for any pressure vessels or equivalent
items included in our scope of supply.
2. Supply of Piping and Piping Accessories
Piping and piping accessories are not supplied prefabricated unless

anything to the contrary has expressly been specified. Even if prefabricated
parts are provided, fitting work may nevertheless become necessary during
erection.
3. Anticorrosive Protection
According the IHI specification 5031-095 for the CP equipment.

Machines, parts and ancillary equipment of our subsupplier will receive their standard
anticorrosive protection.
4. Limitation of our Supply
Our scope of supply is limited to the specified items. Required supporting

structures, platforms, foundation frames, pipe supports, etc. shall be supplied
by us only if expressively specified.
5. Technical Documentation
Unless anything to the contrary has been specified, we shall supply our
standard documentation for commissioning and operation as well as spare
parts lists in English language on CD-ROM (simple).
09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
67

Proj. No.: 02-5/155.477/512- Rev. 3 06.07.2007
6. Erection and Commissioning
We can only guarantee the proper operation of our installations if they are
erected and commissioned under the supervision of our specialists. The costs
for such services are charged extra.
7. Liability
Our liability is limited to our scope of supply. We are not liable for indirect or
consequential damages such as - but not limited to - loss of production and/or
loss of profit. We shall be liable for damages caused by wrong information from
us on supplies and/or services to be provided by you only, if an engineering fee
for such information has been agreed in writing. In such cases our liability is
limited to 30% of the engineering fee.
8. Measurement of noise
All named noise data are based upon machine emitted noise pressure level LP(A)
from each aggregate unit.
They refer to free field measurements (Tolerance ± 2 dB) per DIN 45635 at a
distance of 1 m.
Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

09.03 SCPPpn1e
S155477-03.doc3
68
SUPPLY LIST
Revision: 02
Status: FINAL
Legende / Legend
RAW MEAL SILO MC 26

7 Datum / Date Name / name:
6 19.03.2007 Niewrzella
5
Auftrag Nr.:
Kennwort / Code:
4 order no.:
"IHI FOR BIM SON II"
3 02-1/155478/572
2 Update Niewrzella 12.07.07 Page
1 Update Wuelbern 03.07.07 02-1/155.478-150/B-02 1+
No. Modification Name Date Approved
012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
69
"IHI FOR BIM SON II" : 02-1/155.478/572 RAW MEAL SILO MC26
REV: Customer CPP Quantity Part Name ENGLISH CP Part No.: weight / pc weight CP BOM / CP drawing/ Who supplies? Painting surface
Part-No.: Group No.: total Catalogue Material
24.1-40 0130 1 PC Multiflow feeding MC26 144535-06 1/155478 953,296 3922,7 KG

24.1-40 0130 0010 6 M pipe 168,3 x 4,0 006226-01 16,2 97,2 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
24.1-40 0130 0020 1 PC blind flange for chute, round size 500 131055-08 35,1 35,1 KG 02-1/155.478-380S/00 02-1/155.478-380B/00 CUSTOMER 0,6 m²
24.1-40 0130 0030 1 PC seal 500 round design B 002448-02 0,42 0,42 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0040 16 PC hexagon head screw M12 x 40 011816-01 0,05 0,8 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0050 16 PC hexagon nut M12 012415-01 0,02 0,32 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0060 8 PC hexagon head bolt M16 x 70 011788-01 0,14 1,12 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0080 1 PC gasket 200 PN 6 design IBC t=2 008191-01 0,48 0,48 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0090 1 PC blind flange DN 200 DIN 2501/PN6 131054-09 6,43 6,43 KG 02-1/155.478-381S/00 02-1/155.478-381B/00 CUSTOMER 0,16 m²
24.1-40 0130 0100 1 PC distributor for silo feeding D = 1050 093992-01 1/155478 280 280 KG 02-1/155.478-321S/00 02-1/155.478-321C/00 CUSTOMER 2,1 m²
24.1-40 0130 0110 5 PC compact dowel HKD-S M12 012591-01 0,05 0,25 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0120 5 PC hexagon head screw M12 x 30 011814-01 0,04 0,2 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0130 5 PC washer 12 012729-01 0,006 0,03 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0140 8 PC aeroslide 1 - 200 , L=3000 151095-01 1/155478 151,8 1214,4 KG 02-1/155.478-331S/00 02-1/155.478-331E/00 CUSTOMER 9,6 m²
24.1-40 0130 0150 4 PC aeroslide 1 - 200 , L=3000 151095-01-001 1/155478 151,8 607,2 KG 02-1/155.478-331S/00 02-1/155.478-331E/00 CUSTOMER 5 m²
24.1-40 0130 0160 4 PC aeroslide 1 - 200 , L=2000 151095-01-003 1/155478 101,2 404,8 KG 02-1/155.478-331S/00 02-1/155.478-331E/00 CUSTOMER 3,2 m²
24.1-40 0130 0170 8 PC aeroslide 1 - 200 , L=2000 151095-01-002 1/155478 101,2 809,6 KG 02-1/155.478-331S/00 02-1/155.478-331E/00 CUSTOMER 6,5 m²
24.1-40 0130 0180 660 PC hexagon head screw M 8 x 35 011798-01 0,02 13,2 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0190 660 PC hexagon nut M 8 008910-01 0,01 6,6 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0200 33 PC seal 200, f.Rinne 1 003295-01 0,3 9,9 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0210 4 PC discharge spout 1- 200 square/reinforced L=30 162662-03-001 1/155478 29,5 118 KG 02-1/155.478-372S/00 02-1/155.478-372C/00 CUSTOMER 2 m²
24.1-40 0130 0220 4 PC discharge spout 1- 200 square/reinforced L=15 162662-03 1/155478 29,5 118 KG 02-1/155.478-372S/00 02-1/155.478-372C/00 CUSTOMER 2 m²
24.1-40 0130 0230 4 PC chute square size 200 , L= 700 mm 119210-05 1/155478 25,6 102,5 KG 02-1/155.478-378S/00 02-1/155.478-378B/00 CUSTOMER 4 m²
24.1-40 0130 0240 4 PC seal 200 square 002433-02 0,17 0,68 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0130 0270 4 PC aeroslide support 200/H=750 122350-02 23 92 KG 02-1/155.478-332S/00 02-1/155.478-332C/00 CUSTOMER 2,8 m²
24.1-40 0130 0290 9 PC hexagon head screw M16 x 40 011870-01 0,09 0,81 KG ISO 4017 5.6 gal.verz. CUSTOMER
24.1-40 0130 0300 9 PC washer 16 012710-01 0,01 0,09 KG ISO 7089 St 200HV / gal.verz. CUSTOMER
24.1-40 0131 1 PC Parts for local fabr: Distributor 092553-11-019 1/155478 6,43 9,732 KG
24.1-40 0131 0010 1,4 M fabric 1200 x 4 013355-01 4 5,6 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0131 0030 7 PC washer 16 012710-01 0,01 0,07 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0131 0040 7 PC hex. countersunk head screwM10 x 20 085510-01 0,02 0,14 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0131 0060 38 PC washer 10,5 012749-01 0,012 0,456 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0131 0070 38 PC weld on threaded bolt M10 x 25 077268-01 0,012 0,456 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0131 0080 1 PC inspection cover 150 with quick lock 014101-01 2,3 2,3 KG --- --- CP
1 24.1-40 0131 0090 5 PC hexagon head screw M12 x 35 011859-01 0,04 0,2 KG --- --- CP
1 24.1-40 0131 0100 5 PC hexagon nut M12 012415-01 0,02 0,1 KG --- --- CP
1 24.1-40 0131 0110 5 PC washer 12 012729-01 0,006 0,03 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0132 1 PC Parts for local fabr: aeroslide 1-200 124155-01 1/155478 16,95 193,6 KG
24.1-40 0132 0010 66 M fabric 250 x 4 013340-50 0,8 52,8 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0132 0020 360 PC raised plate srew AM 8 x 35 012375-50 0,03 10,8 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0132 0050 2 PC high-pressure-Fermit (5 kg pail) 060180-01 5 10 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0132 0060 8 PC inspection cover 150 with quick lock 014101-01 2,3 18,4 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0132 0070 8 PC cleaning cover 150x200 117125-01 3,6 28,8 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 0132 0080 8 STK air connection socket DN80 125992-01 5,2 41,6 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40A 0150 1 PC Fan Multiflow feeding 092553-11-034 1/155478 169 169 KG
24.1-40A 0150 0010 1 PC radial fan 31 m³/min 091770-01 1/155478 121 121 KG --- --- CP
2414001M01 0150 0020 1 STK electric motor 7,5 kW, 2 poles 120006-20 48 48 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40A 0151 1 PC Aeration multiflow feeding MC26 092553-11-020 1/155478 36,481 173,97 KG
03.07.2007 Page 2 of 8 012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
70
24.1-40A 0151 0010 1 PC pipe mounting DN 150/K= 105 mm 118924-01 1,9 1,9 KG 02-1/155.478-334S/00 02-1/155.478-334A/00 CUSTOMER 0,01 m²
24.1-40A 0151 0020 5 M pipe 168,3 x 4,0 006226-01 16,2 81 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0030 10 M pipe 76,1 x 2,6 128044-01 5,24 52,4 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0040 2 M pipe 60,3 x 2,3 mm 073902-01 3,29 6,58 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0050 1 PC cap 168,3 x 4,5 024270-01 2,65 2,65 KG DIN 2617 1.0038 / RST37-2 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0060 8 PC bend 90- 3- 76,1 x 2,9 S 011161-01 1,45 11,6 KG DIN 2605/1 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0070 1 PC elbow 90 - 60,3 x 2,9 011158-01 0,49 0,49 KG DIN 2605/1 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0080 8 PC weld-in throttle valve 76,1 011608-01 1,7 13,6 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40A 0151 0090 1 PC sleeve ball cock G 2 006878-01 1,97 1,97 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40A 0151 0100 1 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 2 x 80 eff. 011424-01 0,4 0,4 KG 1.0254/P235T1 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0110 1 PC barrel nipple 2 x 100 011387-01 0,5 0,5 KG EN 10241 1.0254/ST37.0 CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0120 1 PC union elbow UA 2 2 131139-01 0,5 0,5 KG EN 10242 0.8040 / feu.verz. CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0130 2 PC compact dowel HKD-S M16 012592-01 0,1 0,2 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40A 0151 0140 2 PC washer 16 012730-01 0,011 0,022 KG ISO 7091 ST 100HV gal.verz. CUSTOMER
24.1-40A 0151 0150 2 PC hexagon head screw M16 x 30 011821-01 0,08 0,16 KG ISO 4018 4.6 gal.verz. CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 1 PC silobottom equipment MC26 096691-01-263 1349,78 26994 KG
25.1-03 0170 0010 456 PC Aeroslide 2-200 , L = 2056 125756-01-012 43,7 19927 KG 02-1/155.478-303S/00 02-1/155.478-303D/00 CUSTOMER 191,5 m²
25.1-03 0170 0030 22 PC Aeroslide 2-200 , L = 806 125756-01-014 17,5 385 KG 02-1/155.478-303S/00 02-1/155.478-303D/00 CUSTOMER 9,24 m²
25.1-03 0170 0040 12 PC Aeroslide 2-200 , L = 1706 125756-01-016 37,2 446,4 KG 02-1/155.478-303S/00 02-1/155.478-303D/00 CUSTOMER 5 m²
25.1-03 0170 0050 12 PC Aeroslide 2-200 , L = 1356 125756-01-036 28,4 340,8 KG 02-1/155.478-303S/00 02-1/155.478-303D/00 CUSTOMER 5 m²
25.1-03 0170 0060 2 PC Aeroslide 2-200 , L = 806 125756-01-025 17,5 35 KG 02-1/155.478-303S/00 02-1/155.478-303D/00 CUSTOMER 1 m²
25.1-03 0170 0100 1330 PC Fischer-dowel S 14 028461-01 0,01 13,3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0110 1330 PC hexagon head wood screw 10 x 70 012394-01 0,04 53,2 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0120 1330 PC washer 10 012728-01 0,004 5,32 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0180 456 M pipe 60,3 x 2,3 mm 073902-01 3,29 1500,2 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0190 84 M Pipe/pipe 48,3 x 2,3 072976-01 2,61 219,24 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0270 504 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 1 x 300 eff. 064219-01 0,73 367,92 KG 1.0254/P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0280 2 PC barrel nipple 1 x 300 041021-01 0,73 1,46 KG EN 10241 1.0254/ST37.0 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0290 225 PC elbow 90 - 60,3 x 2,9 011158-01 0,49 110,25 KG DIN 2605/1 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0300 36 PC elbow 90 - 48,3 x 2,6 S 011156-01 0,27 9,72 KG DIN 2605/1 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0310 96 PC pipe bottom 60,3 x 3,0 035269-01 0,067 6,432 KG 1.0038/RST37-2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0320 48 PC pipe bottom 48,3 x 3,0 without edge 059985-01 0,043 2,064 KG 1.0038/RST37-2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0360 506 PC union elbow UA11 1 011317-01 0,5 253 KG EN 10242 0.8040 / GTW-40-05 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0370 192 PC pipe clamp 61 075921-01 0,23 44,16 KG DIN 1596 St / gal.verz. CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0380 36 PC Pipe clamp 49 041154-01 0,18 6,48 KG DIN 1596 ST GAL.VERZ. CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0390 12 PC hemp (tress) 038505-01 0,15 1,8 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0400 13 PC Fermit-special (tin 0,65 kg) 097294-02 0,65 8,45 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0430 1 PC silo manhole design B 123021-02 326 326 KG 02-1/155.478-304S/00 02-1/155.478-304D/00 CUSTOMER 0,9 m²
25.1-03 0170 0440 1 PC bottom plate 1500,w.overflowpipe,2 outl. 122790-01 731 731 KG 02-1/155.478-305S/00 02-1/155.478-305C/00 CUSTOMER 2,1 m²
25.1-03 0170 0450 24 PC pipe connecting plate 250 dia. 110984-02 11,78 282,7 KG 02-1/155.478-306S/00 02-1/155.478-306A/00 CUSTOMER 50,5 m²
25.1-03 0170 0460 12 PC pipe connecting plate 250 dia. 128317-02 11,78 141,4 KG 02-1/155.478-307S/00 02-1/155.478-307A/00 CUSTOMER 25,2 m²
25.1-03 0170 0470 288 PC dowel EXA M10/15 132683-01 0,1 28,8 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0480 23 M pipe 273,0 x 5,0 006229-01 33 759 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0170 0490 6 PC fastening for pipe DN 250 036531-01 20,6 123,9 KG 02-1/155.478-308S/00 02-1/155.478-308B/00 CUSTOMER 12,6 m²
25.1-03 0170 0500 2 PC Welding sleeve DN 250 099677-01 4,2 8,4 KG 02-1/155.478-309S/00 02-1/155.478-309A/00 CUSTOMER 1 m²
25.1-03 0170 0510 1 PC Fastening for pipe DN 250 053799-02 37,42 37,42 KG 02-1/155.478-310S/00 02-1/155.478-310A/00 CUSTOMER 0,5 m²
25.1-03 0170 0520 1 PC diagram plate 167137-01 0,3 0,3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0530 1 PC warning plate f.silo ED 027479-01 0,03 0,03 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0540 9 PC silicon-cartouche 055338-01 0,4 3,6 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0170 0550 1 PC manual press gun f.sealing compound 066407-01 0,5 0,5 KG --- --- CP
03.07.2007 Page 3 of 8 012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
71
25.1-03 0171 1 PC Parts for local fabr: aeroslide 2-200 124156-01 1/155478 18,03 1779,6 KG
25.1-03 0171 0010 1040 M fabric with bulbous 250 x 4 x 260 x 7 013337-50 1 1040 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0171 0020 7560 PC Raised plate srew BM 8 x 20 012374-50 0,01 75,6 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0171 0030 20900 PC hexagon head screw M 8 x 20 011795-50 0,01 209 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0171 0040 28500 PC hexagon nut M 8 008910-50 0,01 285 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0171 0050 10 PC high-pressure-Fermit (pail 17 kg) 038508-03 17 170 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1 PC aeration piping for MC26 145110-01 1/155478 391,634 9951,7 KG
25.1-03 0172 0010 12 PC flange A 65 x 76,1 PN10 162449-01 3 36 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0020 12 PC elbow 90- 3- 76,1 x 2,3 S 170522-01 0,76 9,12 KG DIN 2605 1.0570 / S355J2G3 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0030 2,796 M pipe 76,1 x 2,6 128044-01 5,24 14,651 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0050 24 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 2 x 60 eff. 101726-05 0,3 7,2 KG 1.0038 / S235JRG2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0060 5,484 M pipe 60,3 x 2,3 mm 073902-01 3,29 18,042 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0100 12 PC elbow 90- 3- 76,1 x 2,3 S 170522-01 0,76 9,12 KG DIN 2605 1.0570 / S355J2G3 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0130 24 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 2 x 60 eff. 101726-05 0,3 7,2 KG 1.0038 / S235JRG2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0190 36 PC pipe support 4x DN 50 134892-01 6,42 231,12 KG 02-1/155.478.351S/00 02-1/155.478.351B/00 CUSTOMER 9 m²
25.1-03 0172 0220 72 PC U-square taper washer 13,5 012761-01 0,02 1,44 KG DIN 434 St gal.verz. CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0230 48 PC sleeve ball cock G 2 006878-01 1,97 94,56 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0240 48 PC union U12 2 011315-01 1,28 61,44 KG EN 10242 0.8040 / GTW-40-05 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0250 48 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 2 x 60 eff. 101726-02 0,3 14,4 KG P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0270 24 PC t-piece 76,1 x 76,1 x 2,9 015832-01 1,68 40,32 KG DIN 2615 1.0254 / St37.0 CUSTOMER
2510301->24 0172 0280 24 PC shut-off flap DN 65 pneum. cpl. 169220-01 5,7 136,8 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0290 96 PC hexagon head bolt M16 x110 034600-01 0,78 74,88 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0320 63 M pipe 168,3x 4,0 , R = 12055 mm 143657-01 1/155478 16,3 1026,9 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0340 6 PC t-piece 168,3 x 168,3 x 4,5 015836-01 10,7 64,2 KG DIN 2615 1.0254 / ST37.0 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0350 6 PC cap bottom 168,3 x 4,0 w/o shelf 066066-01 0,7 4,2 KG 1.0038 / RST37-2 CUSTOMER
2510337->39 0172 0360 3 PC shut-off flap DN 150 pneum. cpl. 169590-01 13 39 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0410 72 PC elbow 90- 3-114,3 x 3,6 S 011163-01 2,37 170,64 KG DIN 2605/1 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0420 24 PC Pipe bottom 114,3 x 4,0 without edge 051315-01 0,322 7,728 KG 1.0038/RST37-2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0430 60 PC pipe support 1x DN 100 114596-01 3,2 192 KG 02-1/155.478-354S/00 02-1/155.478-354B/00 CUSTOMER 7 m²
25.1-03 0172 0440 120 PC compact dowel HKD-S M12 012591-01 0,05 6 KG --- --- CP
2510325->36 0172 0470 12 PC shut-off flap DN 100 pneum. cpl. 169276-01 7,9 94,8 KG --- --- CP
03.07.2007 Page 4 of 8 012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
72
25.1-03 0172 0500 24 PC flange A 100 x 114,3 PN16 007988-01 3,5 84 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0520 48 PC sleeve ball cock G 2 006878-01 1,97 94,56 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0540 288 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 2 x 60 eff. 101726-02 0,3 86,4 KG P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0570 9,6 M Pipe/pipe 48,3 x 2,3 072976-01 2,61 25,056 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0600 6 PC bend 90- 3- 76,1 x 2,9 S 011161-01 1,45 8,7 KG DIN 2605/1 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0630 6 PC pipe support 1x DN 65 114588-01 2 12 KG 02-1/155.478-353S/00 02-1/155.478-353B/00 CUSTOMER 0,5 m²
25.1-03 0172 0690 1 PC pipe bottom 48,3 x 3,0 without edge 059985-01 0,043 0,043 KG 1.0038/RST37-2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0700 1 PC pipe support 1x DN 40 113135-01 1,4 1,4 KG 02-1/155.478-352S/00 02-1/155.478-352B/00 CUSTOMER 0,06 m²
25.1-03 0172 0740 1 PC Ball valve with socket B 200, G 1 1/2 006877-01 1,56 1,56 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0750 1 PC union U12 1 1/2 011314-01 0,89 0,89 KG EN 10242 0.8040 / GTW-40-05 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0760 2 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 1 1/2x 60 eff. 011417-01 0,21 0,42 KG 1.0254/P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0780 2 PC elbow A1 1 011179-01 0,21 0,42 KG EN 10242 GTW-40-05 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0800 78 M pipe 168,3x 4,0 , R = 12055 mm 143657-01 1/155478 16,3 1271,4 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0840 2 PC cap bottom 168,3 x 4,0 w/o shelf 066066-01 0,7 1,4 KG 1.0038 / RST37-2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0850 70 PC support f.pipe DN 150 106957-01 3,1 217 KG 02-1/155.478-350S/00 02-1/155.478-350B/00 CUSTOMER 50 m²
25.1-03 0172 0860 1 PC shut-off flap DN 150 hand 169282-01 12 12 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 0900 78 M pipe 76,1 x 2,6 , R = 11785 mm 128033-05 1/155478 4,71 367,38 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 0950 40 PC support f.pipe DN 65 106954-01 1,6 64 KG 02-1/155.478-347S/00 02-1/155.478-347B/00 CUSTOMER 1,2 m²
25.1-03 0172 1000 17 PC support f.pipe DN 150 106957-01 3,1 52,7 KG 02-1/155.478-350S/00 02-1/155.478-350B/00 CUSTOMER 12 m²
1 2510501+251052 0172 1010 2 PC shut-off flap DN 150 hand 169282-02 12 24 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1050 1 PC reducer K 88,9x3,2- 76,1x2,9 015741-01 0,56 0,56 KG DIN 2616-2 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
03.07.2007 Page 5 of 8 012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
73
25.1-03 0172 1060 25 M pipe 76,1 x 2,6 128044-01 5,24 131 KG DIN EN 10220 1.0254 / P235TR1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 1090 13 PC support f.pipe DN 65 106954-01 1,6 20,8 KG 02-1/155.478-347S/00 02-1/155.478-347B/00 CUSTOMER 0,4 m²
1 251052+2510503 0172 1100 2 PC shut-off flap DN 65 hand 171058-01 4 8 KG --- --- CP
1 PCV25111 0172 1150 1 PC shut-off flap DN 50 pneum. cpl.(Sipart) 169296-02 4,6 4,6 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1180 2 PC flange A 50 x 60,3 PN16 007984-01 2,47 4,94 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1190 55 PC plate 106958-01 3,7 203,5 KG 02-1/155.478-356-A/00 CUSTOMER 4,5 m²
25.1-03 0172 1200 50 M steel channel 120 010839-01 13,4 670 KG DIN 1026 1.0038 / S235JRG2 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 1210 120 PC compact dowel HKD-S M12 012591-01 0,05 6 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1230 120 PC washer 12 012729-01 0,006 0,72 KG ISO 7091 St-100HV-galv.verz. CUSTOMER
25.1-03 0172 1240 48 PC signification plate D = 100 , Teil 1 059933-05 1/155478 0,01 0,48 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1250 100 PC cheese head screw M 5 x 12 012132-01 0,005 0,5 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1260 100 PC hexagon nut M 5 012411-01 0,01 1 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1270 50 PC mounting clamp SP6021. 60 011568-01 0,17 8,5 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1280 12 PC signification plate D = 100 , Teil 1 059933-05-002 1/155478 0,01 0,12 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1290 30 PC cheese head screw M 5 x 12 012132-01 0,005 0,15 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1310 15 PC mounting clamp SP6021.114 011570-01 0,2 3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1320 1 PC pressure measuring unit 074115-01 0,9 0,9 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1330 48 PC coupling 1/4 063940-01 0,075 3,6 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1340 48 PC sleeve 1/4 011333-01 0,03 1,44 KG --- --- CP
1 PT25111+PT25112 0172 1350 2 PC pressure measurement G1/4A 097056-03 1,4 2,8 KG --- --- CP
1 PT25111+PT25112 0172 1360 2 PC pressure transmitter with connector 122898-01 0,15 0,3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 0172 1370 1 PC pressure gauge connecting 020497-01 2 2 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-03 0172 1380 1 PC pressure measuring unit 074115-01 0,9 0,9 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-03 0172 1390 12 PC coupling 1/4 063940-01 0,075 3,6 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-03 0172 1400 12 PC sleeve 1/4 011333-01 0,03 1,44 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 0173 1 PC Paint for repair 092553-11-048 1/155478 6 15 KG
1 25.1-03 0173 0010 10 KG synthetic enamel RAL 7001 (silvergrey) 168818-01 1 10 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 0173 0020 1 PC paint (grinding)(redbrown) 5kg-container 077441-02 5 5 KG --- --- CP
2 0174 1 PC Parts for local fabr: silo manhole, vertical 092553-11-053 1/155478 30 150 KG
2 25.1-01 0174 0010 5 PC wooden plank 80 x 200 x 760 (mm) 173113-01 30 150 KG --- --- CP
2510501-3 0180 1 PC blower MC26 092553-11-035 1/155478 3110 3110 KG
2510503 0180 0010 1 PC rotary piston blower GM 7L type Delta G5 167773-01 1/155478 484 484 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 1 PC Silo Discharge MC 26 096899-01-002 1/155478 816,92 894,28 KG
25.1-04A/B 1100 0010 2 PC gasket 500 square 069685-02 0,7 1,4 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0020 32 PC hexagon head screw M16 x 50 011825-01 0,1 3,2 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0030 32 PC hexagon nut M16 012402-01 0,03 0,96 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0040 1 PC flat shut-off gate 500 type 11 cpl. 091950-01-001 1/155478 176,3 176,3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0050 1 PC flat shut-off gate 500 type 11 cpl. 091950-01-001 1/155478 176,3 176,3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0060 2 PC gasket 500 square 069685-02 0,7 1,4 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0090 1 PC feed box type 09 cpl. size 500 094524-07-002 1/155478 56,1 56,1 KG 02-1/155.478-360S/00 02-1/155.478-360D/00 CUSTOMER 2,5 m²
25.1-04A/B 1100 0100 1 PC feed box type 09 cpl. size 500 094524-07 1/155478 56,1 56,1 KG 02-1/155.478-360S/00 02-1/155.478-360D/00 CUSTOMER 2,5 m²
03.07.2007 Page 6 of 8 012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
74
25.1-04A/B 1100 0140 2 PC gasket 500 f.aeroslide 1 003300-01 0,73 1,46 KG --- --- CP
1 ZCV25111 1100 0150 1 PC flow control gate PCD size 500 / 90 ° 125935-01 1/155478 143 143 KG --- --- CP
1 ZCV25112 1100 0160 1 PC flow control gate PCD size 500 / 90 ° 125935-01 1/155478 143 143 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0190 2 PC gasket 500 f.aeroslide 1 003300-01 0,73 1,46 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1100 0200 2 PC discharge spout 1- 500 round L=360 mm 147243-08-001 1/155478 62,9 126 KG 02-1/155-478-370S/00 02-1/155-478-370C/00 CUSTOMER 0,6 m²
25.1-04A/B 1101 1 PC Parts for local fabr: inlet box 092553-11-021 1/155478 14,31 19,3 KG
25.1-04A/B 1101 0010 25 PC cap nut M 8 012470-01 0,01 0,25 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1101 0020 1 M2 gasket plate 5 011091-01 6,75 6,75 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1101 0030 1 M fabric 950 x 4 013354-01 3,4 3,4 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1101 0040 1 M fabric 950 x 4 013354-01 3,4 3,4 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1101 0050 50 PC hexagon head screw M12 x 35 011859-01 0,04 2 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1101 0070 10 PC grooved drive stud 3 x 6 018636-01 0,01 0,1 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1101 0080 50 PC hexagon nut M12 012415-01 0,02 1 KG --- --- CP
25.1-04A/B 1101 0100 3 PC high-pressure-Fermit (tin 0,65 kg) 038508-04 0,65 1,95 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 1102 2 PC Aeration for silo discharge MC26 092553-11-037 1/155478 5,097 9,232 KG
25.1-03 1102 0010 2 PC union U12 1/2 011310-01 0,194 0,388 KG EN 10242 0.8040 / GTW-40-05 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 1102 0020 2 PC barrel nipple 1/2 x 60 011366-01 0,07 0,14 KG EN 10241 1.0254 / St37.0 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 1102 0030 2 PC ball valve with socket G 1/2 006873-01 0,27 0,54 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 1102 0040 2 PC 1/2 barrel nipple 1/2x 60 eff. 084809-02 0,2 0,4 KG 1.0254/P235T1 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 1102 0070 2 PC ball valve with socket G 1 006875-01 0,75 1,5 KG --- --- CP
25.1-03 1102 0100 2 PC t-piece 33,7 x 33,7 x 2,6 032996-01 0,29 0,58 KG DIN 2615 1.0308 / ST35 CUSTOMER
25.1-03 1102 0110 2 PC pipe sheet 33,7 x 3,0 059983-01 0,021 0,042 KG 1.0038 / S235JRG2 CUSTOMER
24.1-40 1120 1 PC Silo Process Control 092553-15 1/155478 230 230 KG
1 2510100SCP01 1120 0010 1 PC switch cabinet without MCC 100190-01 1/155478 230 230 KG --- --- CP
25.1-01 1130 1 PC silo bottom built-in parts MC26 096698-01-007 333,1 464,6 KG
25.1-01 1130 0010 1 PC Built-in frame 800 x 1000 028730-01 119,5 119,5 KG 02-1/155.478-300S/00 02-1/155.478-300B/00 CUSTOMER 1,5 m²
25.1-01 1130 0020 6 PC plate for pipe mounting 032221-01 26,3 157,8 KG 02-1/155.478-301S/00 02-1/155.478-301B/00 CUSTOMER 3,6 m²
25.1-01 1130 0030 1 PC built-in frame D=1500 122794-01 187,3 187,3 KG 02-1/155.478-302S/00 02-1/155.478-302B/00 CUSTOMER 1,5 m²
25.1-01 1131 1 PC Silo roof MC26 092553-11-039 1/155478 181,704 407 KG
25.1-01 1131 0010 9 PC blind flange size 500 120965-01 27,5 247,5 KG 02-1/155.478-333S/00 02-1/155.478-333A/00 CUSTOMER 20,7 m²
25.1-01 1131 0020 75 PC Fischer-dowel S 14 028461-01 0,01 0,75 KG --- --- CP
25.1-01 1131 0030 75 PC hexagon head wood screw 10 x 70 012394-01 0,04 3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-01 1131 0040 75 PC washer 10 012728-01 0,004 0,3 KG --- --- CP
25.1-01 1131 0050 27 M sealing cord round 8 mm 041498-02 0,05 1,35 KG --- --- CP
25.1-01 1131 0060 1 PC Silo manhole 800x1000 design A 106471-01 154,1 154,1 KG 02-1/155.478-314S/00 02-1/155.478-314E/00 CUSTOMER 2,5 m²
2 1132 1 PC Parts for local fabr: silo manhole, horizontal 092553-11-051 1/155478 1,04 2,31 KG
2 25.1-01 1132 0010 3 PC bolt B 10 h11 x 45 x 34 027993-01 0,03 0,09 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0020 2 PC bolt B 12 h11 x 50 x 35 070931-01 0,4 0,8 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0030 6 PC washer 10 046830-01 0,01 0,06 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0040 2 PC stud M12 x 35 064421-01 0,03 0,06 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0050 2 PC fork head G12 x 24 070930-01 0,12 0,24 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0060 2 PC lifting eye nut M12 012483-01 0,16 0,32 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0070 10 PC split pin 3,2 x 20 041400-01 0,01 0,1 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0080 6 PC disc 12 053545-01 0,01 0,06 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0090 1 PC padlock Burg 116/30 Korp.Ms/Bü.St 028003-01 0,1 0,1 KG --- --- CP
2 25.1-01 1132 0100 4,1 M moss ruubber EPDM 15 x 20 110282-01 0,1 0,41 KG --- --- CP
03.07.2007 Page 7 of 8 012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
75
2 25.1-01 1132 0110 1 M chandelier chain A 1 x 21 106466-01 0,07 0,07 KG --- --- CP
24.1-40 1160 1 PC Silo Process Control 092553-15-001 1/155478 500 500 KG
1 500100SCP01 1160 0010 1 PC switch cabinet without MCC 100190-01-001 1/155478 250 250 KG --- --- CP
1 500500SCP01 1160 0020 1 PC switch cabinet without MCC 100190-01-003 1/155478 250 250 KG --- --- CP
1 ZV50011>13,21>23L 1160 0030 6 PC local control switch 171289-01 0,7 4,2 KG --- --- CP
1 24.1-40 1300 1 PC Control air MC26 092553-11-050 1/155478 4,26 7,26 KG
1 24.1-40 1300 0010 1 PC pressure measurement G1/2A 097056-02 1,1 1,1 KG --- --- CP
1 PS25101 1300 0020 1 PC pressure switch Ceraphant T PTC31 158077-01 0,16 0,16 KG --- --- CP
1 24.1-40 1300 0030 2 PC conditioning unit 171393-01 2,5 5 KG --- --- CP
1 24.1-40 1300 0040 2 PC pressure gauge conditioning unit 124222-01 0,5 1 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 1 PC Spare parts for erection MC26 092553-11-047 1/155478 28,46 28,46 KG
1 25.1-03 1500 0010 7 M fabric 250 x 4 013340-50 0,8 5,6 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0020 20 M fabric with bulbous 250 x 4 x 260 x 7 013337-50 1 20 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0030 2 PC gasket 500 square 069685-02 0,7 1,4 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0040 2 PC gasket 500 f.aeroslide 1 003300-01 0,73 1,46 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0050 1 PC pressure switch Ceraphant T PTC31 158077-01 0,16 0,16 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0060 1 PC pressure transmitter with connector 122898-01 0,15 0,15 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0070 1 PC collar for shut-off flap DN 100 171971-01 0,391 0,391 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0080 1 PC set of wear parts DN 100 f.PZR 171977-01 0,011 0,011 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0090 2 PC 3/2-way-valve G 1/4", 230 V/AC 160364-01 0,6 1,2 KG --- --- CP
1 25.1-03 1500 0140 1 PC plug-in unit f.analogsignal PS2 123733-01 0,1 0,1 KG --- --- CP
03.07.2007 Page 8 of 8 012_01 02-1-155478-150-B-02.en
76
CROSS REFERENCE LIST

Revision: 00
Status: FINAL
Legende / Legend
RAW MEAL SILO MC 26

7 Datum / Date Name / name:
6 19.03.2007 Niewrzella
5
Auftrag Nr.:
Kennwort / Code:
4 order no.:
"IHI FOR BIM SON II"
3 02-1/155478/572
2 Page
1 02-1/155.478-151/B-00 1+
No. Modification Name Date Approved
02-1-155478-151-B-00.en.xls
77
"IHI FOR BIM SON II" : 02-1/155.478/572

Chapter Customer CPP Quantity Part Name ENGLISH CP Part No.: weight / pc weight total
Part-No.: Group No.:
24.1-40 0130 1 PC MULTIFLOW FEEDING MC26 144535-06 1/155478 786 3316 KG

7.R.3.7 24.1-40 0130 0100 1 PC DISTRIBUTOR FOR SILO FEEDING D = 1050 093992-01 1/155478 280 280 KG
7.R.3 24.1-40 0130 0140 8 PC AEROSLIDE 1 - 200 , L=3000 151095-01 1/155478 151,8 1214,4 KG
7.R.3 24.1-40 0130 0150 4 PC AEROSLIDE 1 - 200 , L=3000 151095-01-001 1/155478 151,8 607,2 KG
24.1-40 0131 1 PC PARTS FOR LOCAL FABR: DISTRIBUTOR 092553-11-019 1/155478 6,3 7,9 KG
7.R.3.2 24.1-40 0131 0010 1,4 M FABRIC 1200 X 4 013355-01 4 5,6 KG
7.R.3.6 24.1-40 0131 0080 1 PC INSPECTION COVER 150 WITH QUICK LOCK 014101-01 2,3 2,3 KG
24.1-40 0132 1 PC PARTS FOR LOCAL FABR: AEROSLIDE 1-200 124155-01 1/155478 3,1 71,2 KG
7.R.3.2 24.1-40 0132 0010 66 M FABRIC 250 X 4 013340-50 0,8 52,8 KG
7.R.3.6 24.1-40 0132 0060 8 PC INSPECTION COVER 150 WITH QUICK LOCK 014101-01 2,3 18,4 KG
24.1-40A 0150 1 PC FAN MULTIFLOW FEEDING 092553-11-034 1/155478 169 169 KG
7.R.7 24.1-40A 0150 0010 1 PC RADIAL FAN 31 M³/MIN 091770-01 1/155478 121 121 KG
7.R.7 2414001M01 0150 0020 1 STK ELECTRIC MOTOR 7,5 KW, 2 POLES 120006-20 48 48 KG
25.1-03 0170 1 PC SILOBOTTOM EQUIPMENT MC26 096691-01-263 144,3 21134,2 KG
7.R.3 25.1-03 0170 0010 456 PC AEROSLIDE 2-200 , L = 2056 125756-01-012 43,7 19927 KG
7.R.3 25.1-03 0170 0040 12 PC AEROSLIDE 2-200 , L = 1706 125756-01-016 37,2 446,4 KG
7.R.3 25.1-03 0170 0050 12 PC AEROSLIDE 2-200 , L = 1356 125756-01-036 28,4 340,8 KG
25.1-03 0171 1 PC PARTS FOR LOCAL FABR: AEROSLIDE 2-200 124156-01 1/155478 1 1040 KG
7.R.3.2 25.1-03 0171 0010 1040 M FABRIC WITH BULBOUS 250 X 4 X 260 X 7 013337-50 1 1040 KG
25.1-03 0172 1 PC AERATION PIPING FOR MC26 145110-01 1/155478 61,15 321,3 KG
7.R.9 2510301->24 0172 0280 24 PC SHUT-OFF FLAP DN 65 PNEUM. CPL. 169220-01 5,7 136,8 KG
7.R.9 2510337->39 0172 0360 3 PC SHUT-OFF FLAP DN 150 PNEUM. CPL. 169590-01 13 39 KG
7.R.9 2510325->36 0172 0470 12 PC SHUT-OFF FLAP DN 100 PNEUM. CPL. 169276-01 7,9 94,8 KG
7.R.9 25.1-03 0172 0860 1 PC SHUT-OFF FLAP DN 150 HAND 169282-01 12 12 KG
7.R.9 2510501+251052 0172 1010 2 PC SHUT-OFF FLAP DN 150 HAND 169282-02 12 24 KG
7.R.9 251052+2510503 0172 1100 2 PC SHUT-OFF FLAP DN 65 HAND 171058-01 4 8 KG
7.R.9 PCV25111 0172 1150 1 PC SHUT-OFF FLAP DN 50 PNEUM. CPL.(SIPART) 169296-02 4,6 4,6 KG
7.R.10 25.1-03 0172 1320 1 PC PRESSURE MEASURING UNIT 074115-01 0,9 0,9 KG
7.R.10 PT25111+PT25112 0172 1360 2 PC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH CONNECTOR 122898-01 0,15 0,3 KG
7.R.10 25.1-03 0172 1380 1 PC PRESSURE MEASURING UNIT 074115-01 0,9 0,9 KG
2510501-3 0180 1 PC BLOWER MC26 092553-11-035 1/155478 3110 3110 KG
7.R.6 2510503 0180 0010 1 PC ROTARY PISTON BLOWER GM 7L TYPE DELTA G5 167773-01 1/155478 484 484 KG
25.1-04A/B 1100 1 PC SILO DISCHARGE MC 26 096899-01-002 1/155478 750,8 750,8 KG
7.R.5 25.1-04A/B 1100 0040 1 PC FLAT SHUT-OFF GATE 500 TYPE 11 CPL. 091950-01-001 1/155478 176,3 176,3 KG
7.R.5 25.1-04A/B 1100 0050 1 PC FLAT SHUT-OFF GATE 500 TYPE 11 CPL. 091950-01-001 1/155478 176,3 176,3 KG
7.R.5 25.1-04A/B 1100 0090 1 PC FEED BOX TYPE 09 CPL. SIZE 500 094524-07-002 1/155478 56,1 56,1 KG
7.R.5 25.1-04A/B 1100 0100 1 PC FEED BOX TYPE 09 CPL. SIZE 500 094524-07 1/155478 56,1 56,1 KG
7.R.5 ZCV25111 1100 0150 1 PC FLOW CONTROL GATE PCD SIZE 500 / 90 ° 125935-01 1/155478 143 143 KG
7.R.5 ZCV25112 1100 0160 1 PC FLOW CONTROL GATE PCD SIZE 500 / 90 ° 125935-01 1/155478 143 143 KG
25.1-04A/B 1101 1 PC PARTS FOR LOCAL FABR: INLET BOX 092553-11-021 1/155478 6,8 6,8 KG
7.R.3.2 25.1-04A/B 1101 0030 1 M FABRIC 950 X 4 013354-01 3,4 3,4 KG
03.07.2007 Page 2 of 3 02-1-155478-151-B-00.en.xls
78
"IHI FOR BIM SON II" : 02-1/155.478/572

Chapter Customer CPP Quantity Part Name ENGLISH CP Part No.: weight / pc weight total
Part-No.: Group No.:
7.R.3.2 25.1-04A/B 1101 0040 1 M FABRIC 950 X 4 013354-01 3,4 3,4 KG
24.1-40 1120 1 PC SILO PROCESS CONTROL 092553-15 1/155478 230 230 KG
6.R.2.4 2510100SCP01 1120 0010 1 PC SWITCH CABINET WITHOUT MCC 100190-01 1/155478 230 230 KG
25.1-01 1131 1 PC SILO ROOF MC26 092553-11-039 1/155478 154,1 154,1 KG
7.R.4 25.1-01 1131 0060 1 PC SILO MANHOLE 800X1000 DESIGN A 106471-01 154,1 154,1 KG
24.1-40 1160 1 PC SILO PROCESS CONTROL 092553-15-001 1/155478 500 500 KG
6.R.2.4 500100SCP01 1160 0010 1 PC SWITCH CABINET WITHOUT MCC 100190-01-001 1/155478 250 250 KG
6.R.2.4 500500SCP01 1160 0020 1 PC SWITCH CABINET WITHOUT MCC 100190-01-003 1/155478 250 250 KG
24.1-40 1300 1 PC CONTROL AIR MC26 092553-11-050 1/155478 0,16 0,16 KG
7.R.10 PS25101 1300 0020 1 PC PRESSURE SWITCH CERAPHANT T PTC31 158077-01 0,16 0,16 KG
25.1-03 1500 1 PC SPARE PARTS FOR ERECTION MC26 092553-11-047 1/155478 28,46 28,46 KG
7.R.3.2 25.1-03 1500 0010 7 M FABRIC 250 X 4 013340-50 0,8 5,6 KG
7.R.3.2 25.1-03 1500 0020 20 M FABRIC WITH BULBOUS 250 X 4 X 260 X 7 013337-50 1 20 KG
7.R.10 25.1-03 1500 0050 1 PC PRESSURE SWITCH CERAPHANT T PTC31 158077-01 0,16 0,16 KG
7.R.10 25.1-03 1500 0060 1 PC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH CONNECTOR 122898-01 0,15 0,15 KG
03.07.2007 Page 3 of 3 02-1-155478-151-B-00.en.xls
79
LUBRICATION OIL LIST
総入替総入替年間消費
給油箇所給油方法給油種類 ISO代替銘柄初期充填量期間補充期間充填量補充量量
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Item Equipment supplied Method of Lubricant Standard Initial Interval Quantity Consumption Remarks
No. (Parts name) Application Class Renew Supply Renew Supply Per Year (Total)
ROTARY PISTON First 500 hr after first
50-01F / 50-05F BLOWER (5,31 m³/min) Bearings POURING Mobil SHC 629 0 every 8000 hr week 0,55 - 0,55 Lit
ELECTRIC MOTOR (11
5000106M01 / 5000506M01 kW) Bearings Grease Gun Mobil Polyrex EM 0 every 4000 hr - 0,4 - 0,4 kg
50-01G / 50-05G / 50-01H BLOWER (13,4 m³/min) Bearings POURING Mobil SHC 629 0 every 8000 hr week 0,86 - 0,86 Lit
5000107M01 / 5000507M01 / ELECTRIC MOTOR (18,5
5000108M01 kW) Bearings Grease Gun Mobil Polyrex EM 0 every 4000 hr - 0,4 - 0,4 kg
First 5000 hr
5000104M01 / 5000504M01 ELECTRIC MOTOR (4 kW) Bearings Grease Gun Mobil Polyrex EM 0 every 10000 hr - 0,4 - 0,4 kg
ELECTRIC MOTOR (2,2
25.1-05C BLOWER (5,31 m³/min) Bearings POURING Mobil SHC 629 0 every 8000 hr week 0,55 - 0,55 Lit
ELECTRIC MOTOR (11
25.1-05A/05B BLOWER (28 m³/min) Bearings POURING Mobil SHC 629 0 every 8000 hr week 0,55 - 0,55 Lit
ELECTRIC MOTOR (37
ELECTRIC MOTOR (7,5
FLAT SHUT OFF GATE H
25.1-04A/04B TYP 11 SIZE 500 Spindle Grease Gun Mobil Mobilgrease XHP103 0 6 month - 0,02 0,04 kg
Ishikawajima-Harima Heavy Industries Co., Ltd 1/1

80
CHAPTER 5
PLANT DRAWINGS
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
CHAPTER 6
ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTS
90
CHAPTER 6.R.1
GENERAL DOCUMENTS
RAW MEAL SILO MC26
91
92
93
94
95
Claudius Peters
Silo Process Control
Operating instructions
619.0009.1000A/03.en
96
Contents
1 Basic operation and designated use..................................................................................... 4
1.1 Designated use ..................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Organisational measures ...................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Basic duties........................................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Connection and operational safety instructions .................................................................... 5
2 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 6
3 Technical data, operating conditions .................................................................................... 7
3.1 Technical data electric equipment ........................................................................................ 7
3.2 Immunity to interfering........................................................................................................... 7
4 Description ............................................................................................................................ 8
4.1 General functional description .............................................................................................. 8
4.2 Further documents ................................................................................................................ 8
4.3 Operation............................................................................................................................... 9
4.3.1 Operation modes................................................................................................................... 9
4.3.2 Place of operation ................................................................................................................. 9
4.4 Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................... 10
4.4.1 Start release.......................................................................................................................... 10
4.4.2 Flap control ........................................................................................................................... 10
4.4.3 Blower control ....................................................................................................................... 10
4.4.4 Option: Stand-by blower........................................................................................................ 11
4.4.5 Availability of the stand-by blower......................................................................................... 11
4.4.6 Chamber level control ........................................................................................................... 11
4.4.7 Control air monitoring............................................................................................................ 11
4.4.8 Signal exchange with the control room ................................................................................. 12
5 Parameters............................................................................................................................ 13
5.1 Times..................................................................................................................................... 13
5.2 Chamber pressure setpoints ................................................................................................. 13
5.3 Abbreviations ........................................................................................................................ 13
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 2 of 17
97
6 Operation of the silo process control .................................................................................... 14
6.1 OP7 operating panel ............................................................................................................. 14
6.1.1 Main screen........................................................................................................................... 14
6.1.2 Navigation to the detailed displays ....................................................................................... 14
6.1.3 Times..................................................................................................................................... 15
6.1.4 Signal exchange.................................................................................................................... 15
6.1.5 Pressure CH / OR ................................................................................................................. 15
6.1.6 Pressure control .................................................................................................................... 16
6.1.7 Fault acknowledgement ........................................................................................................ 16
6.1.8 Fault messages..................................................................................................................... 16
6.2 Emergency switch-off............................................................................................................ 16
7 Electric commissioning.......................................................................................................... 17
7.1 First commissioning .............................................................................................................. 17
7.2 Recommissioning.................................................................................................................. 17
List of figures
Fig. 6-01: Operating panel........................................................................................................................ 14
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 3 of 17
98
1 Basic operation and designated use
1.1 Designated use
The silo process control has been built in accordance with state-of-the-art standards and the recognised
safety rules. Nevertheless, its use may constitute a risk to life and limb of the user or of third parties, or
cause damage to the machine and to other material property.
The silo process control must only be used in technically perfect condition in accordance with its designated
use and the instructions set out in the operating manual, and only by safety-conscious persons who are fully
aware of the risks involved in operating the control.
Any functional disorders, especially those affecting the safety of the silo process control, should therefore be
rectified immediately.
The silo process control must only be used for control of the silo aeration units. Using it for purposes other
than those mentioned above is considered contrary to its designated use. Claudius Peters cannot be held
liable for any damage resulting from such use. The risk of such misuse lies entirely with the user.
Operating the silo process control within the limits of its designated use also involves observing the instruc-
tions set out in the operating manual and complying with the inspection and maintenance directives.
1.2 Organisational measures

The operating instructions must always be at hand at the place of use of the machine/plant, e.g. by stowing
them in the tool compartment or tool-box provided for such purpose.
In addition to the operating instructions, observe and instruct the user in all other generally applicable legal
and other mandatory regulations relevant to accident prevention and environmental protection.
The operating instructions must be supplemented by instructions covering the duties involved in supervising
and notifying special organisational features, such as job organisation, working sequences or the personnel
entrusted with the work.
Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have read the operating instructions and in particular the
chapter on safety before beginning work. Reading the instructions after work has begun is too late. This applies
especially to persons working only occasionally on the machine, e.g. during setting up or maintenance.
Check whether the personnel is carrying out the work in compliance with the operating instructions and pay-
ing attention to risks and safety factors!
In the event of safety-relevant modifications or changes in the behaviour of the machine/plant during opera-
tion, stop the machine/plant immediately and report the malfunction to the competent authority/person.
Modifications, additions or conversions at the machine/plant must only be carried out with the approval of
Claudius Peters!
Spare parts must correspond to the technical requirements defined by Claudius Peters. This is always guar-
anteed if original spare parts are used.
Never modify the program (software of programmable control systems)!
For the execution of maintenance work, tools and workshop equipment adapted to the task on hand are ab-
solutely indispensable.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 4 of 17
99
1.3 Basic duties
Employ only trained or instructed staff and set out clearly the individual responsibilities of the personnel for
operation, set-up, maintenance and repair!
1.4 Connection and operational safety instructions

Connection of cables must only be carried out after the supply voltage has been switched off. The voltage
supply must be disconnected and must be protected against accidental start!
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 5 of 17
100
2 Introduction
All plant components required for the silo aeration are controlled electrically by the silo process control.
These components comprise the blowers for the silo bottom aeration and the corresponding electri-
cally/pneumatically-operated shut-off flaps for sectional aeration.
Silos are divided into inner silo (chamber) and outerring. Within these areas they are again subdivided into
sections. The number of sections depends on the size of the silo. In order to guarantee an optimum mixing
and discharge behaviour, the sections - always one at a time - will be aerated successively for a defined
period of time.
Silo filling, silo discharge and the subsequent material transport are not part of the silo process control. If
these or additional tasks are requested, they will be realised by a separate control or optionally as extension
of the silo process control.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 6 of 17
101
3 Technical data, operating conditions
3.1 Technical data electric equipment
Operating data
Power supply voltage, three phase 380...500 V AC
Control voltage, internal PLC 24 V DC
Motor voltage like the power supply voltage
Solenoid valve voltage 24 VDC
Limit switch voltage 24 VDC
Protection type IP 54
Admissible ambient temperature Min +/- 0°C max +45 °C
Signal exchange with central control Potential-free contacts ( coupling relay )
acc. to Claudius Peters circuit diagram
Digital outputs 24 VDC, 500 mA
Digital inputs 24 VDC
Analogue inputs 4…20mA
Operating panel Display: 4 x 20 characters
Keyboard: 8 functional keys
22 system keys
Mechanical data
Dimensions (width x height x depth) acc. to Claudius Peters circuit diagram
Weight acc. to Claudius Peters documentation
Design acc. to the corresponding circuit diagram.
3.2 Immunity to interfering
• Fluctuations of the power supply voltage within the indicated range are compensated. A special protec-
tion against surge voltage from atmospheric discharge or clocked switchgear with high-frequency inter-
ference voltage is not provided.
• Analogue input and output signals have to be installed shielded.
• Control lines must not be installed together or directly next to power cables.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 7 of 17
102
4 Description
4.1 General functional description
The silo aeration programme only controls the silo aeration process of the silo bottom. Filling and discharge
(including flow control gate) are not included in the programme.
Aeration times and sequence are determined in the process programme in such manner, that the outerring
sectors are aerated synchronously with the chamber bottom sectors.
The exact number of outerring sectors, chamber bottom sectors and the corresponding number of pneumatic
shut-off flaps is indicated in the corresponding project diagram.
For operation three selector switches are provided:
• Operation mode (normal discharge – pulsating rest discharge – pulsating chamber discharge)
• Place of operation (remote operation – local operation)
• Stand-by blower (if available)
For further operation and fault acknowledgement, the respective operating devices are installed.
4.2 Further documents

Aeration diagrams survey 619.0000.0021.
General recommendations for operation 619.0009.1001.
Functional description of the silo 619.0009.XX00.
Silo aeration scheme 619.0017.XX00.
XX = 11: MC Silo (MixingChamber)

XX = 12: EC Silo (ExpansionChamber)
XX = 13: IC Silo (InspectionChamber)
XX = 14: ME Silo (MultipleDischarge)
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 8 of 17
103
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Operation modes

The following selections can be made via the selector switch in the door of the switchboard:
• Normal discharge:
The aeration time per section has been adjusted to the optimum silo mixing ratio.
• The time t1 = 5 minutes for normal discharge is the standard time adjusted by the works. During commis-
sioning the time t1 needs to be checked and adjusted in accordance with the silo discharge capacity.
Concerning the times refer to the corresponding separate functional description of the silo, Chapter 5
“Sequence of process”. For details regarding the execution see this document under “Changing of time
parameters and switching points via the OP”. t1 stands for the time of material discharge per outerring
sector during normal discharge.
• Pulsating rest discharge:
The outerring sections are aerated pulse-wise by a short closing of the flaps. A reduced aeration time is
used. The mode for rest discharge can also be selected if the silo plant is recommissioned after an ex-
tended period of standstill when the flow behaviour of the material remaining in the silo has deteriorated
because the material has been deaerated. In case the material is extremely inert and tends to deposit in
the silo, it is recommended to destroy this hardened material by interval-wise activation of the rest dis-
charge programme.
• Pulsating chamber discharge:
Only the chamber bottom sections are aerated pulse-wise by a short closing of the flaps for residual dis-
charge. A reduced aeration time is used.
4.3.2 Place of operation
• Remote operation
In remote operation the silo aeration process is switched on and off by a central control (e.g. control
room, external control of the customer).
• Local operation
In local operation all silo operation modes - “normal discharge”, “pulsating rest discharge” and “pulsating
chamber discharge” - are possible. Conditioned by the process the operative blowers are started. If for
test purposes the aeration process has to be started in local operation without blowers, the blowers have
to be switched off at the MCC or at the corresponding local control switches.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 9 of 17
104
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.1 Start release

The following conditions have to be fulfilled:
• general release from the control room has been given
• control air pressure > min
• at least one aeration sector has to be available (no flap fault)
(All conditions are AND functions.)
4.4.2 Flap control
• Only one flap each in the outerring and the chamber bottom area of the silo is opened for the aeration of
the sections (depending on the selected operation mode). When changing to the next section, the flaps
are closed with a delay to avoid that critical overpressures occur (due to the closed flaps).
• A flap fault (open or close position) will only be signalled and does not switch off the process control.
During the next selection the defective flap will be skipped. At least one aeration section has to be avail-
able.
• For safety reasons all defect flaps have to be replaced immediately.
4.4.3 Blower control
• The selection of the blowers depends on the flap control and the chamber pressure.
• In order to minimize the power peaks during start of the process (local or remote operation), the outer-
ring blower is started with a time delay.
• The start signal for the outerring blower is interlocked with the acknowledgement of the chamber blower
(no acknowledgement that the chamber blower is in operation Æ no start signal for the outerring
blower).
• The outerring blower is stopped at chamber pressure > max.
• When the process is stopped, the blowers are switched off and the corresponding flaps are closed with
a time delay.
• A malfunction of the blowers leads to a stop of the process.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 10 of 17
105
4.4.4 Option: Stand-by blower
If required, a stand-by blower can be selected and integrated in the silo process control as replacement for
the outerring or the chamber blower. The precise structure is indicated in the corresponding Claudius Peters
circuit diagrams.
The stand-by blower is allocated via a selector switch in the switchboard door.
• The start conditions of the replaced blower shall apply for the stand-by blower.
• Manual blower shut-off flaps have to be switched over by hand.
• A switch-over of the selected stand-by blower at the switchboard during operation leads to a stop of the
process.
• If a blower shut-off flap is in a wrong position, the process is stopped.
4.4.5 Availability of the stand-by blower

The signal exchange with the silo process control without stand-by blower takes place via a bus connection
(MPI bus). This coupling is required in order to use the stand-by blower (this applies only for coupling of
plants with two and more switchboards).
4.4.6 Chamber level control

In order to avoid overfilling of the inner silo area (silo chamber), the chamber pressure is controlled. This
pressure is proportional to the chamber level. If the pressure exceeds the maximum value adjusted at the
OP, the aeration of the outerring is stopped. The material flow from the outerring to the chamber is reduced
or stopped.
While the outerring aeration has been stopped, the section aeration continues to run and the respective flaps
stay open. If the pressure drops below the adjusted minimum value and if the aeration time has not yet e-
lapsed, the same outerring section aeration is started once again.
Only after the aeration time has expired and the minimum chamber pressure has been reached, switch-over
to the next section takes place. The pressure is transmitted to the process control via a pressure transmitter.
4.4.7 Control air monitoring

Monitoring of the control air pressure ensures that the electro-pneumatic shut-off flaps function accurately. If
the control air pressure drops below the value adjusted at the pressure switch, an alarm message is issued
and the plant is stopped.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 11 of 17
106
4.4.8 Signal exchange with the control room
For signal exchange with the central control refer to the Claudius Peters circuit documents. Potential-free
contacts are used.
Digital outputs to the control room:
• available
• collective fault
• operation
Digital inputs from the control room:
• release
• start/stop
• fault acknowledgement
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 12 of 17
107
5 Parameters
5.1 Times
Designation Workshop adjustments [sec]

T1 Section aeration normal 300
T2 Section aeration rest discharge 120
T3 Overlapping time of the flaps 2
T4 Pulsation time "active" 20
T5 Pulsation time "passive" 2
T6 Flaps close – delay time 5
T7 Start delay outerring blower 20
T8 Start delay chamber blower 1
T9 Monitoring time - drives 3
T10 Flap fault shut-off time 6 x complete circulation
5.2 Chamber pressure setpoints
Designation Workshop adjustments [mbar]

P Max Chamber pressure max e.g. 350*
P Min Chamber pressure min e.g. 120*
* for precise values see documentation
5.3 Abbreviations
Designation
AUTO Pressure control in automatic
CH CHamber
OR OuterRing
MAN Pressure control in manual
PCV PressureControl Valve
PV ProcessVariable
SP SetPoint
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 13 of 17
108
6 Operation of the silo process control
6.1 OP7 operating panel
6.1.1 Main screen
AERATION CYCLE: ON
Counter: 6
OR-Section number: 16
Cycle time: 44 sec
Fig. 6-01: Operating panel
6.1.2 Navigation to the detailed displays
F1 Timer
F2 Interface Signals
F3 Pressure CH / OR
F4 Pressure Control
Back to main screen always via system key K4.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 14 of 17
109
6.1.3 Times
Normal aeration time

T1 300 sec
Rest discharge time
T2 l20 sec
56
…
further times
…
6.1.4 Signal exchange
Release : ok
…..
…..
56
…
further signals
…
6.1.5 Pressure CH / OR
Pressure :
CH 220 mbar
OR 243 mbar
PCV 1%
56 Enter limit
Chamber pressure limit values
values here
MAX 350 mbar
MIN 100 mbar
PCV 1%
56
…
further information
…
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 15 of 17
110
6.1.6 Pressure control
Setpoint
automatic
operation
SP: 222 mbar
PV: 210 mbar
AUTO 21 %
(MAN) ON 23 s
F1 to Man
Setpoint man.
56 operation
SP: 22 %
PV: 213 mbar
MAN 21 %
(AUTO) ON 29 s
F1 to Auto
56
CH CONTROL IS ON
Off-Value: 0%
(ON) (OFF)
F1 / F2
Depending on the individual silo design the displays can differ.
6.1.7 Fault acknowledgement

Fault acknowledgement at the switchboard by activating the ACK key.
6.1.8 Fault messages
• Fuse trip
e.g.
• Control air < MIN OR-flap 9
Fault OPEN Position
• Blower motor failure
• Transmitter chamber pressure
• Outerring flap
• Chamber flap
• Pre-chamber flap
In general, the defect plant parts must always be replaced or repaired immediately.
6.1.9 Emergency switch-off

The main switch ON/OFF may only be used as emergency switch-off under certain circumstances. For a
safe EMERGENCY OFF function further devices in the control system of the installation have to be realised
in accordance with the valid regulations!
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 16 of 17
111
7 Electric commissioning
7.1 First commissioning
During the first commissioning the following checks and adjustments have to be carried out:
• Switch off all circuit breakers and fuses in the switchboard.
• Check electric connections at the switchboard and at the consumers in accordance with the circuit
documents.
• Check the operating voltage for the motors and the solenoid valves.
• Switch on main switch at switchboard.
• Switch on control voltage supply in the switchboard and measure the voltage.
• Activate the control voltage by switching on the fuses for the aeration flaps, the PLC and the interface
successively.
• Check sense of rotation of the blowers in manual operation.
• Due to the process the operative blowers are also started in local operation. If you want to start the aera-
tion process in local operation without the blowers for test purposes, these have to be switched off at the
MCC or the respective local control switches.
• Start the local operation by switching over the selector switch for the operation modes “LOCAL - OFF -
REMOTE” (evaluation of the signal flank).
• If necessary, change the time parameters at the operating device.
• If necessary, change the chamber pressure parameters at the operating device.
Further process commissioning measures are required:
• Blowers oil level

• Sense of rotation
• Dedusting
• Checking of aeroslides, etc.
See also the respective documentation.
7.2 Recommissioning
• Switch on voltage supply.
• Activate start command.
619.0009.1000A/03.en
Release 3: 30.08.2006
Page 17 of 17
112
CHAPTER 6.R.2
SUB CONTROL PANEL 2510100 SCP01

(SILO PROCESS CONTROL SPC0)
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
CHAPTER 7
EQUIPMENT
234
CHAPTER 7.R.1
MC SILO
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
Claudius Peters
Mixing and storage silos
General recommendation for the operation

619.0009.1001A/01.en
252
Contents
1 Start-up .................................................................................................................................. 3
2 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................... 4
619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 2 of 5
253
1 Start-up
1.1 The silo body must be absolutely dry and sealed against external moisture.
1.2 The aeration system must corresponded to the drawings and/or instructions for assembly.
1.3 Initial filling is effected in stages.
1.3.1 Charge the silo to approx. 20% of the max. filling level. Aeration of the silo bottom does
not take place until material is discharged from the silo.
- After 1 - 3 days of storage empty the silo entirely.
- Switch on filter and blower; the programme for all pneumatic butterfly valves functions auto-
matically.
1.3.2 Inspection of the completely emptied silo bottom.
1.3.3 Material caking > 10 kg has to be removed manually.
If no material caking has taken place on the silo bottom and on the silo walls, the silo is charged
with a second filling to approx. 40% of the max. filling level.
After approx. 3 - 6 days of storage empty the silo completely (subsequently proceed acc. to 1.3.2).
1.3.4 If material caking > 10 kg is visible again, it has to be removed manually. It has to be checked that
no rain water can leak through the silo roof or the silo wall.
If no material caking is visible, the silo is charged with a 3rd filling to approx. 60% of the max. filling
level.
1.3.5 After an approx. storage time of 4 weeks after the first filling and interim discharging, the silo has to
be emptied completely one more time. Should no material caking be visible, subsequently the silo
can be filled to 100%.
1.3.6 The next complete discharge with checking of silo bottom and silo wall should take place not later
than 1 year after the first 100% filling of the silo.
1.4 The aeration of the silo bottom should only be effected with simultaneous material discharge.
1.5 For silos with several discharge outlets, which are arranged on different levels, the following ap-
plies regarding the use of these outlets:
- In order to avoid foreign matter deposits and lump formation on the silo bottom, the lower
discharge outlet has to be used permanently, but at least alternately.
619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 3 of 5
254
2 Troubleshooting
Fault Repair
2.1 2.1.1
Influential factors resulting from Outlets clogged - Check flow control gates, safety
the equipment and silo process shut-off gates and possibly feed
bexes for foreign body deposits,
lumps etc.
2.1.2
Air supply to aeration bottom - Check pipe system for free pas-
impeded sage form blower to silo bottom
(slide and flap positions, contami-
nation);
- Check pressure difference on the
blowers;
- Check functioning of safety
valves;
- Check blower suction filter for air
permeability and clean, if neces-
sary.
2.1.3
Air distribution on aeration bot- - Check ball valve positions behind
tom not optimal adjusted the butterfly valves..
2.1.4
Material accumulation on silo - Activate material aeration pref-
bottom and discharge of residual erably in range of outer sections
material in silo by:
- - Increasing the volumetric air
flow connecting the stand-by
blower to the outerring sec-
tions;
- Pulsating air supply, i.e. select
rest discharge program (regular or inten-
sive).
2.1 2.1.5
Influential factors resulting from Increased storage sensitivity of - Check silo body for penetration of
the equipment and silo process bulk material due to absorption moisture (silo wall, ceiling, roof
of moisture with accompanying connection frame and socket) and
danger of lump and deposit for- seal if required;
mation
- Reduce or stop residual building
moisture by drying out the silo
when empty or by discharging
remnants several times in suc-
cession (refer to 1.3.1).
619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 4 of 5
255
Fault Repair
2.1.6
Aeration of bulk material decrea- - Interior silo sealing (e.g. by syn-
ses due to air losses caused by thetic coating).
leaks on the silo body
2.2 2.2.1
Influential factors attributed to Increased storage sensitivity of - Discharge some material from silo
physical and chemical properties the bulk material due to strongly and add a limited quantity of nor-
adherent to the bulk material deviating index grain fractions mal grain fraction; repeat the aer-
prior to silo entry caused by extremely fine frac- ating and discharging procedure
tions (refer to 2.1.5).
2.2.2
Increased storage sensitivity of e.g. for cement:
the bulk material due to chemical
- Reduce the moisture content to <
reactions taking place in the silo
0,3% by dehydration of the gyp-
e.g. caused by temperature
sum component gained by the
resp. moisture
formation of a mixture containing
approx. 50% anhydrite CaSO4
and
approx. 50% dehydrate CaSO4 +
2H2O
or
- Add ground limestone in the ratio:
5% raw gypsum
7% limestone
88% clinker
or
- Dehydrate gypsum by increasing the
grinding temperate, i.e. discharge
temperate of the cement should be
120 °C or more.
- Stronger venting of the mill, if
necessary
or
- Avoid cooling-off and conse-
quently condensation zones by:
- insulation of concrete/steel silo
body;
- avoid condensate in pipe-lines
(e.g. by weather protection or in-
sulation).
619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 5 of 5
256
Claudius Peters
Mixing Silo MC
“MIXING CHAMBER“
Functional Description
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Refer also to:
General recommendations for operation
619.0009.1001A/NN.en
257
Contents
1 Field of usage........................................................................................................................ 3
2 Constructional arrangement.................................................................................................. 4
3 Technical equipment ............................................................................................................. 5
4 Function................................................................................................................................. 6
4.1 Feeding ................................................................................................................................. 6
4.2 Mixing by means of gravity in the main silo chamber ........................................................... 6
4.3 Mixing chamber and material discharge ............................................................................... 7
4.4 Pressure transmitter setting .................................................................................................. 8
4.5 Air distribution ....................................................................................................................... 9
4.5.1 Air distribution in the area of the outerring sectors ............................................................... 9
4.5.1.1 Pre-adjustment without material in the silo ........................................................................... 9
4.5.1.2 Final adjustment with material in the silo .............................................................................. 10
4.5.2 Air distribution in the area of the chamber sectors ............................................................... 10
4.5.2.1 Pre-adjustment of the chamber bottom aeration without material in the silo........................ 10
4.5.2.2 Final adjustment of the chamber bottom aeration with material in the silo........................... 11
5 Process control ..................................................................................................................... 12
6 Guarantee prerequisites........................................................................................................ 14
7 Maintenance and inspection ................................................................................................. 15
8 Principle diagrams................................................................................................................. 16
List of figures
Fig. 8.1: Mixing Chamber Silo MC, Arrangement Drawing ................................................................. 17
Fig. 8.2: Mixing Chamber Silo MC, Aeration Flow Sheet.................................................................... 18
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 2 of 18
258
1 Field of usage
The mixing silo MC is used for continuous mixing and storage of mineral bulk materials which are easy to
fluidize.
MC, the designation of the silo type, stands for Mixing Chamber.
The standard design is suitable for the mixing of raw meal and cement.
Prerequisite for effective mixing is that the variations of the components of the bulk material are centering
periodically around an average value, e.g. the 24-hour average value. The duration of these periods, the
feeding capacity and the silo diameter are coordinated in order to guarantee effective mixing. In addition, a
specific relation of the silo height to the diameter as well as a minimum level in the silo have to be
maintained as marginal conditions.
The mixing silo is designed in a way that even high and possible long-term deviations from the nominal value
can be compensated efficiently.
Other materials, such as gypsum, caustic lime, hydrated lime can be stored and discharged from this silo as
well. In order to obtain effective mixing, however, certain marginal conditions need to be fulfilled. These have
to be determined for the individual cases in cooperation with Claudius Peters.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 3 of 18
259
2 Constructional arrangement
For the dimensioning of the cylindrical silo body a 2:1 ratio of internal silo height/diameter is used. This
proportion has proven favourable concerning construction costs and is the basis for the calculation of the
mixing effect.
The foundation of the silo is built in accordance with the local conditions.
The silo body has to be protected against over-/underpressure by a compensation valve, which is to be
installed on the silo roof. The pressure compensation valve has to be set to –5 mbar underpressure
and 10 mbar overpressure.
Claudius Peters recommends to equip the silo with a roof in order to protect the feeding system installed on
top of the silo.
Usually the aeration bottom has to be arranged higher due to the connected conveying devices, thus
creating a space under the silo which can be used for the aeration process control cabinet, the silo blowers
and the air distribution system.
The inside of the silo is characterized by the cone of the mixing chamber, dividing the interior of the silo into
the main storage volume and the chamber volume.
In the bottom area the mixing chamber is equipped with wide, door-like openings.
The silo bottom is sloped towards the silo centre.
The silo outlets are located in the silo centre, in the area under the mixing chamber.
The cone of the mixing chamber can be made either of reinforced concrete or of structural steel.
Note:
With the pressure relieving function of the mixing chamber, the aeration
air pressure is limited to 0,5 bar(g). That means that the civil design of a
mixing silo MC is carried out according to design rules for low pressure
silo systems.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 4 of 18
260
3 Technical equipment
On the silo roof the multi-flow feeding system is arranged. This system mainly consists of a distributor,
radially arranged aeroslides of different lengths, and a fan for aeration.
For dust-free silo feeding a dust collector with a suction fan is usually arranged on the silo roof.
A pressure compensation valve for protection of the silo body, a signalling device for the actual filling level,
as well as a FULL-level switch are also installed on the silo roof.
For the accessibility of the silo, special access holes according to the regulations for the prevention of
accidents are provided.
The aeration bottom of the silo is constructed by open-type aeroslides. The aeration bottom is divided into
two major areas, the outerring area and the chamber area. The outerring area is divided into outerring
sectors. The chamber area is divided into chamber sectors. The open-type aeroslides of these sectors are
connected to the aeration blowers via a system of pipelines, butterfly valves and ball valves. The ball valves
are used for adjusting the air distribution within the outerring sectors and the chamber sectors. In the
outerring, the aeroslides are arranged radially along the inclination of the bottom toward the centre. They
extend through the openings into the inside of the mixing chamber. The remaining inner area of the mixing
chamber bottom is covered as well with open-type aeroslides, pointing radially towards the silo bottom
centre.
The blower set for bottom aeration consists of one outerring blower and one chamber blower. A stand-by
blower is recommended by Claudius Peters and will be provided upon request of the customer.
A pressure transducer, for the control of the outerring blower, is mounted on the pipeline leading from the
chamber blower to the silo bottom.
The chamber dedusting pipe, located on the inside of the cone wall, leads from the tip of the cone through
the silo bottom where it is connected to the silo bottom discharge conveyor.
The silo outlet is divided into 2 separate outlets. The main outlet is equipped with an overflow pipe, approx.
1,5 m long. Each silo outlet is equipped with a shut-off gate, an inlet box and a flow control gate.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 5 of 18
261
4 Function
An effective bulk solid mixing, working continuously with feeding and discharging, is achieved by a
combination of the following process techniques:
• by feeding of the bulk solid in horizontal layers
• by cutting these layers by means of vertical discharge funnels within the main silo area
• and by the final pneumatic mixing of the bulk solid in the mixing chamber.
The formation of layers with the correct thickness of the layers is a decisive step of the blending process.
Too thick layers will decrease the ability of the silo to produce a good blending. The standard silo design is
based on a silo content of 48 hours mill capacity and a mill cycle of 4 hours. The grinding process of the raw
mill must be controlled in such manner that a mill correction cycle does not exceed these 4 hours. The
deviation above or below the mill set point should not last longer than 2 hours. A 2 hour deviation in (+)
direction must be followed by a 2 hour deviation in (-) direction and so on. Furthermore the span of the
deviation should be kept approximately the same.
4.1 Feeding
The multi-flow feeding system distributes the bulk material evenly over the whole silo area during feeding,
thus creating in an alternating manner material layers of material with high and low concentration of the
typical material characteristics. The thinner the layers, the better the mixing effect.
4.2 Mixing by gravity in the main silo chamber

The aeroslides installed on the bottom of the silo are discharge support devices. The aeration air, necessary
for the aeration of the silo bottom, is compressed to the required pressure by the outerring-blower and the
chamber-blower. The compressed air is led into the bottom sectors to be aerated through the opened
butterfly valves. The compressed air, which is pressed into the bulk solid via the aeroslides, loosens the
internal material friction within a restricted layer above the silo bottom. The material is fluidized and flows by
means of gravity, supported by the pressure of the bulk material column along the aeroslide inclination from
the main silo chamber into the mixing chamber. The compressed air can expand in the chamber and can
escape to the dedusting system. If the compressed air supply is interrupted, the internal friction within the
bulk material will stop the discharge process.
The short radial flow ways into the chamber and the wide openings covering the complete aeration section
are characteristic for the process technique of this silo type. They help to ensure that the material is
discharged over the complete surface of the aeration sectors. This discharge procedur, which could be
described as sector mass flow, is distributed over the complete bottom area by the cycling outerring aeration,
switching from one section to the next.
The section aeration guarantees by simple and reliable means the controlled formation of a high number of
discharge funnels inside the silo main storage area, thus mixing the different layers of bulk material. At the
boundary areas of the funnels an exchange with the inactive zones takes place and at the surface bulk
material from the surrounding areas together with just filled in bulk material is drawn into the funnels.
The discharge funnels do not circulate successively but leap through the outer silo room. This movement is
controlled in accordance with a defined switching scheme. Example for 12 outerring sectors: Sectors 1, 8, 3,
10, 5, 12, 7, 2, 9, 4, 11, 6, 1, etc. This will, over time, result in an even decrease of the bulk solid surface
inside the silo.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 6 of 18
262
4.3 Mixing chamber and material discharge
The material in the chamber is relieved of the bulk material pressure of the main storage area. The chamber
is not completely filled, thus the compressed air led into the silo can escape at the surface. The chamber
filling level is kept constant within defined narrow MIN-MAX limits. To this end the aeration gas flow to the
outerring is adjusted in such manner via the blow-off regulation controlled by the pressure transducer in the
chamber aeration, that the bulk solid mass flow from the outerring into the chamber is more or less identical
with the current silo discharge mass flow. This way the chamber filling level remains constant. If the level
inside the chamber nevertheless exceeds the MAX.-level, the blower for the aeration of the bottom sections
of the silo main room is switched off by means of a pressure transducer signal. The material feed from the
main silo room is reduced and finally interrupted. As soon as the flow rate into the chamber becomes smaller
than the discharge rate out of the chamber, the material level in the chamber will drop, which means that the
pressure of the chamber blower will drop as well. The pressure transducer signal starts the outerring blower
again. From the aerated outerring sector material flows again into the mixing chamber and the blow-off
control becomes active again.
The second step of the mixing process is accomplished by alternating active and inactive aeration of the
mixing chamber bottom. Active aeration means aeration with high air volume and inactive aeration means
aeration with a relatively low specific air volume. Above the aerated active area the material circulates
upwards. The aerated inactive sectors support the material flow from the aerated inactive sectors into the
active area. The material flow into the chamber is mixed with premixed material already in the chamber. This
way the chamber content is continuously circulated between active and inactive sectors.
The respective aerated active sectors as well as the respective aerated inactive sectors within the mixing
chamber receive aeration air from the chamber blower. The aeration time and the aeration sequence are
adjusted in the process control in such manner that the aeration of the chamber sectors circulates
synchronously with the aeration of the outerring sectors. The synchronous sequence of the sector aeration of
the outerring and the chamber is extremely important for the correct functioning of the mixing and discharge
process.
The blower air necessary for the material discharge as well as for the mixing process inside the chamber is
relieved inside the chamber and is fed to the dedusting system via a vent pipe.
The bulk solid is discharged via outlets arranged centrally in the silo. As a standard the silo type MC is
equipped with a discharge with overflow pipe and a bottom outlet. The bulk solid is discharged up to 30 – 25
% via the bottom outlet while the flow control gate is in resting position. Approx. 70 – 75 % of the mass flow
are discharged via the overflow pipe. The opening cross section of the flow control gate of this outlet is
controlled via a 4-20 mA signal, coming for instance from the weighing bin of the kiln meal feeding.
With the Claudius Peters expansion chamber technique a mass flow is created above the respective aerated
outerring sector, i.e. a rotating mass flow in the main storage area. Inside the mixing chamber the material
premixed in the main silo room is mixed to its final condition.
The mixing chamber principle as well as the overflow pipe are patented Claudius Peters inventions.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 7 of 18
263
4.4 Pressure transducer setting
The filling level within the chamber, necessary for the mixing and discharge process, is controlled by a
pressure transducer. The pressure of the chamber blower is proportional to the filling level within the
chamber. The pressure transducer supplies a 4-20 mA signal that is proportional to the pressure of the
chamber blower which is used in the process control unit for switching on and off the outerring blower as well
as for activation of the blow-off control.
In order to avoid dirt in the pressure transducer, as far as possible, and deviation between the pressure at
the pressure transducer and directly at the chamber blower, it is recommended to install the pressure
transducer as close as possible to the aeration blower. With a long piping system between pressure
transducer and chamber blower the maximum admissible pressure at the chamber blower may be exceeded
if the pressure loss of the connecting pipeline is not considered correspondingly.
For calculation of the pressure losses for technically rough standard steel pipes installed between pressure
transducer and chamber blower, the following table can be used. The table data is based on the nominal
pipeline widths according to Claudius Peters standard.
Pipe size DN 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250

Pressure loss per min [mbar] 1,2 1,0 0,75 0,6 0,45 0,35 0,25 0,18
Note:
Prior to the first start-up of the silo, the switching points of the pressure
transducer have to be adjusted at the silo process control!
The following tables show the values for the MIN.- and MAX.- switch points in relation to the maximum and
minimum filling height of the chamber. With different bulk densities as shown in the table, the values for PTH MAX
and PTL MIN have to be adjusted accordingly.
For raw meal the bulk density 0,7 t/m³ has to be applied.
Silo diameter 10 – 12 m
Bulk density in aerated condition inside the
chamber [t/m3] 0,5 0,7 0,85 1,0
Maximum filling height inside the chamber [m] 4,5 4,5 4,5 4,5
Pressure transducer PTH MAX [mbar] 225 315 380 450
Minimum filling height inside the chamber [m] 4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0
Pressure transducer PTL MIN [bar] 200 280 340 400
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 8 of 18
264
Silo Diameter > 12 m
Bulk density in aerated condition inside the
chamber [t/m3] 0,5 0,7 0,85 1,0
Maximum filling height inside the chamber [m] 6,5 6,5 5,7 4,85
Pressure transducer PTH MAX [mbar] 325 450 485 485
Minimum filling height inside the chamber [m] 5,7 5,7 5,1 4,35
Pressure transducer PTL MIN [mbar] 285 400 435 435
4.5 Air distribution

The outerring sectors and the chamber sectors of the silo bottom are aerated by separate blowers.
4.5.1 Air distribution in the area of the outerring sectors

The aeration air is compressed with rotary piston blowers. From the rotary piston blowers the compressed air
flows via a system of piping, butterfly valves and ball valves to the open-type aeroslides of the silo bottom
aeration. By means of the ball valves the pressure and air distribution inside the aeration sectors is firmly
adjusted.
Each electro-pneumatically operated butterfly valve for aeration of the outerring sectors is equipped with an
air distribution pipe with two pipe outlets. Each of these two pipes is provided with a ball valve for adjustment
of the air distribution. Behind each ball valve, a quick coupling for connection of a pressure gauge is
installed.
During the commissioning for the first adjustment of the air distribution and for all further controls of the air
distribution, each silo bottom sector, i.e. one after the other, has to be adjusted. This adjustment of the
outerring sectors has to be carried out immediately after opening of the respective pneumatic butterfly valve.
In case any readjustment of the silo bottom aeration will be necessary at a later date, a correction of the
adjustment as well as the new adjustment described below will be carried out.
4.5.1.1 Pre-adjustment without material in the silo
• all ball valves of the A pipes, 100 % open
• all ball valves of the B pipes, 30 % open
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 9 of 18
265
4.5.1.2 Final adjustment with material in the silo
Note:
For the final adjustment, the filling height of material above the silo bottom has
to be at least 9 m.
The final adjustment has to be carried out approx. 30 sec. after the butterfly
valve of the respective sector has been switched to open position.
• all ball valves of the A pipes, 100 % open.
• ball valves of the B pipes to be throttled further step by step, until the safety valve of the outerring blower
starts blowing off air.
• the ball valves of the B pipes have to be opened up again slightly, until the safety valve of the outerring
blower does no longer blow off any air (this can be felt by hand at the blow-off outlet of the safety valve).
4.5.2 Air distribution in the area of the chamber sectors

As for the aeration of the outerring sectors, the aeration air for the chamber sectors is also compressed by a
rotary piston blower. From the rotary piston blower the compressed air flows via a system of piping, electro-
pneumatic butterfly valves and ball valves to the open-type aeroslides of the chamber bottom sectors. The
ball valves are used for the fixed adjustment of air-/pressure-distribution inside the aeration sectors.
During commissioning of the silo, the air distribution of the chamber sectors has to be adjusted. The
adjustment of the ball valves for inactive aeration has to be carried out with open active flap and pressure
gauges attached to the quick couplings. All actuating levers of the respective inactive aeration are
positioned. All inactive by-passes are adjusted to identical pressure according to 4.5.2.1 and 4.5.2.2.
In addition, the air distribution between chamber sectors and silo outlet is adjusted during commissioning. By
means of a manual butterfly valve, the air led to the chamber sectors is slightly throttled to ensure sufficient
aeration of the central silo outlet and the silo discharge aggregates.
4.5.2.1 Pre-adjustment of the chamber bottom aeration without material in the silo
• the chamber sector that is aerated with active air receives the air through the respective open butterfly
valve unthrottled.
• all by-pass ball valves for inactive air have to be throttled to the 30%-open position.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 10 of 18
266
4.5.2.2 Final adjustment of the chamber bottom aeration with material in the silo
Note:
For final adjustment, the filling height of material above the silo bottom has to
be at least 9 m.
The final adjustment has to be carried out approx. 30 sec. after the butterfly
valve of the respective sector has been switched to open position.
• The by-pass ball valves have to be adjusted when the chamber blower pressure is close to the MAX-
pressure set at the pressure transducer. The inactive air pressure behind the by-pass ball valves always
has to be lower than the active air pressure.
• For silo diameter 10 -12 m = 150 mbar lower than the active air pressure.
• For silo diameter ≥ 12 m = 200 mbar lower than the active air pressure.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 11 of 18
267
5 Process control
The principle of the process is shown in a process diagram. The process diagram is project-related and shall
not be used for other projects. The process diagram refers to mixing and discharge only. Feeding is
independent of the silo discharge.
The process diagram can be realized simply by means of a programmable control.
The aeration periods and the sequence are determined in the process control in such way that the outerring
sectors are aerated synchronically with the active sectors (refer to chapter 8 "Principle Diagrams").
The exact number of outerring sectors, the number of chamber bottom sectors as well as the respective
quantity of pneumatic butterfly valves are shown in the project-related flow sheet.
Three program cycles are to be provided. All three have to be available so that they can be chosen by
means of a selector switch.
The first program cycle shows the regular operation. The two other cycles are for the residual discharge of
the total silo bottom and for the residual discharge of the chamber only. The residual discharge cycle can
also be selected after a restart of the silo plant after an extended standstill and if the flowability of the
material located inside the silo has deteriorated due to deaeration of the material. If extremely inert bulk solid
is handled, which tends to settle inside the silo, it is also recommended to destroy the material hardenings by
interval-wise use of the residual discharge program.
The aeration time of the single outerring sectors is adjusted at t1 = 5 minutes as standard by the
works During commissioning the t1 time has to be checked and adjusted, if necessary. t1 stands for
the time during which material is discharged from one outerring sector during normal discharge.
See the following for some basic information on the process sequence:
• Before the program can be started, a number of interlocking conditions must be fulfilled, e.g. the control
air pressure has to be sufficient, the dedusting system and the subsequent conveyors have to be
switched on.
• The blowers must only be started after opening of the butterfly valves and the discharge flow control
gates.
• For switching from one step of the program to the next, the following butterfly valve has to be opened
before the open one closes.
• If the discharge procedure is interrupted for a short time, only the outerring blower is stopped, the open
butterfly valves remain open.
• If, however, the discharge is finished, all blowers are stopped and the butterfly valves are closed. The
period of time during which the chamber blower is working, the time t1 is counted, independent of whether
the outerring blower is in operation or not.
• After t1 has expired, switch-over to the next outerring sector takes place. This way it is ensured that even
at low discharge capacities or easily flowing material, and thus longer standstill times of the outerring
blower, material is discharged from each of the outerring sectors.
• The basic factory setting is t1 = 5 minutes.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 12 of 18
268
• The cycle time t1 has to be adjusted in relation to the silo discharge rate:
discharge rate up to 50 t/h : t1 = 12 minutes

• There are three operation modes for the aeration of the silo bottom
1. Normal discharge with sector aeration time t1
2. Residual discharge (outerring + chamber) with pulsating aeration.

The sector aeration time t2 is always 2 minutes
3. Residual discharge chamber with pulsating aeration.

The sector aeration time t2 is always 2 minutes.
• The pulsation intervals within t2 are preset to 20 seconds OPEN / 2 seconds CLOSED.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 13 of 18
269
6 Guarantee prerequisites
In order to guarantee a flawless functioning of the silo the below prerequisites have to be fulfilled.
Before first filling, the installation has to be accepted by a Claudius Peters expert.
The commissioning also has to be carried out by a Claudius Peters expert.
During the commissioning phase, the times indicated in the process diagram are checked and if necessary
adjusted.
The silo has to be operated according to the Claudius Peters operating and maintenance instructions.
The following points have to be stressed:
• The silo body has to be water-tight.
• There has to be no, or only the contractually allowed residual moisture in the bulk material.
• Chemical reactions of the bulk material in the silo have to be avoided.
• The first filling of the silo has to be carried out in accordance with the Claudius Peters instructions.
• The silo has to be completely emptied and inspected at regular intervals.
• The control of the process has to be effected according to the process diagram.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 14 of 18
270
7 Maintenance and inspection
The pressure compensation valve has to be inspected and maintained very carefully on a regular
basis. The proper function of the compensation valve is essential for a safe operation of the silo.
The silo bottom is, as already pointed out, divided into a number of areas which can be aerated and
discharged independently of each other.
The mixing chamber can be discharged independently of the main silo room. This should be effected at
regular intervals in order to check whether the bottom of the chamber is free of lumps or coarse material.
After the chamber has been emptied, while the outerring blower has been switched-off, the active sectors
can be checked. For this purpose the slip-on pressure gauges can be used for adjustment of the outerring
sectors. If for all OPEN positions of the active sectors the blower pressure is approximately the same, the
chamber aeration bottom is in a good condition.
The outerring sectors can be checked in the same manner when the silo is empty.
A further possibility to check the function of the outerring sectors is to lower the bulk material level while the
feeding has been stopped. After the whole outerring sector has been aerated once, the evenness of the
lowered material level is checked from the silo roof. Unevenness of the material surface indicates that the
outerring sectors are not functioning properly.
When entering the silos, the valid regulations on accident prevention must be observed.
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 15 of 18
271
8 Principle diagrams
Key to figure 8.1 and 8.2:
1 Silo feeding 13 Butterfly valve outerring sector

2 Silo level measurement 14 Ball valve
3 Level switch FULL 15 Outerring sector
4 Dust collector 16 Chamber blower
5 Pressure compensation valve 17 Preselection butterfly valve
6 Main silo room 18 Butterfly valve chamber sector
7 Expansion chamber 19 By-pass ball valve
8 Discharge flow control gate 20 Chamber sector
9 Vent pipe 21 Pressure transmitter
10 Overflow pipe 22 Chamber level MAX
11 Bottom discharge 23 By-pass butterfly valve
12 Outerring blower 24 Blow-off pipe
25 Blow-off control valve
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 16 of 18
272
Figure 8.1: Mixing Chamber Silo MC, Arrangement Drawing
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 17 of 18
273
Figure 8.2: Mixing Chamber Silo MC, Aeration Flow Sheet
619.0009.1100A/03.en
Release 3: 22.08.2005
Page 18 of 18
274
Claudius Peters
Pressure measuring unit

Pressure adjustment for silo external ring sections
Description
617.0015.0001A/04.en
01.06 CPTNOT1
275
Contents
1 Application area .................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Connection ............................................................................................................................ 4
2 Operation............................................................................................................................... 5
3 Spare parts............................................................................................................................ 7
List of figures
Fig. 01: Assembly............................................................................................................................... 3
Fig. 02: Connection ............................................................................................................................ 4
Fig. 03: Air distribution ....................................................................................................................... 5
Fig. 04: Pressure distribution ............................................................................................................. 6
Fig. 05: Spare parts............................................................................................................................ 7

01.06 CPTNOT1
617.0015.0001A/04.en
Release 4: 20.02.2006
Page 2 of 7
276
1 Application area
1.1 Assembly
Controlled ventilation of the silo external ring sections is required in order to guarantee material flow within
the silo. Decisive is a pressure difference which must be adjusted with falling pressure in the direction of the
chamber inlet.
The pressure measuring unit permits a readable adjustment of this pressure difference.
Key to figure 1:
1 Pressure gauge
2 Reducing sleeve
3 Plug
Figure 01: Assembly

01.06 CPTNOT1
617.0015.0001A/04.en
Release 4: 20.02.2006
Page 3 of 7
277
1.2 Connection
Air flows to every silo external ring section via a butterfly flap. This air is further distributed into 2 partial sec-
tors by means of ball cocks within the individual silo external ring sections.
The air pressure resp. the air quantity is adjusted by means of a ball cock. Appr. 150 mm behind the individ-
ual ball cocks a 1/4" weld-in sleeve with installed coupling socket is arranged. The pressure measuring unit
is connected to the coupling socket by means of a plug. A silo external ring section consists of 2 partial sec-
tors with independent pipelines. For each silo external ring section 2 pressure gauges are arranged behind
the corresponding ball cocks
Key to figure 2:
1 1/4"-Weld-in sleeve
2 1/4"-Coupling socket
3 Ball cock
4 Pipeline
Figure 02: Connection

01.06 CPTNOT1
617.0015.0001A/04.en
Release 4: 20.02.2006
Page 4 of 7
278
2 Operation
The air inlet pressures are graduated within the silo external ring section. Adjustment is effected with the
pressure measuring unit.
The highest pressure should be present in the outermost partial section of the silo external ring section. Degraduation to
the next partial section should be approx. 100 mbar.
The lowest pressure is approx. 400 mbar
Key to figure 3:
1 Silo-external ring section
2 Pressure measuring unit
3 Silo wall
4 Cone wall
Figure 03: Air distribution
The 2 pressure gauges for the silo external ring sections to be adjusted are connected to the coupling sock-
ets.
As soon as all pressure gauges are connected, the external ring blower can be switched on. By adjustment
of the ball cocks, the exact pressure graduations can now be set.
The pressure measuring unit is mobile. After settings are effected, the pressure measuring unit can be as-
sembled to the next silo external ring section. The entire silo floor can thus be ventilated in graduations. A
silo with a diameter of 22 m yields the following example:
Maximum blower pressure in the silo external ring section approx. 500 mbar
01.06 CPTNOT1
617.0015.0001A/04.en
Release 4: 20.02.2006
Page 5 of 7
279
Key to figure 4:
1 Pressure measuring unit
2 Silo wall
3 Cone wall
Figure 04: Pressure distribution
This pressure distribution is merely an example; pressure distribution must be adapted to the actual operat-
ing conditions.
01.06 CPTNOT1
617.0015.0001A/04.en
Release 4: 20.02.2006
Page 6 of 7
280
3 Spare parts
Figure 05: Spare parts
Pos. Part Quan. Unit Designation No. or-

dered
1 - 2 pc Pressure measuring unit
2 - 2 pc Reducing sleeve
3 - 2 pc Plug
01.06 CPTNOT1
617.0015.0001A/04.en
Release 4: 20.02.2006
Page 7 of 7
281
Claudius Peters
Storage Silo
Assembly Instructions
619.0015.0021A/01.en
282
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions and principal Assembly instructions ..................................................... 3
1.1 Safety instructions ............................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Principal Assembly instructions........................................................................................... 3
2 Assembly Sequence ........................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Silo Ceiling .......................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Interior Silo .......................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Aeroslides with Aeration Piping........................................................................................... 4
2.4 Air-Leakage Test................................................................................................................. 7
3 Acceptance and Commissioning......................................................................................... 8
3.1 Acceptance.......................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Commissioning.................................................................................................................... 8
List of figures
2-1: Welded pipe connections .................................................................................................... 5
2-2: Bolting the aeroslides to the concrete floor......................................................................... 6
2-3: Aeroslide fastening.............................................................................................................. 7
619.0015.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 22.04.02
Seite 2 von 8
283
1 Safety instructions and principal Assembly instructions
1.1 Safety instructions
These safety instructions and the complete assembly instructions are to be read and applied by every
person dealing with the use of the storage silo.
These assembly instructions and the rules for accident prevention valid at site and the recognised special
rules for safety and professional works have to be observed.
The storage silo is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can be
certain risks if the storage silo is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the storage silo is used
for other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
· risk of injuries;
· danger to the installation and other assets of the operator;
· danger to the efficient operation of the installation.
Unauthorised reconstructions or modifications of the storage silo are prohibited.
Maintenance and repair work is only to be effected by skilled personnel. For the mounting and dismantling
only appropriate hoists and tools are to be used. The tools and the working area have to be clean!
The risks when using hoists have to be observed!
For connection and disconnection of electrical equipment adhere to the valid VDE and EVU regulations.
Check electrical protective measures (earthing resistance, etc.).
The function of all indicating and adjusting units have to be checked.
Take preventive measures in order to avoid accidental start of the mechanical device.
1.2 Principal Assembly instructions

These assembly instructions refer to the equipment of concrete silo bottoms with aeroslides, the connecting
pipes and accessories. All work should be carried out under strict observance of the valid local regulations
for the prevention against accidents and of other safety regulations.
The installation plan forms the basis for the arrangement of all build in components.
619.0015.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 22.04.02
Seite 3 von 8
284
2 Assembly Sequence
2.1 Silo Ceiling
Cleaning of silo ceiling. Checking of the concrete execution according to the drawing „Function Dimensions“.
Assembly of all parts on the silo ceiling. The silo ceiling must be impervious to falling objects inside the silo,
foreign matters and moisture.
2.2 Interior Silo
Cleaning of the interior silo area. Checking of the concrete silo dimensions. All silo dimensions have to
match the dimensions as shown in the drawing „Function Dimensions“.
2.3 Aeroslides with Aeration Piping
The screw joints at the aeroslide aeration sockets are to be adjusted in correct position, sealed and
tightened.
The aeroslides are to be selected and arranged as indicated in the Installation Plan without fastening.
The piping is to be arranged, aligned and fitted by skilled piping mechanics. The piping shall be located
suitable positioned to the aeroslide sets.
All welded pipe connections have to be carried out without decreasing the open pipe cross section, in order
to secure an unrestricted air flow within the piping system (see figure 2-1).
Before and after the pipe welding work and before the piping is connected to the aeration aeroslides, the
inside of the pipes have to be cleaned by hammer and air blowing.
When it is ensured that all aeroslides and all piping is properly located, the piping system is to be connected
to the aeroslides.
The aeration aeroslides require an even bottom surface for proper, even support. Before bolting the
aeroslides to the concrete floor, uneven concrete floor areas under the aeroslides have to be compensated
by lining plates. The lining plates are to be tack-welded to the aeroslides (see figure 2-2).
To fasten the aeroslides the supplied dowels are drilled and inserted into the concrete bottom. The anchor
bolts have to be fastened very tightly to ensure safe position of all aeroslides (se figure 2-3).
619.0015.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 22.04.02
Seite 4 von 8
285
Figure 2-1: Welded pipe connections
619.0015.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 22.04.02
Seite 5 von 8
286
Figure 2-2: Bolting the aeroslides to the concrete floor
619.0015.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 22.04.02
Seite 6 von 8
287
Figure 2-3: Aeroslide fastening
2.4 Air-Leakage Test

An air-leakage test has to be carried out with the aeration blowers running. Be careful ! no compressed air is
allowed for the air leakage-test, due to limited pressure resistance of the aeroslides. For indication of
leakage, a leakage sensor spray or soapy water can be used. All pipe welds and all screw joints have to be
sprayed with leakage sensor spray or have to be wetted with soapy water by using a brush. Leakages will
show air bubbling.
All air leakages have to be eliminated by additional welding (piping) or by checking and further tightening of
the screw joints.
619.0015.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 22.04.02
Seite 7 von 8
288
3 Acceptance and Commissioning
3.1 Acceptance
After the assembly work has been carried out an inspection of all installation must be executed.
3.2 Commissioning
We recommend to empty the silo completely after approximately 4 to 6 weeks after the initial charging.
The silo is to be inspected for any material deposits inside the silo. If deposits are observed, the silo bottom
aeration system has to be switched to rest discharge operation mode.
If the deposits can not be removed with the rest discharge operation mode, the deposits have to be removed
manually by using brush and shovel or other suitable means. The deposits must be put outside the silo.
Attention!
It has to made sure, that no aeroslide fabric will be damaged during cleaning
operation!
The deposits can be caused by moisture which source is to be scrutinized and totally repaired.
DANGER
ALL REQUIRED SAFETY WORKING PRECONDITIONS MUST BE
PROVIDED BECAUSE OF SERIOUS EMERGENCY DANGER
FOR STAFF WORKING INSIDE THE SILO!
619.0015.0021A/01.en
Release 1: 22.04.02
Seite 8 von 8
289
Claudius Peters
Silo
with inverted cone
Principle function and basic structure
619.0015.0022A/02.en
290
Contents
1 Basic structure ...................................................................................................................... 3
2 Operation mode .................................................................................................................... 4
3 Effect on silo structure stress ................................................................................................ 5
List of figures
Fig. 01: Basic structure ...................................................................................................................... 3
Fig. 02: Operation mode .................................................................................................................... 4
619.0015.0022A/02.en
Release 2: 21.04.2006
Page 2 of 5
291
1 Basic structure
Silos with inverted cone consist of a cylindrical body and a bottom which is covered with open-type aeros-
lides and is inclined to the centre by appr. 10°-15°.
In the middle of the bottom a cone is installed. The peak of this cone points upwards. The cone is equipped
with outlet openings to the discharge outlet which is usually arranged in the middle of the silo bottom. The
opening angle of the cone is 60°. The distance between the cone foot and the wall is approx. 2.5 m (see.
Figure 1).
Figure 01: Basic structure
The cone divides the silo into an outer area where the material is located and the area below the cone. De-
pending on the silo type, the area under the cone can be designed differently - for instance as fluidised bed
chamber for fine mixing of the material. In the convergent cone area the outer area is shaped like an annular
gap. Depending on the silo size, its bottom is divided into different numbers of aeration sections.
619.0015.0022A/02.en
Release 2: 21.04.2006
Page 3 of 5
292
2 Operation mode
During bulk solid discharge from a fully or partially filled silo, single outer ring sections are aerated one after
the other, once the peripheral conveying devices and those integrated in the cone have been started. This
way the friction of the bulk solid is dissolved and the material load causes the bulk solid to flow radially from
the aerated segment into the area under the cone. Typical aeration times of a segment are in the range of
approx. 5 to 15 minutes. After this time, the aeration jumps over to a faraway segment. This way all silo sec-
tions along the silo perimeter are aerated one after the other. Subsequent sections are at such a distance
from one another that no reciprocal aeration takes place.
The shape and the height of the flow area forming above the corresponding aerated section in the surround-
ing static material depend on the distribution of the aeration gas on the bottom, the aeration time and the
type of bulk solid. If the adjustment of the plant is optimal with regard to the process, the flow funnel diameter
is nearly identical to that of the section diameter, i.e. the flow area is in direct contact with the silo wall. If less
air is fed at the silo wall and more air is fed towards the cone, small funnels can form in the bulk solid which
do not touch the silo wall (see. Figure 2).
Figure 02: Operation mode
619.0015.0022A/02.en
Release 2: 21.04.2006
Page 4 of 5
293
3 Effect on silo structure stress
• The silo structure is stressen highly eccentric:
• Funnels are off center
• Eccentric stresses circulates jump-wise, approx every 5 – 15 min. it is switch to a faraway aeration section:
• Possibly endurance limit problems
• The stress inside the bulk solid of one flow area differs significantly from the stress inside the surround-
ing static bulk solid, generally the former are lower ( principle of silo inside the silo).
• This results in a local and circulating bending stress of the silo wall.
• The bulk solid in the flow funnel exerts friction / shear forces on the surrounding static material.
• Depending on the shape of the flow area geometry, the flow area contacts the silo wall or is separated
from this silo wall by a bulk solid layer.
According to CLAUDIUS PETERS experience the above stated process loads caused by eccentric and sec-
tion jump-wise rotating bulk solid discharge are described the most realistic in the assessments of the “Euro-
code 1 – Actions on structures, Part 4: Silos and Tanks, DRAFTQ pr EN 1991-4:2003”.
CLAUDIUS PETERS would recommend taking this code into consideration, in addition to any national
codes.
619.0015.0022A/02.en
Release 2: 21.04.2006
Page 5 of 5
294
Claudius Peters
Silo
with inverted cone
Direction for civil construction of the silo plant
619.0015.0023A/00.en
295
Contents
1 General................................................................................................................................ 3
2 Constructional design.......................................................................................................... 3
3 Evenness of the concrete bottom ....................................................................................... 3
619.0015.0023A/00.en
Release 0: 22.10.2004
Seite 2 von 3
296
1 General
This direction serves the secure constructional planning and design of silo plants with inverted cone. It is
without prejudice of completeness and possible future claims.
2 Constructional design
• For the silo body the static calculation which is to be provided by the customer is binding! Process
loads caused by eccentric and section-wise bulk solids discharge have to be considered.
• The silo compartment has to be protected against entry water.
• All concrete surfaces have to be smooth.
• If not otherwise agreed, all connecting frames and fastenings have to be supplied by the customer.
• All frames, supports and fastenings shown in this plan are recommendations. Their final design has
to be discussed between the customer and the supplier.
• The customer is responsible for the observation of all safety regulations according to state or local
laws.
• The indicated dimensions are fixed due to the silo bottom equipment arrangement and have to be
taken into consideration for the static calculation.
• The concrete of the silo bottom is to be prepared in such a way, that fixation of the aeroslides with
dowels is guaranteed.
3 Evenness of the concrete bottom

The below tolerances of the measures are valid for the evenness of a concrete bottom, which is covered with
aeroslides type 2-200.
Distance of measuring points

<1m >1m
Tolerance in radial direction 10 mm 10 mm
Tolerance in peripheral direction 20 mm 40 mm
619.0015.0023A/00.en
Release 0: 22.10.2004
Seite 3 von 3
297
Claudius Peters
EC, IC-, MC-, ME-Silo

Multi-Cell Silo
Civil Design Criteria
General Information on Silo Concrete Structure
619.0015.0024A/00.en
298
Contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 3
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in Accordance

with DIN ISO 16016 ............................................................................................................ 5
3 Additional documents.......................................................................................................... 6
4 Dimensioning and armouring concept ................................................................................ 7
5 Properties of particulate solids .......................................................................................... 12
6 Quality of the building materials, the construction work and the supervision .................. 13
7 Key points.......................................................................................................................... 15
8 Examples and illustrations ................................................................................................ 16
Note of approval from Beuth Verlag GmbH, Burggrafenstrasse 6, D-10787 Berlin
An excerpt from the DIN guidelines 1 Chap. 6 Reproduction of DIN Standards“
PLEASE NOTE: This is a translation of the original German document

“619_0015_0024A00de07032005uhag.doc”, while all reasonable care was applied in translating the original
German text, Claudius Peters does not warrant the completeness or accuracy of the Translation.
619.0015.0024A/00.en
Release 0: 01.09.2005
Seite 2 von 37
299
1 Introduction
This General Information serves as a basic aid for a safe civil design planning and execution of the silo con-
crete structure. It has been prepared as a service to our clients to assist them in identifying some of the more
important aspects (as identified from the point of view of a supplier of silo components) of civil design of a
silo structure. This document was prepared using information available within the Silo industry, and cannot
predict or take account of any further developments or changes in technical understanding which may occur
hereafter.
It should be clearly understood, that the civil design of any silo structure requires the application of significant
expertise and experience. It is therefore essential that clients ensure that, while using this document as a
most basic reference, they entrust the design of their silo structure to a suitably qualified civil design engi-
neer. We cannot warrant the completeness or correctness of the content of this general information package
and, as such, same should not be relied upon as a substitute or replacement for the expertise and know-how
of a civil design engineer, which is in all cases required.
A silo concrete structure is a three-dimensional supporting shell structure made of reinforced concrete /
prestressed concrete, which is best erected with the sliding moulding method, and which must be calculated
statically and designed by an expert with the corresponding experience.
The following pages describe some important principles, which in our experience, should be taken into con-
sideration by the expert charged with the civil design by the plant owner.
Please note that the civil design does not only comprise the static dimensioning and the influences coming
from the bulk solid but that it also needs to be safeguarded by the quality of the material and the erection
work. To this end a professional supervision of the erection work is absolutely necessary.
The four most important key points in advance:
• In a three-dimensional shell supporting structure, eccentric / asymmetric loads have to be expected.
• The influence of the bulk solid and its characteristics must not be underestimated. The whole
range/variability of the bulk material characteristics must be considered in the constructional design.
• The quality of the construction material and the erection work at site must be ensured.
• The professional supervision of the erection is the final link in the design of a reinforced concrete silo.
619.0015.0024A/00.en
Release 0: 01.09.2005
Seite 3 von 37
300
If not otherwise agreed between the silo owner and the civil design expert, the local regulations and guide-
lines on construction shall apply. If local norms and guidelines do not cover the silo construction, we recom-
mend to refer to some of the numerous publications. We would like to point out in particular to:
• Swisscode/Eurocode, e.g. „Eurocode 1 Part 4: Silos and tanks; prEN 1991-4; English version“. In this
text we refer as follows to this norm: [EC chapter no.]
• DIN norm Silo, e.g. „DIN 1055-6: Design loads for buildings and loads in silo bins“ of 2005 or younger.
In this text we refer as follows to this norm: [DIN chapter no.]:
• DIN-Norm concrete structures, e.g. „DIN 1045-1: Concrete, reinforced and prestressed concrete struc-
tures; dimensioning and construction at least as recent as July 2001 or younger. In this text we refer as
follows to this norm: [DIN 1045 chapter no.]
• Silo-Handbuch Germany, publisher Peter Martens in Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin. In this text we refer
as follows to this literature: [Silo chapter no.]
• Recommendations of our office for civil engineering urs hauser ag in Switzerland are marked as fol-
lows in the text: [uhag].
Indicated below are two non-binding references for silo literature and norms:
• Beuth Verlag GmbH

Burggrafenstrasse 6
D-10787 Berlin
Telefon +49 (0)30 2601-0
Telefax +49 (0)30 2601-1260
E-mail postmaster@beuth.de
E-mail für Recherchetipps: dagmar.howering@beuth.de oder gordon.krause@beuth.de
E-mail für Auslandsnormen: auslnormen@beuth.de
Homepage www.beuth.de
• European Committee for Standardization

Central Secretariat
Rue de Stassart 36
B-1050 Bruxelles
Telefon +32 (2)55 00 811
Telefax +32 (2)55 00 819
E-mail infodesk@cenorm.be
Homepage www.cenorm.be
The static calculation and dimensioning of the silo structure have to be based on a safety concept which
incorporates the calculation values of the material characteristics. In most modern norms this is realised by
safety coefficients for external influences and loads and with safety coefficients for the resistance of the
components / construction materials.
This document focuses on the critical, silo-specific elements of the reinforced concrete structure, namely the
silo walls, radial walls (intermediate walls in multi-cell silos), cone and the silo bottom.
The remaining elements such as silo cover, substructure and foundation can be realised with the common
tools of civil engineering.
For the civil design of inspection chambers of IC silos a separate information is available.
619.0015.0024A/00.en
Release 0: 01.09.2005
Seite 4 von 37
301
The constructional draft, the static calculation, the elaboration and the documentation of the dimensioning
and the armouring are a complex technical process, which is documented in several hundred pages of static
calculations and several dozens of plans. This work cannot be replaced by these guidelines but only facili-
tated. From the point of view of the supplier, these guidelines provide the basic aspects on how to proceed
professionally in the dimensioning of a reinforced concrete silo. Normally, the constructional calculation of a
reinforced concrete silo is structured as follows by the civil engineer:
• Recording / determination of the silo geometries such as diameter, filling height, chamber arrangement
/ loading quantities, headroom dimensioning of the loading system including dimensioning of the single
components
• Analysis and evaluation of the foundation soil, determination of the foundation concept
• Analysis and evaluation of the bulk solid parameters for the constructional design of the silo, mostly
based on a report on the lab examinations and lab measurements of the respective bulk solid samples
[EC Annex C, DIN Annex C]
• Definition of the constructional and operating conditions of the silo chambers and the silo as such
• Precautionary definition of the construction material qualities to be used
• Elaboration of loads and load cases
• Calculation of loads and load cases
• Calculation of the relevant forces at the silo calculation model for the different combinations of load
cases
• Proof of the resistance of the different reinforced concrete components / elements for the decisive bal-
ance forces and the force combinations (proof of the carrying capacity)
• Proof of the admissible concrete overlappings, the admissible deformations, the admissible fracture
widths, the possible fatigue behaviour (proof of performance capability, proof of durability)
• Documentation of the static calculations
• Indication of the component dimensions, the armouring and a possible pretensioning in the drawings
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights

in Accordance with DIN ISO 16016
Copying this document or giving it to others, along with the use or communication of its contents, are forbid-
den without express authority. Offenders are liable for the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the
event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
619.0015.0024A/00.en
Release 0: 01.09.2005
Seite 5 von 37
302
3 Additional documents
Type of silo
Additional documents Mixing silo MC Storage silo EC Storage silo IC Storage silo ME
Dimension sheet 619.0000.1100A/NN.ED 619.0000.1200A/NN.ED 619.0000.1300A/NN.ED 619.0000.1400A/NN.ED
General recommandation for the

619.0009.1001A/NN.en --- 619.0009.1001A/NN.en
operation
Functional description 619.0009.1100A/NN.en 619.0009.1200A/NN.en 619.0009.11300A/NN.en 619.0009.1400A/NN.en
Silo with inverted cone

prinziple function and basic struc- 619.0015.0022A/NN.en
ture
Silo with inverted cone

Direction for civil construction of the 619.0015.0023A/NN.en
silo plant
IC-Silo;
civil design criteria general informa- 619.0015.0025A/NN.en
tion for inspection chambers
Aeration flowsheet 619.0017.1101...1106A/NN.ED 619.0017.1201...1206A/NN.ED 619.0017.1301...1305A/NN.ED 619.0017.1401...14011A/NN.ED
Product information 619.0091.1100A/NN.en 619.0091.1200A/NN.en 619.0091.1300A/NN.en 619.0091.1400A/NN.en
619.0015.0024A/00.en
Release 0: 01.09.2005
Seite 6 von 37
303
4 Dimensioning and armouring concept
For the silo chamber or chambers - in case of multi-cell silos - the correct loads have to be considered for the
different design and operating conditions of the silo.
Based on the corresponding loads and model calculations, the most important load cases for the present
building have to be determined.
Possible design and operating conditions of the silo or the silo chambers are generally as follows for all CP
silo types:
• Construction conditions (different, depending on the selected erection sequence)
• Weather conditions (wind, snow, ambient temperatures, rain, water)
• Condition without bulk solid loads, i.e. own loads, plant loads and working loads incl. floors and plat-
forms
• Earthquake (depending on the seismic hazard)
• Conditions during normal operation
- Filling level of silo chambers, i.e. full and empty chambers alternatingly side by side in
multi-cell silos
- Filling loads (not fluidised, symmetric and calculation model “patch load”. [EC 5.2.1, DIN 7.2.1]
- Bottom loads [EC 6., DIN 8.]
- Discharge loads (not fluidised, symmetric and as a patch load) [EC 5.2.2, DIN 7.2.2]
- Discharge loads (not fluidized, in case of a large eccentricity by means of systematic model varia-
tions of the size and location of the flow funnels) [EC 5.2.4, DIN 7.2.4]
- Fluidisation (symmetric and asymmetric) [EC 5.5.2, DIN 7.5.2]
- Temperature differences [EC 5.6, DIN 7.6]
• Conditions during interrupted or abnormal operation (the adjustment / control system of the equipment
is used as basis here)
- For example plugging of venting pipe system
For CP silos the civil engineer has to dimension the cone additionally as special installation part. The dimen-
sioning is not directly defined in the norms. On the one hand the considerations of the norm on hoppers [EC
6, DIN 8] can be applied analogously. On the other hand the load models for silo bottom loads, filling and
discharge loads analogous to the silo wall (symmetric and at large eccentricity) must be considered. [uhag]
For the IC silo in addition to the reinforced concrete structure, the inspection chamber made of steel has to
be calculated accordingly. In this context the suspension of the inspection chamber from the cone and at the
bottom cement outlet has to be proven. Information regarding the design of the inspection chamber is given
in a separate document “Guidelines on the constructional design of inspection chambers”.
304
Especially for mixing silos, raw meal silos and homogenizing silos [Silo 1.4.2] – for which mainly the CP silo
type MC, but also EC are used – special attention has to be paid to the fluidisation condition of the bulk solid.
In the inside of the cone – the actual fluidized mixing chamber – different filling levels exist. These are de-
scribed in the functional description of the MC and EC silos. Since the silo type MC is often operated 320
days a year and 24 hours a day, the fatigue of the materials “concrete” and “steel” has to be considered ac-
cordingly. [uhag]
Most ME, EC, IC and MC silos have to be allocated to requirement category 3 due to their volumetric capac-
ity (> 10.000 t) and / or their silo geometry (eccentric discharge / eccentric filling at > 1.000 t). Classification
of the silos into the respective requirement category is defined by the norms. [EC 2.5 table, DIN 4.5 table]
For silos of requirement category 3 the following additional aspects have to be considered according to the
norms:
• Variability of the size of the flow funnel [EC 5.2.4.3, DIN 7.2.4.3]
• Experimental determination of the bulk solid parameters with lower and upper limit values [EC Annex
C.2, DIN Annex C.2]
• Interference of the patch load model during filling and discharge [EC 5.2.1 & 5.2.2, DIN 7.2.1 & 7.2.2]
• The discharge factors become Ch = 1.15 and Cw = 1.1 [EC 5.2.2, DIN 7.2.2]
• The bottom load increase factor becomes Cb = 1.20 [EC 6, DIN 8]
• The respective impact combinations and dimensioning situations have to be considered [EC Annex A,
DIN Annex A]
The most common designations to describe the single components of a silo are indicated in Illustration 1.
The illustrations are listed in chapter 6 of these guidelines.
For a multi-cell silo it is important to define the various bulk solids and the decisive conditions resulting from
the different chamber filling levels. Special attention should be paid to the radial walls (chamber partition
walls) and the connection of the radial walls to the ring walls (outer and inner silo shell). The ring and radial
walls have to be designed for the most extreme scenarios of bulk solid distribution. The statically optimum
positioning of the radial walls is of special constructional importance. This should be examined in advance as
part of a predimensioning which should consider the different variants. Special attention has to be paid to the
forces in the transition of the radial walls to the ring walls. These forces are usually compensated by use of
corner reinforcements, so-called coves. [uhag]
For determination of the symmetric filling and discharge loads of bulk solids, most norms and guidelines use
the Janssen approach. Illustration 2 shows an exemplary calculation table for the symmetric filling loads and
the symmetric discharge loads. The table shows all necessary silo parameters, bulk solid parameters and
loads.
Illustration 3 exemplarily shows the forces from the symmetric bulk solid load on a silo shaft by means of the
model “patch loads”.
For the determination of bulk solid loads in case of large eccentricities, which always occur in the CP silo
types EC, IC, ME and MC, there are different normative approaches (EC, DIN but also USA, Australia, etc.).
These approaches use different influencing angles of possible flow funnels in the bulk solid (see Illustration
5). Illustration 4 shows an exemplary table for the calculation of bulk solid loads at large eccentricities. Such
values are used to vary the flow funnels. The table shows all necessary parameters as well as all basic data
of the geometry of the flow funnel. To faciltate working with this table, we recommend an enlarged printout of
the illustration in format A3.
305
Illustration 5 schematically shows the flow funnel and the pressure distribution during discharge with large
eccentricities. [EC 5.2.4.3, DIN 7.2.4.3]
In Illustration 6 the corresponding forces resulting from bulk solid loads at large eccentricities are shown. In
this illustration the influence of the flow funnel on a silo shaft can be seen.
Illustrations 2 to 6 are for use by a static engineer.
For the dimensioning in case of fluidised bulk solid there are also various normative approaches. In most
cases 80 % of the specific gravity of the non-fluidised bulk solid are used for calculation of the fluidised con-
dition.
In the silo chambers temperature differences may occur due to the ambient temperature and the inherent
heat of the bulk solid. The influence of these temperature differences must also be considered in the static
design.
The silo loads from the relevant norms apply for the silo ring walls and the silo bottom. For radial walls the
models for wall loads can be used. For the cone the models for bottom load and the models for filling and
discharge loads analogously to the silo wall have to be used.
There are different parts of the silo technology, the silo geometry and the durability of the construction mate-
rials which are not treated sufficiently or not at all in the various silo norms. For these parts, the expert has to
use his practical experiences and has to design the corresponding elements with sufficient safety.
The design of silo supporting structures is still carried out by means of static models. In reality, however, the
following problems may occur, among other things, in addition to the usual inaccuracies of assumptions and
calculation models and in the tolerances of material data and execution work:
• Dynamic loads (bridge formation in the bulk solid including collapsing of such bridges, silo quakes, etc.)
• Cyclic loads which can lead to fatigue of the building material (load alternation behaviour between filling
loads and discharge loads, etc.)
• Switch due to the cone (depending on the characteristic flow behaviour of the bulk solid, the cone influ-
ences the bulk solid loads)
It is therefore important that the calculated safeties, as required by the internationally valid norms, are pro-
vided. Further, it is important that the reinforced concrete body is constructed in an expert manner. [uhag]
The cone supports, for instance - have to be of massive design. The maximum main horizontal reinforce-
ments in the silo wall, for example, always have to be extended beyond the cone apex. [uhag]
The reinforced concrete structure has to be examined for its deformation under load. The admissible defor-
mations should be limited within the range of the country-specific maximum values for reinforced concrete
construction parts. Reinforced concrete and pre-stressed concrete belong to the composite materials, where
the supporting and deforming characteristics are determined on the one hand by the behaviour of the single
materials – in this case steel and concrete – as well as by their interaction.
Construction parts made of reinforced concrete and pre-stressed concrete can absorb relatively lower tensile
strength than compressive strength. If a certain stress level is exceeded, tensile strength occurs partly in the
construction parts and causes fractures in the concrete. Only when these fractures have occurred, the stress
is transferred to the steel reinforcement bars.
For this type of construction fractures are therefore normal. They cannot even be avoided by the highest
possible care in the design and execution.
306
The fractures, however, must not affect the performance capability nor the durability of the concrete building.
This is achieved by limiting the distribution and the width of the fractures to harmless values by measures
adjusted to the ambient conditions as well as to the type and the function of the building.
Limitation of the fracture width is dealt with widely in most local construction norms and construction guide-
lines valid today.
In case the local norms and guidelines do not cover the building of silos, we recommend to look for analo-
gies in the vast literature published. We would like to point out especially to:
• Swisscode / Eurocode
• DIN norm (Deutsches Institut für Normung)
• DBV guidelines (Merkblätter, Deutscher Beton- und Bautechnik-Verein)
• Silo manual Germany
The limitation of the fracture width can often become decisive for the design of reinforced concrete silos.
Illustration 7 gives an example for the limitation of the fracture widths according to DIN 1045-1.
Mainly for single-chamber silos or inner silo chambers it may be necessary to pre-stress the silo walls due to
the silo geometry and the bulk solid. According to the latest DIN norm of 2005, this will in future be even
more often necessary than before. For such pre-stressing only tested systems should be used. During calcu-
lation of the pre-stress, the friction losses, reversing and long-term losses must be taken into consideration.
[uhag]
If a silo is installed in an earthquake area, the stability of the system must be proven for these extraordinary
stresses. Classification of the dangerous area, the local ground conditions and the building class / damage
class of the silo must be defined. A silo in an earthquake area must not be installed on a silo table, i.e. on a
substructure with an open, fine structure (e.g. supports). The whole silo shell must be located on the founda-
tion. Such a silo shell will behave “good-naturedly” against dynamic forces. [uhag]
For the malfunction case “plugging of the venting pipe”, the maximum design pressure (e.g. reaction pres-
sure of the over-pressure flap) has to be used for calculation. The design pressure has to be enquired at the
supplier’s or has to be taken from the functional description.
Illustrations 8, 9, 10 and 11 show recommendations for the armouring concept which will be explained below.
[uhag]
For the vertical reinforcement a practical solution should be chosen which is easy to handle at site. Usually
lengths of approx. 4 m are used. The vertical reinforcement should be stepped at least two times vertically,
i.e. in the vertical a lap joint must be formed. The anchoring length for vertical armouring has to be calculated
and the lap joints have to be defined. [DIN 1045 12.8.2] In this calculation, the production tolerance and the
installation tolerance of the bars must be considered (see illustration lap joint marker vertical bars). On each
bar, a marking of the joints should be made for installation of the reinforcement (see Illustration 9 lap joint
marker for vertical bars). [uhag]
The horizontal reinforcement in the ring wall consists of inner and outer reinforcement rings. The single steel
bars used for the reinforcement rings have to be pre-bent in the bending workshop to the bending radius
corresponding to the silo geometry. The length of the single horizontal steel bars depends on the selected
number of bars per ring, the handiness for installation, the anchoring length and the displacement of the
307
joints. The anchoring length of the different diameters of the horizontal armouring must be calculated. [DIN
1045 12.8.2] The lap joints have to be provided and equipped with defined joint straps (cross armour-
ing).[DIN 1045 12.8.3] Here again, the production tolerance and the installation tolerance of the reinforce-
ment bars have to be considered. On each bar a joint marker should be provided for installation of the rein-
forcement (see Illustration 8, joint marking horizontal bars). [uhag]
To oppose the radial deviating forces of the inner horizontal armouring, the inner reinforcement bars must be
retained by retaining straps (see Illustration 10). The number, diameter and partition of the retaining straps
result from the static of the cable and the required anchoring length of the two strap legs. [uhag]
Experience has shown that depending on the partition of the bars, approx. each third vertical layer of retain-
ing straps should be fastened by welding. [uhag]
So-called distance baskets serve as vertical partition and at the same time as horizontal spacer. An example
is shown in Illustration 11. [uhag]
If a prestressing is required, it should be located in the core concrete and should be provided with sufficient
symmetrically arranged tensioning points. In this context it has to be ensured that the jacket tubes of the
pretensioning will find sufficient space between the outer reinforcement layer and the slide rod. [uhag]
308
5 Properties of particulate solids
The characteristics of the bulk solid influence the loads on the supporting structure considerably. It is there-
fore important to know the bulk solid, its characteristics and also the range / variety of the characteristics.
It must be determined which bulk solid or bulk solids will be stored. Especially for multi-chamber silos, the
decisive bulk solids have to be considered.
Generally there are two targets for quantifying the bulk solid characteristics:
• For the process design of the silo -> flow characteristics of the bulk solid itself
• For the civil design of the silo -> impacts on strength calculation of the silo
For the civil design of a silo there are two ways to determine the characteristics of the bulk solid:
• Norms, tables, literature, practical values (simplified procedure) [EC Annex E, DIN Annex E]
• Empirically, i.e. by specific tests with the bulk solid itself (experimental analysis); the type and scope of
measurements are specified in the design norms [EC Annex C, DIN Annex C]
For unknown bulk solids, bulk solids with additives or for large, critical silo bodies it is appropriate to deter-
mine the bulk solid parameters not only for the process design but also for the constructional design of the
silo empirically. [uhag]
The following bulk solid parameters have to be known / determined for the load calculation of the civil design
of the silo. For these loads the superposition pressure, the vibrations, etc., have to be considered.
• Characteristic value of the bulk unit weight

of particulate solid γ [kN/m ]
3
=> upper and lower limit value
• Characteristic value of loading angle of internal
friction of a particulate solid measured under
increasing loads φi [°] => upper and lower limit value
• Characteristic value of lateral pressure ratio K [-] => upper and lower limit value
• Characteristic value of coefficient of wall friction
for a vertical wall µ [-] => upper and lower limit value
• Cohesion of the solid c [kN/m2] => depending on the bulk solid, c=c(load)
• Bottom load magnifying factor Cb [-] => factor depends on requirement category
• Horizontal pressure discharge factor (load
magnifying factor) Ch [-] => factor depends on requirement category
• Wall frictional traction discharge factor (load
magnifying factor) Cw [-] => factor depends on requirement category
• Patch load solid reference factor (load
magnifying factor) for the stored solid Cop [-] => characteristic value depends on the
bulk solid
The variability of the bulk solid characteristics of each bulk solid is indicated by the upper and the lower limit
values. To ensure that sufficient safety is provided for the silo, the extreme values of the material parameters
have to be combined during calculation of the load cases. [EC 3.2, DIN 5.2]
The combinations of limit values of the bulk solid to be used are specified in the norms [EC 3.2 table, DIN 5.2
table].
For the load case „temperature differences“, it is also necessary to determine the maximum temperature of
the bulk solids inside the silo.
309
6 Quality of the building materials, the construction work and
the supervision
An important factor for the durability of the reinforced concrete structure is the quality of the building materi-
als, the construction work and the supervision.
For the characteristics of the green concrete the following has to be observed [uhag]:
• A dense, low-shrinkage and thus relatively dry concrete should be used.

• The processability of the concrete must not be affected by the above characteristics. 90 minutes after
production, the concrete should still show a slump value of min. 450 mm without de-mixing, i.e. with a
stable matrix.
The water/binding agent value (W/B) with a k-factor = 0.00 should amount to max. 0.50. A sufficient
processability can be achieved by adding a high-capacity liquefier. Please note: The W/B value cannot
be optimised unlimitedly. The amount of cement paste required for the reduction of the friction of the
slip form is otherwise at risk!
• In case of thick-walled construction parts, high ambient temperatures and a high cement dosage, the
concrete temperature should be limited to a max. temperature and should be checked, i.e. the hydra-
tion heat of the concrete should be regulated via the binding agent substitutes or a respective cement
type with low hydration heat.
• In case of thin-walled construction parts, low ambient temperatures and a low cement dosage, winter
construction measures have to be applied during cold weather periods.
Special attention has to be paid to the green bond and the abrasion of the unset concrete. The mix design of
the concrete has to be tested in preliminary tests. [uhag]
The following hardened concrete characteristics ensure a strong, long-lived sliding concrete [uhag]:
• Water conductivity, critical water absorption gw ≤ 4g/(m h) for d = 200 mm

2
• Water impermeability ET average ≤ 10 mm and ET max ≤ 25 mm

• As measure for the frost resistance in particular and the solidity in general, the number of frost changes
N50, is used which leads to a decrease in the static modulus of elasticity by 50 % (rated N50 ≥ 50, i.e.
average frost resistance).
This means only after 50 or more frost changes, the decrease of the static modulus of elasticity should
amount to more than 50 %.
• Chlorine resistance of concrete, diffusion coefficient < 10E-12 m2/s
• Strength development of concrete test cubes (individual values) under the same ambient conditions as
sliding concrete
Test value cube compressive strength 1 day approx. 8N/mm2
Test value cube compressive strength 2 days approx. 50 % of 28-day-strength
Test value cube compressive strength 28 days 100 %
For the reinforcement steel the following has to be observed [uhag]:
• Admissible is corrugated bar material, e.g. BSt 500S (B) suitable for welding, sufficient fatigue and a
high ductility according to EC2.
• Ring-shaped material is inadmissible.
• High-tensile steel, e.g. BSt 550, is not admissible.
Concrete pre-tests as well as pre-tests for welding of the retaining straps are indispensable.
310
The construction work should be carried out by a good construction company experienced in sliding, a quali-
fied slip form builder and an expert for reinforcement plaiting.
Sliding a silo shell is like building in quick-motion. It is therefore recommended to have everything ready and
well-ordered in the storage area before start of the sliding. All work which can be carried out before the slid-
ing starts has to be completed and checked.
During erection work, the following must be considered:
• The inner and the outer concrete surface of the silo walls should be checked immediately after leaving
the sliding shell. Repair work has to be carried out where necessary and all surfaces have to be pol-
ished with a re-treatment agent.
• The concrete cover must be of sufficient thickness and covering must be guaranteed via sliding hook.
Straps and binding wires must not decrease the required concrete cover thickness.
• The distance between the inner and the outer horizontal reinforcement must be ensured by spacer
cages for static reasons.
• The retaining straps should be fastened by expert welding in every third layer.
• All vertical and horizontal reinforcement bars must be provided with joint markers prior to the installa-
tion. The best time to do this is immediately after the cutting table in the bending facility.
• For installation of the long horizontal bars we recommend to install erection rollers at the sliding
frames.
• The reinforcement bars must not be bent additionally at site.
• The reinforcement bars must be checked upon arrival for:
- number / weight
- rolling marks and material marks
- geometry (bending form) and length
- diameter (laboratory tests, if necessary)
During the sliding work, a supervision has to be at site 24 hours a day. [uhag]
During sliding, the quality of the inserted concrete has to be checked by green concrete tests and testing of
the hardened concrete characteristics. [uhag]
Monitoring of the quality of the welding work should be carried out by way of random welding tests. [uhag]
Illustrations 12ff show exemplarily the structure and organisation of a silo erection site.
311
7 Key points
The chapter “key points” summarises the main points for the civil design of a silo concrete structure by way
of a check list [uhag]:
1. A silo body is, among other things, a three-dimensional shell supporting structure. For three-dimensional
shell structures eccentric / asymmetric loads have to be expected.
2. The influence of the bulk solid and its characteristics must not be underestimated. The range / variability
of the bulk solid characteristics must therefore be considered in the constructional design.
3. An expert dimensioning and reinforcement concept must be elaborated.
4. The building material and erection quality has to be ensured at site.
5. The professional supervision of the construction work is an important factor in the design of a reinforced
concrete silo.
6. Calculation of a silo concrete structure is carried out by means of static calculation models. In reality,
however, cyclic and/or dynamic loads can occur. It is therefore important that calculated safeties, as re-
quired in the valid international norms, are provided.
7. For services or consultations for civil design, Claudius Peters has found the services provided by and
expertise of the following Civil Design office to be most satisfactory :
urs hauser ag
civil engineering
werdstrasse 5
po-box
5314 kleindöttingen
switzerland
p. +41 56 268 70 70
f: +41 56 268 70 71
e-mail: uhag@bluewin.ch
312
8 Examples and illustrations
Below you will find examples and illustrations of the following subjects:
• Illustration 1: Section through silo with notations
• Illustration 2: Calculation table for symmetrical filling and discharge loads of bulk material
• Illustration 3: Illustration of internal force due to symmetrical bulk loads using the patch load model
• Illustration 4: Calculation table for large eccentricity discharge loads in circular silos
• Illustration 5: Eccentric discharge flow channel and pressure distribution
• Illustration 6: Illustration of internal force due to large eccentricity discharge loads

(influence of flow channel on silo shaft)
• Illustration 7: Information on fracture size limitation
• Illustration 8: Horizontal lap joint marker
• Illustration 9: Vertical lap joint marker
• Illustration 10: Anchor stirrup
• Illustration 11: Distance basket
• Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation
To facilitate work with Illustrations 1, 2, 4, 8, 9, 10 and 11, there is the possibility to print these illustrations
enlarged in format A3.
Illustrations 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 are provided for static engineers.
313
Illustration 1: Section trough silo with notations
314
urs hauser ag T:+41 (0)56 268 70 70 E:+41 (0)56 268 70 71 E:uhag@bluewin.ch © copyright 2005 urs hauser ag
Calculation Sheet for Symmetrical Filling Loads and Discharge Loads of Bulk Material
(according to Eurocode 1 Part 4 prEN 1991-4, Edition January 2004)
Project: Edition: 08.06.2005
Load Case 1: Maximum Horizontal Loads Perpendicular to the Vertical Walls with Chararteristic Values (Upper Value K, Lower Value µ)
Silo Parameter Properties of Particulare Solids Calculation Parameter
Inner Diameter Silo dc [m] 15.40 Bulk Unit Weight γu [kN/m3] 16.40 Janssen Characteristic Depth zo [m]
Inner Radius Silo r [m] 7.70 Lateral Pressure Ratio Upper Value K [-] 0.55 Asymptotic Horizontal Pressure due to Stored Particulate Solid pho [kN/m2]
Inner Area of Cross Section A [m2] 186.26 Lateral Pressure Ratio Lower Value K [-] 0.37 Janssen Pressure Depth Variation Function YJ [-]
Inner Circumference of Silo U [m] 48.38 Coefficient of Wall Friction Upper Value µ [-] 0.79 Loads
Thickness of Silo Wall t [m] 0.40 Coefficient of Wall Friction Lower Value µ [-] 0.65 Horizontal Pressure after Filling phf [kN/m2]
Height of Vertical Walled Segment hc [m] 46.60 Angle of Internal Friction Upper Value φi [°] 47.00 Wall Frictional Traction after Filling pwf [kN/m2]; Pwf [kN/m1]
Depth of Bulk Material z [m] variable Angle of Internal Friction Lower Value φi [°] 30.00 Vertical Stress in Stored Solid after Filling pvf [kN/m2]
Discharge Factor for Horizontal Pressure Ch 1.15 Horizontal Pressure during Discharge phe [kN/m2]
Discharge Factor for Wall Friction Traction Cw 1.10 Wall Frictional Traction during Discharge pwe [kN/m2]; Pwe [kN/m1]
Magnifying Factor for Bottom Load Cb 1.20 Bottom Loads after Filling pvft [kN/m2]
Calculation Parameter Filling Loads Discharge Loads Bottom Loads

after Filling
z γu K µ A/U zo pho YJ(z) phf(z) pwf(z) pvf(z) Pwf(z) Ch phe(z) Cw pwe(z) Pwe(z) Cb pvft(z)
[m] [kN/m3] [-] [−] [m] [m] [kN/m2] [-] [kN/m2] [kN/m2] [kN/m2] [kN/m1] [-] [kN/m2] [-] [kN/m2] [kN/m1] [-] [kN/m2]
1.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.089 8.61 5.60 15.66 2.84 1.15 9.91 1.10 6.16 3.13 1.20 18.79
2.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.169 16.46 10.70 29.93 11.03 1.15 18.93 1.10 11.77 12.14 1.20 35.92
3.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.243 23.62 15.35 42.94 24.10 1.15 27.16 1.10 16.89 26.50 1.20 51.53
4.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.310 30.14 19.59 54.80 41.60 1.15 34.66 1.10 21.55 45.76 1.20 65.75
5.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.371 36.08 23.45 65.60 63.15 1.15 41.49 1.10 25.80 69.46 1.20 78.72
6.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.427 41.49 26.97 75.44 88.39 1.15 47.72 1.10 29.67 97.23 1.20 90.53
7.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.478 46.43 30.18 84.41 116.99 1.15 53.39 1.10 33.20 128.68 1.20 101.30
8.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.524 50.92 33.10 92.59 148.65 1.15 58.56 1.10 36.41 163.51 1.20 111.11
9.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.566 55.02 35.76 100.04 183.10 1.15 63.28 1.10 39.34 201.41 1.20 120.05
10.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.605 58.76 38.19 106.83 220.10 1.15 67.57 1.10 42.01 242.11 1.20 128.20
11.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.640 62.16 40.40 113.02 259.41 1.15 71.48 1.10 44.44 285.36 1.20 135.62
12.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.672 65.26 42.42 118.66 300.84 1.15 75.05 1.10 46.66 330.93 1.20 142.39
13.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.701 68.09 44.26 123.80 344.20 1.15 78.30 1.10 48.68 378.62 1.20 148.56
14.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.727 70.67 45.93 128.48 389.30 1.15 81.26 1.10 50.53 428.23 1.20 154.18
15.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.752 73.01 47.46 132.75 436.01 1.15 83.96 1.10 52.20 479.61 1.20 159.30
16.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.774 75.15 48.85 136.64 484.18 1.15 86.42 1.10 53.73 532.59 1.20 163.97
17.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.794 77.10 50.12 140.19 533.67 1.15 88.67 1.10 55.13 587.03 1.20 168.22
18.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.812 78.88 51.27 143.42 584.37 1.15 90.71 1.10 56.40 642.81 1.20 172.10
19.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.829 80.50 52.32 146.36 636.18 1.15 92.57 1.10 57.56 699.79 1.20 175.63
20.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.844 81.97 53.28 149.04 688.99 1.15 94.27 1.10 58.61 757.88 1.20 178.85
21.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.858 83.32 54.16 151.49 742.71 1.15 95.82 1.10 59.57 816.98 1.20 181.79
22.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.870 84.54 54.95 153.72 797.27 1.15 97.23 1.10 60.45 877.00 1.20 184.46
23.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.882 85.66 55.68 155.75 852.60 1.15 98.51 1.10 61.25 937.86 1.20 186.90
24.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.892 86.68 56.34 157.60 908.61 1.15 99.68 1.10 61.98 999.47 1.20 189.12
25.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.902 87.61 56.94 159.28 965.26 1.15 100.75 1.10 62.64 1'061.78 1.20 191.14
26.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.911 88.45 57.49 160.82 1'022.48 1.15 101.72 1.10 63.24 1'124.73 1.20 192.98
27.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.918 89.22 57.99 162.22 1'080.23 1.15 102.60 1.10 63.79 1'188.25 1.20 194.67
28.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.926 89.92 58.45 163.50 1'138.45 1.15 103.41 1.10 64.30 1'252.30 1.20 196.20
29.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.932 90.56 58.87 164.66 1'197.12 1.15 104.15 1.10 64.75 1'316.83 1.20 197.59
30.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.938 91.15 59.25 165.72 1'256.17 1.15 104.82 1.10 65.17 1'381.79 1.20 198.87
31.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.944 91.68 59.59 166.69 1'315.60 1.15 105.43 1.10 65.55 1'447.15 1.20 200.02
32.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.949 92.16 59.91 167.57 1'375.35 1.15 105.99 1.10 65.90 1'512.88 1.20 201.08
33.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.953 92.60 60.19 168.37 1'435.40 1.15 106.49 1.10 66.21 1'578.94 1.20 202.04
34.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.957 93.01 60.45 169.10 1'495.72 1.15 106.96 1.10 66.50 1'645.29 1.20 202.92
35.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.961 93.37 60.69 169.77 1'556.30 1.15 107.38 1.10 66.76 1'711.93 1.20 203.72
36.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.965 93.71 60.91 170.37 1'617.10 1.15 107.76 1.10 67.00 1'778.81 1.20 204.45
37.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.968 94.01 61.11 170.93 1'678.11 1.15 108.11 1.10 67.22 1'845.92 1.20 205.11
38.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.971 94.29 61.29 171.43 1'739.31 1.15 108.43 1.10 67.42 1'913.24 1.20 205.72
39.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.973 94.54 61.45 171.89 1'800.68 1.15 108.72 1.10 67.60 1'980.74 1.20 206.27
40.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.976 94.77 61.60 172.31 1'862.20 1.15 108.99 1.10 67.76 2'048.42 1.20 206.77
41.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.978 94.98 61.74 172.69 1'923.87 1.15 109.23 1.10 67.91 2'116.26 1.20 207.23
42.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.980 95.17 61.86 173.04 1'985.67 1.15 109.45 1.10 68.05 2'184.24 1.20 207.65
43.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.982 95.35 61.98 173.36 2'047.59 1.15 109.65 1.10 68.17 2'252.35 1.20 208.03
44.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.983 95.51 62.08 173.65 2'109.62 1.15 109.83 1.10 68.29 2'320.58 1.20 208.38
45.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.985 95.65 62.17 173.91 2'171.75 1.15 110.00 1.10 68.39 2'388.92 1.20 208.69
46.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.986 95.78 62.26 174.15 2'233.96 1.15 110.15 1.10 68.48 2'457.36 1.20 208.98
47.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.987 95.90 62.34 174.37 2'296.26 1.15 110.29 1.10 68.57 2'525.89 1.20 209.24
48.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.988 96.01 62.41 174.57 2'358.64 1.15 110.41 1.10 68.65 2'594.50 1.20 209.48
49.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.989 96.11 62.47 174.75 2'421.08 1.15 110.53 1.10 68.72 2'663.18 1.20 209.70
50.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.990 96.20 62.53 174.91 2'483.58 1.15 110.63 1.10 68.79 2'731.94 1.20 209.90
51.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.991 96.29 62.59 175.07 2'546.14 1.15 110.73 1.10 68.84 2'800.75 1.20 210.08
52.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.992 96.36 62.64 175.20 2'608.75 1.15 110.82 1.10 68.90 2'869.62 1.20 210.24
53.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.993 96.43 62.68 175.33 2'671.41 1.15 110.90 1.10 68.95 2'938.55 1.20 210.39
54.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.993 96.49 62.72 175.44 2'734.11 1.15 110.97 1.10 68.99 3'007.52 1.20 210.53
55.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.994 96.55 62.76 175.55 2'796.85 1.15 111.03 1.10 69.03 3'076.53 1.20 210.66
56.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.994 96.60 62.79 175.64 2'859.62 1.15 111.09 1.10 69.07 3'145.58 1.20 210.77
57.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.995 96.65 62.82 175.73 2'922.43 1.15 111.15 1.10 69.10 3'214.67 1.20 210.87
58.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.995 96.69 62.85 175.81 2'985.27 1.15 111.20 1.10 69.14 3'283.79 1.20 210.97
59.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.996 96.73 62.88 175.88 3'048.13 1.15 111.24 1.10 69.16 3'352.94 1.20 211.05
60.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.996 96.77 62.90 175.94 3'111.02 1.15 111.28 1.10 69.19 3'422.12 1.20 211.13
61.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.997 96.80 62.92 176.00 3'173.93 1.15 111.32 1.10 69.21 3'491.32 1.20 211.20
62.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.997 96.83 62.94 176.06 3'236.86 1.15 111.36 1.10 69.23 3'560.55 1.20 211.27
63.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.997 96.86 62.96 176.11 3'299.81 1.15 111.39 1.10 69.25 3'629.79 1.20 211.33
64.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.997 96.88 62.97 176.15 3'362.78 1.15 111.42 1.10 69.27 3'699.05 1.20 211.38
65.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.998 96.91 62.99 176.19 3'425.76 1.15 111.44 1.10 69.29 3'768.33 1.20 211.43
Maxtor (g): MS Excel 2000/W 2000: Calculation Bulk Material Loads EC New.xls Max. Horizontal Loads: 08.06.2005, 13:46
Illustration 2: Calculation table for symmetrical filling and discharge loads of bulk material
315
© copyright 2005 urs hauser ag
Illustration 3: Illustration of internal force due to symmetrical bulk loads using the patch load model
316
Calculation Sheet for Large Eccentricity Discharge Loads in Circular Silos

(according to Eurocode 1 Part 4 prEN 1991-4, Edition January 2004)
Project: Edition: 08.06.2005
Load Case 1: Flow Channel Variation rc=0.5r (Upper Value K, Lower Value µ, Lower Value φi => zoc, Upper Value φi => η)
Silo Parameter Properties of Particulare Solids Geometry of the Flow Channel
Inner Diameter Silo dc [m] 15.40 Bulk Unit Weight γu [kN/m 3] 16.40 Radius of Eccentric Flow Channel rc [m] 3.85
Inner Radius Silo r [m] 7.70 Lateral Pressure Ratio Upper Value K [-] 0.55 Eccentricity of the Centre of the Flow Channel ec [m] 4.48
2
Inner Area of Cross Section A [m ] 186.26 Lateral Pressure Ratio Lower Value K [-] 0.37 Ratio of Radius of Flow Channel to Radius of Circular Silo G [-] 0.50
Inner Circumference of Silo U [m] 48.38 Coefficient of Wall Friction Upper Value µ [-] 0.79 Calculation Parameter of Centre of Flow Channel η [-] 0.61
Thickness of Silo Wall t [m] 0.40 Coefficient of Wall Friction Lower Value µ [-] 0.65 Cosinus of Circumference Wall Contact Angle cos Θc [-] 0.94
Height of Vertical Walled Segment hc [m] 46.60 Angle of Internal Friction Upper Value φi [°] 47.00 Eccentric Flow Channel Wall Contact Angle Θc [°] 20.68
Depth of Bulk Material z [m] variable Angle of Internal Friction Lower Value φi [°] 30.00 Sinus of Centred Wall Contact Angle sin Ψ [-] 0.71
Calculation Parameter Loads Eccentric Flow Channel Wall Contact Angle measured
Janssen Characteristic Depth zo [m] Horizontal Pressure in Static Solid phse [kN/m ] 2
from Flow Channel Centre Ψ [°] 44.92
Asymptotic Horizontal Pressure due to Stored Particulate Solid pho [kN/m 2] Wall Frictional Traction in Static Solid pwse [kN/m 2]; Pwse [kN/m 1] Internal Perimeter of Flow Channel Wall Contact Uwc [m] 5.56
Janssen Pressure Depth Variation Function YJ [-] Horizontal Pressure in Flow Channel phce [kN/m 2] Internal Perimeter of Flow Channel to
Janssen Charateristic Depth for Flow Channel zoc [m] Wall Frictional Traction in Flow Channel pwce [kN/m 2]; Pwce [kN/m 1] Static Solid Contact Usc [m] 18.15
Asymptotic Horizontal Pressure in Flow Channel phco [kN/m 2] Horizontal Pressure adjacent to Flow Channel phae [kN/m 2] Plan Cross-Sectional Area of Flow Channel Ac [m 2] 44.17
Janssen Pressure Depth Variation Function in Flow Channel YJc [-] [uhag] Wall Frictional Traction adjacent to Flow Channel pwae [kN/m 2]; Pwae [kN/m 1]
Calculation Parameter Loads in Calculation Parameter Loads in Loads adjacent

Static Solid Flow Channel to Flow Channel
z γu K µ A/U zo pho YJ(z) phse(z) pwse(z) Pwse(z) zoc phco YJc(z) phce(z) pwce(z) Pwce(z) phae(z) pwae(z) Pwae(z)
[m] [kN/m 3] [-] [−] [m] [m] [kN/m 2] [-] [kN/m 2] [kN/m 2] [kN/m 1] [m] [kN/m 2] [-] [kN/m 2] [kN/m 2] [kN/m 1] [kN/m 2] [kN/m 2] [kN/m 1]
1.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.089 8.61 5.60 2.84 5.70 51.40 0.16 8.27 5.38 2.77 8.95 5.82 2.92
2.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.169 16.46 10.70 11.03 5.70 51.40 0.30 15.21 9.89 10.47 17.71 11.51 11.60
3.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.243 23.62 15.35 24.10 5.70 51.40 0.41 21.04 13.67 22.30 26.20 17.03 25.89
4.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.310 30.14 19.59 41.60 5.70 51.40 0.50 25.92 16.85 37.61 34.35 22.33 45.58
5.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.371 36.08 23.45 63.15 5.70 51.40 0.58 30.02 19.52 55.84 42.13 27.39 70.46
6.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.427 41.49 26.97 88.39 5.70 51.40 0.65 33.46 21.75 76.50 49.52 32.19 100.27
7.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.478 46.43 30.18 116.99 5.70 51.40 0.71 36.35 23.63 99.22 56.50 36.73 134.75
8.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.524 50.92 33.10 148.65 5.70 51.40 0.75 38.77 25.20 123.66 63.08 41.00 173.64
9.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.566 55.02 35.76 183.10 5.70 51.40 0.79 40.80 26.52 149.54 69.24 45.01 216.66
10.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.605 58.76 38.19 220.10 5.70 51.40 0.83 42.51 27.63 176.63 75.01 48.75 263.57
11.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.640 62.16 40.40 259.41 5.70 51.40 0.85 43.94 28.56 204.74 80.38 52.25 314.09
12.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.672 65.26 42.42 300.84 5.70 51.40 0.88 45.14 29.34 233.70 85.39 55.50 367.98
13.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.701 68.09 44.26 344.20 5.70 51.40 0.90 46.15 30.00 263.38 90.03 58.52 425.01
14.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.727 70.67 45.93 389.30 5.70 51.40 0.91 46.99 30.54 293.66 94.34 61.32 484.95
15.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.752 73.01 47.46 436.01 5.70 51.40 0.93 47.70 31.01 324.44 98.33 63.91 547.58
16.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.774 75.15 48.85 484.18 5.70 51.40 0.94 48.30 31.39 355.64 102.01 66.31 612.71
17.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.794 77.10 50.12 533.67 5.70 51.40 0.95 48.79 31.72 387.20 105.41 68.52 680.13
18.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.812 78.88 51.27 584.37 5.70 51.40 0.96 49.21 31.99 419.06 108.54 70.55 749.68
19.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.829 80.50 52.32 636.18 5.70 51.40 0.96 49.56 32.22 451.17 111.43 72.43 821.19
20.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.844 81.97 53.28 688.99 5.70 51.40 0.97 49.86 32.41 483.48 114.09 74.16 894.49
21.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.858 83.32 54.16 742.71 5.70 51.40 0.97 50.11 32.57 515.97 116.53 75.74 969.45
22.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.870 84.54 54.95 797.27 5.70 51.40 0.98 50.31 32.70 548.61 118.77 77.20 1'045.94
23.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.882 85.66 55.68 852.60 5.70 51.40 0.98 50.49 32.82 581.37 120.83 78.54 1'123.82
24.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.892 86.68 56.34 908.61 5.70 51.40 0.99 50.63 32.91 614.24 122.72 79.77 1'202.98
25.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.902 87.61 56.94 965.26 5.70 51.40 0.99 50.76 32.99 647.19 124.46 80.90 1'283.32
26.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.911 88.45 57.49 1'022.48 5.70 51.40 0.99 50.86 33.06 680.22 126.04 81.93 1'364.74
27.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.918 89.22 57.99 1'080.23 5.70 51.40 0.99 50.95 33.11 713.31 127.50 82.87 1'447.15
28.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.926 89.92 58.45 1'138.45 5.70 51.40 0.99 51.02 33.16 746.44 128.83 83.74 1'530.46
29.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.932 90.56 58.87 1'197.12 5.70 51.40 0.99 51.08 33.20 779.63 130.05 84.53 1'614.61
30.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.938 91.15 59.25 1'256.17 5.70 51.40 0.99 51.13 33.23 812.85 131.16 85.26 1'699.50
31.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.944 91.68 59.59 1'315.60 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.17 33.26 846.09 132.18 85.92 1'785.10
32.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.949 92.16 59.91 1'375.35 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.21 33.29 879.37 133.12 86.53 1'871.32
33.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.953 92.60 60.19 1'435.40 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.24 33.31 912.66 133.97 87.08 1'958.13
34.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.957 93.01 60.45 1'495.72 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.26 33.32 945.98 134.75 87.59 2'045.47
35.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.961 93.37 60.69 1'556.30 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.29 33.34 979.31 135.46 88.05 2'133.29
36.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.965 93.71 60.91 1'617.10 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.30 33.35 1'012.65 136.11 88.47 2'221.55
37.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.968 94.01 61.11 1'678.11 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.32 33.36 1'046.00 136.70 88.86 2'310.22
38.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.971 94.29 61.29 1'739.31 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.33 33.36 1'079.36 137.25 89.21 2'399.25
39.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.973 94.54 61.45 1'800.68 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.34 33.37 1'112.73 137.74 89.53 2'488.62
40.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.976 94.77 61.60 1'862.20 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.35 33.38 1'146.10 138.19 89.82 2'578.30
41.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.978 94.98 61.74 1'923.87 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.36 33.38 1'179.48 138.60 90.09 2'668.27
42.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.980 95.17 61.86 1'985.67 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.36 33.39 1'212.87 138.98 90.34 2'758.48
43.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.982 95.35 61.98 2'047.59 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.37 33.39 1'246.25 139.32 90.56 2'848.93
44.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.983 95.51 62.08 2'109.62 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.37 33.39 1'279.64 139.64 90.76 2'939.60
45.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.985 95.65 62.17 2'171.75 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.38 33.39 1'313.04 139.92 90.95 3'030.46
46.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.986 95.78 62.26 2'233.96 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.38 33.40 1'346.43 140.18 91.12 3'121.49
47.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.987 95.90 62.34 2'296.26 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.38 33.40 1'379.83 140.42 91.27 3'212.69
48.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.988 96.01 62.41 2'358.64 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.38 33.40 1'413.23 140.64 91.42 3'304.04
49.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.989 96.11 62.47 2'421.08 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.40 1'446.63 140.84 91.54 3'395.52
50.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.990 96.20 62.53 2'483.58 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.40 1'480.03 141.02 91.66 3'487.13
51.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.991 96.29 62.59 2'546.14 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.40 1'513.44 141.18 91.77 3'578.84
52.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.992 96.36 62.64 2'608.75 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.40 1'546.84 141.33 91.87 3'670.66
53.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.993 96.43 62.68 2'671.41 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.40 1'580.24 141.47 91.96 3'762.57
54.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.993 96.49 62.72 2'734.11 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.40 1'613.65 141.59 92.04 3'854.57
55.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.994 96.55 62.76 2'796.85 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.40 1'647.05 141.71 92.11 3'946.64
56.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.994 96.60 62.79 2'859.62 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.41 1'680.46 141.81 92.18 4'038.79
57.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.995 96.65 62.82 2'922.43 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.41 1'713.86 141.91 92.24 4'131.00
58.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.995 96.69 62.85 2'985.27 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.41 1'747.27 141.99 92.30 4'223.26
59.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.996 96.73 62.88 3'048.13 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.41 1'780.67 142.07 92.35 4'315.59
60.00 16.40 0.55 0.65 3.85 10.77 97.14 0.996 96.77 62.90 3'111.02 5.70 51.40 1.00 51.39 33.41 1'814.08 142.14 92.39 4'407.96
Maxtor (g): MS Excel 2000/W 2000: Calculation Flow Channel EC New Variation rc=0.5r: 17.03.2005, 10:20
Illustration 4: Calculation table for large eccentricity discharge loads in
317
Illustration 5: Eccentric discharge flow channel and pressure distribution [EC 5.2.4.3]
318
© copyright 2005 urs hauser ag
Illustration 6: Illustration of internal force due to large eccentricity discharge loads (influence of flow channel on silo shaft)
319
Extracts of DIN 1045-1, Edition July 2001 as an Example
(10) Check the following proofs concerning crack restriction:

- Proof of minimum reinforcement according to 11.2.2,
- Proof of crack restriction concerning decisive load cases according to 11.2.3 or 11.2.4
Table 18 - Specifications for the Restriction of Cracks and the Decompression
Column 1 2 3
Line Specification Load Cases for the Proof of Design Value
Class Decompression Crack Restriction Crack Width w k mm
1 A seldom -
2 B frequent seldom
0.2
3 C quasi-steady frequent
4 D - frequent
5 E - quasi-steady 0.3
6 F - quasi-steady 0.4
Table 19 - Minimal Specification Class according to Exposition Class
Column 1 2 3 4
Minimal Specifications
Way of Tension
Line Exposition
Class Tension Reinforced
Posttension Pretension
without Bond Concrete
1 XC1 D D F F
a
2 XC2, XC3, XC4 C C E E
XD1, XD2, XD3b, XS1,
3 Ca B E E
XS2, XS3
a Is the corrosion protection secured in an other way, specification class D can apply. See also offical civil approval
papers for the system.
b In specific cases special measures of corrosion protection can be necessary.
Maxtor (g): MS Excel 2000/W 2000: Crack Restriction 18.03.2005, 10:20
Illustration 7: Information on fracture size limitation [DIN 1045-1]
320
Illustration 8: Horizontal lap joint marker
321
Illustration 9: Vertical lap joint marker
322
Illustration 10: Anchor stirrup
323
Illustration 11: Distance basket
324
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Form work with metal sheets for trials
325
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Vertical reinforcement: walking line and distance baskets
326
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Bundeling and logistics of vertical reinforcement bars
327
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Bundeling and logistics of horizontal reinforcement bars
328
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Distance baskets
329
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Deposit location with collector rail
330
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / „Betomat“ bomb with special hose
331
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Slip form work at start
332
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Overview
333
Illustration 12ff: Picture documentation / Logistics on the storage yard
334
CHAPTER 7.R.2
FLOW CONTROL GATE - TYPE PCD
335
336
337
Claudius Peters
Flow control gate 2000.1 PCD

Drive: PNEU
682.0009.1077A/06.en
338
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions................................................................................................................. 4
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 Construction .......................................................................................................................... 5
3 Transport / Storage / Assembly ............................................................................................ 8
3.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Storage.................................................................................................................................. 8
3.3 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Flow control gate................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Control air connection ........................................................................................................... 9
3.3.3 Control air connection ........................................................................................................... 9
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 10
4.1 Pneumatic drive .................................................................................................................... 10
4.2 Manual emergency operation ............................................................................................... 10
4.3 Commissioning...................................................................................................................... 11
4.4 Positioner commissioning ..................................................................................................... 11
5 Maintenance instructions ...................................................................................................... 11
5.1 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 11
5.2 Lubrication............................................................................................................................. 11
5.3 Trouble shooting ................................................................................................................... 12
5.4 Repair.................................................................................................................................... 13
5.4.1 Replacement of roller sealing................................................................................................ 13
5.4.1.1 Cassette removal .................................................................................................................. 13
5.4.1.2 Exchange of roller sealing..................................................................................................... 14
5.4.1.3 Assembly of cassette ............................................................................................................ 15
5.4.2 Adjustment of spacer screws ................................................................................................ 16
6 Technical Data ...................................................................................................................... 17
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 2 von 17
339
List of figures
Fig. 2-1: Claudius Peters Flow control gate 2000.1 PCD.................................................................... 6
Fig. 2-2: Pneumatic circuit diagramm CONTROL without ext. quick acting stop extension ............... 7
Fig. 2-3: Pneumatic circuit diagram CONTROL with ext. quick acting stop extension ....................... 7
Fig. 5-1: Cassette removal .................................................................................................................. 13
Fig. 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing..................................................................................................... 14
List of tables
Tab. 5-1: Maintenance work............................................................................................................... 11
Tab. 5-2: Trouble shooting ................................................................................................................. 12
Tab. 5-3: Maximum adjusting torque.................................................................................................. 15
Annex:
Additional informations:
Dimension sheet
682.0000.1077A/NN.ED (Flow control gate PCD)

682.0000.0040A/NN.ED (Flow control gate CD-HO)
697.0009.0023A/NN.en (Limit switch unit)

697.0026.0022A/NN.en (Electro pneumatic Controller Unit, Typ PS2)
698.0026.0021A/NN.en (Pneumatic actuator)
Spare parts drawings:
682.0010.1077A/NN.SV (Flow control gate PCD)
Connecting diagrams:
682.0017.1077A/NN.ED
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 3 von 17
340
1 Safety instructions
These safety instructions and the complete operating instructions are to be read and applied by every person
dealing with the use, operation, maintenance or repair of the flow control gate.
These operating instructions and the rules for accident prevention valid at site and the recognized special
rules for safety and professional works have to be observed.
The flow control gate is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can be
certain risks if the machine is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the machine is used for
other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
• risk of injuries;
• danger to the installation and other assets of the operator;
• danger to the efficient operation of the installation.
Unauthorised reconstructions or modifications of the flow control gate are prohibited.
The distance between flow control gate and unsecured handhole cover of an connected aeroslide installation
has to amount to at least 850 mm. If the handhole cover is retained the distance may be smaller.
Maintenance and repair work is only to be effected by skilled personnel. For the mounting and dismantling
only appropriate hoists and tools are to be used. The tools and the working area have to be clean!
The risks when using hoists have to be observed!
For connection and disconnection of electrical equipment adhere to the valid VDE and EVU regulations.
Check electrical protective measures (earthing resistance, etc.).
In case of work at the flow control gate the pneumatic drive is to be kept free of pressure.
The function of all indicating and adjusting units have to be checked.
Take preventive measures in order to avoid accidental start of the device.
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 4 von 17
341
2 Description
The flow control gate 2000.1 PCD is pneumatically driven and digitally controlled.
It can be used to control fluidising bulk material flows in aeroslide installations.
2.1 Construction
The flow control gate consists of a steel housing with a mounted roller. The roller is sealed ready for
operation by means of a cassette with inserted roller sealing. The cassette and hence the roller sealing can
be easily replaced. In CLOSE-position the flow control gate shuts off the material flow.
The roller is equipped with a flow opening (control cross section). By turning the roller the flow opening is
changed between 0 and 100 %. A scale shows the opening angle of the roller in percent.
The roller is continuously adjustable by means of pneumatic rotating actuator drive (101) with installed
electro-pneumatic position controller (30.105). The position controller controls the roller in accordance with
the input signal of 4...20mA.
Up to flow control gate size 250 the internal quick acting stop speed is adjusted to approx. 3 s at an
operating pressure of 5 bar for each 90° angle of rotation. For bigger construction size it amounts to approx.
7 s. With an installed external quick acting stop extension (106.102) the 90° positioning time of the flow
control gate is below 3 s at 5 bar. A lower speed can be adjusted.
In case of a pressure drop the flow control gates of size 300...630 with a 90 ° drive can still run in CLOSED
position up to a pressure of 2,5 bar.
The further details and instructions concerning the adjustment, refer to the separate operating instruction for
the positions controller
The flow control gate is closed in current less condition.
The optimum equipment of the flow control gate with 180 ° drive allows the release of the complete flow
section to allow the pass of lumps in front of the roller section.
The flow control gate is equipped with an optional limit switch unit (99) for the signalisation of end positions.
The intermediate positions are indicated via the optional Iy-module (30.103) as analog signal at the position
controller (30.105).
The option alarm module (30.104) can indicate failures. Additionally there is an alarm entry (e.g. for direct
control air monitoring or for locking of manual operation ("Local Permission") existing.
In case the flow control gate comprises the field bus Profibus PA, ly and alarm module are already integrated
in the controller.
Equipment and connection of the controller and its module:

see separate operating instructions 660.0026.0022A/NN.en
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 5 von 17
342
90° drive
180°drive
Figure 2-1: Claudius Peters Flow control gate 2000.1 PCD
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 6 von 17
343
Figure 2-2: Pneumatic circuit diagram CONTROL without ext. quick acting stop
extension
RIGHTHAND-DESIGN LEFTHAND-DESIGN
Figure 2-3: Pneumatic circuit diagram CONTROL with ext. quick acting stop
extension
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 7 von 17
344
3 Transport / Storage / Assembly
3.1 Transport
The flow control gate will be delivered according to the transport requirements for street, sea and air
transport.
When lifting the flow control gate ensures that the carrying capacity of the ropes is in accordance with the
weight of the flow control gate. For lifting use the stop points at the housing. For reasons of safety and in
order to avoid damages only this stop points are to be used for transport.
Attention!
Drive parts may not be used for fastening points during transport!
3.2 Storage
The flow control gate has to be stored in covered condition resp. in a dry place and in installation position.
Avoid damages e.g. by charging it or climbing on it.
Attention!
No loads shall be put on the flow control gate. Walking on it is to be prevented.

Dropping machine parts may cause injuries!
3.3 Assembly
3.3.1 Flow control gate
The flow control gate is delivered ready for installation. The drive is completely assembled.
The conveying direction, which is marked by an arrow on the housing, has to be observed by all means
during assembly.
All flanges have to be dry and clean. Between all flanges to be connected install one sealing each which
corresponds to the size of the flanges.
The housing of the flow control gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the connected
installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
The energy supply lines are to be placed appropriately observing the valid safety regulations.
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 8 von 17
345
3.3.2 Control air connection
Dry, clean and free of oil control air according to ISO 8573-1 class 2 of at least 5,0 to max. 6,0 bar over-
pressure has to be provided by the customer.
The standard design of a flow control gate comprises two compressed air filters (500) which guarantee a
sufficient air quality and service life for the adjusting unit.
The pressure dew point for operational overpressure of the compressed air system has to be determined ›
20 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected.
3.3.3 Aeration air connection

The lower box of the flow control gate is equipped with an air connection socket for the connection of
compressed air with max. 0.5 bar overpressure. The air connection socket is equipped with an diaphragm for
quantity measuring.
In order to be able to switch off the aeration for maintenance and repair work it is convenient to install a
shut-off valve in the air pipe in front of the flow control gate.
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 9 von 17
346
4 Operation
4.1 Pneumatic drive
The flow control gate is adjusted by means of a double acting pneumatically rotating actuator.
If the flow control gate is to close quickly out of any OPEN position, the internal quick-acting stop has to be
activated through switching and configuring of the corresponding controller entry.
The external quick-acting stop (possible for size 300 up to 630) is carried out by the solenoid valve of the
quick-acting stop option. This valve has to be separately supplied with tension. If the quick-acting stop will be
activated, the nominal value supply to the controller will be interrupted, as otherwise control air would be
continuously blown off after reaching of the CLOSED position.
The limit positions of the rotary wing will be adjusted by means of two set screws. The set screw for limit
position CLOSED will be relieved through stoppers inside the flow control gate.
Attention
The two set screws must not be turned - they are adjusted at the works!
4.2 Manual emergency operation

Refer to figure 2-1.
The flow control gate makes manual emergency operation possible. The necessary fork wrench (30.360) is
located at the device.
DANGER
BEFORE ANY MANUAL EMERGENCY OPERATION ENSURE
THAT ACCIDENTAL STARTING OF THE DRIVE IS PREVENTED
BY APPROPRIATE MEASURES!
• Pull the hose from the drive to depressurise the chambers of the drive.
• Turn the roller at the external square of the rotating actuator drive shaft by means of an fork wrench
(30.360) into the requested position.
• Attach the drive hoses to reconnect the drive pneumatically.
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 10 von 17
347
4.3 Commissioning
First of all the mechanic function of the flwo control gate has to be checked. For this purpose the cylinder has
to be turned by means of the fork wrench (30.360).
However, the necessary adjusting moment shall not exceed the double of the values on table 5-3, page 15.
The positioning speed of the drive (90° drive: appr. 10 s each 90° and 180° drive: appr. 5 s each 90°),
adjusted in the workshop, has to be checked after the hose couplings have been installed and the controller
has been activated. If necessary, the speed has to be corrected.
4.4 Positioner commissioning

Commissioning of the positioner was already carried out during workshop assembly. If changed conditions
make a renewed commissioning necessary, proceed acc. to the information indicated in the separate
operating instructions of the positioner (697.0026.0022A/NN.de, chapter 4.6.2).
5 Maintenance instructions
5.1 Maintenance
Maintenance work Intervals

Check roller for smooth running 1 month
Table 5-1: Maintenance work
5.2 Lubrication
For the flow Lubrication of pneumatic drive: Refer to separate operating instructions.
control gate no lubrication is required.
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 11 von 17
348
5.3 Trouble shooting
Fault Cause Repair

Flow control gate is leaky Roller or sealing is worn Disconnect flow control gate
Remove cassette
Check parts and replace, if necessary
Roller does not open and/or Roller blocked by foreign matter Disconnect flow control gate
close
Remove foreign matter
- by repeated switching in
manual emergency operation or
- via cleaning cover at the
distributor connected in front
Air pressure too low Adjust air pressure to 5-6 bar
Air quantity too low Clean air filter
Roller does not reach the Actuating drive misadjusted or Refer to separate operating
preselected position or has an faulty instructions
extended actuating time
Roller blocked by foreign matter Disconnect flow control gate
Remove foreign matter
- by repeated switching in
manual emergency operation or
- via cleaning cover at the
distributor connected in front
Sealing is damaged Disconnect flow control gate
Remove cassette
Check parts and replace, if necessary
Throttles are misadjusted Open throttles at the controller and,
if existing, at the solenoid valve.
Table 5-2: Trouble shooting
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 12 von 17
349
5.4 Repair
The repair work described in the following can be affected easily and fast. No special tools are required.
5.4.1 Replacement of roller sealing

A worn roller sealing has to be exchanged in time in order to avoid unnecessary wear of the flow control
gate.
Leakage’s and/or an uneven or extended actuating time indicate wear.
The cassette (10.110) has to be removed for replacing the roller sealing.
5.4.1.1 Cassette removal

The cassette removal for the flow control gate with 180° drive is carried out without dismantling the drive.
The roller has to be in 180° position. Further work to be carried out for the flow control gate with 180° drive
are marked in the following with *).
Roller position Operation Roller position Cassette exchange
Figure 5-1: Cassette removal
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 13 von 17
350
• Close the shut-off device in front of the flow control gate or empty completely the silo resp. the storage *)
• Disconnect rotating actuator from pressure, use pressure reducer (adjustment: 0 bar).*)
• Release flexible connections between controller and drive.
• Disassemble pneumatic actuator (101).
• Mark position of roller shaft.
• Disassemble lateral sealing cover.*)
• Unscrew the 4 cassette screws (10.110.110).*)
• Turn roller by appr. 135° past position OPEN up to the stop (10.300) into the position for cassette removal
- use fork wrench (30.360).
• Disassemble cassette (10.110) laterally.*)
Note:
The spacer screws (10.270) must not be shifted during cassette removal!
5.4.1.2 Exchange of roller sealing
• Loosen screws.
• Remove roller sealing from the cassette.
• Insert new roller sealing in the cassette.
Do not assemble the clamping frame twistedly but in a way that it ends on the same level as the
cassette.
• Tighten screws evenly but not too firm (distortion of the cassette is possible).
• Check the flat sealing glued to the cassette frame for firm position.
If the flat sealing has loosened, fasten it again by use of the appropriate glue.
Figure 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 14 von 17
351
5.4.1.3 Assembly of cassette
The works to be carried out for the flow control gate with 180° drive are marked in the following with *).
• Clean feed housing.*)
• Position cassette in the cassette opening so that the projecting ends of the feed housing will be identical
at both sides.*)
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.110.110) slightly.*)
Ensure that during this procedure the cassette will lie on both spacer screws (10.270). This will help to
fasten the cassette in its original height.
• Turn/drive roller back into the direction CLOSED of the operating position.
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws with approx. 25 Nm.*)
Check for smooth turning of the roller. Use fork wrench (30.360).
Size 200 250 300 350 400 500 630

Md [Nm] 40 45 50 60 70 90 125
Table 5-3: Maximum adjusting torque
If smooth turning cannot be reached, evenly unscrew the spacer screws (10.270) a bit and adjust them
anew, if necessary (refer to chapter 5.4.2).
• Assemble lateral sealing cover.*)
• Turn marking of the roller shaft in such a way that the roller shaft marking faces the marking at the drive.
• Move rotating actuator drive (101) on the roller shaft and fasten with screws.
• Adjust the pressure reducer on an operating pressure. *)
Test run of the flow control gate by means of a local control station or a mA-transmitter.*)
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 15 von 17
352
5.4.2 Adjustment of spacer screws
After replacing the complete cassette (10.110) or through mechanic changes of the existing cassette, it might
be necessary to adjust the spacer screws (10.270) anew:
• Remove cassette: Refer to chapter 5.4.1.1.
• Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.110.110) so far that the cassette is just movable.
• Turn back roller into direction CLOSED against stop (10.300).
Since the cassette has not been adjusted yet, lift the cassette so far that the clamping frame will show an
even distance all around the roller.
• Tighten evenly the 4 cassette screws at the perimeter (approx. 25 Nm).
Make sure that there is an even pressure of the cassette on the spacer screws by unscrewing and
tightening of the spacer screws until contact of the lower side of the cassette is established.
• Secure spacer screws.
Further working steps: Refer to chapter 5.4.1.3.
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 16 von 17
353
6 Technical Data
Standard Option
Function flow control gate ADJUST (PCD)
Opening angle of the roller 90° – 180°
Starting capacity solenoid --- – 9 VA / 2 W (only for ext. quick
valve acting stop installation for size
300 up to 630)
Type of protection IP65 (controller) – IP67 (solenoid valve)
Compressed air pressure 5...6 bar overpressure
Control air structure ISO 8573-1, class 2
Dew point at least 20 K below
ambient temperature
Air consumption Size 200-250: 0,5 m3/h
Size 300-630: 1,1 m3/h
Cable passage M 16
Close time Positioning: 3...60 sec/90°
Quick acting stop: < 3 sec
Aeration connection Max. 0,5 bar overpressure
Temperature of the material to max. 140°C – max. 180°C (up to 220°C if
be conveyed required)
Ambient temperature -15 ... +50°C
Number of way switches --- – 2/4 pieces
Micro switch IP 40, 6 A, 24...380 V
Proximity switch PNP IP 54, 0,1 A, 10...30 V-DC
Proximity switch NAMUR IP 67, 3 mA, 8 V-DC
Analog output --- – 4...20 mA
Alarm module --- – Alarm module
Profibus --- – Profibus PA
682.0009.1077A/06.en
Release 6: 07.06.2004
Seite 17 von 17
354
Limit switch unit
697.0009.0023A/02.en
355
Contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 3
3 Technical data....................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Micro switch .......................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 Proximity switch (three-wire design) ..................................................................................... 4
3.3 Proximity switch (two-wire design)........................................................................................ 4
4 Adjustment of switches ......................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Micro switch .......................................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Proximity switch .................................................................................................................... 5
4.3 Electrical connection ............................................................................................................. 5
5 Connection diagram .............................................................................................................. 7
List of figures
Fig. 5-1: Connection diagram .............................................................................................................. 6
Fig. 6-1: Spare parts............................................................................................................................ 7
697.0009.0023A/02.en
Release 2: 14.11.2002
Page 2 of 7
356
These safety instructions are to be read and applied by every person dealing with the operation,
maintenance or repair of the limit switch unit.
The limit switch unit is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can be
certain risks if the limit switch unit is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the limit switch unit
is used for other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
Unauthorized reconstructions or modifications of the limit switch unit are prohibited.
Maintenance and repair work is only to be effected by skilled personnel.
Take preventive measures in order to avoid accidental start of the device.
For connection and disconnection of electrical equipment adhere to the valid VDE and EVU regulations. Check
electrical protective measures (earthing resistance, etc.).
Check all indicating devices for correct functioning.
2 Description
The limit switch unit is a reliable and economic possibility to signalize the position of the aggregate or to
control switchings.
The limit switch unit is to be fastened on the basic aggregate through supplied screws.
The limit switch unit is surface-protected by stoved epoxide resinous varnish.
The shaft (3) led through the zinc diecasting housing (4) enables the individual adjustment of the switch
points through adjustable switch cams (2). S1 + S3 resp. S2 + S4 are actuated at times by the same switch
cam (2).
A manual emergency operation of the drive is effected via the square of the shaft (3) led through.
697.0009.0023A/02.en
Release 2: 14.11.2002
Page 3 of 7
357
3 Technical data
Basic design (Standard) .................................................................................. S1 Micro switch
S2 Micro switch
Additional equipment (Option) ........................................................................ S3 Micro switch / Proximity
switch
S4 Micro switch / Proximity
switch
Cable inlet ........................................................................................................ 1 x PG 13.5
Protection class ............................................................................................... IP 54
Ambient temperature ....................................................................................... min - 20 °C
max + 60 °C
3.1 Micro switch

Switching capacity ........................................................................................... AC 230 V / 4 A
AC 400 V / 3 A
DC 60 V / 3 A
3.2 Proximity switch (three-wire design)

Three wires, switching plus (PNP) ................................................................... make contact
Operating voltage ............................................................................................ DC 10 - 30 V
Continuous current .......................................................................................... 100 mA
3.3 Proximity switch (two-wire design)

Two wires acc. to DIN 19 234 (NAMUR) ......................................................... break contact
Operating voltage ............................................................................................ DC 5 - 25 V
697.0009.0023A/02.en
Release 2: 14.11.2002
Page 4 of 7
358
4 Adjustment of switches
4.1 Micro switch
• Put the aggregate into limit position.
• Shift the appropriate switch cam (2) on the guide ring so far until a slight clicking indicates the switching
over of the micro switch (1) contact.
• For safety reasons shift the switch cam (2) about 1 - 2 mm further.
• Tighten clamping screw.
• Put the aggregate into opposite limit position.
• Shift the appropriate switch cam (2) on the guide ring so far until a slight clicking indicates the switching
over of the micro switch (1) contact.
• For safety reasons shift the switch cam (2) about 1 - 2 mm further.
• Tighten clamping screw.
4.2 Proximity switch
• Assembly and adjustment of the switch cam (2) analogous to chapter 4.1.
The luminous diode indicates the switching function.
4.3 Electrical connection
• Connect electrical connections.
• Tighten screwed cable joint firmly.
• The housing cover in the shaft exit has to be rubbed slightly with MoS2-grease.
Note
Make sure that the cover sealing (5) is inserted in its groove and that the
cover screws are sealed with the screw sea lings (7)!
• Place and center cover.
• Fasten cover screws.
697.0009.0023A/02.en
Release 2: 14.11.2002
Page 5 of 7
359
5 Connection diagram
Figure 5-1: Connection diagram
697.0009.0023A/02.en
Release 2: 14.11.2002
Page 6 of 7
360
6 Spare parts
Figure 6-1: Spare parts
Key to figure 6-1:
1 Switch 5 Cover sealing

2 Switch cam 6 Cork sealing
3 Shaft 7 Screw sealing
4 Housing 8 Terminal strip
697.0009.0023A/02.en
Release 2: 14.11.2002
Page 7 of 7
361
Pneumatic actuator
698.0026.0021A/07.en
362
Contents
1 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................. 3
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 3
3 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Quality of control air .............................................................................................................. 5
4 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Maintenance works ............................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Repair.................................................................................................................................... 5
4.2.1 Dismounting of drive ............................................................................................................. 5
4.2.2 Assembly of wing .................................................................................................................. 6
4.2.3 Assembly of drive .................................................................................................................. 6
5 Spare parts............................................................................................................................ 7
List of figures
Fig. 2-1: Pneumatic actuator ............................................................................................................... 3
Fig. 5-1: Spare parts drawing .............................................................................................................. 7
List of tables
Tab. 5-1: Spare parts list ...................................................................................................................... 7
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 2 of 7
363
These safety instructions are to be read and applied by every person dealing with the operation,
maintenance or repair of the pneumatic actuator.
The pneumatic actuator is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can
be certain risks if the pneumatic actuator is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the
pneumatic actuator is used for other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
· risk of injuries;
· danger to the installation and other assets of the operator;
· danger to the efficient operation of the installation.
Unauthorized reconstructions or modifications of the pneumatic actuator are prohibited.
Maintenance and repair work is only to be effected by skilled personnel.
Take preventive measures in order to avoid accidental start of the pneumatic actuator.
2 Description
The constructional concept of the pneumatic actuator dispenses with lever arms, toothed racks and
transmissions and allows for a direct transmission of the torque without disturbing lateral forces at the drive
journal. The drives are light and compact, the degree of efficiency is high. In addition the drives require
hardly any maintenance. The life of the pneumatic can be compared to that of regular pneumatic cylinders
due to the longevity of the lip seals.
The pneumatic actuator is suited for the adjustment of an operation angle of 90° ± 5°. The exact angle of
rotation can be adjusted by means of stops integrated in the housing.
Figure 2-1: Pneumatic actuator
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 3 of 7
364
3 Assembly
Usually, the drive is installed at the machine at works. If during maintenance works a drive had to be
dismantled it will have to be installed again as follows.
The life of drive and machine shaft as well as the tightness of the sealing depend to a large extent on
the care during erection.
· Check whether the coupling piece can be moved onto the spindle of the machine and onto the drive shaft
without any efforts. Possible edges or damages at the shafts can be easily removed by means of
scrapers or files. Production tolerances can be influenced in the same way.
Note:
Never hit drive housing, drive shaft, machine spindle or coupling with a
hammer!
A light lubrication of the shaft ends before erection will facilitate assembly and will prevent possible
corrosion.
· First check whether drive and machine are in the same final position.
It will be the decision of the erector whether the machine or the drive will first be screwed to the mounting
component. In any case the screws are only to be tightened loosely at first. In order to retain the screws
it is appropriate to use a liquid screw retainer (e.g. LOCTITE) during erection. As soon as mounting
component and drive are screwed to each other - do not forget to install coupling - the most critical phase
of erection approaches: the adjustment.
Note:
The quality of your work will depend to a large extent on the fact that
machine spindle and drive shaft are in alignment with each other in both
end positions of the shut-off device!
· Check whether the mounting component is positioned vertically and horizontally to all respective levels or
axles of the machine. If necessary correct the position by hitting the mounting component slightly with a
mallet. Tighten assembly screws at the machine.
· Check whether the drive shaft is positioned directly in the center above the machine spindle. Take care
that the shaft axles are in alignment and are not facing each other in an obtuse angle.
· If necessary correct position of drive by loosening the fastening screws and by moving the drive within
the drilling tolerances of the mounting component. Tighten fastening screws.
· Connect drive according to the pneumatic connection plan. Before the functional test of the drive is
effected, adjust drive to "slow" at the throttle check valves. Actuate several times and observe the
installed unit. If drive and machine move relatively to each other and the mounting component twists, this
indicates an alignment error of the two axles which has to be corrected.
· The correct position of the shut-off device in its end position can be easily regulated via the two
adjustable end stops of the pneumatic actuator.
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 4 of 7
365
3.1 Quality of control air
Dry, clean and free of oil clean control air (filter max. 40 µm) of at least 5.0 to max. 6.0 bar overpressure has
to be provided by the customer. A penetration of condensate into the drive should be prevented by
appropriate means.
4 Maintenance
4.1 Maintenance works
The pneumatic actuator requires hardly any maintenance. If the drive is erected accurately and if the control
air is according to the regulations the drive can reach a durability comparable to that of regular pneumatic
cylinders.
If drives are installed e. g. at components which vibrate heavily (e.g. close to pumps) we recommend to
check all screwed connections at regular intervals for firm positioning.
If a repair of the drive should become necessary after a long time of operation refer to chapter 4.2.
4.2 Repair
Position numbers refer to figure 5-1.
4.2.1 Dismounting of drive
· Dismount pneumatic actuator from mounting component.
· Check both shaft ends of drive for correct edges. Flatten possible damages with file since otherwise shaft
bearings and shaft sealings will be damaged during dismounting.
· Set clamping pins (11) in the lateral housing flanges back to the partition line by means of a flat ejector
drift of appropriate size.
· Remove housing screws (14) and separate both housing parts by blowing-in compressed air.
· Remove housing parts (10) from wing (1) without force.
· Clean surface of housing and sealings.
· Dismount and clean wing (1).
· Check shaft bearing (13) and shaft sealings (12) and replace them if necessary.
Housings with damaged surfaces cannot be repaired completely.
Attention
Never hit housing parts or shaft ends with hammer, this could lead to damages
at the inner surfaces!
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 5 of 7
366
4.2.2 Assembly of wing
· Check whether the stud bolts (6 / 7) are located centrally and whether they are still fixed, if not readjust
using LOCTITE.
· Move O-rings (9) over stud bolts.
· Install wing sealings (3) and spring plates (4).
Note:
Sealing profile and wing profile have to be identical. The spring plate is
marked where it will touch the wing shaft. Lip seals and teeth of the spring
plates have to be turned away from the wing.
· Install lateral plates (5) and fix with nuts (8); use a bit of LOCTITE for this procedure.
Torques for the nuts (8): 3.5 Nm
4.2.3 Assembly of drive
· Lubricate lip seals, bearings and inner sliding surface of the housing slightly with MoS2 grease.
· Spread sealing material slightly over both parts of the housing and distribute the material with the tops of
your fingers.
· Remove excess sealing material carefully especially from the running surface.
· Install wing in one of the housing parts, position second housing part on top and press down carefully
with your hands.
Do not use a hammer!
· Take care that the wing seal is not damaged or jammed in between the sealing surfaces.
· Press spring-type straight pins (11) carefully into the drillings of the second housing part.
· Install housing screws and nuts and tighten them with 120 Nm.
· Move wing manually from stop to stop into both directions in order to remove sealing paste which has
probably passed out at the inside.
· After 20 minutes of drying: effect a functional test with 7 bar compressed air.
· Retighten housing screws again.
Sealing material: commercial silocon caoutchouc mass,

e.g. Silastic 732 RTV by Wacker Chemie AG
Grease: non-saponifying and acid-free high-performance grease,

e.g. MoS2 grease by CASTROL
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 6 of 7
367
5 Spare parts
Figure 5-1: Spare parts drawing
Part no. Quantity Designation

- Set Wear parts, complete
1 1 Wing, complete
2 1 Wing
3 2 Sealing
4 2 Spring plate
5 2 Lateral plate
6 Set Stud bolt or screw, short
7 Set Stud bolt or screw, long
8 Set Nuts for pos. 6 + 7
9 Set O-rings
10 1 Housing (upper and lower part)
11 Set Straight pin
12 4 Shaft sealing
13 2 Shaft bearing
14 Set Housing screws and nuts
15 2 End stop complete, adjustable
16 2 O-ring
21 1 Coupling (not used when installed to flow control gate)
Table 5-1: Spare parts list
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 7 of 7
368
Electropneumatic Positioners
Types PS2 and PS2 PA
Brief - Operating Instructions
697.0026.0022A/08.en
369
Contents
1 Safety information ............................................................................................................... 4
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in Accordance with
DIN ISO 16016 .................................................................................................................... 4
3 General information............................................................................................................. 4
3.1 Documentation .................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 Documentation .................................................................................................................... 4
3.2.1 Operating instructions for users .......................................................................................... 5
3.2.2 Manual for control technicians ............................................................................................ 5
3.2.3 Folding leaflet – Brief description........................................................................................ 6
3.2.4 GS file (for Profibus version only) ....................................................................................... 6
4 Commissioning.................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 Scope of supply................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 Initialisation ......................................................................................................................... 6
5 Factory settings................................................................................................................... 8
5.1 2000.1 PCD flow control gate – without PROFIBUS PA, version 6DR5320 ...................... 8
5.2 2000.1 PCD flow control gate – with PROFIBUS PA, version 6DR5520 ........................... 9
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 2 of 9
370
Appendix
The Appendix includes the following manuals, downloads, GSD etc.:
Siemens homepage: http://www4.ad.siemens.de
Unit 3.2 includes further details on how to find the respective documents/files.
Operating instructions for users:
Standard version:
Siemens no.: A5E00074600 SIPART PS2 - Electropneumatic Positioners (6DR5xxx)
Profibus version:
Siemens no.: A5E000120716 SIPART PS2 PA - Electropneumatic Positioners (6DR55xx)
Manual for control technicians:
Standard version:
Siemens no.: A5E00074630 SIPART PS2 - Electropneumatic Positioners for
Linear and Rotary Actuators (6DR5xxx)
Profibus version:
Siemens no.: A5E00127924 SIPART PS2 PA - Electropneumatic Positioners for
Linear and Rotary Actuators (6DR55xx)
Folding leaflet – Brief description:
Standard version:
Siemens no.: A5E00074610 SIPART PS2 - Operation Summary (6DR5xxx-xx)
Profibus version:
Siemens no.: A5E00120711 SIPART PS2 PA – Operation Summary (6DR55xx-xx)
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 3 of 9
371
1 Safety information
The safety information and warnings relating to the positioner are outlined in the appropriate Operating
Instructions and/or Manual supplied by Siemens.
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in

Accordance with DIN ISO 16016
Copying this document or giving it to others, along with the use or communication of its contents, are
forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable for the payment of damages. All rights are reserved
in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
3 General information
3.1 Documentation
The positioner is supplied ready-assembled and initialised to a Claudius Peters system or as an individual
component, e.g. as a spare part.
The extensive possibilities and areas of application necessitate comprehensive documentation, the structure
of which is outlined below.
Apart from this document, which includes information on specific Claudius Peters settings, the
documentation included by Siemens in Unit 3.2 is also required depending on the version.
3.2 Documentation
Other documentation required apart from this document can be downloaded from the Siemens homepage
http://www4.ad.siemens.de.
Such documentation includes manuals, operating instructions, downloads, GSD files etc.
The path indicated above will bring you to the Siemens homepage. First of all, the desired language needs to
be selected. You can choose between German, English, Italian, French, Spanish and Chinese.
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 4 of 9
372
The following paths will bring you to the documentation you require:
German English
→ Produkt Support → Product Support
→ Produktinformationen → Product Information
→ Prozeßautomatisierung → Process Automation
→ Feld- und Wartungsgeräte → Field and Panel Instrumentation
→ Elektropneumatische Stellungsregler SIPART PS2 → SIPART PS2 electropneumatic positioners
Selecting a positioner:
Standard version (2- bzw. 3/4-Leiter Technik) → SIPART PS2 (6DR5xxx)
Profibus version (Profibus PA) → SIPART PS2 PA (6DR55xx)
The desired documentation/file can now be selected after choosing the appropriate registration card.
3.2.1 Operating instructions for users

(“Manual/Operating Instructions” registration card on the Siemens homepage):
Standard version:
Siemens no.: A5E00074600 SIPART PS2 - Electropneumatic Positioners (6DR5xxx)
Profibus version:
Siemens no.: A5E000120716 SIPART PS2 PA - Electropneumatic Positioners (6DR55xx)
3.2.2 Manual for control technicians

Standard version:
Siemens no.: A5E00074630 SIPART PS2 - Electropneumatic Positioners for
Linear and Rotary Actuators (6DR5xxx)
Profibus version:
Siemens no.: A5E00127924 SIPART PS2 PA - Electropneumatic Positioners for
Linear and Rotary Actuators (6DR55xx)
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 5 of 9
373
3.2.3 Folding leaflet – Brief description
Normal version:
Siemens no.: A5E00074610 SIPART PS2 - Operation Summary (6DR5xxx-xx)
Profibus version:
Siemens no.: A5E00120711 SIPART PS2 PA – Operation Summary (6DR55xx-xx)
3.2.4 GS file (for Profibus version only)

The GSD file required for the Profibus version of the PS 2 positioner can be downloaded from the Siemens
homepage under the “Downloads” registration card.
4 Commissioning
4.1 Scope of supply
If required, the Claudius Peters version of the PS 2 positioner can be supplied with installed Iy-module for
repeating and/or with an installed alarm module with additional binary inputs and outputs.
Where spare parts are supplied, these must be installed properly before using the positioner.
4.2 Initialisation
The positioner has already been initialised during assembly in the factory. If altered conditions or
replacement of the positioner necessitate re-commissioning, please proceed according to the following work
steps and the information contained in these operating instructions.
• If necessary/available: Install optional modules.
• Set up control air connection to the positioner and solenoid valve (if available) when in pressureless
state.
• Connect setpoint signal to terminals 3 (+) and 8 (-) of the positioner and set up voltage supply at the
solenoid valve (if available). Connect the bus lines to terminals 6 and 7 in version PS2 PA.
• Set the geared transmission switch on the positioner to 90°. Switch on the air and power supply (if there is
a solenoid valve) and set the setpoint at > 4mA.
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 6 of 9
374
• Adjusting factory settings on the positioner:
• Positioner indicates [WAY / 1.YFCT].
• Using the +/- keys, set [turn / 1.YFCT] for flow control gates with right-hand drive and [LWAY /
1.YFCT] for flow control gates with left-hand drive (right-hand drive = drive in conveyor direction -
RIGHT) and leave the [WAY / 1.YFCT] setting for the vent valve.
• Change to the next parameter [33° / 2.YAGL] using the operating mode key.
• Set [90° / 2.YAGL] using the +/- keys.
• Change to the other parameters using the operating mode key and compare them with the factory settings.
Any deviations should be corrected accordingly.
• Then change to the [noini / 4.INITA (Standard Version and PA version 6DR5xxx)] parameter.
• Starting initialisation of the positioner:
• Keep the + key pressed for approx. 5 seconds. The display indicates the following message: [Strt / 4.INITA
(Standard Version)].
• Initialisation starts automatically (duration: a few minutes).
• In the event of errors:
Error 1: If the bottom line of the display indicates , check whether the geared transmission
switch on the positioner is set at 90° – correct setting if necessary (please refer to unit 3.2.1 and
3.2.2) and then press the operating mode key.
Alternatively, reset the slip clutch on the positioner until the following display appears in the
bottom line. Then briefly press the operating mode key. Keep the + key pressed for
at least 5 seconds to permit the positioner to continue with initialisation.
Error 2: If other errors occur (if the word [FINISH] fails to appear in the bottom line after a maximum of 15
minutes), consult unit 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 on Troubleshooting and follow the appropriate instructions.
• When initialisation is complete, [FINISH] appears in the display.
• Breifly press the operating mode key to make the positioner ready for operation.
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 7 of 9
375
5 Factory settings
5.1 2000.1 PCD flow control gate – without PROFIBUS PA, version 6DR5320
No.: Parameter Left-hand Right-hand No.: Parameter Left-hand Right-hand

drive1) drive1) drive1) drive1)
1 YFCT LWAY 2) turn 2) 40 YCDO 0.5
2)
2 YAGL 90 ° 41 YCUP 99.5
3)
3 YWAY OFF 42 BIN1 OFF
4 INITA noini 43 BIN2 OFF
5 INITM noini 44 AFCT OFF
6 SCUR 4 MA 45 A1 10.0
7 SDIR riSE 46 A2 90.0
8 SPRA 0.0 47 FCT
9 SPRE 100.0 48 TIM Auto
10 TSUP Auto 49 LIM Auto
11 TSDO 0…400 50 PRST no
12 SFCT Lin 51 XDIAG OFF
34 DEBA Auto
35 YA 0.0
36 YE 100.0
37 YNRM MPOS
38 YDIR riSE
39 YCLS no
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 8 of 9
376
5.2 2000.1 PCD flow control gate – with PROFIBUS PA, version 6DR5520
No.: Parameter Left-hand Right-hand No.: Parameter Left-hand Right-

drive1) drive1) drive1) hand
drive1)
1 YFCT LWAY 2) turn 2) 40 AFCT OFF
2 YAGL 90 ° 2) 41 A1 10.0
3)
3 YWAY OFF 42 A2 90.0
4 INITA noini 43 FCT
5 INITM noini 44 TIM Auto
6 SDIR riSE 45 LIM Auto
7 TSUP Auto 46 STRK 0…1.00 E9
8 TSDO 0…400 47 PRST no
9 SFCT Lin 48 XDIAG OFF
31 DEBA Auto 49 FSTY FSAC
32 YA 0.0 50 FSTI 30
33 YE 100.0 51 FSVL 0.0
34 YNRM MPOS 52 STNR 126
35 YCLS no 53 IDENT 1
36 YCDO 0.0 54
37 YCUP 100.0 55
38 BIN1 OFF 56
39 BIN2 OFF
1) In direction of conveyance
2) Deviating from the positioner’s basic setting
3) Only appears where no. 1 = LWAY (left-hand drive)
697.0026.0022A/08.en
Release 8: 13.04.2007
Page 9 of 9
377
Claudius Peters
Dosierwalze 2000.1 PCD

Vanne doseuse 2000.1 PCD
Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 PCD
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Dessin de Pieces de Rechange
Dibujo de Repuestos
682.0010.1077A/07.SV
01.06 CPTNOT1
378
Inhalt / Contents / Table des matières / Sumario

Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 PCD ............................................................................................................. 5
Abbildungsverzeichnis / List of figures / Tables des illustration / Lista de figuras

Abb. 01: Dosierwalze 2000.1 PCD
Fig. 01: Flow control gate 2000.1 PCD
Fig. 01: Vanne doseuse 2000.1 PCD
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 PCD .............................................................................................. 3

Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 PCD .............................................................................................. 4
Achtung! / Attention! / Attention! / Atención!
Bei Anfragen oder Bestellung bitte Auftrags-Nr., Nummer dieser Ersatzteilzeichnung, die gewünschten Pos.-
Nr. und deren Benennungen, sowie alle Angaben des Typschildes angeben.
In case of enquiries or orders, please indicate comission no., no. of this spare part drawing, the required
position nos. and their designations as well as all data stated on the nameplate.
Pour toutes les demandes de prix ou des commandes veuillez indiquer le n° de la commande, le n° du des-
sin de pièce de rechange, les positions souhaitées et leurs désignations ainsi que toutes les données de la
plaque signalétique.
En caso de demandas o pedidos indiquen, por favor, el número de comisión, el número de este dibujo de
repuestos, el número de la posición requerida y su respectiva designación y todos los datos de la placa del
tipo.
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1077A/07.SV
Release 7: 12.04.2007
Seite / Page / Página 2 von / of / sur / de 7
379
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 PCD
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1077A/07.SV
Release 7: 12.04.2007
380
Fig. 01: Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 PCD
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1077A/07.SV
Release 7: 12.04.2007
381
01
Cilindro dosificador 2000.1 PCD
Pos. Benennung Designation Designation Denominacion
5 Kassette, kpl. Cassette, cpl. Cassette, cpl. Cajita, cpl.
5.010 Kassettenrahmen Cassette frame Cadre de cassettent Marco de cajita
5.020 Klemmrahmen Clamping frame Cadre de serrage Marco de enclavar
5.030 Abdeckblech Cover plate Tole de recouvrement Chapa recubridora
5.050* Flachdichtung Flat gasket Joint plate Junta plana
5.060* Walzendichtung Roller seal Joint de tambour Junta de cilindro
5.070 Rundstab Round rod Baguette ronde Barra redonda
10.140 Gelenklager Pivot bearing Articulation a rotule Cojinete de rotula
10.150 Federscheibe Spring washer Rondelle elastique Disco de resorte
10.170 Lochblech Perforated plate Tole perforee Chapa perforada
10.230 Passfeder Parallel key Chavette Chaveta
10.250 Dichtungsdeckel Seal cover Couvercle détancheite Tapa de empaquetadura
20.010* Wellendichtring Rotary shaft seal Bague détancheite Annillo de abturaction

dárbre para ejes
30.101 Drehflügelantrieb Rotation wing drive Aile commande Aleta impulsion
30.110 Regleranbau Control unit Runite de reglage Unidad de regulador
30.110.10 Konsole - Regler Console - controller Console - controleur Consola - regulador
30.110.20 Adapter Adapter Adaptateur Adaptador
30.140 Adapter Adapter Adaptateur Adaptador
30.155 Reduziernippel Reducing nipple Nipple de reduction Tejido
30.170 Gerade- Straight screw-in Raccord visse droit Attornilladura recta

Einschraubverbindung connection
30.175 Winkel- Angular screw-in Raccord a vis coude Attornilladura de angulo

30.180 Hohlschraube Banjo bolt Boulon creux a filet Perno hueco con rosca
femelle interior
30.190 Winkel- Angular swivelling Raccord durientation Racor angular orientable

Schwenkverschraubung screw-in connection a vis coud
30.200 Kunststoffschlauch Plastic hose Manche plastique Tubo de plastico

01.06 CPTNOT1
30.210 Kunststoffschlauch, blau Plastic hose, blue Manche plastique, bleu Tubo de plastico, azul
682.0010.1077A/07.SV
Release 7: 12.04.2007
382
30.360 Schlüssel Key Clef Llava
30.430 Dichtring Seal ring Baque détancheite Annillo de

empaquetadura

empaquetadura
30.500 Druckluftfilter Compressed air filter Filtre á air comprimé Filtro de aire comprimido
30.510 Druckluftfilter Compressed air filter Filtre á air comprimé Filtro de aire comprimido
30.520 Quick clamp Quick clamp Bride rapide Abrazadera rapida
30.550 Winkel- Angular screw-in Raccord a vis coude Attornilladura de angulo

40* Gewebe Fabric Tissu Tejido
50 Konsole Console Console Consola
60 Welle Shaft Arbre Eje
70* Walze Roller Tambour Liston de carcasa,

inferior
99 Endschaltereinheit Limit switch unit Unite de fins de course Unida de interruptor final
102 Magnetventil Solenoid valve Electrovanne Valvula magnetica
103 Analogsignalmodul Analog signal module Module de signal Modulo de senal analogo
analogue
104 Binärsignalmodul Binary signal module Module de signal Modulo de senal

binaire binaria
105 Stellungsregler Position controller Regulateur de position Regulator de posicion
106.010 Hohlschraube Banjo bolt Boulon creux a filet Perno hueco con rosca
femelle interior
106.020 Winkel- Angular swivelling Raccord dórientation Atornilladura orientable

Schwenkschraubkörper screw fitting angulaive angular

empaquetadura
106.060 Anschlussplatte Connection plate Plaque de Placa de conexion

raccordement
106.070 Verschlussschraube Screw plug Vis de fermeture Tagon rosador
106.080 Einschraubverbindung Screwed joint Raccord a vis Racor para enroscar
106.110 Verschlussschraube Screw plug Vis de fermeture Tagon rosador
Soupape Valvulade estrangulacion

106.130 Ausblasdrossel Blow-off valve détanglement a para evacuacion
souffler
106.140 Polyamid-Rohr Polyamide pipe Tube en polyamide Tubo de poliamida
01.06 CPTNOT1
106.150 Polyamid-Rohr Polyamide pipe Tube en polyamide Tubo de poliamida
682.0010.1077A/07.SV
Release 7: 12.04.2007
383
106.200 Rückschlagventil Check valve Clapet de retenue Valvula a de retencion
160 Skala Indicator scale Cadran Escala
1000.101) Druckbehälter Pressure vessel Réservoir sous Depósitio de presión

pression
1000.401) Minikugelhahn Mini ball cock Mini-robinet à boisseau Llave esférica mini
sphérique
1000.1101) Druckschalter Pressure switch Interrupteur Interruptor de presión

manométrique
1000.1201) Befestigung für Fastening for Fixation pour réservoir Fijación para depósitio
Druckbehälter pressure vessel sous pression de presión
1010.701) Schaltschrank-Heizung Heater for Chauffage armoire Calefacción para

switchboard de distribution armario de distribución
1010.801) Temperaturregler Temperature Régulateur de Controlador de

controller température temperatura
* = Verschleissteil / wear part / pièce d’ usure / pieza de desgaste

1)
= Optional an geeigneter Stelle montiert / Optionally installed at suitable place /
En option monté à l’endroit adéquat / Opcionalmente instalado en lugar adecuado
01.06 CPTNOT1
682.0010.1077A/07.SV
Release 7: 12.04.2007
384
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONTROLLER BASIC UNIT OPTION OPTION

A A
WITH OPTIONS Iy-MODULE ALARM MODULE
BINARY ACTUAL VALUE ALARM ALARM FAULT BINARY

INPUT 1 OUTPUT A 2 OUTPUT A 1 OUTPUT INPUT 2
SET POINT VALUE BE 2
M20
->1
A2
A1
1
B a3141 B
M20
BE 1
3V
1 kΩ
1 kΩ
1 kΩ
1 1 1 1 #
+ 3V
+
9 10 8 7 6 61 62 51 52 41 42 31 32 21 22 12 11
4...20mA
FUNCTION ARE PROGRAMMABLE
RB
C 1 C
4...20mA
AT POSITIONER +4,5V
- + + - + - + - + - +13V
HART
UH UH UH UH
COMMUNICATOR
U H = 12...35V
OPTION OPTION
D D
QUICK CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH BOX
Y1
LIMIT SWITCH: (S) RIGHT HAND LEFT HAND
2 1
SOLENOID VALVE SIZE 2
S4
DESIGN DESIGN
VOLTAGE POWER
S3 FUNCTION S1 S2 S1 S2
S3 S4 S3 S4
INRUSH/HOLD
GATE = OPEN 0 1 1 0
E E
S1
1 2
220 - 240 V 50/60 Hz 6/5 VA
S2
GATE = CLOSED 1 0 0 1
110 - 120 V 50/60 Hz 4/2,5 VA
PG 9 24 V DC 2W INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS 0 0 0 0
Erstellt mit ELCAD (R) 7.3.2
PG9
FOR EQUIPMENT / VARIANTS 0 - NOT ACTIVATED
PLEASE REFER TO CONNECTION DIAGRAM 1 = ACTIVATED
M20
697.0017.0035A
F F
9 Datum 06.2006 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 0017_
8 Bearbeiter Mol
7 Überarbeitung 02.07 Mol Geprüft Cord
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm FLOW CONTROL GATE PCD DRIVE: PNEU CLAUDIUS PETERS 682.0017.1077A/07.en Blatt 01
385
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONTROLLER BASIC UNIT OPTION OPTION

A WITH OPTIONS Iy-MODULE ALARM MODULE A
ACTUAL VALUE ALARM ALARM FAULT BINARY

OUTPUT A 2 OUTPUT A 1 OUTPUT INPUT 2
(TO USE AS OPTION)

BE 2
M20
#
->1
A2
A1
SAFE OPTION
BE 1
1
#
B B
M20
INPUT:
+
1 kΩ
1 kΩ
1 kΩ
1 1 1
3V
+ 3V
#
31 32 12 11
42
10 9 7 6 82 81 61 62 51 52 41 21 22
PROFIBUS PA
13...30V
4...20mA
9...24V
FUNCTION ARE PROGRAMMABLE
RB
C 1 C
AT POSITIONER
-
+
+4,5V
EEx
EEx + - + - + - + - +13V
UH UH UH UH
U H = 12...35V
OPTION OPTION
D D
QUICK CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH BOX
Y1
LIMIT SWITCH: (S) RIGHT HAND LEFT HAND
2 1
SOLENOID VALVE SIZE 2
S4
DESIGN DESIGN
S3
VOLTAGE POWER FUNCTION S1 S2 S1 S2
S3 S4 S3 S4
INRUSH/HOLD
GATE = OPEN 0 1 1 0
E E
S1
1 2
220 - 240 V 50/60 Hz 6/5 VA
S2
GATE = CLOSED 1 0 0 1
110 - 120 V 50/60 Hz 4/2,5 VA
PG 9 24 V DC 2W INTERMEDIATE POSITIONS 0 0 0 0
PG9
FOR EQUIPMENT / VARIANTS 0 - NOT ACTIVATED
PLEASE REFER TO CONNECTION DIAGRAM 1 = ACTIVATED
M20
697.0017.0035A
F F
9 Datum 13.09.2006 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 0017_
8 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm FLOW CONTROL GATE PCD-PA, DRIVE: PNEU CLAUDIUS PETERS 682.0017.1077A/07.en Blatt 02
386
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
PS
B ESD B
CUSTOMER CP
C C
BE1 CONFIGURED AS ESD TO CLOSE FCG

IN CASE OF PREEURE LOSS
( PARAMETER 42.BIN1:DOWN)
D D
P< 3,7 bar
P> 3,7 bar
9
+
PS
10
BE1
E E
ELECTROPNEUMATIC POSITIONER
F F
2 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm COMPRESSED AIR STORE FCG / PCD CLAUDIUS PETERS 682.0017.1077A/07.en Blatt 03
387
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-A1
0 1 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
5
6
3
B B
1
N
-R1 -R2 HEATER
C C
PE
N
L
D D
FUSE AND BREAKER

CUSTOMER SUPPLY
gL 4A
PE
N
L
E E
F F
2 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm HEATING FCG / PCD CLAUDIUS PETERS 682.0017.1077A/07.en Blatt 04
388
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D
A
01Blatt
8
S4
8
697.0017.0035A/05.en
S3
S1
S2
7
7
CLAUDIUS PETERS
M20 x 1,5
Ø 9 - 12 mm
NON EX-VERSION
0017_
6
6
VARIANT -S1 -S2
000-004 2 2
1 1
2 MICROSWITCH
3 3
AC 250 V/15 A
DC 24 V/10 A
DC 250 V/0,25 A
T = -20...+80 °C
1 2 3 4 5 6
5
5
VARIANT -S1 -S2 -S3 -S4
000-007 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
4 MICROSWITCH
3 3 3 3
4
AC 250 V/15 A
4
DC 24 V/10 A
DC 250 V/0,25 A
T = -20...+80 °C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LIMIT SWITCH BOX (KINETROL)

-S1 -S2
VARIANT PNP PNP
3
3
NON EX-VERSION
000-006
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
2 PROXIMITY SWITCH
+ - + -
DC 10-30 V
BN
BN
BK
BK
BL
BL
I max = 100 mA
T = -20...+70 °C
1 2 3 4 5 6
13.02.2007
Cord
Mol
2
-S1 -S2
Bearbeiter
VARIANT
Mol Geprüft
Datum
Name Norm
NAMUR NAMUR
000-001
2 NAMUR SWITCH
+ - + -
Datum
02.07
BN
BN
BL
BL
T = -25...+100 °C 1 2 3 4
1
1
5 Überarbeitung
R. Änderung

7
6
389
D
A
F
D
A
02Blatt
8
8
697.0017.0035A/05.en
EX-VERSION
VARIANT -S1 -S2

S4
S3
P1350 2 2
1 1
2 MICROSWITCH
+ 3 3
7
7
S1 2 NAMUR SWITCH
S2
CLAUDIUS PETERS
1 2 3 4 5 6
-S3 -S4
NAMUR NAMUR
T = -20...+80 °C
0017_
M20 x 1,5 IP 67 PLUG
+ - + -
6
6
BN
BN
BL
BL
7 8 9 10
NOTE: -S1 -S2

VARIANT
5
5
REGULATIONS REGARDING NAMUR NAMUR
LOW ENERGY BARRIER, GROUNDING P1351
AND CABLE 4 NAMUR SWITCH
HAS TO BE RECOGNIZED + - + -
BN
BN
BL
BL
ACCORDING TO THE
1 2 3 4
DOCUMENTATION!
T = -20...+80 °C -S3 -S4
4
4
NAMUR NAMUR
+ - + -
LIMIT SWITCH BOX (KINETROL)

BN
BN
BL
BL
5 6 7 8
3
3
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
EX-VERSION
VARIANT
P1352, T = -20...+80 °C
P1353 T = -20...+70 °C
4 MICROSWITCH
-S1 -S2 -S3 -S4
02.2006
Cord
Mol
2
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
Bearbeiter
Mol Geprüft
Datum
Name Norm
3 3 3 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Datum
02.07
1
1
5 Überarbeitung
R. Änderung

7
6
390
D
A
F
CHAPTER 7.R.3
AEROSLIDE AND ELEMENTS
391
Claudius Peters
Aeroslides Type 1
Assembly Instructions
621.0009.0000A/04.en
392
Contents
1 Description............................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Inspection cover .................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Aeration line........................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Welding work ......................................................................................................................... 4
621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 2 of 4
393
1 Description
Before start of the assembly, check that all parts required for the aeroslide assembly are available at site.
Any damage which may have been caused to the parts by improper transport should first be rectified (e.g.
slightly bent flanges should be straightened).
1.1 Assembly
Beginning at the silo connection, place the aeroslides in accordance with the assembly drawing. The aeros-
lide gasket should be inserted on one side with a sealing compound (e.g. Curil, Fermit). The screws of the
flange connection should be tightened up evenly crosswise. The inclination, which depends on the flowability
of the conveyed material, should be checked immediately after the first part of the aeroslide has been in-
stalled.
If there are aluminium components in the aersolide assembly (such as e.g. flow control gate, lateral dis-
charger), it is essential to make sure that no distortion results during the installation work.
The aeroslide supports and the suspensions must not be rigidly connected to the aeroslide as temperature
differences can cause changes in length. The maximum distance between the individual supports must not
exceed 5 m.
1.2 Inspection cover
According to the safety regulations, inspection covers with quick closure must be at least 850 mm distant
from a source of danger (such as e.g. flow control gate, flap of the lateral discharger). In the case of covers
which are screwed, and can only be opened with a tool, the distance can be less.
621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 3 of 4
394
1.3 Aeration line
The aeration line must be of sufficiently large crosssection to avoid excessive pressure drop. The necessary
pressure reduction should take place immediately ahead of the aeroslide. The aeration pressure most suit-
able for the conveyed material should be determined by the engineering department. For long aeroslide as-
semblies, air dividers should be fitted in the lower box in accordance with the assembly drawing. Instead of
the normal aeroslide gasket, an air divider gasket will be used here. Since the outer dimensions of the air
divider are larger than those of normal aeroslide gaskets, the position of the air dividers is immediately ap-
parent in a completely assembled aeroslide assembly.
Please note:
The venting lines should be laid as steeply as possible so as to avoid the
accumulation of material deposits.
1.4 Welding work
Attention!
If it is necesary to do welding work on the aeroslides at the place of assembly,

for example if an inspection cover is to be subsequently fitted, the fabric mate-
rial must be carefully covered to prevent its being damaged by welding spatter.
621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 4 of 4
395
Claudius Peters
Fabric for
Aeration Elements
Description
621.0009.0022A/10.en
396
Contents
1 Polyester fabric ..................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Changing the fabric ............................................................................................................... 3
2 Meta – and Para –Aramide fabric ......................................................................................... 4
2.1 Characteristics of fabric......................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Changing the fabric ............................................................................................................... 4
3 Sealing compound ................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 Chemical characterization..................................................................................................... 5
4 Protecting the Fabric During Welding ................................................................................... 5
621.0009.0022A/10.en
Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 2 of 5
397
1 Polyester fabric
The aeration elements are regularly equipped with Polyester fabric.
Characteristics of fabric:
• smooth surface
• high temperature resistance up to 150 °C
• high tearing resistance in direction of warp
• it does not rot
1.1 Changing the fabric

After removing of the old fabric and the remains of the sealing compound, the new fabric can be fitted. When
doing this, the following points should be observed:
• All sealing surfaces which come into contact with the fabric have to be covered with a sealing compound
(e. g. „ highpressure Fermit brown", see paragraph 3).
• The fabric should be stretched during fitting (maximum 2%).
• Cut edges should be sealed with a soft flame. If the welding has been done properly, the cut edges will
have a lightbrown colour.
• In case of other aeration elements it is sufficient to drill the fixing holes to a dia of 8 mm.
621.0009.0022A/10.en
Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 3 of 5
398
2 Meta – and Para –Aramide fabric
Meta-Aramide fabric will be used for temperatures of up to 200°C, and Para-Aramid fabric for temperatures
of up to 250°C.
The air permeability corresponds to the one of the Polyester fabric.
2.1 Characteristics of fabric
• smooth surface
• high temperature resistance
• high solidity
• it does not rot
• free of asbestos
2.2 Changing the fabric

As soon as the old fabric and the remains of the sealing compound have been removed, the new fabric can
be fitted. When doing so, the following points should be observed:
• All sealing surfaces which come into contact with the fabric have to be covered with a sealing compound
(e. g. high-pressure Fermit "brown", see paragraph 3).
• The cutting edges of the fabric have also to be covered/glued with the sealing compound.
• The fabric should be stretched during fitting (max. 2%).
• The fixing holes should be drilled out to a dia. of 8 mm.
621.0009.0022A/10.en
Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 4 of 5
399
3 Sealing compound
A sealing compound which is also suitable for sealing of threads, flanges and surfaces of highpressure
plants, turbine housings, etc. is to be used.
3.1 Chemical characterization

The sealing compound consists of mineral oil, abiettic acid and chalk.
Characteristics
• ointment like
• heat and highpressure resistant
• non-drying
• poisonless
4 Protecting the Fabric During Welding

In the event of subsequent welding or burning of cut-outs in existing sheet metal bodies at the construction
site, e.g., installation of loose supports provided or subsequent installation of an observation hatch, the fabric
must be protected against spatter by carefully covering it with fireproof material.
621.0009.0022A/10.en
Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 5 of 5
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
Claudius Peters
Verteiler
Distributor
Distributeur
Distribuidor
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Dessin de Pieces de Rechange
Dibujo de Repuestos
660.0010.1020A/00.SV
01.06 CPTNOT1
415
Inhalt / Contents / Table des matières / Sumario
Verteiler
Distributor
Distributeur
Distribuidor ............................................................................................................................................ 3
Abbildungsverzeichnis / List of figures / Tables des illustration / Lista de Figuras

Abb. 01: Verteiler
Fig. 01: Distributor
Fig. 01: Distributeur
Fig. 01: Distribuidor................................................................................................................................. 3
Achtung! / Attention! / Attention! / Atención!
Bei Anfragen oder Bestellung bitte Auftrags-Nr., Nummer dieser Ersatzteilzeichnung, die gewünschten Pos.-
Nr. und deren Benennungen, sowie alle Angaben des Typschildes angeben.
In case of enquiries or orders, please indicate comission no., no. of this spare part drawing, the required
position nos. and their designations as well as all data stated on the nameplate.
Pour toutes les demandes de prix ou des commandes veuillez indiquer le n° de la commande, le n° du
dessin de pièce de rechange, les positions souhaitées et leurs désignations ainsi que toutes les données de
la plaque signalétique.
En caso de demandas o pedidos indiquen, por favor, el número de comisión, el número de este dibujo de
repuestos, el número de la posición requerida y su respectiva designación y todos los datos de la placa del
tipo.
01.06 CPTNOT1
660.0010.1020A/00.SV
Release 0: 29.11.2006
416
Abb. 01: Verteiler
Fig. 01: Distributor
Fig. 01: Distributeur
Fig. 01: Distribuidor
Verteiler
Distributor
Distributeur 01
Distribuidor
Pos. Benennung Designation Designation Denominacion
30* Gewebe Fabric Tissu Tejido

40* Drahtgewebe Wire Fabric Tissu Metallique Tele Metalica
100 Boden Bottom Fond Fondo
* = Verschleissteil / wear part / pièce d’ usure / pieza de desgaste

01.06 CPTNOT1
660.0010.1020A/00.SV
Release 0: 29.11.2006
417
418
CHAPTER 7.R.4
SILO MANHOLE SIZE 800X1000,

HORIZONTAL
419
420
421
422
CHAPTER 7.R.5
FLAT SHUT- OFF GATE
423
424
Claudius Peters
Flat shut-off gate H

Drive: HAND
412.0009.0014A/03.en
425
Contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Application............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Construction .......................................................................................................................... 3
3 Transport / Storage / Assembly ............................................................................................ 5
3.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Storage.................................................................................................................................. 5
3.3 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 5
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 5
5 Maintenance instructions ...................................................................................................... 6
5.1 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 6
5.2 Lubrication............................................................................................................................. 6
5.3 Trouble shooting ................................................................................................................... 6
List of figures
Fig. 1: Flat shut-off gate ................................................................................................................... 4
Annex
Dimension sheets:
412.0000.0014A/NN.ED
412.0000.0015A/NN.ED
Spare parts drawings:

412.0010.0014A/NN.SV
412.0010.0015A/NN.SV
Electric connection diagrams:

412.0017.0000A/NN.ED
412.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 2 of 6
426
These safety instructions are to be read and applied by every person dealing with the operation, mainte-
nance or repair of the flat shut-off gate .
The flat shut-off gate is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can be
certain risks if the flat shut-off gate is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the flat shut-off
gate is used for other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
Unauthorised reconstructions or modifications of the flat shut-off gate are prohibited.
Maintenance and repair work is to be effected by skilled personnel only.
2 Description
The flat shut-off gate serves as emergency stop valve for bulk goods and is installed below silos, bins etc.
For working load and temperature see type plate.
2.1 Application
The flat shut-off gate serves as an emergency shut-off device and should mainly be used for maintenance
and repair work at devices connected behind.
With the flat shut-off gate it is not possible to seal the conveying distance from overpressure.
Pressure sealing against ambient pressure max. 250 mbar

Operating temperature max. 200 °C
2.2 Construction
The slide plate (2) is led in a housing (1) through lateral supporting cams. The sealing against the adjacen-
cies is carried out by means of a stuffing box; the stuffing box packings (8) are arranged around the slide
plate.
The slide plate opens and closes through a spindle (3) and a spindle nut (5). The rotating movement of the
spindle is alternatively carried out through a handwheel (12) or through a chain wheel (13) with chain (14).
To the signaling of the final position can the flat shut-off gate with position switches are to be equipped.
412.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 3 of 6
427
Figure 1: Flat shut-off gate
412.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 4 of 6
428
3 Transport / Storage / Assembly
3.1 Transport
When lifting the flat shut-off gate ensure that the carrying capacity of the ropes is in accordance with the
weight of the flat shut-off gate. For lifting use the lifting lugs at the housing. For reasons of safety and in or-
der to avoid damages only the lifting lugs are to be used for transport.
3.2 Storage
The flat shut-off gate has to be stored in covered condition resp. in a dry place and in installation position.
Avoid damages e.g. by charging it or climbing on it.
3.3 Assembly
The flat shut-off gate is delivered with installed drive ready for assembly.
All flanges have to be dry and clean. Between all flanges to be connected install one sealing each which
corresponds to the size of the flanges.
The housing of the flat shut-off gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the connected
installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
4 Operation
The adjustment of the flat shut-off gate is carried out by means a handwheel or a chain wheel with chain.
412.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 5 of 6
429
5 Maintenance instructions
5.1 Maintenance
Maintenance work Intervals

Remove strong cakings from the spindle as required
5.2 Lubrication
Lubrication work Intervall

Spindle with lubricating grease (K2 K) to grease 6 months
5.3 Trouble shooting
Fault Cuse Repair

Dust leaves the stuffing box Stuffing box is not tight Increase the tension of the stuffing
box
Replace stuffing box packings, if
necessary
412.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 6 of 6
430
431
432
433
CHAPTER 7.R.6
ROTARY PISTON BLOWERS
434
CHAPTER 7.R.6.1
BLOWER
435
Aerzener Maschinenfabrik GmbH
Customer: Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

Customer project no: 02-1/155478/572
Customer group no: 0180 0010
Customer tag no. : 25.1-05c
Order no. : 61-235536-00
Aerzen positive displacement blower GM 7L-G5
Performance data:
medium Air
volume handled at intake condition m³/min 5,31
density at intake condition kg/m³ 1,099
intake pressure (absolute) bar 1,011
discharge pressure (absolute) bar 1,511
pressure difference mbar 500
intake temperature °C 40
discharge temperature °C 99
blower speed 1/min 3440
motor speed 1/min 2945
power consumption at blower shaft kW 6,54
motor rating kW 11
Tolerances on volume (handled at intake conditions) and power consumption (at blower shaft) : ± 5%
Machine noise:
sound pressure level without hood approx. dB(A) 89
sound pressure level with hood approx. dB(A) 68
measured in the free field in 1 m distance from the outline of
the unit (tol. +/- 2 dB(A)), in accordance with DIN 45 635.
Scope of delivery ( x = included)

Aerzener compact blower-unit X
motor X
acoustic hood, indoor X
pressure gauge X
maintenance indicator for filter control X
speed control X
.....................
.....................
436

Customer tag no. : 25.1-05a
Order no. : 61-235536-06
Performance data:
medium Air
volume handled at intake condition m³/min 28
motor rating kW 37
Machine noise:

motor X
pressure gauge X
speed control X
.....................
.....................
437

Customer tag no. : 25.1-05b
Order no. : 61-235536-07
Performance data:
medium Air
volume handled at intake condition m³/min 28
motor rating kW 37
Machine noise:

motor X
pressure gauge X
speed control X
.....................
.....................
438
Operating and installation instructions
Positive displacement blower unit
english
G4-006 C EN
174 676 000 07-2006
439
english
Die INFO-Seite ist vor der Inbetriebnahme durchzulesen.

Dort evtl. vermerkte Hinweise und Änderungen sind durchzuführen.
Read the INFORMATION sheet prior to commissioning.

Possible notes and changes indicated herein are to be effected.
La page INFO est à lire avant la mise en route.

Y apporter éventuellement des annotations et modifications.
De INFO-Bladzijde moet voor de inbedrijfname worden doorgelezen.

Daar eventueel opgeschreven aanwijzingen en modificaties moeten worden uitgevoerd.
Prima della messa in esercizio leggere la pagina INFO, ed eseguire eventuali

istruzioni o modifiche indicate.
Antes de proceder a la puesta en marcha, leer detenidamente la página informativa y

cumplir eventuales indicaciones y modificaciones indicadas en la misma.
440
english
C o n t e n t s
english 1 - 23
24
INFO - Seite
Information sheet
Page infos 25
Info bladzijde
Pagina
Informativa
/
Informazioni
I n h a l t
441
Contents Page
1. Suitability, general advice 1

2. Construction, function 2
3. Care to be taken before and during the operation 3
4. Inadmissible operation methods 4
5. Transport / Assembly 4-7
6. Commissioning 8
english
7. Admissible connecting frequencies of the drive motor 9

8. Shutdown 9
9. Operating of compressor units
9.1 - with frequency converter 9 -10
9.2 - with pole-changing motor 10
10. Attendance / Maintenance 10-19
10.1 Maintenance schedule 11
10.2 Inspection / -dates 11
10.3 Exchange of lubricants 12 - 14
10.4 Lube oil regulations 15
10.5 Lube oil quantities 16
10.6 Check pressure valve for functioning 16
10.7 V-belts - Installation / Exchange 17
10.8 Intake filter / starting strainer / maintenance 18
10.9 Overhauling / Failure chart 19
11. Accessories 20 - 22
12. Spare parts 23
13. Recycling 24
14. INFORMATION sheet 25
1. Suitability, general advice
The useful suitability of Positive Displacement Blower Units made by Aerzener is the oil-
free conveying and compressing of air, also of neutral gases in modified design.
In order to ensure an optimum operation, the technical suitability limits have to be

observed.
Intake temperature t1 stated in the order confirmation applies as ambient temperature

at place of installation.
Non-observance of the technical application limits and safety regulations releases the
Aerzener Maschinenfabrik from warranty and liability regarding replacement for
consequential damages. The same applies for defects caused by inspections carried
out not in time or not properly.
1
442
2. Construction, function
Unit:
The standard unit is delivered with mounted accessories ready to operate.
The following steps are to be effected in addition:
Ü Connect the conveying piping.
Ü Fill with lube oil, check oil level and adjust if necessary
Ü Install the electrical connection.
Ü Mount the special accessories delivered separately - if there are any.
Service package:
Every unit is supplied with a service package. It includes auxiliary equipment and
material for aligning, filling with oil and lifting the hinged motor mounting plate.
english
Generation 5 / initial operating oil quantity:
Fifth-generation series units with acoustic hood are supplied with an initial operating oil
quantity. The lubricating oil is contained in suitable containers and stored inside the acoustic
hood. Please take note of the machine-type specifications on the lubricating oil container.
The oil for initial filling corresponds precisely to the oil quantity required for the blower. This
means that the oil container may not be completely full. Pleas observe the machines oil
filling quantity and check the oil level markings on the gauge glass.
Please retain the lubricating oil container until the first oil change is made and use it as
catching and collecting container for the waste oil.
Motor connection:
The electrical installation has to be effected by an authorized electrical fitter.
The terminal diagram for the motor can be found in the cover of the terminal box
as well as in the accompanying documentation.
The motor- and control voltage is to be connected to a common network,
where the sealing-in of the power contactor is cancelled in case of an interruption
of circuit.
Alternative: Parallel to the driving motor an electronic monitoring relay is to be
installed which cancels the sealing-in of the power contactor in case of an
interruption of circuit.
Base support:
A torsion-stable, cylindrical container serving as absorption-free discharge silencer as
well as installation basis for blowers with intake silencer, belt drive, belt guard, hinged
motor support and connection casing. The base support rests on flexible machinery
mountings and is to be placed on an even, slope-free underground.
Filter silencer:
This silencer is a combination of intake-sided silencer and intake filter.
The filter element is to be replaced at intervals speciefied in the operating manual.
Connection casing:
The connecting casing consists of a non-return flap that prevents the blower from running
in reverse after shutdown.
Additionally, a start-up relief can be mounted on the connecting casing.
Also a pressure relief valve to suit the size of the blower is mounted on this casing to
protect the blower against overload.
The discharge-sided piping is to be connected to the casing via a flexible sleeve or via a
compensator.
Accessories: please refer to chapter 11.

Three-lobe rotary pistons. Pulsation decrease by interference (patented).
The conveying chamber (cylinder) is sealed against the oil chambers (casing cover and
gear case) by piston ring labyrinth sealings and the driving shaft is sealed by a radial
seal ring.
In case the oil level is too high, oil can penetrate into the conveying chamber in an
uncontrolled way.
Compression heat arises upon the compression procedure. The heat is partly released
via the outer surfaces of blower and conveying pipings to the ambient air. Outer surfaces
and conveying pipings reach temperatures which may burn the unprotected skin.
2
443
3. Precautions prior to and during operation
ATTENTION! Draws the attention to all dangerous situations.
WARNING! Points to direct risks of persons.
Upon receipt the blower is to be checked for damages during transport and
completeness by means of delivery note and order.
Work safety rules, safety regulations as well as the operating instructions,

english
are to be observed.
Read the INFORMATION sheet prior to commissioning. Possible notes and
changes indicated herein are to be effected.
The following described tasks are only to be carried out by experts who are familiar with
the functions of the blower unit and its components as well as with the safety
regulations to be kept.
This positive displacement blower meets the European regulations for accident
prevention. Nevertheless, a residual technical risk remains, with a possibility of
endangering persons and property. To avoid this, operators have to comply with the
following safety regulations:
Read first,
then operate! Ü In case of acoustic hood operation the respective elements are to be locked by
means of theprovided male triangular wrench and may only be opened when the motor is
currentless and the fuses are removed or switched off.
ÜThere is the danger of sustaining injury if the acoustic hood is opened while the
blower is operating! Free-running fan! Open belt drive!
Ü Do not carry out any improper repair or modification work at the blower. In case of
problems contact the Aerzen after-sales service!
Ü Operators must be skilled, introduced to their job and instructed!
Ü Prior to commissioning, operators must be familiar with the protection-, operating- and
monitoring elements by means of these instructions.
Ü Use the machine in accordance with its suitability, keep its performance limits.
Ü Remove solids, liquids and powdery substances from the intake range.
Ü Safety appliances, such as e.g. belt guard, in case of acoustic hood design hand
protection and hood element, motor guard / Emergency-OFF etc. must not be
removed while machine is running. Risk of injury !
Ü Ensure that the motor is currentless upon working at the unit.
Ü Do not operate when electrical connections, belt guard and pressure valve are
defective or missing.
Ü No operation with open intake- or pressure socket / blower stage, as: positive
displacement machines are forced conveying machines with risk of injury in the range
of conveying chamber.
Ü Risk of burns!
In case of opened or non-existing acoustic hood wear safety gloves when the blower
surface is at operation temperature!
Ü Use ear protection in case of blower operation !
Due to the respective operating condition, the sound pressure level can deviate from
the mentioned operating data. Therefore a sound pressure level higher than 85 dB(A)
can be possible at short notice.
Ü Upon oil change pay attention to the oil temperature.The oil temperature must not exceed
60 °C. Risk of combustion at oil temperature exceeding 60 °C !
Ü Only tools that correspond to the standard and design of the bolts, nuts and fittings must
be used.
Ü Danger of poisoning by inhalation and risk of causticization by touching when
using cleaning agents and sprays.
Ü Follow manufacturers instructions as well as applicable regulations!
3
444
4. INADMISSIBLE OPERATION METHODS
Ü Wrong direction of rotation.
Ü Switching-on - during run-down.
- upon rotating in reverse direction.
Ü Inadmissible pressure increase.
Ü Remaining under or exceeding the limit speed.
Ü Exceeding the limit-discharge temperature / please also refer name plate.
Ü Pole-changing to lower speed prior to standstill of the motor.
Ü Operation without oil filling.
english
ÜPositioning on slanting or uneven foundation.
5. Transport / Assembly
During transport of the blower unit the following points must be always observed:
Ü The hinged motor support must be always locked by means of the transport locking
screw / refer to page 10.7. Remove the V-belts from the pulleys.
Ü Protect the blower unit from impacts.
ÜPrior to transport the cover plate is to be removed from the acoustic hood, if it has not
been included separately.
It must be properly reinstalled after the unit has been set up.
Ü The unit is to be transported by means of crane, high-lift truck, elevating truck or
similar.
Ü Lift the unit only according to sketch.
Concerning units without acoustic hood, transport is effected by application of the
transport devices at three resp. four eyelets (hinged motor support / base frame) / or
below the transport lugs.
4
445
Upon assembly the following points are to be observed:
Ü Upon dispatch Positive Displacement machines are preserved for 12 months and packed
accordingly. Upon a storage for more than 12 months, the preservation is to be repeated,
observe TN0 1175.
Ü During storage pay atttention to proper preservation, packing and if necessary
nitrogen filling, according to TN0 1175. Test interval every 6 weeks.
Negative influences are to be removed immediately to guarantee a continuous preservation.
Ü Intermediate storage in dry, clean and vibrationless rooms.
Ü During storage relieve the V-belts.
Ü In case of shutdown for more than 6 weeks, preserve conveying chamber, pistons and
polished parts.
english
Ü Place unit on even, vibrationless and slope-free ground. Alignment is carried out with a
spirit level included in the service package. The unit is to be set up level and adjusted
with shims if necessary. The fault in the aligment determines the operating safety of
the unit.
ATTENTION! A unit that is unevenly set up can, as a result of an undefined oil
level, cause a complete breakdown of the machine.
Depending on the foundation, it is recommended that the unit is properly secured at
the 4 drill holes with dowels and retaining bolts.
In case of units without acoustic hoods one anchor bolt per machine foot is sufficient.
³DN 150
Ü Remove the packing material completely. In case of acoustic hood design ensure free
section of the inlet- and exhaust silencer.
ÜInstall exhaust air baffle.
ÜInstall exhaust air damping strip on the exhaust air channel.
Alignment from DN
150
max.
Ü From Ab DN 150 the correct alignment is determined by the initial operating oil quantity.
min. Therefore, the unit is to be aligned in such a manner that, after the oil quantity
specified by the factory has been filled, the oil level corresponds with the marking on
the gauge glass.
5
446
english
View from bottom View from bottom
Installation of baffle plates ³ DN 200 Installation of baffle plates DN 150
Ü Ensure sufficient aeration and ventilation at place of assembly / inlet- and exhaust air.
The following standard installation conditions have to be adhered to:
Ambient temperature : -10°C to 40°C
Rel. air humidity : 0% to 80%
Chemical-free atmosphere
Ü Check the blower for smooth running / tight running may be the consequence of
distortion or foreign particles.
Ü In case of air conveyance remove the plastic plugs from the condensate drillings.
This may lead to a slight air flow to the outside, flushing the condensate drillings.
90 S - 1080 L
Ü In view to conveyance of "Technical Gases" the condensate drillings are closed. If

theconveying medium tends to develop condensate built-up, the condensate can be
drained depending on the operation case, e.g. by means of storage tanks, residual
gas pipings or by short-term opening of the lower drillings.
Ü In order to avoid electrostatic supercharging of the units, motor, acoustic hood and
base frame are to be earthed via the provided connections.
Ü Fix piping separately, so that stable connection can be established. Connection via
flexible connection compensator.
6
447
Motor connection
Ü Connect electric motor. For technical details, refer to the name plate or the
operating manual. Please observe instructions in the operating manual for the
motor enclosed separately!
The connection shall only be carried out by authorized electricians.
Install connection cable for electric motor in such a way that no damages may occur
by movements of the hinged motor support. Refer instructions G4-036... .
Ü In case of design with acoustic hood and depending on unit size and output it may be
necessary to remove the intake console and the acoustic hood cover to connect the
motor.
english
Ü All valid regulations for connecting the motor are to be observed by the electrician.
Ü EN 60204-1 is to be observed!
Ü All connections are to be secured against loosening.
Ü The connecting hardware must be suitable for the cross-section and the type of the
connecting leads.
Ü Cables, leads and connections must not be subjected to excessive bending and
pulling forces.
Ü The connecting cables are to be installed via a stayed cable bridge, to prevent the
terminal box from being subjected to forces or stress.
Ü Cables and leads must be installed in such a way that no external damage can
occur.
Ü Contact with the machine, excessive friction and radiating heat should be avoided.
Ü The cable and lead sheathing must be resistant to normal wear which is to be
expected due to the movement of the hinged motor support plate and the effects of
contaminants in the atmosphere.
Ü The motor is to be installed in such a manner that adequate cooling is assured.
Ü Fine-core cable is recommended for the connecting leads.
VDE 0298
Kabel cable Kunststoffkabel

plastic-instulated cable
Uo = 0,6 kV Uo > 0,6 kV

einadrig single-core 15 x d 15 x d
mehradrig multi-core 12 x d 15 x d
Motor connection
Layout of connecting cables
Ü In case of motor- and belt drive assembly provided by the

customer the marked dimensions (X) have to be adhered to
according to Aerzen general tables. Only then, an optimum
design of the drive unit can be guaranteed.
Ü Noise prevention is to be taken into consideration! Pipings
and foundations can be incited to self-vibrations with sound
release.
Ü Ensure that in case of unit planning the safety instructions and
the technical documents of the component suppliers are observed.
Ü Prior to commissioning check oil level and adjust if necessary.
7
448
Preparation
6. Commissioning
The blower unit is installed in accordance with chapter 5 of these instructions.
Þ
Prior to initial commissioning: Oil level gauge glass design
Check lube oil level and adjust if necessary / refer to chapter 10.3 - 10.5 without acoustic hood /
blower stage
Check oil filling screw and drain valve for tight fit and proper sealing.
Observe commissioning instructions and lubrication intervals of
drive motor manufacturer !
Depending on design, cut off rubber nipple on top of the pressure gauges (if existing) or
english
turn deaeration bracket to OPEN.
Set maintenance indicator on "ZERO".
Attention! Prior to commissioning: Check acoustic hood ventilation fan for free
and smooth movement fan.
If necessary, the blower cover is to be readjusted, to guarantee contactless
running!
Þ
Check direction of rotation. Oil level gauge
Also refer to red direction of rotation shield on the blower. glass on the
acoustic hood
No V-belts must be placed on the motor disc.
Remove axial locking screw, if installed, between pulley and motor casing.
Start driving motor for a short time (approx.1 to 2 seconds).
Please also refer to the instructions of the supplier of electric components
resp. of the plant manufacturer.
ATTENTION ! Incorrect direction of rotation during operation will destroy blower.
Upon looking on the driving shaft the blower rotates anticlockwise.
Direction of rotation of drive motor and blower must be equal.
Þ
In case of correct direction of rotation the following tasks are to be effected:
Acoustic hood ventilation fan
Remove transport locking screw of the hinged motor support / refer to 10.7.
Check alignment of the pulleys.
Lift hinged motor support by means of hydraulic jack.
Put on V-belts (refer to chapter 10.7).The V-belts are tensioned by the motor weight.
Close openings for motor driving shaft in belt guard with pre-mounted,
movable protection covers.
Slide protection covers up to max. 2 cm to motor driving shaft and secure.
Þ
Connect pipings with unit ready to operate,
stickers concerning safety instructions must be legible and safety devices Direction of rotation
are to be inspected.
Open slide valves available at the unit. Operation can start.
Þ
Switch on drive motor! Startup
Switch off after approx. 20 seconds and verify the smooth run-down of the blower.
Þ
Should pressure valve blow off, switch off immediately and remove cause of failure.
Þ
Then, switch on again and check EMERGENCY-OFF switch!
Þ
Now the unit is ready to operate! Operation
8
449
7. Admissible connecting frequencies of the
drive motors
To 160 kW = 6 starts per hour
From 200 kW = 3 cold starts or 2 warm starts
Ü For further indications and advice, please refer to the documentation of the
motor manufacturer.
Ü Please also refer to chapter 2, motor connection.
english
8. Shutdown
Shutdown:
By means of the power switch of the motor. Following standstill of the blower, withdraw
Shutdown fuses. Ensure that the slide valves in the pipings are closed. Preserve the conveying
chamber if standstill lasts longer than 6 weeks. Rotate the blower regularly by hand,
in order to prevent damages which may arise from standstill.
In case of danger:
Press EMERGENCY-OFF button.
For details please refer to the instructions of the supplier of electric components resp. of
the plant manufacturer.
9. Operation of compressor units

9.1 with frequency converter
The following has to be taken into consideration:

Ü In case the frequency converter is provided by others the electrical and
mechanical characteristics of the driving motor are to be taken into account.
Ü The minimum frequency must always be set in a fixed manner.
Upon operation this frequency must not be remained under.
Ü The maximum frequency must be set under consideration of the maximum
motor speed and the maximum blower- / compressor speed.
Ü The run-up time of driving motor from standstill up to minimum speed may be 3 to 6
seconds.
Ü The frequency converter must be designed for operation of a work machine with
constant load moment.
Min.- or max. speeds are not to be remained under or exceeded.
9
450
Ü The highest admissible voltage increase speed of the motor converter is
1200 V/ms. When exceeding the value, e.g. due to too long cables, frequency
converter make etc. a motor throttle / motor filter coil corresponding to the frequency
converter is to be applied. A renunciation of these component parts may lead to a
damage of the motor isolation and to a motor breakdown.
Ü The max. speed regulation speed on Positive Displacement blowers /Screw
compressors after run-up to min. speed for regulation time upward and downward is
1 Hz per second.
Min.-frequency = 20 Hz // Max.-frequency = 50 Hz results in a regulation time from
min. to max. of 30 seconds.
Ü The max. current limit of the motor must not be exceeded.
english
Observe the details on the motor name plate.
Ü In order to avoid operational failures the function "flying restart circuit" must not be
parameterized in the control of the frequency converter. Upon shutdown of the
frequency converter a re-start is only permitted following complete standstill of
blower resp. compressor.
9.2 with pole-changing motor
The following has to be taken into consideration:

Ü Between a change of motor speed
- from high to low speed the motor must have reached each time
speed zero.
- from low to high speed switching can be effected directly, undelayed.
10. Attendance / Maintenance

The attendance / maintenance consists of the following points:
Inspection - Pressure valve test - Exchange of lubricants - Lube
oil regulations - Exchange of V-belts - Intake filter maintenance -
Attendance
In case of questions, please refer to the Aerzen after-sales service.
Please state the following in your queries:

Ü Order- and serial numbers.
Ü Describe arisen failures / malfunctions as detailed as possible.
Ü Steps taken so far to remove the failures.
Is the blower sent back to the supplier, the following measures are to be carried out:
Ü Drain the oil, otherwise it is a transport of hazardous goods.
Ü Provide unpolished parts with a preservation oil.
Ü Close blower flanges by means of blind covers.
10
451
10.1 Maintenance schedule
Whenever carrying out work on the blower, it must be switched off, to prevent injury and damage! To gaurantee long
service life and optimum operating conditions, the maintenance work listed in the following table must be carried out
at the specified intervals.
Maintenance intervals
We recommend carrying out maintenance on the blower at
After each 1000 Oh
After each 4000 Oh
After each 8000 Oh
After each 20000

or after 3 years
the intervals specified below. The operating hours refer to
- 1/2 yearly in clean
- monthly in dusty
or 1/2 yearly
After the first
After the first
first 500 Oh
normal operating conditions. Other intervals could apply
environment
environment
or yearly
After the
Weekly
25 Oh
depending on environmental conditions. In this case please
3 Oh
Oh
consult Aerzener Maschinenfabrik.
english
Retaining screws and fittings

- re-tighten after machine has cooled l
Starting strainer, if installed
- check; if no more contaminant it can be removed l
Intake filter
- check filter contaminaton, replace if necessary,
max. -45 mbar
l
- replace filter insert l
Air intake openings
- check on acoustic hood and clean l
V-belt condition
- check, replace if necessary l l l l
V-belt pulley alignment
- check, adjust if required l l l l l
Pressure valve
- check for freedom of movement l l
Oil level
- check l l l
Lubricating oil
- exchange
*at end temperatures of above 120° C
l l* l
grease
Only for gastight shaft seal,
- exchange
*at end temperatures of above 120° C
l l* l
Non-return valve
- check for wear and tightness l
Main inspection / maintenance
- replacing wearing parts
- check complete machine l
Drive motor
- carry out maintenance - observe maintenance intervals and specifications of motor manufacturer!
- observe grease replacement intervals - in cas of Aerzener motors observe additional information!
Have the blower checked by Aerzener service at the specified intervals or yearly. Or: Take out a
maintenance contract with Aerzener Maschinenfabrik. Through regular and proper maintenance
Aerzener Machinenfabrik gaurantees maximum safety for your operation.
10.2 Inspection / - dates

After 3 years or 20,000 operating hours we recommend a general inspection at site by an Aerzen
technician. On this occasion a preventive overhauling of wearing parts, such as bearings, sealings or
similar is effected. We recommend to keep wearing parts on stock, in order to avoid waiting times and
non-productive times in case of failures.
11
452
10.3 Exchange of lubricants
In case of gastight design depending on type of sealing
Weekly - Check oil level in the oiler, if necessary - refill the oiler.
Yearly - Provide shaft sealing with roller bearing grease / some operating hours
before oil change, so that the surplus of grease is flushed out.
english
At gastight design depending on the sealing method
Example Weekly
- oiler Check level in the
- grease lubricating oiler refill oil, if
bush necessary
- lubricating nipple
Lubricating grease, when using the
*
oil types acc. to oil specification, point 1 and 2,
>> except polyglycol oils <<
KHC-2P-30
Shaft sealing with Filling at works Re-lubrication
KLÜBER PETAMO GHY 133 N
roller bearing grease GM 3S - 30L
lubricate again / Lubricating grease, » 5 cm³
several operating when using of polyglycol oils, point 3
MPG2K-40 GM 35S - 130L
hours prior to oil KLÜBER SYNTHESO PROBA 270
change so that the » 10 cm³
excess grease is lA mixing of different greases is to GM 150S - 400L
be avoided.
flushed lA re-lubrication is admissible only » 20 cm³
with the same grease.
lIf these greases are not available,
they are to be removed completely and
to be replaced for other greases acc. to
KHC-2P-30 resp. MPG2K-40.
lNote sealing consistency with Viton.
12
453
Filling with oil / design with acoustic hood
Ü Drainage valves must be closed / check for proper seating.
Ü Open oil reservoir.
Ü Please note that the bleed lines for the oil system end at the oil filling container.
This line, dependent on the level in the oil reservoir, must not be closed.
Ü Fill oil with a suitable funnel. Please ensure that the oil has a temperature of
at least 20°C.
The filling process should be carried out in stages.
First fill with approximately ¾ of the specified oil quantity.
After a suitable interval, approximately 5 10 minutes, the oil level in the system
adjusts itself.
english
The oil level is now to be checked and adjusted in line with the markings on the sight
glass. Correct oil level is between the minimum and maximum indicators.
Ü The oil level is to be checked after the first 3 operating hours and adjusted if necessary.
ÜThe oil level can be checked while the blower is operating.
max.
Open oil tank
Fill oil tank
min.
Oil level sight glass / filling with oil / with acoustic hood
Filling with oil / design without acoustic hood

Ü Drainage valves must be closed / check for proper seating.
Ü Open oil reservoir.
Ü The specified oil quantity is to be divided between both oil chambers according to the oil
level indicator.
Ü Fill oil with a suitable funnel. Please ensure that the oil has a temperature of at least
20° C. The filling process should be carried out in stages.
First fill with approximately ¾ of the specified oil quantity.
After a suitable interval, the oil level in the system adjusts itself.
The oil level is now to be checked and adjusted in line with the markings on the sight
glass. Correct oil level is between the minimum and maximum indicators.
Ü The oil level is to be checked after the first 3 operating hours and adjusted if necessary.
Oil level too high,

Oil in the
conveaing chamber
GM 3S - GM 80L GM 90S - GM 400 L

a - Measuring device Oil level too low,
connectioon mechanical
b - Oil filling Oil level at damage to bearings
c - Oil dranage / machine standstill and gear wheel
drain valvel
d - Oil level
Oil level sight glass / filling with oil at the blower stage / without acoustic hood
13
454
Draining the oil
The initial operating oil container can be used as collecting container.

The waste oil can be properly collected in this container and disposed of in an
environmentally-friendly manner at an appropriated collecting station.
Please observe capacity.
a) b) Screw the cap (1), threaded plug (1) off the drain valve.
If the cap (1), threaded plug (1), is too tight, hold the valve tightly with an open-
jaw wrench and loosen position (1) with a second wrench.
english
a) Screw on the hose, which is supplied.
a) The drain valve opens automatically.
a) Position the end of the hose in a catch pan.
b) Open hand valve, drain the old oil into a container.
a) b) The waste oil is to be properly disposed off.
a) Remove the hose from the drain valve
b) Close manual valve, screw in threaded plug (1) while gripping the valve.
a) Screw cap (1) hand-tight onto drain valve.
a) b) If the drain valve loosens itself in the thread, it must be replaced together with a
new seal.
1
Example a) b)
Design without acoustic hood

c - Oil drain / drain valve
Example a)
Design with acoustic hood

c - Oil drain / drain valv
14
455
10.4 Lube oil regulations for "Standard"
Positive Displacement blowers
Requirements to lube oil characteristics

l Kinematic viscosity at 100°C at least 13 cSt (mm²/s).
l Kinematic viscosity at 100°C at least 28 cSt (mm²/s), only applicable for item 3.
l Kinematic viscosity at -10°C <= 3500 cSt (mm²/s).
l Oil additives, with the following minimum characteristics:
- EP wearing protection additives for use in anti-friction bearing gearboxes
- oxidation stability up to 110°C, at item 3 from 110°C up to 220°C oil temperature
- foam suppression agent
english
- Detergents for loosening of deposits

- Neutrality compared to sealing materials made of Viton (Fluorine-Propylene-Methyl)
- Neutrality compared to single-package-synthetic resin primer
1. One- or two-shift operation / intermittent service

application conditions - intake temperature up to 60°C
- discharge temperature up to 140°C
- ambient temperatures which may remain under 10°C .
Ü 5W-40 / full-synthetic high-performance light motor oil, as per oil specification
- API CF or higher - ACEA B3 / E3 or higher
Example Aerzen Special oil Order No. 160 754 or 160 755
2. Continuous operation 24 hours / day

application conditions - intake temperature up to 60°C
- discharge temperature up to 140°C
- ambient temperatures above 10°C all the year round
Ü 5W-40 see also item 1
Ü PAO gearbox oils / full-synthetic Poly-Alpha-Olefins
Example MOBIL SHC 629 / and as mentioned under item 1
3. Operation at continuous oil temperatures above 120°C

application conditions - continuous oil temperatures above 120°C
- at oil temperatures above 160°C the oil change intervals halve
Ü ISO VG 220 / synthetic lube oil with a basic oil type Polyglycol
Example ESSO Glycolube 220 ARAL Degol GS 220
4. Lube oils in foodstuff and pharmaceutic industry

Lube oils, approved acc. to USDA H1 can be used.
Example Klüberoil 4 UH1-100 application at conveying discharge temperatures up to 100°C
Klüberoil 4 UH1-220 application at conveying discharge temperatures from 100°C up to 140°C
General
Ü In case of a change-over from one oil brand to another an oil change has to be carried out
after 24 operating hours.
Ü For filling or refilling the oil chambers, lube oil of the same brand and same type is to be
used only.
Ü All the oil brands can be used observing the specification.
15
456
10.5 Lube oil quantities
Oil quantities, without acoustic hood total approximate litres
(up to centre of gauge glass)
GM 3S 0,55 l GM 4S 0,55 l GM 7L 0,55 l
GM 10S 0,86 l GM 15L 0,86 l GM 25S 1,20 l
GM 30L 1,20 l GM 35S 3,00 l GM 50L 3,50 l
GM 60S 6,50 l GM 80L 6,50 l GM 90S 11,50 l
GM 130L 11,50 l GM 150S 11,00 l GM 220L 11,00 l
GM 240S 17,50 l GM 315L 17,50 l GM 400L 22,00 l
english
Oil quantities, with acoustic hood
Total in approximate litres (up to the markings on gauge glass on the acoustic hood)
GM 60S 7.50 l GM 80L 7.50 l GM 90S 12.50 l
GM 30L 1.75 l GM 35S 3.75 l GM 50L 4.50 l
GM 10S 1.40 l GM 15L 1.40 l GM 25S 1.75 l
GM 3S 0.55 l GM 4S 1.00 l GM 7L 1.00 l
10.6 Check pressure valve for functioning

Ü ATTENTION !
The valve is no control device and must also not be used as such.
Ü Please pay attention to the operating manual for the pressure valve G4-002... .
Ü The unit must be properly shut down before any kind of work is carried out on the
valve.
R2 // DN 50 // DN 80 // DN 125
Ü The mobility of the valve is to be checked during machine shutdown.
The valve bell is to be lifted with the aid of two screw drivers.
> The valve must open correctly.
DN 150 // DN 200 // DN 300

Ü The mobility of the valve is to be checked during machine shutdown.
´The valve is to be lifted by actuating the lever.
> The valve must open correctly.
Ü Afterwards the screw drivers are to be removed or the lifting device is to be

released.
--> An intact valve closes properly.
ÜThe valve can be used for temperatures up to 150°C.
DN 150 // DN 200 // DN 300 R2 // DN 50 // DN 80 // DN 125
16
457
10.7 V-belts - installation / - replacement
For all work necessary at belt drive, the machine is to be taken out of operation and
disconnected properly from the supply.
A starting / operation of the machine must be excluded.
Attention: At belt drive and hinged motor plate risk of shearing and squeezing!
Ü Open belt protection housing and / or acoustic hood.

Ü Dismount protection cover of compressor- resp. blower belt pulley, only in case of
design with acoustic hood.
Ü Protection cover / plastic plate of motor belt pulley to be dismantled, only in case of
english
design with acoustic hood.

Ü At first placement of belts the transport locking screws resp. the transport locking angle
are to be removed.
Ü Depending on machine size the hinged motor plate is to be lifted by hand or by
means of the supplied hydraulic jack kit until the belts can be placed upon resp.
exchanged.
Ü When replacing the V-belt on units with acoustic hoods the cover plate for the fan is to
be removed.
Ü During lifting the hinged motor plate is to be supported step-by-step, in order to avoid
possible accidents.
Ü The V-belts are to be replaced set by set.
Ü The hinged motor plate is to be completely lowered.
Ü The tension of the belt drive is effected automatically by the motor weight.
Ü Belt protection housing, cover plate for the fan and protection covers are to be mounted
properly and / or acoustic hood to be closed.
Ü Upon design with belt protection housing the distance between motor drive shaft
and plastic cover is 10 mm maximum.
Disassembly of various transport safety devices
Lifting of various hinged motor plates

ATTENTION! Support hinged motor plate upon lifting.
Motor shaft cover >, = DN 150

Fan cover
17
458
10.8 Intake filter / starting strainer maintenance
english
ðRemove the cap locks and then remove the maintenance cover.
ðLoosen filter element by turning left and remove.
ðReplace filter element.
ðInsert filter element and tighten by turning to the right, observe correct
position of insertion groove.
ðCorrectly install maintenance cover.
DN Øf m g

125 180 250 15
150 212 265 15
200 268 280 15
250 325 220 15
300 375 200 15
350 435 460 15
400 485 342 15
Starting strainer
Ü Upon intake from a closed piping system a starting strainer resp. a filter housing is to be
installed upstream of the compressor intake side. Depending on order it is included in scope
of supply. Therefore the machine is protected against contamination and torn foreign
particles in intake flow.
Ü The resistance of starting strainer / filter element, max. 45-50 mbar, is to be monitored and
not to be exceeded.
Ü If the strainer stays clean after approx. 500 operating hours, it can be dismantled and
replaced by the supplied adjusting ring.
Ü The filter element is to be checked resp. replaced according to corresponding indications
'intake filter' of maintenance plan.
18
459
10.9 Overhauling / chart of failures
Malfunction Possible cause Remedy
Abnormal running -Belt alignment -Measure and adjust - if

noise necessary
-Bearing damages -Exchange
-Rotary pistons contact each -Check clearance
other or in the conveying chamber adjustment/check for cracks
-Contaminated pistons -Clean them
english
-Foreign particles in gear wheels -Clean wheels

-Shaft deflection -Measure/exchange
Blower too hot -Intake filter contaminated -Clean/exchange
-Ambient temp. too high -Ensure sufficient room
ventilation inlet-/exhaust air
-Hood slots clogged, -Clean ventilating slots
ventilator defective repair ventilator
-Oil level or viscosity too high -Adjust / drain
-Rotary piston clearances too -Adjust / ask after-sales
large service
-Overloaded -Keep operating data
Oil in conveyed air -Oil chambers overfilled with oil -Drain, clean the conveying
chambers
Intake volume flow -Starting strainer / intake filter -Clean or replace it
too low contaminated
-Leaky piping -Seal it
-Incorrect dimensioning of -Compare with
blower performance diagram
-Piston wear -If necessary - replace
pistons
Excessive power -Operating data differ from order -Compare performance data
requirement of motor data with measured data
-Mechanical blower- or motor -Repair by manufacturer
damage
-Motor tensioning dropped -Adjust power, refer to
instructions motor
Side belt vibrations - V-belts worn -Inspect V-belt condition and
renew - if necessary
Blower runs in reverse - Non-return flap defective resp. -Replace it
direction after leaky
switching-off
Machine damaged, - Motor and control system are - Motor and control voltage are
due to incorrect power connected to two different to be connected to one
supply networks supply network
- Alternatively: installation of a
power monitoring
After each interference at the blower due to malfunction, the following is to be checked:
Ü Smooth running.
Ü Contactless rotation.
Ü Proper functioning.
In case of resistances, do not start blower !

After starting observe the blower thorougly !
19
460
11. Accessories
1. Acoustic hood for unit

2. Start-up unloading device
3. Maintenance indicator for monitoring of the filter contamination
4. Thermometer for indication of the discharge temperature
5. Pressure gauge for monitoring of the intake- and discharge pressure
6. Accessories for maintenance (V-belts, intake filter, oil etc.)
In addition to the standard delivery scope the a./m. accessories can be inquired of the Acoustic
Aerzen after-sales service where spare parts can also be ordered. The instructions for hood
english
special accessories in bold face are listed as follows. Pay attention to the notes of
possible separately delivered manuals of manufacturers of accessories.
Accessories no. 1: Acoustic hood

Ü The acoustic hood is made of powder-coated steel plate.
It is forced ventilated by a fan mounted at the blower shaft.
Acoustic hoods for units up to a nominal width of 250 are always delivered completely
assembled. For acoustic hoods in disassembled segmental design installation
manual G4-035... is available.
Ü Concerning all work at the acoustic hood the unit is set at standstill and the drive
is disconnected from the supply.
Ü The acoustic hood serves at the same time as belt guard.
Ü When the unit is running the breech blocks of the doors are to be locked by the
provided male triangular wrench. Then, check the correct locking. The wrench must be
kept at a safe place. Only authorized persons may have access.
Ü All maintenance work of the unit can only be effected at standstill of the machine after
opening of the acoustic hood doors.
Ü The hinges are to be re-lubricated periodically acc. to the installation conditions.
Ü In order to protect the units from electrostatic supercharging of the units, connect
earthing cables at the ground straps of the base frame and the acoustic hood.
Ü Ensure that the safety labels are fixed to the acoustic hood in a visible way.
Intake from a piping

Ü Regarding the intake from a piping the corresponding perforated sheets are to be
"cracked off" the acoustic hood element, the foamed material in the diameter of the
intake piping to be cut out and removed. Lead the connection piping through the
openings.
Accessories no. 2 : Start-up unloading device / AEROMAT

Ü The start-up unloading device is installed in units which are driven by electric motors
with star/delta drive. Therefore, blowers resp. compressors can start in an unloaded Start-up
condition against the consisting supply pressure. unloading
Ü Concerning drives with pole-changing motors a start-up unloading device with solenoid
device /
valve can be applied, in order to start also in higher speed in unloaded condition.
Ü For frequency converter drives a start-up unloading device is not necessary. general
Ü Following the setting the start-up unloading device works maintenance-free.
Ü Should the start-up unloading device not close after correct adjustment, the nozzle (5)
is to be cleaned by compressed air, please also refer to sectional drawing, page 17.
Attention!
The start-up unloading device does not serve for regulating the operating data !
If the start-up unloading device is within the acoustic hood, in case of machine stand-
still an adjustment is to be effected step by step. Furthermore, the drive motor is to be
started paying attention to the starting frequency, also control the closing time.
Due to safety reasons all adjusting work within the acoustic hood must only
be effected when the motor is switched off!
20
461
Start-up unloading device DN 50
Ü At DN 50 a solenoid valve offers the possibility to start in
Technical standard data:
open at zero current
unloaded condition .
220V - 240V Ü The closing time is determined by the voltage application. If
50 c/s voltage is applied to, the valve closes immediately.
IP 65 Ü Star-delta connection: The valve must close after the
8W change from star to delta only.
Ü Pole change: In case of Star-double-star start-up the
solenoid valve is to be connected so that it opens prior to
switchover to high speed and closes after high speed
DN 50 has been reached.
english
Start-up unloading device DN 80-400

l The necessary closing time is to be set as follows:
Ü In view to acoustic hoods the outlet silencer is to be disassembled depending on
the unit design.
Ü Upon delivery the maximum closing time is adjusted.
Ü The start-up unloading device may only completely close after switchover from star to
delta and after nominal speed has been reached.
Ü The closing process can be noticed by hearing and can also be seen due to the
discharge pressure gauge.
Ü If necessary change adjustment, in order to receive optimum closing time:
The closing time is to be set by loosening the counternut (10) and moving the
spindle (8):
- spindle (8) clockwise closing time is decreased
- spindle (8) anticlockwise closing time is increased
Following the adjustment, tighten counternut (10).
Ü Following the adjustment, all loosened and disassembled component parts are to be
fastened properly.
Pole-changing
Ü The start-up unloading device is to be set to operation with lower speed and acc.
to steps 1 - 5 in case of star/delta-drive.
Ü Closing time:
Regarding pole-changing motors the closing time is to be set in the lower speed
range as long as possible, so that in case of higher speed an acceptably long
closing period can be still obtained.
Ü If this is not possible due to the high conveying quantity, or is high speed started
from the low speed of the Star-double-star start-up, an additional solenoid valve is
used.
Ü The solenoid valve (9) keeps the start-up unloading device open at high speed in
case of direct run-up.
Ü In case of Star-double-star start-up the solenoid valve is connected so that it opens
prior to switchover to high speed and closes after high speed has been reached.
10
1 spring
2 blow-off opening
3 housing Technical standard data
4 protection grid close at zero current
5 hollow spindle with 230 V
nozzle 50 Hz
6 diaphragm IP 65
7 valve 8W
8 spindle <
9 solenoid valve
Example
10 counternut
21
462
Accessories no. 3: Maintenance indicator
Ü The cleaning intervals depend on the degree of contamination in the intake air.
Observe the maintenance plan!
Ü The maintenance indicator displays the degree of contamination of the intake filter.
Variation a)
Ü The contamination of the filter is displayed via the indicator of the

maintenance unit.
Ü At -45 mbar / red field the intake filter is to be replaced.
Ü After replacement of the filter the indicator is to be reset to its
english
starting position by pressing the reset button.
Variation b)
Ü The contamination of the filter element is indicated by the red trailing
pointer of the maintenace unit.
Ü The unit is to be set to zero prior to the first startup. To do this pull out
the front-side plug and then move the setting screw by means of a
screw driver.
Observe "+ and -" designation!
Ü The red trailing pointer is to be positioned between 0 to -10mbar prior
to commissioning and after each filter replacement.
Ü As contamination increases the red trailing pointer is pulled along by
the black pointer and remains on the maximum intake pressure.
Ü The filter element is to be replaced when the trailing pointer reaches
the red area on the scale.
Ü The red trailing pointer is to be positioned between 0 to -10mbar after
each filter change.
22
463
12. Overview of spare parts
Spare parts for blower sizes GM 3S up to GM 400L
First-rated parts
Are to be replaced at each disassembly and therefore
these parts must always be available.
The package includes: bearings, seal rings, bushing
sleeves, adjusting elements and repair instruction.
english
Second-rated parts
Are replaced at disassemblies depending on their condition.
They should also be available.The package includes:
gear wheels, fittingkeys, seal rings, oil level indicators,
nuts, bushes, retainers, oil splashers and oil throwers.
Third-rated parts
Are parts not normally associated with wear but could need
replacement following a major failure through misuse.
Spare parts and accessories

We expressly draw your attention to the fact that replacement parts and accessories not
supplied by us are not tested and approved by us. The integration or installation, as well
as the use of such products can, under certain circumstances, alter the original design
characteristics of the equipment. We exempt ourselves from any liability for damages
resulting from the use of parts and accessories not supplied by us.
23
464
13. Recycling / Disposal
Ü All waste products are to be disposed of or treated not harmful to the environment.
Ü Used lubricants are to be disposed of properly.
Ü Contaminated components and auxiliary material are to be packed and decontaminated.
Recycling Entsorgung
english
24
465
english
Gegenüber Darstellungen und Angaben dieser Betriebsanleitung sind technische Änderungen,

die zur Verbesserung der Kompressoren notwendig werden, vorbehalten.
This operating- and installation manual is subject to engineering changes necessary for the compressor advancement.
Nous nous réservons le droit dans les instructions de service procéder à toutes modifications techniques utiles visant à améliorer la qualité des compresseurs.
Wat de betrft de tekeningen en gegevens in deze bedienings- en opstellings-hanleiding verbetering van de schroefcompressor noodzakelijk worden, voorbehouden.
Nos reservamos el derecho de efectuar, frente a las representaciones e indicaciones de esta
instrucciones de montage servicio modificaciones técnicas necesarias para perfeccionar.
Rispetto all'illustrazione ed alle indicazioni di questa Istruzioni di Esercizio ci si riserva quelle modifiche tecniche che sono necessarie per migliorare i compressori.
466
467
Works Standard
Modification level:
Index A B C D E F
Sheet 2-3 cpl.
Date 16.06.03 14.06.04
Name Dörries Sagebiel
Index G H I K L M
Sheet
Date
Name
Index N O P Q R S
Sheet
Date
Name
Information
Dept. AS Dept. B Dept. M Dept. T Dept. V
Lotus Notes
training
EA G
workshop
changes
Issued: Dörries
Storage – and preservation regulations Date: 25th May 2004 TN01175

Sheet: 1 of 8 Index B
468
Works Standard
Contents:
Page
1. General 3
2. External preservation 3
3. Internal preservation 3
3.1 Filling of conveying chambers with nitrogen 4
4. Packing and storage 4
5. Preservation of spare parts 4
6. Measures of corrosion protection during storage 5
6.1 General 5
6.2 Damaged packing 5
6.3 Exceeding of storage period 5
6.4 Preservation after opening of packing 5
6.5 Steps to be taken prior to installation of the machine into a unit or a plant 6
6.6 Steps to be taken after installation of the machine into a unit
or a plant until commissioning 6
6.7 Steps to be taken prior to commissioning 6
7. Product specification for corrosion protection agents 6
8. Charts for preservation measures referring to the product 7
8.1 Blowers 7
8.2 Compressors 8
Issued: Dörries

469
Works Standard
1. General
Under preservation the treatment against corrosion is meant. It is applied for all Aerzen product ranges and
corresponding spare parts. We distinguish between
• External preservation and
• Internal preservation
The preservation refers to the external coating, the protection treatment of metallic polished parts as well as the
preservation of conveying- and oil chambers against corrosion.
The scope of the preservation measures depends on the storage period until commissioning, the bearing
conditions and special customer requests.
In tropical climates* a preservation and packing according to the local conditions is necessary.
Also in case of longer operation breaks (more than 6 months) special preservation measures are required for
Aerzen products. Spare part deliveries are also subject to a preservation at site.
Initial preservation is carried out in factory of manufacturer according to appropriate quality stipulations and based
on contractural agreements. Upon non-observation of the guidelines and measures included in the works standard
Aerzener Maschinenfabrik is liable for possible corrosion damages and resulting subsequent damages.
*climates and corresponding technical application, climate designations (DIN 50010)
2. External preservation
The standard finish of Aerzen machines consists of a corrosion protection primer on alkyd resin basis for metallic
undergrounds, especially for the industrial range in connection with alkyd resin cover coating. For the extended
corrosion protection a special finish is offered, based on a combination of a 2-component base-and intermediate
coating of epoxy resin – micaceous iron ore and a cover coating. Please also refer to information sheet for colour
paints A3-010. For the design of the external prevention the following Aerzen quality regulations do apply:
QH00402, QH00408, QH00510, QH00550.
All external metallic polished surfaces such as socket flanges, shaft journals and installation surfaces are provided
with corrosion protection agent TECTYL 506 EH .
3. Internal preservation
The conveying- and oil chambers of Aerzen products are preserved upon delivery according to application case.
For the corresponding preservation agents please refer to chart (chapter 8). If not stated differently the conveying
chamber is preserved by means of BIO CHEM Food Tech Oil, the oil chambers are provided with a preservation
oil ISO VG 100 (e.g. ESSO MZK LD30).
The BIO CHEM Food Tech Oil is biodegradable and does not harm the groundwater.
A standard preservation up to 12 months is sufficient provided a proper storage is ensured.
In case of longer storage periods a corresponding long-time preservation and special packing is provided as
indicated under point 6.3.
In general all Aerzen products are supplied without oil filling.
All connection orifices are sealed with plastic flap.
The internal preservation is determined in the corresponding inspection regulations of the products.
3.1 Filling of conveying chambers with nitrogen
Alternatively the machines can be filled with nitrogen. For this all orifices, such as intake- and pressure flanges and
the neutral chambers need to be closed.
The nitrogen pressure needs to be at approx. 0,5 bar and must be observed.
Issued: Dörries

470
Works Standard
4. Packing and storage
The preservation measures at site are designed for a limited period of time (up to 12 months) under special storage
conditions according to Aerzen quality regulations resp. customer’s request.
For the storage a dry, shock-proof and clean room is to be provided. Extreme temperature fluctuations and water
penetration (e.g. by rain) are to be avoided.
The machines must not be exposed to shock load. If a shock-free storage cannot be guaranteed, the rotors are to
be rotated 2 – 3 times every 6 – 8 weeks.
If the products are stored longer as agreed or under other conditions, additional measures are necessary, in order
to ensure a sufficient corrosion protection.
The efficiency of the preservation measures depends on packing, the storage conditions as well as storage period.
In order to prepare the necessary preservation measures the customer is asked to provide a climate specification.
If the customer requires a preservation for a longer period of time (more than 12 months), the machines, units,
accessories etc. are wrapped in VPI-paper and welded in PVC-foil.
In case of storage longer than 12 months and in case of storage in tropical climates, prior to welding the packing is
provided with drying agent (VPI-powder in gauze bags) in corresponding quantity as per climate zone. A high-
quality packing with sufficient drying agent as well as a storage in air-conditioned chambers with small air humidity
has positive effect on corrosion protection.
The design of packing is designed in Aerzen quality regulation QH00409.
5. Preservation of spare parts
All spare parts being supplied are provided with a preservation. Under normal conditions this preservation is
designed at site for a corrosion protection of 12 months.
• Upon storage of spare parts up to 1 year the parts are preserved with BIO-CHEM Food Tech Oil.
• Upon storage of spare parts up to 5 years the parts are preserved with TECTYL 506.
• In case of special preservation of spare parts being stored longer than 5 years the parts are preserved with
TECTYL 506, wrapped in VPI-paper and welded in PVC-foil. Prior to welding VPI-powder in gauze bags is
attached to the packing as drying agent. If no appropriate room is available resp. the period of storage
exceeds the indicated durability of preservation, the preservation is to be checked at corresponding
intervals (from beginning of the storage) and if necessary – it is to be renewed accordingly.
In case of appropriate storage places and storage period longer than 1 year, the preservation needs to be checked
in 2-months intervals.
The measures for preservation of spare parts refer to the required storage period. They are determined in Aerzen
quality regulations QH00441.
Issued: Dörries

471
Works Standard
6. Measures for corrosion protection during storage
6.1 General
The measures as described in the following paragraphs are to be understood as general guidelines for certain
events. In case of doubt we recommend to agree the measures with the Aerzener Maschinenfabrik.
If in the course of controls or maintenances corrosion damages are found, the nearest Aerzen service station is to
be informed.
6.2 Damaged packing
Through damaged packing humidity and detrimental environmental influences may act directly onto the product.
Due to temperature fluctuations humidity may penetrate to the inside of the machine more frequently.
Measures:
• Drying of the machine, if necessary
• Check and if necessary replacement of the applied quantity of drying agent
• Check and if necessary repair of the preservation of the polished points
• Repair or replacement of the packing. Remove old PVC sheeting and weld the machine again in PVC
sheeting of the same value together with drying agents.
• External check of the packing at regular intervals. Observe control intervals of the drying agents depending
on climatic zones.
6.3 Exceeding of storage period
If the machines are stored for a longer period than 12 months after delivery (standard), the preservation must be
repeated. After a storage period of more than 2 years at site the manufacturer generally should have an inspection
of the entire scope of supply carried out by the Aerzen specialized staff.
Measures:
• Preserving the conveying chamber by spraying through the intake socket of the machine with
corresponding preservation oil
• Preserving the oil chambers by spraying throught the oil supply and oil drain screws with corresponding
preservation oil or alternatively short-term filling and draining the oil chambers
• Preserving again the external polished surfaces
• Check of the plug caps on the connection orifices
• Check and restoration of the packing
6.4 Preservation after opening of packing
Immediately after opening the packing additional preservation measures become necessary, to guarantee a
sufficient corrosion protection for the product.
Measures:
• Check of the connection orifices. Plug caps must not be removed
• Protect the product as good as possible by suitable measures (chapter 4) against water and detrimental
environmental influences. If the machine is covered by tarpaulins, these are to be arranged if possible at a
certain distance to the machine.
• Check the preservation of the external polished surfaces
Issued: Dörries

472
Works Standard
6.5 Steps to be taken prior to installation of the machine into a unit or a plant
• Check of the intake- and discharge-sided connection orifices for possible damages
• Check of conveying chamber for possible damages
• Check of all connections/screwings for damage and function
• Check of all external polished surfaces for corrosion
6.6 Steps to be taken after installation of the machine into a unit or a plant until commissioning
• Purging of the intake- and discharge side of the machine

• Perhaps nitrogen filling of the conveying chambers after contacting the Aerzen After Sales Service
• Check preservation of conveying chamber and if necessary repeat this
• Preservation of oil chambers in case of longer operation stops
• In case of a standstill of more than 6 weeks the conveying chamber is to be preserved and the rotors are to
be turned manually, to avoid standstill damages
6.7 Steps to be taken prior to commissioning
Prior to commissioning of the machine it must be sure, that the preservations were removed. In case of non-
compatibility with the conveying medium the conveying chamber is washed with a degreasant and blown dry with
compressed air. Otherwise the conveying chamber does not need to be cleaned. During commissioning the
preservation oil is loosened by compression heat and thrown out.
The preservation oil can remain in the oil chambers. Without cleaning the chambers the corresponding oil, in
accordance with the operating manual, can be filled up.
• Information based on operating manual !

• Check conveying- and oil chambers for corrosion
• Remove purgings (intake- and discharge side) possibly installed
• Turn rotors manually
7. Product specification for corrosion protection agent
• TECTYL 506 EH, Fa. Valvoline, Hamburg, => preservation agent

• Valvoline 150, Fa. Valvoline, Hamburg, => Special solvent for TECTYL 506
• BIO CHEM Food Tech Oil, Fa. CB Chemie, Gütersloh, => corrosion protection oil
• BALLISTOL, Fa. F.W. Klever, Aham, => corrosion protection oil
• FOMBLIN YL-VAC 25/6, Fa. Solvay Solexis, Seligenstadt, => corrosion protection oil
• FOMBLIN Y 45, Fa. Solvay Solexis, Seligenstadt, =>corrosion protection oil
• BRANOGEL, Fa. Brangs & Heinrich, Hannover, => drying agent
• BRANOROST, Fa. Brangs & Heinrich, Hannover, => corrosion protection paper
• Motanol HV 100, Fa. ARAL, Bochum, => Vacuum pump oil
• HIGH TRONIC SAE 5W-40, Fa. ARAL, Bochum, => Lubricating oil
• MKZ LD 30, Fa. ESSO, Hamburg, => Lubricating oil
• RARUS 425, Fa. MOBIL, Hamburg, => Compressor oil
• REN ISO SYNTH 68, Fa. Fuchs DEA, Mannheim, => Refrigerator oil
Issued: Dörries

473
Works Standard
8. Charts for preservation measures referring to the product
8.1 Blowers (Gas meters)
GM... GR... Oxygen Oxygen Pre-inlet Vacuum- Oil- and Special

GL... GQ... blowers blowers blowers blowers grease free blowers
Preservation measure standard HV standard blowers
(variation
087)
External polished surfaces
x x x
TECTYL 506

x x
Fomblin YL-VAC 25/6

x
Fomblin Y 45

x
BIO CHEM Food Tech Oil
Internal preservation /
conveying chamber x x x
conveying chamber
Fomblin YL-VAC 25/6
Internal preservation
x
Nitrogen-filling
conveying chamber x x x x
None
Seal ring housing
x
ARAL Motanol HV 100
Oil chambers
x
ARAL Motanol HV 100
Oil chambers
x x x
ESSO MZK LD 30
Oil chambers
x x
Fomblin YL-VAC 25/6
Oil chambers
x
Fomblin Y 45
Preservation referring to the
x
order
Special
QP00001, QP00144 QP00209, QP00209 QP00192 QP00209 QP00209 test
Quality prescription
QP00276 QH00428 instructi
on
Issued: Dörries

474
Works Standard
8.2 Compressors
VM... VMX… VMY… VMY- VR… DELTA- Special

Preservation measure VMT... Process semiherm. Screw Compressors
refrigeration refrigeration

x x x x x
TECTYL 506
conveying chamber x x
conveying chamber x
ESSO MZK LD 30
Internal preservation / oil
chamber x x
ESSO MZK LD 30
conveying chamber x
MOBIL RARUS 425
conveying chamber x
None
Internal preservation
x x
Nitrogen-filling
Internal preservation / Oil
chambers
x
ARAL HIGH TRONIC SAE
5W-40
Oil chambers
x
FUCHS REN ISO SYNTH 68
Preservation referring to
x
the order
QP00179, Special test Special test
Quality prescription QP00092 QP00138 QH00541 QP00228
QP00228 instruction instruction
Issued: Dörries

475
INFO - SEITE
Information sheet
english
deutsch
476
477
478
479
480
CHAPTER 7.R.6.2
MOTOR
481
TECHNICAL DATA of Aerzen code number motors sheet 7 / 30
pole number 2
code number Aerzen 172 781 000
identification number manufacturer
motor make: Aerzener
motor type: EFF 1
motor frame size: 160M
rated power: kW 11,0 12,5
rated voltage: V 400 / 690 460
frequency: Hz 50 60
limit performances at frequency converter
operation (1/3) at 50 Hz kW 8,62 9,77
motor rated speed nN: min-1 2945 3545
rated current at 400 V: A 19,94 19,91
starting current / rated current: (Factor) 8,3 8,3
rush current / rated current
(Factor)
(Inrush current factor) 8,3 8,3
efficiency eta: % 90,6 90,7
power factor cos phi: cos phi 0,88 0,87
rated torque: Nm 35,7 33,6
starting torque / rated torque: (Factor) 2,6 2,8
stall torque / rated torque: (Factor) 3,1 3,3
moment of inertia: kgm2 0,0471 0,0471
admissible axial lateral load (acc. to works standard
TN01159) : 2200 2200
intake air quantity of motor fan: 0,25 0,30
motor guard: by 3 PTC thermistors
starting: star delta / direct or frequency inverter
degree of protection: IP 55
ISO classification: "F"
weight of motor: kg 104
housing type of construction: B3
position of terminal box: on top
cable entry: from fan side
cable glands: 2 x M 40 x 1,5 + 1 x M 20
cable diameter max.: mm depends on cable glands
size of terminal box: 180 x 154 x 90
connection bolt(s): Thread M6 x 1,0
bearing:
bearing type: AS: 6309-C3, BS: 6209-Z-C3
bearing manufacturer: SKF, FAG, NSK
pre-lubrication device: at drive- and fan side
lubricating nipple design: DIN 71412 cone
pre-lubrication period: at 50 c/s / 40°C ambient temperature max.
lubrication quantity: cm3
1cm3 grease = 0,9g g DS 13 / BS 8
1 stroke of AM grease gun = 1,4g strokes DS 9,3 / BS 5,7
lubricating grease: EXXON POLYREX EM / UNIREX N2 / UNIREX N3
lubrication interval h 4000
shaft diameter: mm 42
accessible transport eyebolts: 2
type of rotor shaft protection during transport: no
finish according to manufacturer’s standard colour: __ RAL 5007 Synthetic alkyd enamel
g date name
f treated by 2005-07-14 S.Niemeier list:
e checked by 2006-01-23 F. Willmann code number motors WEG
d
c
b
a
D-31849 Aerzen 4TV - 1987
index mod. No. date name origin
482
TECHNICAL DATA of Aerzen code number motors sheet 12 / 30
pole number 2
code number Aerzen 172 786 000
identification number manufacturer
motor make: Aerzener
motor type: EFF 1
motor frame size: 200L
rated power: kW 37,0 42,0
rated voltage: V 400 / 690 460
frequency: Hz 50 60
limit performances at frequency converter
operation (1/3) at 50 Hz kW 28,93 32,99
motor rated speed nN: min-1 2965 3560
rated current at 400 V: A 65,05 65,63
starting current / rated current: (Factor) 7,6 7,6
rush current / rated current
(Factor)
(Inrush current factor) 7,6 7,6
efficiency eta: % 93,4 93,5
power factor cos phi: cos phi 0,88 0,86
rated torque: Nm 119 113
starting torque / rated torque: (Factor) 2,9 3,1
stall torque / rated torque: (Factor) 2,9 3,1
moment of inertia: kgm2 0,2242 0,2242
admissible axial lateral load (acc. to works
N
standard TN01159) : 3600 3600
intake air quantity of motor fan: 0,4 0,48
motor guard: by 3 PTC thermistors
starting: star delta / direct or frequency inverter
degree of protection: IP 55
ISO classification: "F"
weight of motor: kg 253
housing type of construction: B3
position of terminal box: on top
cable entry: from fan side
cable glands: 2 x M 50 x 1,5 + 1 x M 20
cable diameter max.: mm depends on cable glands
size of terminal box: 200 x 170 x 94
connection bolt(s): Thread M8 x 1,25
bearing:
bearing type: AS: 6312-C3, BS 6212-Z-C3
bearing manufacturer: SKF, FAG, NSK
pre-lubrication device: at drive- and fan side
lubricating nipple design: DIN 71412 cone
pre-lubrication period: at 50 c/s / 40°C ambient temperature max.
lubrication quantity: cm3
1cm3 grease = 0,9g g DS 21 / BS 13
1 stroke of AM grease gun = 1,4g strokes DS 15 / BS 9,3
lubricating grease: EXXON POLYREX EM / UNIREX N2 / UNIREX N3
lubrication interval h 3000
shaft diameter: mm 55
accessible transport eyebolts: 2
type of rotor shaft protection during transport: no
finish according to manufacturer’s standard colour: __ RAL 5007 Synthetic alkyd enamel
g date name
f treated by 2005-07-14 S.Niemeier list:
e checked by 2006-01-23 F. Willmann code number motors WEG
d
c
b
a
D-31849 Aerzen 4TV - 1987
index mod. No. date name origin
483
Bedienungshinweise
für
deutsch
Antriebsmotor
Operating instructions for drive motor
Instructions de service pour Moteur de commande
Bedieningsaanwijzingen voor de aandrijfmotor
english
Instrucciones de servicio para
motor de accionamiento
Istruzioni d'esercizio per motori di comando
Aerzener "WEG" Motore
français
nederlands
español
1,5 kW - 200 kW
italiano
M4-001 C XT
174 521 000 07-2006
484
deutsch
- apply to all Aerzen motors, please also see name plate - 1,5 kW - 200 kW
Safety information:
Ü No work is to be carried out until motor is electrically isolated
and locked out.
Ü Any work required is only to be carried out by trained and
authorized personnel. Please also refer to VDE 0105, IEC 364.
Ü Low-tension machines may have dangerous, energized, rotating
component parts and hot surfaces.
Ü Adherence to safety information is mandatory for the use of
english
detergent cleaners.
Storage:
Ü Storage is to be in a clean, dry, dust- and vibration free area.
(Veff <,= 0,2 mm/s)
Commissioning:
Ü Check motor shaft for dismantled transport safety device. It must be possible to turn
the shaft properly.
français
Ü The motors are to be commissioned with an overload protection.

Ü In case of storage in excess of 4 years the bearings require inspection. Any damaged
bearings are to be replaced. If no visible signs of damage are present the bearings
require re-greasing before refitting.
Ü Prior to re-commissioning the insulation resistance requires checking. Maximum applied
voltage is 500 V. Values <, = 20 MW (at approx. 20 °C) indicate the windings will have to be
dried before the motor is used.
Ü Rotation check: In an uncoupled condition briefly switch the motor on/off.
Pay attention to direction of rotation according to designation on rotary piston
machine.
nederlands
Motors with thermal winding protection

Ü A continuity check of the PTC thermistor detector circuit by means of test lamp, magneto
inductor or similar is prohibited. In case of measurement of the cold resistance
(at approx. 20 °C) of the detector circuit, the measuring voltage must not exceed 2,5 V DC.
Lubrication instructions:
Ü For all applications, the type and quantity of grease as well as the re-lubricating
intervals stated on the nameplate or in the table of the appendix are to be observed.
español
Grease filling ex factory: ExxonMobil Polyrex EM

ExxonMobil Unirex N3 may be used as alternative.
The use of other grease types is not permitted due to the miscibility and
characteristics of the mixture.
Alternative greases may only be used when the motor bearings as well as their
supply lines have been completely cleaned and are filled with new grease.
The use of alternative types of grease could alter the lubricating intervals. Only high-
grade greases of other manufacturers are to be used.
italiano
To avoid technical disadvantages the alternative grease used must at least meet the
minimum specifications of the type of grease filled at the factory.
Alternative types of grease: Chevron SRI Klüber Staburags N12 or N12 MF

Shell Albida RL SKF LGHP2
BP Energrease LCX 103
1
485
deutsch
- apply to all Aerzen motors, please also see name plate - 1,5 kW - 200 kW
Motors with relubricating device / Lubrication of the bearings:
Ü The re-lubrication periods and the type and quantity of grease can be taken from the
nameplate or from the chart in the appendix.
Ü Upon delivery the motor bearings are provided with lubricating grease by the factory
for initial commissioning.
When reaching the first re-lubricating interval, for complete filling of the grease
channels and for lubricating the bearings, the double grease quantity as per
english
stipulations is to be used.
Concerning the following re-lubricating intervals the grease quantity indicated is
sufficient.
Ü Re-lubrication is effected via lubricating nipples.

-In 2 intervals with each the half quantity of grease
Between the intervals the motor is to be taken into operation for a short time,
approx. 2-3 seconds.
Attention! Risk of injury! Pay attention to safety measures, such as closed
acoustic hood, closed belt guard e.t.c.
or
français
-In one working cycle with the full quantity of grease. The driving shaft is to be turned
manually.
Attention ! Risk of injury! Protect motor against unintentional starting.
Motor is to be shut down properly.
Cleaning of the bearings:

Ü Attention ! Risk of poisoning. Observe product tips of the cleaner!
Pay attention to contact of skin and safety regulations of the cleaner!
nederlands
Ü Used cleaning agent and grease residues are to be disposed of properly.
Maintenance schedule:
Ü The operating safety of the motors depends on keeping the re-lubrication periods,
taken from the nameplate on the motor or from the chart in the appendix.
Ü Depending on contamination the motors are to be cleaned regularly along the

whole direction of cooling air.
español
Ü All 10 000 Op.h Motors with permanently lubricated bearings
Checking, maintenance, cleaning and new greasing
of the bearing by trained specialist staff.
Upon request, an exchange of the bearings has to be carried out
Ü All 10 000 Op.h or after 4 years, in case of lower operating hour consumption
Motors with relubrication device
Checking, maintenance, cleaning and new greasing
of the bearing by trained specialist staff.
Upon request, an exchange of the bearings has to be carried out
italiano
Note:
More difficult conditions of application, such as increased ambient temperatures,
speeds > 3000 min-1 e.t.c. have a negative influence on the maintenance intervals.
A regular checking of the unit is to be carried out acc. to the operating conditions.
ATTENTION !
In case of unusual running noises, the motor is to be shut down immediately
and the service to be informed.
2
486
CHAPTER 7.R.7
RADIAL FANS
487
03/2003
Safety Instructions
for the application
of Products
Sicherheitshinweise_englisch-neutral
488
Table of contents
1. Safety
1.1 General ........................................................................................................................1.1
1.2 Organizitional measures ..............................................................................................1.2
1.3 Warnings and Symbols ...............................................................................................1.3
1.4 Commissioning ............................................................................................................1.3
1.5 Servicing Work ............................................................................................................1.4
1.6 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................1.5
1.7 Electrical Safety ...........................................................................................................1.6
1.8 Transport of fans ..........................................................................................................1.7
1.9 Noise emmision ...........................................................................................................1.7
1.10 Stand-by operation ......................................................................................................1.8
1.11 Other safety instructions ..............................................................................................1.8
2. Trial run and start-up

2.1 Tests in preparation of a trial run .................................................................................2.1
2.2 Trial run and start-up ....................................................................................................2.1
Sicherheitshinweise_englisch-neutral 0.1
489
Safety Requirements acc. VDMA 24167
1.1 General
Fans, accessories, component parts and

subassemblies meet the technical safety
requirements applicable in the EC at the time of
delivery. The valid accident prevention regulations
were taken into account at the time the fan was
fabricated. Nevertheless its use may constitute a
risk to life and limb of the user or of third parties, or
cause damage esp. to the fan and to other material
property.
The technical safety aspects of the fan´s design

comply with VDMA 24167 „Fans; Safety
Requirements“.
The technical design of the fan complies with DIN

24166 „Technical delivery conditions for fans“.
When mounting individual components the user or

third parties have to observe the respective safety
standards !
The fan and his components must only be used in a

technically perfect condition in accordance with its
designated use and only by safety-conscious
persons who are fully aware of the risks involved in
operating the fan. Any functional disorders,
especially those affecting the safety of the fan, must
therefore be rectified immediately.
The operating manual and any supplementary

mounting and service manuals must always be
available to the user.
In addition to the operating instructions, the

instructions relating to inspection and servicing
duties and the corresponding intervals have to be
observed.
490
1.2 Organizational measures
Observe and act in accordance with the generally

applicable legal and other mandatory regulations
relating to accident prevention and environmental
protection.
Complete the operating instructions by instructions

covering the duties involved in supervising and
notifying special organizational features.
Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must

have read the operating instructions and in
particular the instructions relating to safety before
beginning work.
Note all safety instructions and warnings attached to

the fan.
See to it that safety instructions and warnings

attached to the fan are always complete and
perfectly legible.
In the event of safety-related modifications or

changes in the behaviour of the fan during
operation, that impair the fan safety, stop the fan
immediately and report the malfunction to the
competent authority/person.
Never modify or change the fan´s original condition

without obtaining approval from fan manufacturer.
This also applies to the exclusive use of original
spare parts or of subsupplied parts that comply with
the original parts.
Always observe the specified or indicated inspection

and testing intervals. Repair work requires
workshop tooling suitable for the job to be carried
out.
Any work on and with the fan must be carried out by

reliable, qualified and trained staff only. Make sure
that only authorized personnel works on or with the
fan.
491
1.3 Warnings and symbols
This pictograph refers to hazardous

situations invollving risks which may cause
injury.
Signal words indicating injury to persons:

Danger => indicates an imminently hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury
(crippling)
Warning => indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
Caution => indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury.
This pictograph refers to work which must

only be carried out by a skilled electrician.
This pictograph is used whenever

additional information is provided.
1.4 Commissioning
Do not commission the fan (not even for trial
purposes) unless the suction and exhaust ports are
closed by suitable guards or plate screens or have
pipes attached to them so that persons are barred
from entering.
Avoid any operational mode that might be
prejudicial to safety.
Prior to commissioning, check the inside of the fan
housing and pipes to make sure that all foreign
objects have been removed.
Take the necessary precautions to ensure that the
fan is used only when in a safe and reliable state.
Operate the fan only if all protective and safety-
oriented devices are in place and fully operational.
Note the VDMA 24167 safety instructions relating to
trial runs and commissioning.
492
1.5 Servicing work

Observe the inspection and servicing duties and
their intervals as specified in the operating manual.
Spare parts and parts of the equipment must be
replaced by qualified personnel only.
Do not carry out inspection, maintenance and repair
work unless you have read the instructions relating
to servicing work included in the operating manuals.
If necessary, secure an area large-enough around
the spot where servicing work is carried out.
Do not carry out servicing work unless the
power supply to the fan has been cut off.
Note the following items:
- Turn off electrical machines and
secure them so that they cannot be
turned back on.
- Lock the master controller and remove
the key and/or attach a warning sign to
the master controller.
- Wait until the impeller has to come to a
standstill.
- Remove the motor fuse.
- Disconnect the drive motor cables.
If components or large assemblies have to be
replaced, make sure that they are properly attached
and secured to the hoisting gear to eliminate all
hazards. Use only suitable and technically perfect
hoisting gear of adequate lifting capacity.
Working under suspended loads is
extremely dangerous and may be lethal.
For carrying out overhead servicing work always

use specially designed or otherwise safety-oriented
ladders and working platforms. Do not use machine
parts as a climbing aid. Wear a safety harness when
carrying out servicing work at greater heights. Keep
all handles, steps, handrails, platforms, ladders and
other means of access free from dirt, snow and ice.
Any guards, safety devices and pipes removed for
servicing must be refitted, tightened up and checked
immediately upon completion of maintenance and
repair work. Close and tighten up all inspection
openings.
The fan can then be put into operation again.
493
1.6 Cleaning
Do not carry out cleaning work on rotating parts

when the fan is in operation.
Do not start to clean the fan unless it is
shut down and is secured against being
restarted.
Before cleaning work is started, plug up/tape
up/cover/close all openings in which
water/steam/detergents are not allowed to enter for
safety and/or operational reasons. These fluids
present a risk to the electric motors and to other
electrical equipment.
Use only suitable equipment for cleaning.
Remove from the fan housing all foreign substances
disengaged from the impeller.
Remove all covers/plugs/tapes once cleaning is
completed.
Check pipes for leaks. Inspect connections and
check the equipment for signs of scouring and for
damage. Tighten up loose connections and repair
any damage.
Safety devices removed for cleaning must be
refitted and tested.
Properly dispose of consumables, service fluids,
auxiliaries and replaced parts.
Foreign particles caked to the impeller or
general impeller wear may cause
unbalance which will destroy the fan. It is
therefore recommended to keep vibrations
under observation.
494
1.7 Electrical safety
DANGER:
Live and rotating parts of electrical

machines may cause serious injury or
death.
The user has to make sure that the fan is only

connected up and serviced by a skilled electrician in
accordance with the electrical engineering rules.
The user also has to ensure that the fan is only
operated in compliance with the electrical
engineering rules.
Never carry out work on live parts.
- Cut off the power supply to the fan and use
mechanical means to secure the fan against
being restarted.
- Use a voltage tester to check that the
equipment is de-energized. Ground and short-
circuit the working area.
- Earth and short-circuit the working area
- Only use the fuses indicated in the wiring
diagram. Immediately stop the fan if there is a
malfunction in the power supply.
- Check the condition of all connected cables
before restarting the fan.
- Replace any damaged cables.
The electrical equipment of the fan must be checked

at regular intervals. Any electrical defects must be
rectified immediately. Fans with an electrical defect
must be shut down immediately.
Work on live parts and elements must be carried out
only in the presence of a second person who can
cut off the power supply in case of danger by
actuating the emergency stop or main power switch.
Secure the working area with a safety chain and
warning sign.
495
1.8 Transport of fans
Only transport the fan and single components using

handling equipment that is appropriate for the
conditions prevailing at the site where the fan is to
be installed.
Only use hoisting and slinging gear of adequate
lifting capacity for handling the fan.
Appoint a skilled banksman to supervise lifting and
loading/unloading.
Only use appropriate transport vehicles of adequate
lifting capacity.
Lifting ropes may only be attached to the lifting lugs
or to other specially provided lifting appliances.
The load must be properly secured to eliminate all
hazards. Make use of the appropriate slinging
points.
Before and immediately after loading is completed,
use appropriate equipment to secure the fan against
inadvertent shifting. Remove this equipment before
the fan is put into operation. Components removed
for transport must be properly attached again before
the fan is started up. Even a small change in the fan
position requires the unit to be cut off from any
external power supply. Ensure that the fan is
properly reconnected to the mains before it is put
back into operation.
Start up the fan in accordance with the appropriate
instructions included in the operating manual.
1.9 Noise emission
When the fan is operating, all soundproofing

devices must be in soundproofing position.
Operators must wear the required ear protectors.
496
1.10 Stand-by operation
If another or several other fans are used as stand-

by units, such fans must be kept on permanent
stand-by. They should be subjected to a continuous
alternating duty.
1.11 Other safety instructions
When handling oil, grease and other chemical

substances observe the product-related safety
regulations.
Be careful when handling hot fluids and
consumables (risk of burning or scalding).
Carry out welding, flame-cutting and grinding work
on the fan only if this has been expressly
authorized. Always observe the fire prevention
regulations. Before such work is carried out, clean
the working area from dust and other inflammable
substances and make sure that the premises are
adequately ventilated. Observe the national rules
and regulations applying to work carried out in
cramped spaces.
497
2. Trial run and start-up
2.1 Tests in preparation of a trial run
The following safety checks must be made by a

skilled inspector in preparation of a trial run:
- Check that all mechanical guards and electrical
safety devices are properly attached and
installed.
- Check that there are no foreign objects inside the
fan housing or inside the connected pipes.
- Check that the mains power rating, voltage and
frequency are suitable for the drive motor and
control system and that the equipment is
correctly connected up.
- Check that the inlet and discharge are ducted
and/or are fitted with guards.
- Check the operation of the controlling
implements / dampers.
- Check that the impeller rotates freely. Fans
suitable for being used in hazardous locations
require the impeller gap to be measured and
recorded.
- Check the tension and alignment of the V-belt
and tension the belt if necessary.
- Check that all attachment bolts have a tight fit.
2.2 Trial run and start-up
Trial run and start-up require the following measures

to be taken:
- Turn the drive motor on and immediately off
again to check that the impeller rotates in the
direction indicated by the arrow. Change the
polarity of the drive motor if necessary.
- Check the running behaviour of the fan and
compare it with the permissible vibration values.
- Check and if necessary measure the temperature
of the bearings and compare the measurements
with the permissible values indicated in the
operating manual.
- Check and make sure that the motor is not
overloaded.
- Check that the housings of gastight fans have no
leaks.
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
Item No. 24.1-40
Air slide fan
547
Serial-No.
231219 FAN DATA SHEET Page 1
Order-No. 231217-221 delivery date 06.07.2007 27/2007

delay penalty
final inspection
Customer-No. 416064 completion date 25.06.2007 26/2007
Customer Claudius Peters manufacturing 01.06.2007 (18)
Address DE-21614 Buxtehude AV 31.05.2007 (1)
Order-No. 18558 EK 30.05.2007 (1)
Com.-No. TB 2 25.05.2007 (2)
Project Konstr. 16.05.2007 (5)
Delivery address Altonaer Kistenfabrik TB 1 11.05.2007 (3)
20539 Hamburg date of order 07.05.2007
Customer Quotation no.20067491 Order
In charge Mr. Christian Peters Stefan Steinwachs Oliver Tappe -116
Position of
Fan type MXE 063-003130-00 P/n 8 discharge GR 270
No. Position of IO at degree
Design / Operating data (2)
Operating mode pressure operation
Handled gas
Rated data Calculated data Operation point(s)
Characteristic curveno. 3
Inlet temperature ϑ 20 °C
Altitude h m a.s.l.
Abs. pressure Pa 10133 daPa
Density, atm. ρa 1,205 kg/m³
Density, inlet ρ1 1,130 kg/m³
Inlet volume V1 31,5 m³/min
Total pressure ∆pt2 630 daPa
increase ∆pt1 593 daPa
Pressure loss,discharge pd2 66 daPa
Pressure loss, inlet pd1 16 daPa
Static pressure,discharge pst2 564 daPa
Static pressure, inlet pst1 548 daPa
Required power-shaft PW2 5,13 kW
Required power-shaft PW1 4,83 kW
Recomm.power,motor PM 7,50 kW
E-motor speed nM 3000 rpm
Impeller speed nL 2900 rpm
Class of accuracy acc. to DIN 24166 2
Connections Identification data
Inlet DN 200 Product catalogue L12/2002
Flange acc. DIN Standard DIN 24154 R2 Dimension sheet MB 25
Connection design flange mounted Revised dimension sheet
Dimension f= 183 f1= General arrangement drawing
Discharge DN or B1/B2 0140 Customer drawing
Flange acc. DIN Standard Parts list - fan MXE000
Connection design end piece design Pedestal drawing 0550-10-0
Dimension a1= a2= 515 Impeller drawing LRE063-003130-50-1
Dimension d1= Impeller design DZ SFV 1.0
E-motor data (4) Start-up data
Power 7,50 kW Moment of inertia 0,47 kgm2
Speed 3000 rpm Fan load torque Nm
Voltage 400D V Rated motor torque (a) Nm
Frequency 50 Hz Relation b:a ---
Protect.type/class of ins. IP55 F --- Locked-rotor torque (b) Nm
Frame size 132S IMB3 --- Start-up time s
Explosive protection no --- Starting current A
Thermistors no Main voltage V
VIK design no
Special design
Start-up condition
Weight / Motor-No. UD0706/1084605-003-1 Start-up type: damper closed
Make / Type Siemens 1LA7131-2AA60-Z Wiring: direct delta
Motor supply ordered & supplied by customer
FC operation no
Noise data (1)

A-weighted total sound power level inlet/discharge L WAi2 / L WAi1 102 / 95 dB (A)
A-weighted housing sound power level L WAa 84 dB (A)
A-weighted measuring surface sound pressure level L PA 70 dB (A)
Correction value for A-weighting ∆L KA 5 dB (A)
Measuring surface dimension Ls 14 dB
A-weighted free inlet resp. free discharge sound pressure level at 1 m distance L PA5 / L PA6 86 / 93 dB (A)
Special design of fan
Temperature range -9°C up 80°C drucks. Stutzenausführung auf
Sealing normal RohraußenØ 168,3 mm
Pressure-resistant and shock-proof no
Housing insulation none ID=
Housing splitting no
Housing design type
Pedestal design type
548
FAN DATA SHEET Page 2
Serial-No. 231219
Order-No.
231217-221
Material Surface finish microns

Spiral housing S235JRG2 Impeller - coating
Scroll S235JRG2 - derusting sandblasting grain2.5
Impeller - primer RAL 3009 40
· Blades S235JRG2 Housing inside - coating
· Main plate S235JRG2 - derusting sandblasting grain2.5
· Shroud S235JRG2 - primer RAL 3009 70
Pedestal S235JRG2 - intermediate coat -------
Shaft - finish coat -------
Housing outside - coating
Heat treatment - derusting sandblasting grain2.5
Stress relief heat treatment impeller no - primer RAL 3009 70
- intermediate coat -------
- finish coat RAL 7001 70
Colour code acc. to RAL-tone
Surface and weights w/o equipment Pedestal inside - coating
Housing inside/outside 1,86 2,02 m² - derusting sandblasting grain2.5
total 3,88 m² - primer RAL 3009 70
Insulation 1,71 m² - intermediate coat -------
Impeller total 1,54 m² - finish coat -------
Pedestal inside/outside 0,84 0,61 m² Pedestal outside - coating
total 1,45 m² - derusting sandblasting grain2.5
Fan outside 6,85 m² - primer RAL 3009 70
Impeller - weight 19,9 kg - intermediate coat -------
Weight without motor 120,9 kg - finish coat RAL 7001 70
Special techn. features (3) and equipment Colour code acc. to RAL-tone
shaft seal DBW101-000060-03 W1231-0000001-00
drain KAG100-100000
anti-vibration mount(4) SPZ420-050045, NR Shore A55 Bearing I= 8
mounting plate (4) MPZ400-000050, Stverz Single bearing hous. N-end
foundation bolts D-end
flex.connection at dis. (1) K1, -90°C, 0160 Anti-friction bearing N-end
filter inlet RFF113-032020 200, horizontal, S235JRG2 D-end
U-tube manometer Taper N-end
rainhood (1,000) D-end
Fix ring
Fixed bearing position
Shaft
Special design of bearing
V-belt drive
Pulley - fan mm
Finish bore mm
Taper no. --
Pulley - motor mm
Finish bore
Taper no. --
Design of belts --
Length of belts mm
Number of belts --
Labels and plates German/English/ neutral Special design of V-belt drive
Customer's type code %
Packing
Coupling
Shipment CPT Buxtehude - including packing Make --
Type --
Marking see text Size --
see text
Shipment marks Finish bore - shaft mm
1/155478 0150 0010 Finish bore - motor
Special design of coupling
1/155478 0150 0010
Remarks
( 1 ) Sound data: Acc. DIN 45635 part 1 and 38 - free field condition.
A-weighted sound pressure level LPA only with connected duct-work at inlet and discharge under free field
condition without consideration of motor noise.
( 2 ) Tolerance: Tolerance with respect to class of accuracy in accordance DIN 24166 in range of effiency
eta >= 0,9 x etamax. Coordination for class of accuracy (G-KL) see product specification.
( 3 ) Shaft seal: Standard seal is not absolutely tight!
( 4 ) Motor: Recommended E-motor is calculated for start-up with closed damper and D.O.L. starting.
Please observe start-up conditions of our catalogue/techn. sheets.
Test remark
Purchase Planning engineering Inspection / Test Consignment control
Date
Name
549
reference no.
FAN DATA item no.
Liste 12/2002 date

09.11.2007 / otb
fan type serial no. comm. no.
MXE063-003130-00 231219
your order no. type of control code
19105 valve (valve)
fan type MXE063-003130-00 NP OP 1

type of connection free inlet ducted
operating condition discharge operation discharge operation
handled gas clean air clean air
Designated volume flow 31,5 m³/min
Designated total pressure increase 630 daPa
humidity 0 g/kg
gas constant R 287 287 J/(kg K)
Kappa K 1,4 1,4 -
power factor added power - - % of SP
inlet temperature T1 20 20 °C
discharge temperature t2 28 28 °C
altitude h 0 0 m
abs. atmos. pressure P0 10133 10133 daPa
athmos. density ρ0 1,205 1,205 kg/m³
density at inlet ρ1 1,205 1,205 kg/m³
volume flow V1 32 32 m³/min
total pressure increase Δpt 630 630 daPa
dynamic pressure pd2 68 68 daPa
dynamic pressure pd1 17 17 daPa
static pressure increase Δpst 579 579 daPa
shaft power PW 5,1 5,1 kW
impeller speed nI 2900 2900 RPM
rec. motor power PM 7,5 7,5 kW
motor synchronous speed nM 3000 2920 RPM
tip speed u2 90 90 m/s
A-weighted sound power level
inlet LwAi1 95 95 dB(A)
discharge LwAi2 102 102 dB(A)
correct.value A-weight.dB(A) dLkA 5 5 dB(A)
A-weighted sound pressure level at 1m distance with
both sides ducted LpAm 70 70 dB(A)
free inlet LPA5 86 86 dB(A)
free discharge LPA6 93 93 dB(A)
superficial dimension Ls-k 15 15 dB
suction box AN/BN - - mm
inlet size Aø 200 200 mm
discharge size Bø 140 140 mm
transition piece* B1'/B2' - - mm
blade thickness sSch 2,5 2,5 mm
shroud thickness sD 2,5 2,5 mm
backplate thickness sTs 2,5 2,5 mm
impeller diameter D2 610 610 mm
blade effective diameter D2s 590 590 mm
shaft diameter Dw 0 0 mm
no. of blades z 9 9 -
massmoment of inertia I 0,470 0,470 kgm²
characteristic curve type 3/3 3/3 -
weight without motor MXE 121 121 kg
1.0.16.22749
Tolerances dependant on class of accuracy in accordance to DIN 24166 in range of efficiency class of accuracy 1 2 3
η >= 0,9 x ηmax.. Coordination for class of accuracy (G.Kl.) see product specification. Δpt und V1 [ %] +/- 2,5 +/- 5 +/- 10
At any rate, please pay attention to the techn. indications made in our catalogue. PW [ %] +3 +8 + 16
pressure units : 1 daPa = 10 Pa = 10 N/m² = 0,1 mbar = 1,0197 mmWC Lw und Lp [dB] +3 +4 +6
550
reference no.
FAN CHARACTERISTIC CURVE item no.
Liste 12/2002 date

09.11.2007 / otb
MXE063-003130-00 231219
19105 valve (valve)
pressure increase in daPa
700
NP
600
500
Δp tot
400
300
pd2
200 Δp stat
ptot-pd2
100
pd1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
volume flow V1 In m³/min
power requirement PW in kW efficiency in %
100
8
PW 90
7
80
6 70
NP
5 60
η tot 50
4
40
3
30
2
20
1 10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
NP OP 1 OP 2 OP 3 OP 4 OP 5 OP 6
volume flow V1 m³/min 32
total pressure increase Δpt daPa 630
density at inlet ρ1 kg/m³ 1,205
impeller speed nI RPM 2900
inlet guide vane / damper
1.0.16.22749
551
reference no.
FAN CHARACTERISTIC CURVE item no.
Liste 12/2002 date

09.11.2007 / otb
MXE063-003130-00 231219
19105 valve (valve)
pressure increase in daPa
700
OP1
600
500
Δp tot
400
300
pd2
200 Δp stat
ptot-pd2
100
pd1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
power requirement PW in kW efficiency in %
100
8
PW 90
7
80
6 70
OP1
5 60
η tot 50
4
40
3
30
2
20
1 10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
NP OP 1 OP 2 OP 3 OP 4 OP 5 OP 6
volume flow V1 m³/min 32
total pressure increase Δpt daPa 630
density at inlet ρ1 kg/m³ 1,205
impeller speed nI RPM 2900
inlet guide vane / damper
1.0.16.22749
552
reference no.
SOUND DATA item no.
Liste 12/2002 date

09.11.2007 / otb
MXE063-003130-00 231219
19105 valve (valve)
technical data of fan at ρ-1 =1,205 kg/m³ (nominal point) :
total pressure increase Δpt 630 daPa volume flow V1 31,50 m³/min
impeller speed nI 2900 RPM shaft power PW 5,1 kW
no. of blades z 9 - main residual frequency f 435 Hz
drive motor PM 7,5 kW motor speed nM 2920 RPM
sound data:
superficial dimension Ls-k 15,0 dB corr. value A-weighting dlkA 5,4 dB(A)
at inlet LwAi1 95,3 dB(A) at discharge LwAi2 102,1 dB(A)
A-weighted free inlet resp. free discharge power level
from hemisphere radius
at inlet LpA5 86,5 dB(A) at discharge LpA6 93,3 dB(A)
A-weighted external sound power level structural design M: LwAa 84,5 dB(A)
structural design K: LwAa 87,2 dB(A)
structural design R: LwAa 88,0 dB(A)
A-weighted measuring surface sound pressure level structural design M: LpA 70,0 dB(A)
fan ducted structural design K: LpA 72,2 dB(A)
structural design R: LpA 73,0 dB(A)
A-weight. meas.surface sound pressure level of drive LpAMo dB(A)
A-weight. meas. surface sound press.level fan and drive LpAMo+LpA dB(A)
octave spectrum
frequency fm in Hz 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Dim

main residual frequ. dLD-okt 0,0 0,0 0,0 2,7 0,6 0,1 0,0 0,0 dB
relative octave spectrum dLw-okt -8,4 -5,8 -5,3 -7,1 -10,9 -17,0 -25,2 -35,7 dB
A-weighting dLA -26,7 -16,1 -8,6 -3,3 0,0 1,2 1,0 -1,1 dB
total sound power Lwi2-okt 98,4 101,0 101,4 102,4 96,5 89,9 81,6 71,1 dB
Lwi1-okt 91,5 94,1 94,6 95,6 89,6 83,0 74,7 64,3 dB
LwAi2-okt 71,7 84,9 92,8 99,1 96,5 91,1 82,6 70,0 dB(A)
LwAi1-okt 64,8 78,0 86,0 92,3 89,6 84,2 75,7 63,2 dB(A)
A-weighted external sound power level
structural design M LwAa-okt 54,0 67,2 75,2 81,5 78,8 73,4 64,9 52,4 dB(A)
design K (with bearings) LwAa-okt 56,8 70,0 77,9 84,2 81,6 76,2 67,7 55,1 dB(A)
design R (with bearings) LwAa-okt 57,5 70,7 78,7 85,0 82,3 77,0 68,4 55,9 dB(A)
A-weighted measuring surface sound pressure level
structural design M LPA-okt 39,5 52,7 60,7 67,0 64,3 58,9 50,4 37,9 dB(A)
design K (with bearings) LPA-okt 41,8 55,0 62,9 69,2 66,6 61,2 52,7 40,1 dB(A)
design R (with bearings) LPA-okt 42,5 55,7 63,7 70,0 67,3 62,0 53,4 40,9 dB(A)
Remark : The rounding of the values to whole figures results necessarily in differences of further calculations.
At calculation of the sound pressure level a reduction of 3 dB for self shielding of the fan housing is to be taken into account.
LpA = LwAa - Ls - 3 dB(A)
1.0.16.22749
553
reference no.
SOUND DATA item no.
Liste 12/2002 date

09.11.2007 / otb
MXE063-003130-00 231219
19105 valve (valve)
technical data of fan at ρ-1 =1,205 kg/m³ (OP 1 ) :
total pressure increase Δpt 630 daPa volume flow V1 31,50 m³/min
impeller speed nI 2900 RPM shaft power PW 5,1 kW
no. of blades z 9 - main residual frequency f 435 Hz
drive motor PM 7,5 kW motor speed nM 2920 RPM
sound data:
superficial dimension Ls-k 15,0 dB corr. value A-weighting dlkA 5,4 dB(A)
at inlet LwAi1 95,3 dB(A) at discharge LwAi2 102,1 dB(A)
A-weighted free inlet resp. free discharge power level
from hemisphere radius
at inlet LpA5 86,5 dB(A) at discharge LpA6 93,3 dB(A)
A-weighted external sound power level structural design M: LwAa 84,5 dB(A)
structural design K: LwAa 87,2 dB(A)
structural design R: LwAa 88,0 dB(A)
A-weighted measuring surface sound pressure level structural design M: LpA 70,0 dB(A)
fan ducted structural design K: LpA 72,2 dB(A)
structural design R: LpA 73,0 dB(A)
A-weight. meas.surface sound pressure level of drive LpAMo dB(A)
A-weight. meas. surface sound press.level fan and drive LpAMo+LpA dB(A)
Sound correction value
speed correction dLn 0 dB deviation of nominal point dLbp 0 dB

density correction dLt 0 dB other corrections dLs 0 dB
octave spectrum
frequency fm in Hz 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Dim

main residual frequ. dLD-okt 0,0 0,0 0,0 2,7 0,6 0,1 0,0 0,0 dB
relative octave spectrum dLw-okt -8,4 -5,8 -5,3 -7,1 -10,9 -17,0 -25,2 -35,7 dB
A-weighting dLA -26,7 -16,1 -8,6 -3,3 0,0 1,2 1,0 -1,1 dB
total sound power Lwi2-okt 98,4 101,0 101,4 102,4 96,5 89,9 81,6 71,1 dB
Lwi1-okt 91,5 94,1 94,6 95,6 89,6 83,0 74,7 64,3 dB
LwAi2-okt 71,7 84,9 92,8 99,1 96,5 91,1 82,6 70,0 dB(A)
LwAi1-okt 64,8 78,0 86,0 92,3 89,6 84,2 75,7 63,2 dB(A)
A-weighted external sound power level
structural design M LwAa-okt 54,0 67,2 75,2 81,5 78,8 73,4 64,9 52,4 dB(A)
design K (with bearings) LwAa-okt 56,8 70,0 77,9 84,2 81,6 76,2 67,7 55,1 dB(A)
design R (with bearings) LwAa-okt 57,5 70,7 78,7 85,0 82,3 77,0 68,4 55,9 dB(A)
A-weighted measuring surface sound pressure level
structural design M LPA-okt 39,5 52,7 60,7 67,0 64,3 58,9 50,4 37,9 dB(A)
design K (with bearings) LPA-okt 41,8 55,0 62,9 69,2 66,6 61,2 52,7 40,1 dB(A)
design R (with bearings) LPA-okt 42,5 55,7 63,7 70,0 67,3 62,0 53,4 40,9 dB(A)
Remark : The rounding of the values to whole figures results necessarily in differences of further calculations.
At calculation of the sound pressure level a reduction of 3 dB for self shielding of the fan housing is to be taken into account.
LpA = LwAa - Ls - 3 dB(A)
1.0.16.22749
554
Zeichnung-Nr. / drawing no.
ERSATZTEILLISTE
Datum / date
spare part list
23.07.2007
Ventilator-Typ / fan type Fabrik-Nr. / serial no. Kom.-Nr. / com.-no.
MXE 063-001230 231219
Ihre Bestell-Nr. / your order no. Bauform / structural design Kennwort / code word
18558 MXE
Bauform / form MXE KXE RHE / RGE
Gewicht
Pos. Stk. Benennung Typenbezeichnung / Zeichng-Nr./Abmess. Werkstoff weight
pos. piece designation type designation/drawing-no./dimension material kg
Baugröße / size 132S
Antriebsmotor / motor
Leistung / power 7,50 kW
1 1 IP 54 / B3
400D / 960S / 50Hz Drehzahl / 3000 1/min
rotation speed
2 1 Laufrad / impeller LRE063-001230-50-1 S235JRG2
3 % Ventilatorwelle / shaft
4 % Kühleinrichtung / heat flinger
5 1 Wellendichtung / shaft seal DBW101-000060-03 S235JRG2
6 Lagerung / bearing
6.1 % Stehlager / single bearing
6.2 % Wälzlager / antifriction bearing
6.3 % Lagerdichtung / bearing seal
6.4 % Spannhülse / clamping sleeve
6.5 % Festring / locating ring
Fabrikat / manufacture FBV ∅
7 % Kupplung / coupling
Größe / size FBM ∅
8 Keilriementrieb / V-belt drive
8.1 % Motorscheibe / motor pulley ∅ / x
8.2 % Ventilatorscheibe / fan pulley ∅ / x
8.3 % Keilreimen / V-belt x Lw
8.4 % Taper-Spannbuchse / taper bush TLV :
8.5 % Taper-Spannbuchse / taper bush TLM :
Schwingmetallpuffer mit Montageplatte
9 4 SPZ423-050045
anti-vibration mount
9.1
10 Kompensator / flexible connection
10.1 % Saugseite / inlet
10.2 1 Druckseite / discharge
KONRAD REITZ VENTILATOREN GmbH & Co.KG

Konrad-Reitz Strasse 1
D-37671 Höxter – Albaxen 1/1
555
CHAPTER 7.R.8
MOTOR FOR RADIAL FANS
556
Datenblatt für Drehstrom-Käfigläufermotoren
Data sheet for three-phase Squirrel-Cage-Motors
Kunden-Auftrags-Nr./Client-Order-No.: Item-Nr./Item-No.:
Siemens-Auftrags-Nr./Order-No.: Komm.-Nr./Consignment-No.:
Angebots-Nr./Offer-No.: Anlage/Project: 02-1/155.476/572
Bestell-Daten/ Ordering Data Allgemeine Daten/General Data
Motortyp Baugröße
Motortyp
1LA71312AA60-Z Frame size
132 S
Kurzangaben K54 +L13 Bauform IM B3
Order Codes Type of construction
Gewicht in kg , Bauform IM B3 ohne Opt.
Weight in kg, Type of construction IM B3 without Opt.
48 kg
Elektrische Daten/Electrical Data Gehäusematerial
Aluminium - aluminium
Frame material
Bemessungsspannung Schutzart
( 6 ) 400 VD/690 VY, 50 Hz; 460 VD, 60 Hz Degree of protection IP 55
Rated motor voltage
Frequenz Kühlart, TEFC
Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Method of cooling, TEFC IC 411
Bemessungsleistung Vibrationsklasse
Rated motor power 7,5 kW 8,6 kW Vibration class N ( Standard)
Bemessungsdrehzahl -1
Isolation
Rated motor speed 2930 min 3530 min-1 Insulation F,ausgenutzt nach B - F, utilized to B
Bemessungsmoment Betriebsart
Rated motor torque 24 Nm 23 Nm Duty type S1
Bemessungsstrom Drehrichtung
Rated motor current 13,8 A Direction of rotation bidirektional - bidirectional
Anzugs-/ Bemessungsstrom
Starting-/ Rated motor current 6,9
Kipp-/ Bemessungsmoment Klemmenkasten/ Terminal box
Breakdown/ Rated motor torque 3
Anzugs-/Bemessungsmoment Klemmenkastenmaterial
Starting-/ Rated motor torque 2,3 Material of terminal box Aluminium - aluminium
Wirkungsgrad bei Typ
Efficiency at Typ gk 230
100 % Pn, 75% Pn, 50 % Pn Gewinde Kontaktschraube
100 %, 75 % and 50 % rated power 88 % 88 % 87 % Terminal screw thread M4
Wirkungsgradklasse Max. Leiterquerschnitt
Efficiency class EFF 2 Max. cable diameter 6 mm2
Leistungsfaktor bei Kabeldurchmesser von ... bis ...
Power factor at Cable diameter from ... to ... 11 mm 21 mm
100 % Pn, 75 % Pn, 50% Pn Kabeleinführung
100 % Pn, 75% Pn, 50% Pn 0,89 0,86 0,80 Cable entry 4xM32x1,5
Kabelverschraubung
Cable gland Gusshaut - cast skin
Mechanische Daten/Mechanical Data
Schalldruckpegel (LpfA) 50 Hz/60Hz
Noise 50Hz/60 Hz
68 dB(A) 72 dB(A) Explosionsschutz/ Explosion protection
Trägheitsmoment 2
Moment of inertia 0,019 kgm
Zündschutzart ohne (Standard) - without
Lager AS
Bearing AS 6208 2ZC3 Type of protection
Lager BS
6208 2ZC3
Sonderausführungen/ Special configurations
Bearing BS
Art der Lagerung
Locating bearing Schwimmende Lagerung mit Anstellung AS
K54 - Kabelverschr. Metall, norm. Bestückung
Kondenswasserlöcher K54 - cable glands metal, norm. complement
Drain Holes nein/no L13 - Äußere Erdung
Nachschmiereinrichtung L13 - external earthing
Regreasing device nein/no
Schmiermittel
Type of lubrication Esso Unirex N3
Fettgebrauchsdauer: 40˚C/25˚C
Relubrication interval at 40˚C/ 25˚C 10000 h 20000 h
Fettmenge Nachschmierung :40°C/25°C
Quantity of grease for relubrication -/- g -/- g
Äußere Erdungsklemme
External earthing ja/yes/oui/si
Anstrich
Paintwork Sonderanstrich RAL7030 steingrau - special
paintwork RAL7030 stone grey
Umgebungsbedingungen/ Site conditions

Umgebungstemperatur
Ambient temperature -30 - +40°C
Höhe über Meeresspiegel
Altitude above sea level 1000 m
Normen und Vorschriften

IEC, DIN, ISO, VDE, EN
Standards and specifications
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. Differenzen zwischen berechneten und Leistungsschilddaten möglich

Technical and ordering data are subject to change. There may be descrepancies between calculaded and rating plate values.
Bemerkungen/Remarks:
15.03.2007
00_76_50_60_DL01 1.2
557
Betriebsanleitung
DE Drehstrommotoren Operating instructions
Instructions de service
EN Three-phase AC Motors Instrucciones para el manejo
Manuale duso
FR Moteurs triphasés Bruksanvisning
Provozní návod
ES Motores trifásicos Äèðåêöèÿ ïðåäïðèÿòèÿ
IT Motori trifasi
SV Trefasmotorer
CS Tøífázové motory
RU ÊíàòñÙãêùà ÞÛåÝÙïàèå
1LA6/7/9, 1LP7/9, 1PP6/7/9
BG 56 ... 90 L - IM B3
1MA6/7, 1MF6/7
BG 100 ... 160 L - IM B3

BG 100 ... 160 L - IM B3 1LA6, 1MA6
Baugrößen (BG) / Frame sizes (BG) / Désignation de carcasse (BG) / Tamaños constructivos (BG) /
Grandezza costruttiva (BG) / Konstruktionsstorlekar (BG) / Velikosti (BG) / ÊåìëíÙãéàíù (BG)
(1MA) (1MA)
* (1MA)
oder oder * oder
or or
or
ou ou ou
o o
IM V 5 IM V 6 o IM V 18
oppure oppure
oppure
eller eller *
eller
IM B 3 nebo IM B 5 nebo IM V 1 IM V 3 IM B 14 nebo IM B 35
åèå åèå åèå IM B 34
IM B 6 IM B 7 IM B 8 IM V 19
Fig. 1 Bauformen / Types of construction / Formes de construction/ * s. "4 EEx e Motoren"/ see "4 EEx e motors"/ voir "4 Moteurs EEx e " /
véase "4 Motores EEx e " / cfr. "4 Motori EEx e " / se "EEx e-Motorer" /
Formas constructivas / Forme costruttive / Monteringssätt/
viz motory 4 EEx e / ñì. ìîòîðû 4 EEx e
provedení / Ìîäåëè
Bestell - Nr. / Order No.: 5 610 70000 10 000 a

DEUTSCH / ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / ESPAÑOL / ITALIANO / SVENSKA / ÈESKY / Ðóññêèé
Ausgabe / Edition 11.03
1
ã Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved
558
ENGLISH EN
GENERAL NOTE 3 Comissioning

The data and recommendations specified in all the instructions
supplied ("Information on safety and commissioning"), and in all
WARNING
other related instructions, must always be observed in order to
avoid hazardous situations and the risk of possible injury or Before starting any work on the machine, be sure
damage. to isolate it from the power supply.
Furthermore, the pertinent national, local and plant-specific
regulations and requirements should be kept in mind! 3.1 Installation
Special designs and other versions may vary in technical details! If arranged vertically, all existing lifting eyes and possible lifting
If in doubt, be sure to contact the manufacturer, quoting the type bands (DIN EN 1492-1) and / or lashing straps (DIN EN 12195-2) must
designation and serial number (No. ..., see rating plate), or have be used to stabilize the position.
maintenance work done by one of the SIEMENS Service Centres. Built-on devices (e.g. tachometer) must not be used to help lift the
motor.
Lifting eyes that are screwed in place must be tightened or removed
1 Description after the motor has been installed.
1.1 Field of Application If the motor is installed vertically with the shaft end facing
downwards, a protective shield is recommended for the ventilator
Prescribed use of standard motors: hood in order to prevent the ingress of foreign bodies.
The motors are provided with degree of protection IP55 (see rating If the shaft end is facing upwards, a cover must be provided by the
plate) and can be used in a dusty or damp environment. A suitable equipment operator to prevent the ingress of liquids along the shaft.
superstructure or an additional cover is recommended if the motors
are deployed or stored outdoors to avoid the long-term effects of Quiet running: Exact alignment of the coupling and a well-balanced
intense, direct sunshine, rain, snow, ice and dust. If necessary, please transmission element (coupling, pulleys, fans, etc.) are essential for
consult the manufacturer or your technical department. The motors quiet vibration-free running. If necessary, the whole motor and
are tropic proof. Guide value: 60% relative humidity at a coolant transmission element should be balanced.
temperature of 40°C. BG90S/L: Double drillholes are provided for Type IM B3 in the rear feet
(see Fig. 10) to maintain the standard foot dimensions.
Ambient temperature -20°C ... +40°C
Site altitude £ 1000 m
3.2 Terminal box
If the ambient conditions deviate, this must be shown on the ratings
BG56...90L: In the case of 1LA, 1LP and 1LP motors, the top part of
plate; these data then apply.
the terminal box can be turned through 4x90 degrees.
1.2 Construction and mode of operation BG100...160L: The cast terminal box on the motor housing cannot be
Motor types: turned. In the case of motors with screw-fitted upper section of the
1LA and 1MA motors are self-cooled (with a fan). 1PP motors are terminal box this can be turned 4 times through 90 degrees (Fig. 2
supplied without their own fans. The customer must ensure that - 5.90).
there is sufficient cooling, either through a separately driven fan or, Tightening torques for screws at the electrical terminal box see
with fan drives, through the driven fan. When the fan is mounted, Fig. 5.2.
make sure that the fan hub does not obstruct the flow of air over
the cooling ribs. 1LA-BG56, 1LP and 1MF motors are self-cooled
(without a fan). 3.3 Balancing, transmission elements
In the case of the base motors the feet are screwed or cast on the A suitable device should always be used for fitting and removing the
motor housing. transmission elements (couplings, pulleys, pinions, etc.) (Fig. 7).
The screw-fitted feet on the motor housing can be changed As standard, the rotors are dynamically balanced with the half
over to alter the position of the terminal box (see Fig. 2). The thread featherkey.
in the existing drillholes in the motor housing can be tapped to fasten When fitting the transmission element, keep the type of balance in
the motor feet in retrospect. However, the stand surface of the feet mind!
must be remachined and aligned afterwards and shims fitted, if The balance status is indicated on the shaft end face or the ratings
necessary.
plate (H = Half, F = Full-key balancing, N = Balancing without
The brake connection cable is also to be considered in the case of
brake motors! featherkey).
The transmission elements must be balanced in accordance with ISO
2 Transportation and Storage 1940!
If the transmission elements are balanced with a half featherkey,
WARNING the visible, protruding part of the featherkey TP must be cut back
(see Fig. 9).
All lifting eyes on the motor must be used to transport
it. Only use the lifting eyes provided when transport- WARNING
ing machine assemblies (e.g. gearboxes, fans, pumps,
etc.). Machine assemblies must not be lifted by
attaching the hoisting gear to motor lifting eyes. The usual measures should be taken to guard
transmission elements from touch.
If the motors are stored for a long period the usable life of the grease
If a motor is started up without the transmission element attached,
on the bearings reduces. After storage periods of over 12 months the
the featherkey should be secured to prevent it being thrown out.
condition of the grease is to be checked. The grease must be replaced
if the check reveals contamination (condensation water getting into
the grease changes its consistency).
3.4 Electrical connection
The roller bearings should be replaced if the period from the time WARNING
the motor is delivered up until it is commissioned exceeds 4 years.
The service life of the motor unit is considerably reduced the longer All work on the low-voltage machine must be
it is stored. carried out by qualified skilled workers. Before work
Finished surfaces (flange surfaces, ends of shafts, etc.) should be is carried out the machine must be at a standstill,
treated with an anti-corrosion agent. disconnected and secured against switching on.
If necessary, the insulation resistance of the winding must be This applies to the auxiliary circuits as well (e. g.
checked, see Section 3.5. space heater).
ã Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved 5

559
EN ENGLISH
NOTE: If the openings for cables and wiring in the terminal box In the case of converter-fed motors, interference is emitted to a
are sealed with a cast skin (knockout), this must be removed in the greater or lesser degree, depending on the converter version concerned
appropriate manner (see Fig. 4). (type, interference suppression measures, manufacturer). The
Care must be taken not to damage the terminal box, the terminal instructions of the converter manufacturer regarding electromagnetic
board, the cable connections, etc. inside the terminal box! compatibility must be heeded at all times. If the use of a shielded
See Fig. 4.1 for details of the screwed connections for cables and motor cable is recommended, the shield will have the greatest effect
leads. An adapter must be screwed in for PTC thermistor connections! if it is conductively connected over a large area on the metal terminal
The terminal box must be sealed so that it is dust and water-tight. box of the motor (with a screwed metal conduit thread). Noise
voltages may occur on the sensor leads of motors with integrated
The system voltage and the frequency must agree with the data given sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) as a result of the converter.
on the rating plate. Voltage or frequency deviations of ±5% and ±2% If the motor is operated on a converter at speeds that exceed the
respectively from the rated voltage and frequency values are permitted rated speed, the mechanical critical speeds (safe operating speed
without needing to derate the output. The connection and IEC 60034-1) must be observed.
arrangement of the terminal links must agree with the diagram Noise immunity: If the motor has an integrated sensor (e.g. a PTC
provided in the terminal box. thermistor), the owner is responsible for ensuring adequate noise
Connect the earthing conductor to the terminal with the marking. immunity by choosing a suitable sensor signal lead (possibly with
Wherever terminal clips are used (for example, to DIN 46282), shielding, connected like the motor supply lead) and evaluator.
arrange the conductors so that the clips are virtually level on both The data and recommendations specified in all the instructions
sides. This method of connection means that the ends of single supplied (Information on safety and commissioning), and in all
conductors must be bent in the shape of a U or be fitted with a other related instructions, must always be observed prior to
cable lug (see Fig. 6.1). This also applies to the green-yellow commissioning!
protective earthing conductor and the outer earthing conductor After motor installation, the brake, if fitted, should be checked for
(see Fig. 6.2). proper functioning.
Please refer to Fig. 5 for the tightening torques for the screwed
electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for
terminal strips).
4 Maintenance
The anti-condensation heater must not be switched on during Safety precautions
operation.
DANGER
3.5 Checking the insulation resistance Before starting any work on the motor or other
The insulation resistance of the windings must be measured prior equipment, particularly before opening covers over
to initial startup of the motor, or after long periods of storage or live parts, the motor must be properly isolated from
standstill (approx. 6 months). the power supply. Besides the main circuits, any
While the measurement is being taken and immediately afterwards, additional or auxiliary circuits that may be present
some of the terminals carry dangerous voltages and must not be must also be isolated.
touched. The usual "5 safety rules" (as set forth in DIN VDE
0105) are:
Insulation resistance
- Isolate the equipment
- The minimum insulation resistance of new, cleaned or
- Take effective measures to prevent
repaired windings with respect to ground is 10 MW.
reconnection
- The critical insulation resistance Rcrit is calculated first by
- Verify equipment is dead
multiplying the rated voltage UN, e.g. 0.69 kV AC, with the
- Earth and short-circuit
constant factor (0.5 MW/kV):
- Cover or fence off adjacent live parts
Rcrit = 0.69 kV x 0.5 MW/kV = 0.345 MW.
The precautions listed above should remain in force
Measurement until all maintenance work is finished and the motor
The minimum insulation resistance of the windings to ground is has been fully assembled.
measured with 500 V DC. The winding temperature should then be
25oC ± 15 oC. ATTENTION
The critical insulation resistance should be measured with 500 V DC
with the winding at operating temperature. The appropriate construction standards must be
Checking observed if any modifications or repairs are made to
If the minimum insulation resistance of a new, cleaned or repaired the motors listed (UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
motor, which has been stored or at standstill for a prolonged period or CSA - Canadian Standards Association). The
of time, is less than 10 MW, this may be due to humidity. The windings markings shown on the left are used to identify these
must then be dried. motors on their respective rating plates.
After long periods of operation, the minimum insulation resistance
may drop to the critical insulation resistance. As long as the NOTE: Where motors are fitted with closed condensed water
measured value does not fall below the calculated value of the openings, these should be opened from time to time to allow any
critical insulation resistance, the motor may continue in operation. accumulated condensed water to drain away.
If it does, the motor must be stopped immediately. Condensed water openings should always be at the lowest point of
The cause must be determined, and the windings or winding sections the motor!
repaired, cleaned or dried as necessary.
Fitting new bearings, type of grease
3.6 Commissioning Under normal operating conditions, with horizontally mounted
motors and the following coolant temperatures and motor speeds,
NOTE: Electromagnetic compatibility the bearings should be changed at the intervals [h] specified below:
40°C
WARNING
... 1800 rev/min approx. 40,000 h
Emitted interference: Where the torque is very ... 3600 rev/min approx. 20,000 h
uneven (the drive of a piston-type compressor, for
NOTE: The permissible axial and transverse forces (see Catalog)
example), the inevitable result is a non-sinusoidal
must not be exceeded!
motor current, whose harmonics can lead to excessive
Irrespective of the number of operating hours, a motor which is in
system perturbation and thus excessive emitted
use should have its bearing replaced every 3 years because of the
interference.
reduction in effectiveness of the grease.
6 ã Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved
560
ENGLISH EN
In the case of motors operating under special conditions, such as The cable entries must be approved for the explosion-endangered
a vertical motor position, heavy vibration, sudden load changes, area and be secured to prevent accidental loosening. Unused openings
frequent reversing operation, etc., the bearing should be changed at are to be closed with approved plugs.
considerably more frequent intervals than the operating hours Where the motor is mounted vertically with the shaft end at the top,
stated above. e.g. models IMV3, IMV6, IMV19 (see Fig. 1), 1MA motors must have
The motors feature deep-groove ball bearings which are provided
a cover fitted so that no objects can penetrate between the cooling
with cover plates (2ZC3 version). The cover plate material should ribs into the motor fan hood. The cover must not obstruct the cooling
withstand temperatures from -30 °C to +150 °C, e.g. polyacryl-rubber of the motor.
(ACM).
Type of grease for standard machines: UNIREX N3 (Esso); synthetic Should no details be given to the contrary in respect of mode of
greases must conform to DIN 51825-K3N. operation and tolerances in the EC sample test certificate or on the
Special greases should be indicated on the rating plate or on a rating plate the electric motors have been designed and built for
separate plate. continuous operation and infrequent repeated start-up with no
Dismantle the motor to the extent necessary. Pull off the rolling- excessive heating up when starting. The motors are only to be used
contact bearing with a suitable device (see Fig. 7). Clean the journal! for the given mode of operation shown on the rating plate.
Heat the rolling-contact bearing evenly to about 80-100 °C and press Section A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, Part 1) - voltage + 5 %, frequency
on. Heavy blows (such as with a hammer, etc.) should be avoided. + 2 %, waveform, power-system symmetry - must be complied with
Any worn sealing elements (such as the shaft sealing ring, etc.) in order to ensure that any increase in temperature remains within
should also be renewed. the permitted limits. Greater deviations from the rated values can
If springless radial shaft sealing rings are used, the replacement lead to non-permissible increases in the temperature of the machine
sealing rings must also be of the springless type. and must be indicated on the rating plate.
The temperature class of the motor given on the rating plate must
Centering recess seal agree with the temperature class of the inflammable gas which may
When reassembling the motor, the bare mounting faces between the occur.
motor casing and the bearing end shields are to be sealed with a Each machine must be protected in all phases in accordance with EN
suitable non-hardening sealing material, e.g. Fluid-D. 60079-14 against unacceptable termperature rise by a current-
Tightening torques for the screws at the end shields (see Fig. 5.2). sensitive delayed circuit-breaker with phase-failure protection in
accordance with EN 60947 or with an equivalent device.
Regreasing device
In the case of motors with a regreasing device, take note of the The overcurrent protection facility with current dependent delayed
information given on the rating plate or the lubrication instruction triggering is to be selected so that the triggering time to be taken
plate! The bearings should be relubricated while the motor is from the switch characteristic curve for the protected motor ratio
running! IA / IN must not be greater than the heating up time tE of the motors.
The ratio IA / IN as well as the heating up time tE are to be found
on the rating plate. The protective device is to be set to the rated
current. In the case of delta-connected windings, the trips are to be
5 1MA and 1MF motors with connected in series with the winding phases and set to 0.58 times
increased EExe protection the rated current. If such a circuit is not possible, additional protective
measures are necessary (e.g. thermal machine protection).
Marking: CE 0158 II 2 G EEx e II T.
If the rotor is blocked, the protection device must switch off the
machine within the time tE indicated for the respective temperature
CAUTION class.
Repairs must be performed in or by authorized Sie- Electrical motors for heavy start up (running up time > 1.7 x tE-time)
mens workshops. Any repair work carried out must are to be protected by a start monitoring system in accordance with
be documented on the motor (e.g. by means of an the details given in the EC sample type test certificate.
additional plate). Thermal machine protection by means of direct temperature
monitoring of the winding is permissible if this is certified and
The information in italics is intended to serve as supplementary or indicated on the rating plate.
special information on these types of motors. Separate, common interlocked protection devices are required for
The increased hazards in areas which are exposed to the danger of each speed stage for pole reversible motors. To be recommended
explosion or firedamp necessitate that the general notes on safety are devices with EC sample type test certificate.
and commissioning are carefully complied with. In Germany, please refer to DIN EN 60079-14 and workplace safety
As to Spare parts, with the exception of standardised, commercially regulations when erecting electrical installations in areas exposed
available equivalent parts (e.g. roller bearings), only original spare to the danger of explosion. In countries other than Germany, the
parts (see parts list) may be used; this applies in particular also with relevant national regulations are to be complied with in each case!
respect to gaskets and connectors. Operation on a converter must be certified. The separate instructions
Electrical machines which are protected against explosion are in line of the manufacturer must be complied with. The motors, converters
with the standards EN 60034 (VDE 0530) and EN 50014 to 50021. It and protection devices are to be marked as pertinent to each other
is permitted to use these machines in areas exposed to the danger in the case of the EExe ignition protection mode and the approved
of explosion only in accordance with the stipulations of the responsible operating data is to be laid down in the general EC sample type test
authority which also determines whether a danger of explosion certificate.
exists (division into zones). The connector cable installed between the inverter and the electrical
To be observed in the case of certification additionally marked device can adversely affect the levels of the voltage peaks produced
with an X are the special stipulations in the EC sample test by the inverter. . The maximum value of the voltage peaks at the
certificate. terminals in the system Inverter-Cable-Eletrical Device must not
exceed the value stated in the manufacturers special notes.
Furthermore, the EMC Guideline must be observed.

561
26
DE EN FR ES
Ersatzteile, vom Werk lieferbar Spare parts, available from the works Pièces de rechange, livrables par lusine (voir exemple de Piezas de recambio, suministro desde fábrica (v. ejemplo de pedido)
(s. Bestellbeispiel) (see order example) commande)
1.00 Rodamiento D
1.00 Lagerung AS 1.00 Bearing, drive end 1.00 Palier côté entraînement .40 Escudo portacojinetes
.40 Lagerschild .40 Endshield .40 Flasque-palier .43 Anillo obturador
.43 Wellendichtring .43 Shaft sealing ring .43 Bague détanchéité .58 Arandela flexible
.58 Federscheibe .58 Resilient preloading ring .58 Rondelle élastique .60 Rodamiento
.60 Wälzlager .60 Rolling-contact bearing .60 Roulement .61 Cinta elástica para el cubo del escudo portacojinetes
.61 Federband für Lagerschildnabe .61 Spring band for endshield hub .61 Lame élastique pour moyeu du flasque (no se emplea siempre)
(nicht immer vorhanden) (not always provided) (pas toujours présente)
3.00 Rotor, completo
3.00 Läufer, komplett 3.00 Rotor, complete 3.00 Rotor, complet .88 Chaveta para ventilador
.88 Paßfeder für Lüfter .88 Featherkey for fan .88 Clavette pour ventilateur
4.00 Estator, completo
4.00 Ständer, komplett 4.00 Stator, complete 4.00 Stator, complet .07 Pata derecha de la carcasa
.07 Gehäusefuß, rechts .07 Frame foot, right .07 Patte de la carcasse, droite .08 Pata izquierda de la carcasa
ANHANG / APPENDIX / APPENDICE/ANEXO

.08 Gehäusefuß, links .08 Frame foot, left .08 Patte de la carcasse, gauche .18 Placa de características
.18 Leistungsschild .18 Rating plate .18 Plaque signalétique .19 Tornillo
.19 Schraube .19 Bolt .19 Vis .20 Tapa
.20 Abdeckung .20 Cover .20 Recouvrement .30 Angular de contacto
.30 Kontaktwinkel .30 Contakt angele .30 Equerre de contact .31 Angular exterior de puesta a tierra
.31 Erdungswinkel .31 Earthing angele .31 Equerre de mise à la terre
5.00 Caja de bornes, completa
5.00 Anschlußkasten, komplett 5.00 Terminal box, complete 5.00 Boîte à bornes, complète .03 Sello
.03 Dichtung .03 Seal .03 Joint .04 Sello
.04 Dichtung .04 Seal .04 Joint .10 Placa de bornes, completa
.10 Klemmenbrett, komplett .10 Terminal board, complete .10 Plaque à bornes, complète .11 Regletero (p. ej. para conexión con termistor PTC)
.11 Klemmleiste .11 Terminal strip(e.g. for PTC .11 Bornier (par ex. pour sonde CTP) .44 Parte superior de la caja de bornes
(z. B. für Kaltleiteranschluß) thermistor connection) .44 Partie supérieure de la boîte à bornes .70 Pisacables
.44 Anschlußkasten-Oberteil .44 Top part of terminal box .70 Etrier de serrage .71 Pisacables
.70 Klemmbügel .70 Terminal clip .71 Etrier de serrage .83 Sello
.71 Klemmbügel .71 Terminal clip .83 Joint (torique sur (HA 180...200) .84 Tapa de la caja de bornes
.83 Dichtung .83 Seal .84 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes .85 Sello
.84 Anschlußkasten-Deckel .84 Terminal box cover .85 Joint .90 Parte superior de la caja de bornes, girable en
.85 Dichtung .85 Seal .90 Parie supérieure de la boîte à bornes, 4 x 90 grados, completa (para montaje posterior)
.90 Anschlußkastenoberteil .90 Top part of terminal box, can be turned through orientable de 4 x 90 °, complète (pour montage .92 Tapa de la caja de bornes
4x90 Grad drehbar, komplett 4 x 90 degrees, complete (for retrofitting) ultérieur) .93 Sello
(für nachträglich Anbau) .92 Terminal box cover .92 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes .95 Parte superior de la caja de bornes
.92 Anschlußkasten-Deckel .93 Seal .93 Joint .98 Sello
.93 Dichtung .95 Top part of terminal box .95 Partie supérieure de la boîte à bornes .99 Placa del adaptador
.95 Anschlußkasten-Oberteil .98 Seal .98 Joint
.98 Dichtung .99 Adapter plate .99 Plaque dadaptateur 6.00 Rodamiento N
.99 Adapterplatte .10 Rodamiento
6.00 Bearing, non-drive end 6.00 Palier côté opposé à lentraînement .11 Cinta elástica para el cubo del escudo
6.00 Lagerung BS .10 Rolling-contact bearing .10 Roulement portacojinetes (no se emplea siempre)
ã Siemens AG 2003
.10 Wälzlager .11 Spring band for endshield hub .11 Lame élastique pour moyeu du flasque .20 Escudo portacojinetes
.11 Federband für Lagerschildnabe (not always provided) (pas toujours présente) .23 Anillo obturador
(nicht immer vorhanden) .20 Endshield .20 Flasque-palier
.20 Lagerschild .23 Shaft sealing ring .23 Bague détanchéité 7.00 Sistema de ventilación, completo
.23 Wellendichtring .04 Ventilador
7.00 Ventilation, complete 7.00 Ventilation, complète .40 Capota del ventilador
7.00 Belüftung, komplett .04 Fan .04 Ventilateur
All Rights Reserved
.04 Lüfter .40 Fan cowl .40 Capot du ventilateur ¡No se pueden suministrar los dispositivos para calar y extraer los
.40 Lüfterhaube rodamientos, ventiladores y órganos de accionamiento!
The devices for pressing on and pulling off the rolling-contact Les dispositifs demmanchement et dextraction pour
Auf- und Abziehvorrichtungen für Wälzlager, Lüfter und bearings, the fan and the transmission elements cannot be roulements, ventilateurs et organes de transmission ne sont
Abtriebselemente sind nicht lieferbar! ordered! pas livrables.
562
ã
IT SV CS RU
Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved
Parti di ricambio disponibili da magazzino (vedere esempi Reservdelar, kan levereras från fabriken (se Náhradní díly, dodávané výrobcem Çàïàñíûå ÷àñòè, âîçìîæíà ïîñòàâêà ñ ôàáðèêè
di ordinazione) beställningsexempel) (viz pøíklad objednávky) (ñì. ïðèìåð çàêàçà)
1.00 Cuscinetti lato albero 1.00 Lager AS 1.00 uloení AS 1.00 Óñòðîéñòâî ïîäøèïíèêîâ AS
.40 Coperchio del cuscinetto .40 Lagersköld .40 loiskový tít .40 ïîäøèïíèêîâûå ùèòû
.43 Anello di tenuta dellalbero .43 Axeltätring .43 tìsnící krouek høídele .43 óïëîòíèòåëüíîå êîëüöî âàëà
.58 Anello elastico .58 Fjäderbricka .58 pérová podloka .58 Óïðóãàÿ øàéáà
.60 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .60 Rullager .60 valivé loisko .60 Ïîäøèïíèê êà÷åíèÿ
.61 Nastro elastico per il mozzo dello scudo .61 Fjäderband för lagersköldsnav (finns ej alltid) .61 pruná objímka pro náboj loiskového títu .61 Ïðóæèíÿùàÿ ïîëîñêà äëÿ âòóëêè ïîäøèïíèêà
di supporto (non sempre inserito) (není vdy k dispozici) (íå âñåãäà â íàëè÷èè)
3.00 Rotor, komplett
APPENDICE / BILAGA
3.00 Rotore completo .88 kil för fläkt 3.00 rotor, kompletní 3.00 Âåíòèëÿòîð, êîìïëåêò
.88 Chiavetta per ventilatore .88 pero ventilátoru .88 Ïðèçìàòè÷åñêàÿ øïîíêà äëÿ âåíòèëÿòîðà
4.00 Stator, komplett
4.00 Statore completo .07 Fot för hus, höger 4.00 statorový svazek v kostøe 4.00 Ñòîéêà, êîìïëåêò
.07 Piede di sostegno destro .08 Fot för hus, vänster .07 patka pravá .07 Ëàïà êîðïóñà, ïðàâàÿ
.08 Piede di sostegno sinistro .18 Märkskylt .08 patka levá .08 Ëàïà êîðïóñà, ëåâàÿ
.18 Targhetta dei dati .19 Skruv .18 typový títek .18 Ôèðìåííàÿ òàáëè÷êà ñ óêàçàíèåì ìîùíîñòåé
.19 Vite .20 Lock .19 roub .19 Âèíò
.20 Coperchio .30 Kontaktvinkel .20 ucpávka .20 Ïîêðûòèå
.30 Angolare di contatto .31 Jordingsvinkel .30 kontaktní úhelník .30 Êîíòàêòíûé óãîëîê
.31 Angolare di messa a terra .31 zemnící úhelník .31 Óãîëîê äëÿ çàçåìëåíèÿ
5.00 Uttagslåda, komplett
5.00 Cassetta terminale completa .03 Packning 5.00 svorkovnice, úplná 5.00 Êëåììíàÿ êîðîáêà, êîìïëåêò
/ PRILOHA
.03 Guarnizione .04 Packning .03 tìsnìní .03 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.04 Guarnizione .10 Kopplingsplint, komplett .04 tìsnìní .04 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.10 Morsettiera completa .11 Kontaktplint (t.ex. för anslutning av .10 deska svorkovnice , úplná .10 êëåììíûé ùèòîê, êîìïëåêò
.11 Morsettiera ad es. per il collegamento di PTC-termistor) .11 svorková lita (napø.pro pøipojení termistoru) .11 Çàæèìíàÿ ïëàíêà (íàïðèìåð äëÿ òåðìîðåçèñòîðà)
termistori PTC .44 Överdel till uttagslåda .44 skøíò svorkovnice vrchní èást .44 Âåðõíÿÿ ÷àñòü êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.44 Parte superiore della cassetta terminale .70 Klämbygel .70 upínací objímka .70 Çàæèì
.71 upínací objímka
/ Ïðèëîæåíèå
.70 Staffa .71 Klämbygel .71 Çàæèì
.71 Staffa .83 Packning .83 tìsnìní .83 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.83 Anello di tenuta .84 Lock till uttagslåda .84 víko svorkovnice .84 Êðûøêà êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.84 Coperchio della cassetta terminale .85 Packning .85 tìsnìní .85 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.85 Guarnizione .90 Överdel till uttagslåda 4 x 90 Dgrader vridbar, .90 svorkovnice,horní èást .90 Âåðõíÿÿ ÷àñòü êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.90 Parte superiore della cassetta komplett (för montering i efterhand) otoèná o 4x90 stupòù, úplná 4x90ãðàä. ðàçâîðîòîñïîñîáíîñòü, êîìïëåêò
orientabile 4 volte di 90°, completa (per .92 Lock till uttagslåda (pro dodateènou montá) (äëÿ äîïîëíèòåëüíîãî ìîíòàæà)
montaggio successivo) .93 Packning .92 svorkovnice - víèko 92 Êðûøêà êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.92 Coperchio della cassetta terminale .95 Överdel till uttagslåda .93 tìsnìní .93 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.93 Guarnizione .98 Packning .95 skøíò svorkovnice .95 Âåðõíÿÿ ÷àñòü êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.95 Parte superiore della cassetta terminale .99 Adapterplatta .98 tìsnìní .98 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.98 Guarnizione .99 adapter skøínì svorkovnice .99 Ïåðåõîäíàÿ ïëàñòèíà
.99 Piastra adattatore 6.00 Lager BS
.10 Rullager 6.00 uloení BS 6.00 Óñòðîéñòâî ïîäøèïíèêîâ BS
6.00 Cuscinetti lato opposto albero .11 Fjäderband för lagersköldsnav (finns ej alltid) .10 valivé loisko .10 Ïîäøèïíèê êà÷åíèÿ
.10 Cuscinetti a rotolamento .20 Lagersköld .11 pruná objímka pro náboj loiskového títu .11 Ïðóæèíÿùàÿ ïîëîñêà äëÿ âòóëêè ïîäøèïíèêà
.11 Nastro elastico per il mozzo dello scudo .23 Axeltätring (není vdy k dispozici) (íå âñåãäà â íàëè÷èè)
di supporto (non sempre inserito) .20 loiskový tít .20 Ïîäøèïíèêîâûé ùèò
.20 Coperchio dei cuscinetti 7.00 Ventilation, komplett .23 tìsnící krouek høídele .23 óïëîòíèòåëüíîå êîëüöî âàëà
.23 Anello di tenuta dellalbero .04 Fläkt
.40 Fläktkåpa 7.00 vìtrání, úplné 7.00 Âåíòèëÿöèÿ, êîìïëåêò
7.00 Ventilatore completo .04 ventilátor .04 Âåíòèëÿòîð
.04 Ventilatore .40 kryt ventilátoru .40 Êðûøêà âåíòèëÿòîðà
.40 Cappa del ventilatore
Nasazovací a stahovací pøípravky pro valivá loiska, Ïðèñïîñîáëåíèå äëÿ ñúåìà è ìîíòàæà ïîäøèïíèêà êà÷åíèÿ,
I dispositivi per il calettamento e lestrazione di cuscinetti, På- och avdragningsanordningar för rullager, fläkt och vìtráky a prvky pohonu nedodáváme ! âåíòèëÿòîðà è âåäîìûõ ýëåìåíòîâ íå ïîñòàâëÿþòñÿ
ventilatori e elementi di trasmissione non possono essere drivdonselement kan inte levereras!
27
ordinati!
563
DE EN FR ES IT SV CS RU
DE - Normteile sind nach Abmessung, Werkstoff und Oberfläche im freien Handel zu beziehen.
EN - Standard commercially available parts are to be purchased in accordance with the specified dimensions, material and surface finish.
FR - Les pièces normalisées peuvent être obtenues dans le commerce daprès leurs dimensions, le matériau et létat de surface.
ES - Las piezas estándar se comprarán en comercios del ramo según las dimensiones, material y superficie especificados.
IT - Le parti standard sono reperibili sul mercato secondo le dimensioni, il materiale e la finitura della superficie.
SV - Normerade detaljer kan erhållas i öppna handeln, och skall specificeras beträffande storlek, material och ytbehandling.
CS - Normované díly lze v pøísluných rozmìrech, materiálech a povrchu nakoupit v bìných obchodech.
RU - ñòàíäàðòíûå ÷àñòè ìîæíî ïðèîáðåñòè â ñâîáîäíîé òîðãîâëå ïî ðàçìåðàì, ìàòåðèàëó è ïîâåðõíîñòè
DIN EN ISO 7089/7090

(DIN 125)
DIN EN ISO 4762 DIN EN ISO 4014 DIN EN 50262
4.05 (s. Fig. 3) (DIN 912) (DIN 931)
1.49
4.11 5.52
4.10 4.39 5.53
4.38 DIN 128 5.19 5.96
5.78 5.49
5.79
DIN EN ISO 4017 DIN EN ISO 7045
5.89 (DIN 7985)
(DIN 933)
5.91 DIN 625
7.12 DIN 471
5.94
6.29 Lagertyp:
Type of bearing:
7.49
Type de roulement:
1.60 Tipo de cojinete:
6.02 DIN 472
6.10 Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ loiska
Òèï ïîäøèïíèêà
4.04 (s. Fig. 3) DIN 580 3.38 DIN 6885
Fig. 2
DE - Ersatzteile sind über den Vertrieb bei den jeweiligen Produktionsstätten zu bestellen.
EN - Spare parts can be ordered from the Sales departments of the particular production sites.
FR - Les pièces de rechange doivent être commandées auprès du service de vente des lieux de production respectifs.
ES - Los recambios se piden a través de la distribución de las plantas de producción respectivas.
IT - I pezzi di ricambio vanno ordinati presso i centri di distribuzione dei rispettivi stabilimenti di produzione.
SV - Reservdelar ska beställas på respektive fabriks distributionsavdelning.
CS - Náhradní díly je tøeba objednat pøes odbyt u pøísluných výrobních závodù.
RU - Çàêàçû íà çàïàñíûå ÷àñòè ïðèíèìàþò îòäåëåíèÿ ïðîäàæè ñîîòâåòñòâóþøèõ ïðîèçâîäñòâåííûõ çàâîäîâ.
E Bad Neustadt / D
UD Mohelnice / Cz
UC Frenstat / Cz
Bestellbeispiel
E Áàä Íåéøòàäò / Ãåðìàíèÿ Order example
UD Ìîõåëüíèöå / ×åõèÿ Exemple de commande 1.40 Lagerschild
UC Ôðåíøòàò / ×åõèÿ Ejemplo de pedido 1LA7 163-4AA60
Esempio di ordinazione Nr. E4A6 4567 890077
Beställningsexempel
Pøíklad objednávky
Ïðèìåð çàêàçà
564
1MA/1MF **) 1MA/1MF: EEx e - bescheinigte Verschraubung (5.1)
certify screwed connections (5.1) Bei Aluminium-Lagerschilden (1.40 AH90) ist in die Nabe ein Federband (1.61) eingelegt (Sicke
ã
certifier presse-étoupe (5.1) im Freistich einhaken).

Siemens AG 2002
5.91 certificar uniones atornilladas (5.1) In the case of aluminium bearing plates (1.40 AH90) a spring strip (1.61) is inserted in the hub
certificare collegamenti a vite (5.1) (hook-in bead in undercut) .
5.92 intyga skruvförband (5.1) Sur les flasques aluminium (1.40 AH90), un ressort à ruban (1.61) est inséré dans le moyeu
schválený roubový spoj (5.1) (Accrocher le jonc par dégagement par rainure).
5.98 En las placas de cojinete de aluminio (1.40 AH90) en el cubo se halla montado un fleje de
2003 All Rights Reserved
ðåöèíçèðîâàííîå ðåçüá.ñîåäèíåíèå (5.1)

muelle (1.61) (enganchar la acanaladura en la entalladura).
5.89 Nel caso degli scudi di cuscinetti in alluminio (1.40 AH90) un nastro elastico (1.61) è inserito
nel mozzo (agganciare la nervatura nello scarico).
5.94 Hos aluminium-lagersköldar (1.40 AH90) finns ett fjäderband (1.61) i naven (fäst falsen i det
5.84 fria uttaget).
U hliníkových títù (1.40 AH90) je do loiskového náboje vloena pruná objímka (1.61) Prolisy na
5.95 této objímce musí zapadnout do zápichu za loiskovým prùmìrem
5.83 Â àëþìèíèåâûõ ïîäøèïíèêîâûõ ùèòàõ (1.40 AH90) âî âòóëêó âëîæåíà ïðóæèíÿùàÿ ïëàñòèíà(1.61)
5.52 **) (æåëîáîê)
5.90 1.40 AH90 1.61
5.49
5.53 **)
5.98 5.44
5.19
2x 5.96
5.78 5.03
5.10 5.19
5.99 5.10
5.79
5.04 5.78
6.10 6.23
5.71 5.11
5.70
4.20
1.40
4.00
IM B5 IM B3
7.40* 7.49*
7.04*
6.29
6.20
4.18 4.19
4.30 * Teile entfallen bei
4.31
3.00 3.38
* Parts not included with
1.60 4.38 * Certaines pièces sont
1.43 1.58 4.39 supprimées pour le type
1.49 * Pazas inexistentes en 1LP, 1PP, 1MF
1MA7/1MF7 * Parti non
1.49 * Delar ingår inte för
* díly odpadají u
Fig. 2 BG 56...90L
29
* ×àñòè îòñóòñòâóþò â
565
1LA 6/1MA 6 Bei Aluminium-Lagerschilden (1.40/6.20) ist in die Nabe entweder ein Federband (1.61/6.11)
**) 1MA/1MF: EEx e - bescheinigte Verschraubung (5.1)
30
eingelegt (Sicke im Freistich einhaken) oder ein Stahlring eingegossen.
5.91 certify screwed connections (5.1) 5.79 With aluminium end shields (1.40/6.20), either a spring band (1.61/6.11) is inserted (bead
hooked in undercut) or a steel ring is cast in the hub.
certifier presse-étoupe (5.1)
certificar uniones atornilladas (5.1) 5.70 5.78 Les flasques-paliers en aluminium comportent (1.40/6.20) soit une lame élastique (1.61/6.11)
5.92 certificare collegamenti a vite (5.1)
introduite de telle manière que le bossage vienne se placer dans la gorge, soit un anneau en
acier inséré par coulée.
intyga skruvförband (5.1) En el cubo del escudo portacojinetes de aluminio (1.40/6.20) puede haber una banda elástica
schválený roubový spoj (5.1) (1.61/6.11) cuyos abultamientos se enganchan en el canal, o hay embebido un anillo de acero.
ðåöèíçèðîâàííîå ðåçüá.ñîåäèíåíèå (5.1) Nel mozzo degli scudi in alluminio è stato (1.40/6.20) inserito o un anello in acciaio fuso, o un
5.93 nastro flessibile (1.61/6.11) il cui rilievo è innestato nelle gole.
I Lagersköldar av aluminium (1.40/6.20) är ett fjäderband (1.61/6.11) antingen inlagt i nevet
1MA/1MF: 5.98 (vulsten inpassad i underskärningen) eller ingjutet i en stålring.
U hliníkových títù (1.40/6.20) je do loiskového náboje vloena buï pruná objímka (1.61/6.11
5.90 5.94
prolisy musí zapadnout do zápichu) nebo je zde zalit ocelový krouek
Â àëþìèíèåâûõ ïîäøèïíèêîâûõ ùèòàõ (1.40 /6.20) âî âòóëêó ëèáî æåëîáîê âëîæåíà ïðóæèíÿùàÿ
5.89 ïëàñòèíà(1.61/6.11) (æåëîáîêíàñàäèòü íà êðþê) èëè âëèòî ñòàëüíîå êîëüöî
* Teile entfallen bei

5.95 1.40/6.20 1.61/6.11 * Parts not included with
5.96 * Certaines pièces sont
5.84 supprimées pour le type
5.52 **) * Pazas inexistentes en
* Parti non 1LP, 1PP, 1MF
* Delar ingår inte för
5.19 * díly odpadají u
5.19
5.93 5.78 * ×àñòè îòñóòñòâóþò â
1MA/1MF: 5.98 7.04* 7.49*

5.10 6.29
5.53 **) 6.20
6.23
5.03 6.02 6.10
5.79 5.71 (BG 160)
1MA/1MF 2x
5.78 5.11
1.47 4.20 5.70
1.40 IM B3
IM B5 4.00 3.88*
7.40*
7.12*
ã Siemens AG 2003
1.60 3.38
1.43 1.58 4.19 1MA6/1MF6
1.49 4.31 4.38 4.18
All Rights Reserved
1.49 4.30 4.39

4.08 4.11 4.10 4.31
4.07 4.38
1MA7/1MF7
Fig. 2 BG 100...160L (Bei 1..7 BG100L - Füße angegossen) / (In the case of 1..7 BG100L cast feet are involved) / (Avec 1..7 BG100L Pieds coulés) / (En 1..7 BG100L patas fijadas por fundición) /
4.39
(nel caso di 1..7 BG100L - piedi applicati mediante fusione) / (Hos 1..7 BG100L fastgjutna fötter) / (U 1.7 BG 100L nalité patky) / (â 1...7 BG 100L ëàïû ïðèâàðåíû)
566
Fig. 3
DE - Ausführung mit seitlich angeordnetem Anschlußkastenoberteil (4x90° drehbar)
EN - Motor with top part of terminal box mounted on side (can be turned through 4x90°)
FR - Exécution avec partie supérieure de la boîte á bornes disposé sur le côté
ES - Motor con la parte superior de la caja de bornes adosada lateralmente (puede girarse 4x90°)
IT - Esecuzione con parte superiore della cassetta terminale disposta lateralmente (orientabile 4x90°)
SV - Utförande med överdel till uttagslådan (4x90° vridbar) monterad på sidan
CS - Provedení s horní èástí svorkovnice, umístìné na stranì (otoèné o 4 x 90°)
RU - Ìîäåëü ñ ïðèäåëàííîé ñáîêó âåðõíåé ÷àñòüþ êëåììíîé êîðîáêè (4õ90° âðàùàòåëüíàÿ ñïîñîáíîñòü)
BG 100...160L
4.04
4.05
z. B. Öffnung für Kabel und Leitungen - unten

e.g. opening for cables and leads - bottom
p. e. traversées pour câbles et conducteurs - en bas
p. ej abertura pasacables - abajo
ad es. passaggio per conduttori e cavi - parte inferiore
t.ex. öppning för kabel och ledningar - nedtill
Napø. otvor pro kabely a vedení - dole
Íàïðèìåð îòâåðñòèå äëÿ ïðîâîäêè- âíèçó
Fig. 4
DE - Ausschlagen der Öffnungen für Kabel und Leitungen im Anschlußkasten
EN - Knocking out the openings for cables and leads in the terminal box
FR - Rupture des membranes de fabrication aburant les entées de câbles et de conducteurs sur la boîte á bornes
ES - Martillando las aberturas pasacables de la caja de bornes
IT - Asportare la pellicola per cavi e conduttori nella cassetta terminale
SV - Utslagning av öppningarna för kabel och ledningar i uttagslådan
CS - Vyraení otvorù pro kabely a vedení ve svorkovnici
RU - Âûáèâàíèå îòâåðñòèÿ äëÿ êàáåëåé èëè ïðîâîäîê â êëåììíîé êîðîáêå
BG 100...160L (1LA7/9, 1LP7/9, 1PP7/9)
Ausbrechöffnung (Gußhaut)
Cast iron skin
Membrane de fabrication
Membrana de fundición
Pellicola residua della colata
Gjutskorpa
Vylamovací otvor (èepièka)
âûáèòûå îòâåðñòèÿ (ëèòåéíàÿ êîðêà)

567
Fig. 4.1
DE - Verschraubungen mit (Blech-) Mutter (DIN EN 50262) DE - Verschraubungen mit Reduzierung und (Blech-) Mutter (DIN EN 50262)
EN - Screwed connections with (plate-) nut (DIN EN 50262) EN - Screwed connections with reducer and (plate-) nut (DIN EN 50262)
FR - Raccords à vis avec écrou (en tôle) (DIN EN 50262) FR - Raccords à vis avec réduction et écrou (en tôle) (DIN EN 50262)
ES - Atornilladuras con tuercas (para chapa) (DIN EN 50262) ES - Atornilladuras con reductores y tuercas (para chapa) (DIN EN 50262)
IT - Collegamenti a vite con dado (per lamiera) (DIN EN 50262) IT - Collegamenti a vite con riduzione e dado (per lamiere) (DIN EN 50262)
SV - Förskruvningar med (plåt-) mutter (DIN EN 50262) SV - Förskruvningar med reducering och (plåt-) mutter (DIN EN 50262)
CS- roubová spojení s (plechovou) matkou (DIN EN 50262) CS - roubová spojení s redukcí a (plechovou) matkou (DIN EN 50262)
RU- Ðåçüáîâûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ ñ ïîìîùüþ (ñàìîíàðåçàþùèõ) ãàåê RU - Ðåçüáîâûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ ñ ïîìîùüþ ïåðåõîäíûõ äåòàëåé è (ñàìîíàðåçàþùèõ)
(DIN EN 50262) ãàåê (DIN EN 50262)
M M M
Mutter O-Ring
M M
O-Ring (Fig. 5.1)
Nut O-ring (Fig. 5.1) O-ring
Ecrou Joint torique (Fig. 5.1) Joint torique
Tuerca junta tórica (Fig. 5.1) junta tórica
Dado Guarnizione a o-ring(Fig. 5.1) Guarnizione a o-ring
Mutter O-ring (Fig. 5.1) O-ring
Matka O-krouek (Fig. 5.1) O-krouek
Ãàéêà Î-êîëüöî (Fig. 5.1) Î-êîëüöî
Mutter
Nut Reduktionsstück
Anschlußkastenwand
Ecrou Adapter
Wall of terminal box
Tuerca Pièce de réduction
Paroi de la boîte á bornes
Dado Pieza reductora
Pared de la caja de bornes
Mutter Riduttore
Cassetta termina l parete
Vägg till uttagslådan Matka Reduceringsstycke
Stìna svorkovnice Ãàéêà Redukce
íàñàäêà
ñòåíêà êëåììíîé êîðîáêè M M
Einbaulage Blechmutter
Installation length sheet metal nut
Emplacement pour écrou à tôle
posición del montaje tuerca para chapa
Posizione di montaggio dado di lamiera
Monteringsläge påtmutter
Poloha plechové matky
ìåñòî ïîñàäêè ãàéêè
Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje / Hinweis / Note / Note / Note / Nota / Observera / poznámka /
Montaggio / Montering / Montá / Ñáîðêà Óêàçàíèÿ/ïðèìå÷àíèÿ
1 DE - Verschraubung in Gehäuse einschrauben oder mit Gegenmutter befestigen, 1 DE - Die Verschraubungen dürfen ausschlieslich für Kabel ohne Bewehrung oder
(Drehmoment M). Umspinnung sowie nur für feste Installation verwendet werden.
EN - Screw connection into housing or tighten with locknut , (Torque M). EN - The cabel entries may be used only for non-armouring cables and only for
FR - Visser le raccord à vis dans le carter ou fixer avec un contre-écrou, solid installation.
(couple de serrage M). FR - Les raccords à vis ne peuvent être utilisés que pour les câbles sans armature
ES - Enroscar la atornilladura en la carcasa o sujetarla con la contratuerca, ou guipage ainsi que pour uniquement les installations fixes.
(par de giro M). ES - Las atornilladuras pueden usarse solo y exclusivamente para cable sin
IT - Avvitare il collegamento a vite sulla carcassa o fissare con controdado, armadura ni trenzado, así como sólo para la instalación fija.
(momento torcente M). IT - I collegamenti a vite devono essere utilizzati solo per cavi senza armatura
SV - Skruva i förskruvningen i huset eller fäst den med en kontermutter, o calza ed esclusivamente per installazioni fisse.
(vridmoment M). SV - Förskruvningarna får endast användas för kabel utan armering eller
CS - Naroubujte roubové spojení do bloku nebo jej upevnìte pojistnou maticí, omflätning samt endast för fasta installationer.
(toèivý moment) CS - roubová spojení se smìjí pouívat výluènì pro kabely bez výztue
RU - Ââèíòèòü ðåçüáîâîé ýëåìåíò â êîðïóñ èëè çàêðåïèòü åãî êîíòðãàéêîé, nebo opøedení a jen k pevné instalaci.
(ìîìåíò çàòÿæêè Ì). RU - Ðåçüáîâûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ äîëæíû èñïîëüçîâàòüñÿ òîëüêî äëÿ
ïðîâîäîâ áåç êàáåëüíîé áðîíè èëè îáìîòêè, à òàêæå òîëüêî äëÿ
2 DE - Leitung einführen. ñòàöèîíàðíîãî ìîíòàæà.
EN - Put cable through.
FR - Introduire la conduite. 2 DE - Bei mehrmaliger Verwendung ist auf Unversehrtheit des Kunststoffein-
ES - Introducir el cable. satzes zu achten.
IT - Introdurre il cavo. EN - The plastic insert must be undamaged at multiple use.
SV - Skjut in ledningen. FR - En cas dutilisation à plusieurs reprises, veiller vous assurer que la garniture
CS - Zaveïte vedení en plastique ne soit pas endommagée.
RU - Ââåñòè êàáåëü. ES - Al usarse varias veces, se tiene que comprobar si está intacto el inserto de
plástico.
3 DE - Hutmutter festziehen,(Drehmoment M). IT - In caso di uso ripetuto, fare attenzione che la guarnizione di plastica non sia
EN - Tighten nutcap, (Torque M). danneggiata.
FR - Serrer lécrou borgne, (couple de serrage M). SV - Vid upprepad användning är det viktigt att kontrollera att plastinsatsen inte
ES - Apretar la tuerca de sombrerete, (par de giro M). har tagit skada.
IT - Stringere il dado cieco, (momento torcente M). CS - Pøi opakovaném pouití je tøeba dbát na to, aby nedolo k pokození
SV - Dra åt toppmuttern, (vridmoment M). plastové vloky
CS - Utáhnìte uzavøenou matici, (toèivý moment) RU - Ïðè ìíîãîêðàòíîì èñïîëüçîâàíèè ïðîâåðÿòü íåïîâðåæäåííîñòü
RU - Ïðî÷íî çàòÿíóòü êîëïà÷êîâóþ ãàéêó, (ìîìåíò çàòÿæêè Ì). ïëàñòìàññîâîãî ñåðäå÷íèêà.
568
Fig. 5
DE - Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer Klemmenleisten)
EN - Tightening torques for screwed electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for terminal strips)
FR - Couples de serrages des bornes de la plaque à bornes (ne concerne pas les borniers)
ES - Pares de apriete para uniones atornilladas de las conexiones eléctricas en la placa de bornes (exceptuando las regletas de bornes).
IT - Coppie di serraggio per le viti di attacco di collegamenti elettrici / dei portamorsetti (escluse morsettiere)
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för motorns huvudkopplingsplintar. (utom för hjälpkopplingsplintar)
CS - Utahovací momenty pro roubové spoje elektrických pøípojek svorkovnice (mimo svorkových lit)
RU - Ìîìåíòû çàòÿæêè ðåçüá. ñîåäèíåíèé ýë. ïîäêëþ÷åíèé-ïîäêëþ÷åíèéíà êëåììíûõ ùèòàõ(êðîìå ïîäêëþ÷åíèé íà êëåììíîé ïëàíêå)
Gewinde- Æ / Thread- Æ
Æ du filetage / Æ de la rosca
Diametro del filetto / Gängdimeter M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
Závit-Æ / ÐåçüáàÆ
Anziehdrehmoment
Tightening torque
Couple de serrage
min 0,8 1,8 2,7 5,5 9 14 27
Par de apriete Nm
Coppia di serraggio
Åtdragningsmoment
Utahovací moment max 1,2 2,5 4 8 13 20 40
Çàòÿæíîé ìîìåíò
Fig. 5.1
DE - Anziehdrehmoment der Kabelverschraubungen aus Metall (*) und Kunststoff (**) für direkten Anbau am Motor. Bei weiteren
Verschraubungen (z. B. Reduzierungen) sind die entsprechenden Momente gemäß Tabelle anzuwenden.
EN - Tightening torques of the cable screw connections made from metal (*) and plastic (**) for direct installation on the motor.
For other threaded attachments (e.g. reducers) the appropriate torques in the tables are to be used.
FR - Le couple de serrage des passe-câble à vis en métal (*)et en plastique (**) pour le montage direct sur le moteur.
Pour les autres raccords à vis (par ex. réductions), il faut utiliser les couples correspondants indiqués dans le tableau.
ES - Par de apriete de los racores para cables en metal (*) y plástico (**) para el montaje directo en el motor.
Tratándose de otras atornilladuras (p.ej., reductores), se tienen que aplicar los pares correspondientes de conformidad con el cuadro.
IT - Coppia di serraggio dei collegamenti a vite dei cavi in metallo (*) e materiale sintetico (**) per il montaggio diretto sul motore.
In caso di altri collegamenti a vite (p. es. riduzioni), applicare i momenti riportati nella tabella.
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för kabelförskruvningar av metall (*) och plast (**) för direkt montering på motorn.
För övriga förskruvningar (t ex reduceringar) gäller de i tabellen angivna åtdragningsmomenten
CS - Utahovací toèivý moment kabelových roubových spojení z kovu (*) a O-Ring - Dicke
plastu (**) k pøímé montái na motor. U dalích roubových spojení (napøíklad (*) (**) Joint torique
redukcí) pouijte pøísluné momenty uvedené v tabulce. junta tórica
RU - Ìîìåíòû çàòÿæêè ðåçüáîâûõ êàáåëüíûõ ââîäîâ èç ìåòàëëà (*) è Guarnizione a o-ring
ïëàñòìàññû (**) äëÿ íåïîñðåäñòâåííîé óñòàíîâêè íà ýëåêòðîäâèãàòåëå. O-ring
Ïðè èñïîëüçîâàíèè äîïîëíèòåëüíûõ ðåçüáîâûõ ýëåìåíòîâ (íàïðèìåð ïåðåõîäíûõ
Nm Nm O-krouek
äåòàëåé) ñîáëþäàòü ìîìåíòû çàòÿæêè, ïðèâåäåííûå â òàáëèöå. Î-êîëüöî
min max min max mm
M 12 x 1,5 4 6
M 16 x 1,5 5 7,5 2 3
M 25 x 1,5 6 9 2
M 32 x 1,5
8 12 4 6
M 40 x 1,5
Fig. 5.2
DE - Anziehdrehmomente für Schrauben am elektrischen Anschlußkasten, Lagerschilden und Schutzleiter-Schraubverbindungen
EN - Tightening torques for screws at the electrical terminal box, endshileds and protectice conductor-screw connections.
FR - Couples de serrage pour vis - sur larmoire électrique, .flasques et raccords à vis de fils de protection
ES - Momentos de apriete para los tornillos en la caja de conexiones eléctricas, placas de los cojinetes y conexiones del conductor de puesta a tierra y conexiones roscadas.
IT - Coppie di serraggio per avvitamenti alla scatola di giunzione elettrica, scudi e collegamenti a vite del conduttore di protezione
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för skruvar på kopplingsskåp, lagerskyltar och skyddsledaranslutningar
CS - Utahovací momenty roubù v elektrickém pøípojném pouzdøe, loisek ve títu a roubových spojení na ochranném vedení.
RU - Çàòÿæíûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ äëÿ âèíòîâ íà êëåììíîé êîðîáêå, ùèòîâ ïîäøèïíèêîâ è ðåçüá. ñîåäèíåíèé çàùèòíîé ïðîâîäêè
Gewinde- Æ / Thread- Æ
Æ du filetage / Æ de la rosca
Diametro del filetto / Gängdimeter M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Závit-Æ / ÐåçüáàÆ
Anziehdrehmoment
Tightening torque
Couple de serrage
min 2 3,5 6 16 28 46 110 225
Par de apriete Nm
Coppia di serraggio
Åtdragningsmoment
Utahovací moment max 3 5 9 24 42 70 165 340
Çàòÿæíîé ìîìåíò
DE - Die obigen Anziehdrehmomente gelten soweit keine anderen Werte angegeben sind!
EN - The above values of tightening torque are applicable unless alternative values are given elsewhere.
FR - Les couples de serrage indiqués ci-dessus sont valables pour autant quaucune valeur spécifique ne soit donnée.
ES - Estos pares de apriete rigen mientras no se indiquen otros.
IT - Le coppie di serraggio indicate qui di sopra sono valide se non sono indicati altri valori.
SV - Ovanstående åtdragningsmoment gäller om ej andra värden angivits!
CS - Výe uvedené utahovací momenty platí, pokud nejsou udány ádné jiné hodnoty!
RU - Âûøåóêàçàííûå ìîìåíòû- äåéñòâèòåëüíû â ñëó÷àå îòñóòñâèÿ äðóãèõ óêàçàíèé

569
Fig. 6
DE - Anschließbare Querschnitt je nach Klemmengröße (ggf. reduziert durch Größe der Leitungseinführungen)
EN - Conductor cross-sections connectable to the various terminals (may be reduced by size of cable entries)
FR - Sections raccordables suivant la taille de la borne (réduction éventuelle par la taille des entrées de câbles)
ES - Sección conectable según tamaño del borne (en caso dado, más pequeña debido al tamaño de las entradas de línea)
IT - Diametri dei collegamenti a sec. delle misure dei morsetti (eventualmente sono ridotte le dimensioni delle aperture per i conduttori)
SV - Anslutningsbara ledarareor för olika klämstorlekar (ev. reducerat med hänsyn till genomföringens storlek)
CS - Pøipojitelný prùøez podle velikosti svorek (pøíp. zmenený velikostí kabelových vývodek)
RU - Ïîäêëþ÷àåìîå ñå÷åíèå â çàâèñèìîñòè îò ðàçìåðà êëåìì (ïðè íåîáõîäèìîñòè óìåíüøàåòñÿ çà ñ÷åò ðàçìåðà ââîäà)
... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2
DIN 46 234 DIN 46 234
Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabelschuh Anschluß eines einzelnen Leiters Anschluß von zwei etwa gleich dik- Anschluß eines einzelnen Leiters Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabelschuh
ist dieser nach unten abzuwinkeln! mit Klemmbügel. ken Leitern mit Klemmbügel. unter äußerem Erdungswinkel. unter äußerem Erdungswinkel.
If connections are made with DIN Connecting a single conductor If connections are made with DIN
cable lugs, bend the cable lugs Connecting a single conductor with Connecting two conductors of al- under the outer earthing angle. cable lugs, under the outer ear-
downwards. a terminal clip. most equal thickness with a terminal thing angle.
Lorsque le raccordement est clip. Raccordement d'un seul Lorsque le raccordement est
réalisé par cosses DIN, celles-ci Raccordement d'un seul conduc- Deux conducteurs de diamètre à conducteur à une équerre extérieu- réalisé par cosses DIN, à une
doivent être pliées vers le bas. teur à une borne à étrier. peu pré équivalents, raccordés à re de mise à la terre. équerre extérieure de mise à la
une borne à étrier. terre.
Si la conexión se efectúa con Conexión de un solo conductor bajo Si la conexión se efectúa con
terminales para cables DIN, habrá Conexión de un solo conductor con Conexión de dos conductores de el angular exterior de puesta a tierra. terminales para cables DIN, bajo
que doblarlos hacia abajo. un pisacables. diámetro aproximadamente igual, el angular exterior de puesta a tierra.
con un pisacables. Allacciamento di ogni singolo con- Nel collegamento con capocorda
Nel collegamento con capocorda Allacciamento di ogni singolo conduttore sotto angolare di messa a conforme alle norme DIN, sotto
conforme alle norme DIN, questo duttore con staffa. Allacciamento di due conduttori di terra esterno. angolare di messa a terra esterno.
va piegato verso il basso. stesso o pressocchè indentico Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl.
Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl. Anslutning av en enkelledare med spessore con staffa. Anslutning av en enkelledare under DIN under extern jordningsvinkel.
DIN skall denna bockas nedåt. klämbygel. Anslutning av två ungefär lika tjocka extern jordningsvinkel.
ledare med klämbygel. Pøi pøipojení kabelovým oèkem
Pøi pøipojení kabelovým oèkem Pøipojení jednotlivého vodièe Pøipojení jednotlivého vodièe pøi DIN pøi vnìjím zemnícím
DIN musí být toto ohnuto smìrem upínací objímkou. Pøipojení dvou zhruba stejnì vnìjím zemnícím úhelníku. úhelníku.
dolù! silných vodièù upínací objímkou.
Ïîäêëþ÷åíèå îäèíî÷íîãî Ïîäêëþ÷åíèå îäèíî÷íîãî Ïðè ïîäêëþ÷åíèè ñ ïîìîùüþ
Ïðè ïîäêëþ÷åíèè ñ ïîìîùüþ ïðîâîäà ñ ïîìîùüþ çàæèìà. Ïîäêëþ÷åíèå äâóõ ïðèìåðíî ïðîâîäà ïîä âíåøíèì DIN- êàáåëüíîãî íàêîíå÷íèêà ïîä
DIN- êàáåëüíîãî íàêîíå÷íèêà åãî îäèíàêîâûõ ïî òîëùèíå çàçåìëÿþùèì óãîëêîì. âíåøíèì çàçåìëÿþùèì óãîëêîì.
ñëåäóåò çàìîòàòü âíèç. ïðîâîäîâ ñ ïîìîùüþ çàæèìà.
Fig. 6.1 Fig. 6.2
Fig. 7
DE - Lagerwechsel
EN - Changing bearings
FR - Remplacement des roulements
ES - Cambio de cojinetes
IT - Sostituzione dei cuscinetti
SV - Lagerbyte
CS - Výmìna loiska
RU - çàìåíà ïîäøèïíèêà Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout darbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione della centratura nullestremità dalbero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen l axeltappen)
Vloená podloka(ochrana centrování na konci høídele)
Ïðîìåæóòî÷íàÿ øàéáà (çàùèòà öåíòðèðóþùåãî ýëåìåíòà â êîíöå âàëà)
570
Fig. 8
DE - Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen
EN - Pressing on and pulling off drive elements
FR - Emmanchement et extraction dorganes de transmission
ES - Calado y extracción de órganos de transmisión
IT - Calettamento ed estrazione degli elementi di transmissione Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
SV - På- och avdragning av drivdon Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
CS - Nasazování a stahování hnacích prvkù Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout darbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
RU - Ìîíòàæ è ñíÿòèå âåäîìûõ ýëåìåíòîâ
Spessore (protezione della centratura nullestremità dalbero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen l axeltappen)
Vloená podloka (ochrana centrování na konci høídele
Ïðîìåæóòî÷íàÿ øàéáà (çàùèòà öåíòðèðóþùåãî ýëåìåíòà â êîíöå âàëà)
DE - Zum Aufziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplung, Zahnrad, Riemenscheibe usw.), Gewinde im Wellenende benutzen und - sofern
möglich - Abtriebselemente nach Bedarf erwärmen. Zum Abziehen geeignete Vorrichtung verwenden. Es dürfen beim Auf- und Abziehen
keine Schläge (z.B. mit Hammer oder ähnlichem) oder größere als die laut Katalog zulässigen radialen oder axialen Kräfte über das
Wellenende auf die Motorlager übertragen werden.
EN -Use the tapped hole provided in the end of the shaft for fitting drive components such as couplings, gearwheels, belt pulleys, etc. and,
if possible, heat the components as necessary. Use a suitable puller tool for removing the components. Do not strike the components,
e.g. with a hammer or similar tool, when fitting or removing them and do not exert more than the maximum value of radial or axial
force - according to the catalog - transmitted to the motor bearings through the shaft extension.
FR - Pour monter les organes de transmission (accouplements, roues dentées, poulies à courroie, etc.), utiliser le taraudage du bout darbre.
Au besoin et lorsque cela est possible, chauffer les organes de transmission. Pour le démontage, utiliser un dispositif approprié. Aucun
coup (par ex. marteau) supérieur aux efforts axiaux et radiaux admissibles mentionnés au catalogue ne doit être transmis par larbre
aux roulements en cours de montage ou de démontage.
ES - Para calar los órganos de transmisión (acoplamientos, rueda dentada, polea, etc.) utilizar la rosca en el extremo del eje y - siempre
que sea posible - calentar convenientemente dichos órganos. Utilizar el dispositivo adecuado para la extracción. Durante las operaciones
de calado o extracción no golpear (p. ej. con martillo o similar) ni ejercer sobre los cojinetes del motor a través del extremo del eje
fuerzas axiales o radiales superiores a las admisibles según catálogo.
IT - Per calettare gli elementi di transmissione (giunti, ruote dentate, pulegge, ecc.), utilizzare il foro filettato nellestremità dalbero e,
se possibile, riscaldare gli elementi di transmissione . Per lestrazione vanno adoperati attrezzi adatti. Sono da evitare colpi o martellate,
e forze radiali o assiali trasmesse dallestremità dalbero ai cuscinetti maggiori di quelle consentite sec. il catalogo.
SV - Använd axeltappens gänga vid pådragning av drivdon (koppling, kugghjul, remskiva etc) och värm om möjligt upp drivdonen om så behövs.
Använd lämpliga verktyg för avdragningen. Några slag (t.ex. med hammare e.dyl.) får aldrig förekomma vid på- och avdragning, och
radiella och axiella krafter som är större än de som anges i katalogen får inte överföras till motorlagren via axeltappen.
CS -Pro nasazování hnacích prvkù (spojka, ozubené kolo, øemenice a pod.) pouijte závit na konci høídele a pokud to je moné zahøejte podle
potøeby hnací prvky. Pøi stahování pouijte vhodný pøípravek. Pøi nasazování a stahování nesmí být pouívány ádné údery (napø. kladivem
a podobnì) nebo pøenáeny pøes konec høídele na loisko motoru ádné radiální nebo axiální síly vìtí, ne je uvedeno v katalogu.
RU - Äëÿ ìîíòàæà âåäîìûõ ýëåìåíòîâ (ðåäóêòîð, çóá÷àòûé ðåìåíü, ðåìåííàÿ øàéáà è ò.ä.) èñïîëüçîâàòü ðåçüáó íà êîíöå âàëà ïî
âîçìîæíîñòè íàãðåâàòü âåäîìûå ýëåìåíòû, åñëè åñòü íåîáõîäèìîñòü. Äëÿ ñíÿòèÿ èñïîëüçîâàòü ñïåöèàëüíîå ïðèñïîñîáëåíèå. Äëÿ
ñíÿòèÿ èëè ìîíòàæà ñëåäóåò èçáåãàòü óäàðîâ(íàïðèìåð ìîëîòêîì èëè ïîäîáíûìè ïðåäìåòàìè). Íåëüçÿ äîïóñêàòü, ÷òîáû ÷åðåç êîíåö
âàëà íà ìîòîð ïåðåäàâàëèñü àêñèàëüíûå èëè ðàäèàëüíûå ñèëû, áîëüøèå ÷åì óêàçàííûå â êàòàëîãå.
Fig. 9
DE - Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder
EN - Balancing with half featherkey TP
FR - Equilibrage avec demi-clavette
ES - Equilibrado con media chaveta
IT - Equilibratura con mezza chiavetta
SV - Balansering med halv kil
CS - Vyváení polovièními lícovanými pery
RU - Áàëàíñèðîâêà ñ ïîëîâèíîé ïðèçìàòè÷åñêîé

571
Fig. 10 BG 90 S,L
S
90
BG 90
L
BG
S
90
BG 90
L
BG
Automation & Drives

Standard Drives
D-91056 Erlangen
Änderungen vorbehalten / Subject to change without prior notice / Sous réserve de modifications / Sujeto a modificaciones/ Con riserva di
modifiche/ Förbehåll för ändringar / Zmìny vyhrazeny / ñîõðàíÿåòñÿ ïðàâî íà
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bestell-Nr. / Order No.: 5 610 70000 10 000 a

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
11.03 36 De-En-Fr-Es-It-Sv-Cs-Ru
572
Typ / Types / Type / Tipo / Tipo / Type / Type / Tipos / ³õŒÿ / Type / Tyyppi /
Typy / Type / TEGUND / Típus / Tip / Typ / Typ / Tüüp / Tips / Tipas / Tipi
1LA, 1LB, 1LC, 1LD, 1LF, 1LG, 1LL, 1LN, 1LP, 1LS, 1LT, 1LV, 1PG, 1PB, 1PF,
1PK, 1PP, 1PQ, 1PR
DE Sicherheits- und Inbetriebnahmehinweise für Niederspannungs-Asynchronmotoren

(gemäß Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG) Achshöhe: 56 bis 450 mm
Information on safety and commissioning for low voltage asynchronous motors

EN (in accordance with L. V. directive 73/23/EEC) Shaft height: 56 to 450 mm
Consignes de sécurité et de mise en service pour moteurs asynchrones à basse tension

FR (selon directive basse tension 73/23/CEE) Hauteur d'axe: 56 à 450 mm
Advertencias de seguridad y de puesta en marcha para motores asíncronos de baja tensión

ES (según las Directrices para baja tensión 73/23/CEE) Altura del eje: 56 ..... 450 mm
Avvertenze per la sicurezza e la messa in servizio di motori asincroni in bassa tensione

IT (conformemente alla direttiva per impianti impiegati in bassa tensione 73/23/CEE) Altezza asse: 56 ..... 450 mm
Säkerhets- och idrifttagningsanvisningar för lågspännings-asynkronmotorer

SV (enl. lågspänningsdirektivet 73/23/EEC) Axelhöjd: 56 ..... 450 mm
Aanwijzingen voor de veiligheid en het inbedrijfstellen van laagspanningsmotoren

NL (volgens Laagspanningsrichtlijn 73/23/EEG) Ashoogte: 56 ..... 450 mm
Instruções de segurança e de colocação em funcionamento para motores asíncronos de baixa tensão

PT (em conformidade com a directiva de baixa tensão 73/23/CEE) Altura do eixo: 56 a 450 mm
‹å®ã¥ªÿ ã¯¦ ½®º ¦÷ø¦ðª¥¦ÿ ¦¯ ½® æ¢÷® ÷ª ðª¯½Œ¾¼ã¥¦ ½þº ¦÷³ã¿¼Œºþº ¯º®½±¼þº ¿¦¹®ð±ÿ ½¡÷®ÿ
EL (÷³¹øþº¦ ¹ª ½Œº ¦ºŒº¯÷¹² õª¼¥ ¿¦¹®ð±ÿ ½¡÷®ÿ 73/23/Š‹˜). 56 ... 450 mm
Sikkerheds- og ibrugtagningsanvisninger for lavspændings-asynkronmotorer

DA (i henhold til lavspændingsdirektiv 73/23/EØF) Akselhøjde: 56 til 450 mm
Pienjänniteoikosulkumoottoreiden turvallisuus- ja käyttöönotto-ohjeet

FI (pienjännitedirektiivin 73/23/ETY mukaisesti) Akselikorkeus: 56 ..... 450 mm
Pokyny o bezpečnosti a uvádění do provozu nízkonapěťových asynchronních motorů

CS (podle směrnice pro nízká napětí 73/23/EWG) Osové výšky: 56 až 450 mm
Az alacsonyfeszültségű aszinkron-motorokkal kapcsolatos biztonsági, és indítással kapcsolatos információk

HU (az L. V. 73/23/EEC direktíva szerint) Tengelymagasság: 56 - 450 mm
Informacije o varnosti in uporabi za nizkonapetostne asinhrone motorje

SL (v skladu s smernico L. V. 73/23/EEC) Višina osi: 56 do 450 mm
Informácie o bezpečnosti a uvedení do prevádzky pre nízkonapäťové asynchrónne motory

SK (podľa smernice L. V. 73/23/EEC) Dĺžka hriadeľa: 56 až 450 mm
Informacje dotyczące bezpieczeństwa i konfekcjonowania niskonapięciowych silników asynchronicznych

PL (zgodnie z dyrektywą L. V. 73/23/EEC) Wysokość wału: 56 do 450mm
ET Madalpinge-asünkroonmootorite ohutusteave ja käikuandmine

(vastavalt madalpingeelektriseadmete direktiivile 73/23/EEC) Veovõlli kõrgus: 56–450 mm
LV Informācija par drošību un zemsprieguma asinhrono motoru nodošanu ekspluatācijā

(atbilstoši direktīvai par zemspriegumu 73/23/EEC) Vārpstas augstums: 56–450 mm
Informacija apie žemos įtampos asinchroninių variklių saugą ir eksploatavimą

LT (pagal L. V. direktyvą 73/23/EEC) Veleno aukštis: nuo 56 iki 450 mm
MT Tagħrif dwar is-sigurtà u tħaddim ta' muturi asinkroni b'vultaġġ baxx

(b'mod konformi mad-direttiva L.V 73/23/KEE) L-għoli tax-xaft: 56 sa 450 mm
Ausgabe / Edition 06.2004 Bestell - Nr. / Order No.: 5 610 70000 38 006
DEUTSCH / ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / ESPAÑOL / ITALIANO / SVENSKA / NEDERLANDS / PORTUGUÊS / ελληνιΚα / DANSK / SUOMI / Česky / Magyar /
Slovenščina / Slovensky / POLSKI / EESTI / Latviski / Lietuviškai / Malti
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1

573
ENGLISH EN
1 General information 5 Electrical connection
Electric motors have dangerous voltage-carrying and rotating Work is only permitted to be carried out by qualified specialists on
components as well as surfaces that may become hot. All work the stationary motor, while disconnected and prevented from
involved in the transport, connection, commissioning and regular being switched on again. This also applies for the auxiliary power
maintenance must be carried out by qualified, responsible circuits (e.g. Anti-condensation heaters).
specialists (note VDE 0105; IEC 364). Improper behaviour may result Check that the equipment is potential-free!
in serious injury and damage to property. The applicable national, If the tolerance limits are exceeded that are specified in EN
local and works regulations and requirements must be complied 60034, part 1 / IEC 34-1 (voltage ± 5%, frequency ± 2%, shape of
with. curve, symmetry) the heating effect is increased and the
electromagnetic compatibility is affected. Please note the
2 Intended use specifications on the rating plate and the connection diagram in the
These motors are intended for commercial installations. They comply terminal box.
with the harmonized standards of the EN60034 (VDE 0530) series. Connections must be made in such a way as to ensure that a
Utilization in areas subject to explosion hazard is not permitted, permanently safe electrical connection is maintained (no protruding
unless expressly intended for this purpose (see additional notes). In wire ends); use the corresponding cable end pieces. Create a safe
certain special cases, for example, on use in non-commercial earth continuity connection.
installations, if requirements are more strict (e.g. protection against See Fig. 1 for the tightening torques for terminal board connections.
contact with children’s fingers), it is the responsibility of the customer Clearences in air between bare live parts themselves and between
to ensure compliance on installing the equipment. bare live parts and earth must be ≥ 5,5 mm (Urated ≤ 690 V) .
The motors are rated for ambient temperatures of -20°C to +40°C and
site altitudes ≤ 1000 m above sea level. Any contradictory It must be ensured that the terminal box does not contain foreign
information on the rating plate must be observed. The conditions on bodies, dirt or humidity. Seal any unused cable entry openings
site must correspond to all rating plate specifications. against dust and water.
Inlets in the terminal box (see DIN 42925), other open inlets must be
Low voltage motors are components for installation in machinery sealed with an O-ring or a suitable flat gasket, and the terminal box
in terms of the Machine directive 89/392/EEC. Commissioning itself must be sealed with the original seal so that it is dustproof and
must not take place until it has been proved that the end product watertight.
conforms with this guideline (please note EN 60204-1). See Fig. 2.1 for the tightening torques for cable glands and Fig. 3 for
other screws.
3 Transport and storage Secure the featherkey on test operation without drive components.
In the case of damage determined after delivery this must be For motors with brakes, check that the brakes are operating perfectly
immediately reported to the transport company; if necessary the before commissioning.
plant is not to be put into commission. During transportation all the
available lifting eyes in the motor are to be used and be done up tight 6 Operation
when fitted! They are only designed and built for the weight of the Vibration levels of vr m s ≤ 3.5 mm/s (PN ≤ 15 kW) or vr m s ≤ 4.5 mm/s
motor. Do not load additionally. If necessary use suitable adequately (PN > 15 kW) are quite acceptable in the coupled state.
dimensioned transporting means (for example, rope guides). If deviations from normal operation occur - e.g. increased
Remove existing shipping braces before commissioning; and reuse temperatures, noises, vibration - the motor should be switched off
for subsequent transport. If motors are stored, a dry, dust-free and in the event of doubt. Determine the causes and contact the
low vibration (vr m s ≤ 0.2 mm/s) environment is important (to avoid manufacturer if necessary. Do not disconnect protective equipment,
bearing standstill damage). On long-term storage, the regrease even under test operation.
interval of the bearings is reduced. Under dirty operating conditions, clean the air channels regularly.
The state of the grease is to be checked when storing for more than Open any closed condensate water holes from time to time!
12 months. Should it be determined that the grease has become Irrespective of the number of operating hours, a motor which is in
contaminated (penetration of condensation water leads to changes in use should have its bearing replaced every 3 years because of the
the consistency of the grease) then the grease must be replaced. reduction in effectiveness of the grease.
For motors without regreasing points, bearings and/or the grease
Insulation resistance are to be replaced in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
The minimum insulation resistance of new, cleaned or repaired at least every three years.
windings should be 10 MΩ to earth For motors with regreasing points, the instructions on the
Check the insulation resistance before commissioning. For values lubrication data plate must be observed! Regreasing should be
≤ 0.5 MΩ/kV design voltage dry the windings. performed on running motors!
Damage will be caused when operating at lower than minimum radial
4 Installation stress in the case of motors with cylindrical roller bearings for higher
After installation, the screwed-in lifting eyes should either be screwed radial load. The radial stress is to be minimum 30 % of the permissible
in tightly or removed! radial stress in operation (see catalogue).
Ensure an even underlying surface, good foot or flange fixing and In the case of motors with separate ventilation, the separately-
precise alignment for direct coupling. It is important to ensure that driven fan must be switched on throughout motor operation.
the mounting conditions do not cause resonance with the rotational
frequency and the doubled supply frequency. Turn the rotor by hand 7 Further information
and listen for any unusual grinding noises. Check the direction of Information about any additional equipment, such as the different
rotation in the decoupled state (note section 5). manufacturers’ instructions for cable connections including sealing
Only mount or remove drive components (belt pulley, coupling, etc.) elements, shall be observed. More information is available in our
using suitable tools (heat up), and cover to shield against contact. detailed operating and maintenance instructions. On request you will
Avoid unpermissible belt tensions (see catalogue and technical data). be sent further details if you state the type and machine number or,
Balance see shaft end face or the ratings plate (H = Half key you can find these under www.siemens.com/motors.
balancing, F = Full-key balancing, N = Balancing without featherkey) These notes on safety and commissioning must be retained for future
DIN IEC ISO 8821. Check the balance when fitting the drive element! reference!
For use or storage outside, it is recommended that the motor is
installed under a sheltering object or fitted with an additional cover to
avoid the long-term effects of direct sunlight, rain, snow, ice or dust.
Where shaft ends face upwards water must not be allowed to enter
along the shaft.
Do not obstruct ventilation! Discharged air, also from neighbouring

equipment, must not be sucked in again immediately.

574
Fig. 1
DE - Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer Klemmenleisten)
EN - Tightening torques for screwed connections for the electrical terminals - terminal board connections (apart from terminal strips)
FR - Couples de serrage pour raccords à vis des connexions électriques - raccords de tablette à bornes (sauf barrettes de raccordement)
ES - Momentos de par de apriete para las atornilladuras de las conexiones eléctricas – conexiones del tablero de bornes (excepto regletas de bornes)
IT - Coppie di serraggio per i raccordi a vite degli allacciamenti elettrici – allacciamenti alla morsettiera (eccetto listelli di raccordo)
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för de elektriska anslutningarnas skruvanslutningar klämanslutningar (utom klämlister)
NL - Aantrekmomenten voor schroefverbindingen van de elektrische aansluitingen – klembordaansluitingen (behalve klemlijsten)
PT - Momentos de aperto das uniões aparafusadas das ligações eléctricas – ligações da placa de bornes (réguas de bornes exteriores)
EL - Ελκτικές ροπές περιστροφής για συνδέσεις κοχλίων των ηλεκτρικών συνδέσεων – Συνδέσεις ακροδεκτών (εκτός των παρυφών των ακροδεκτών)
DA - Tiltrækningsdrejningsmomenter tilskrueforbindelser af elektriske tilkoblinger – klemmebrættilkoblinger (uden klemmelister)
FI - Sähköliitäntöjen ruuviliitosten - pinnelevyliitäntöjen (paitsi liitinkiskojen) vääntömomentit
ČS - Utahovací momenty pro šroubová spojení elektrických přípojů – přípojů na svorkovnici (mimo svěracích lišt)
HU - Az elektromos érintkezők – csatlakozótábla csavaros bekötéseinek meghúzási nyomatékai (kivéve a szorítósávot)
SL - Pritezni navori za električne priključke – povezave na priključni plošči (razen priključnih trakov)
SK - Uťahovacie momenty skrutkovaných spojov pre elektrické svorkovnice – dosky spojov svorkovnice (vedľa pásov svorkovnice)
PL - Momenty docisku przykręcanych połaczeń wyprowadzeń elektrycznych – połączenia tablicy rozdzielczej (poza listwą zaciskową)
ET - Ühendusklemmide kruviliidete pingutusmomendid – klemmikarbiühendused (välimised ühendusklemmid)
LV - Elektrospaiļu skrūvējamo savienojumu savilces griezes momenti — spaiļu plates savienojumi (neskaitot spaiļu sloksnes)
LT - Elektrinių kontaktų įsuktų sujungimų suveržimo jėga – ryšiams išvadų skydelyje (išskyrus kontaktų skydams)
MT - It-torque ta’ l-issikkar għal konnessjonijiet invitati għat-terminali ta’ l-elettriku – konnessjonijiet terminali tal-bord
(barra mill-istrippi terminali)
DE - Gewinde ∅ FI - Kierre- ∅
EN - Thread- ∅ CS - Ø závitu
FR - ∅ du filetage HU - Menet- ∅
ES - ∅ de la rosca SL - Navoj-∅
IT - Diametro del filetto SK - Závit- ∅
M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
SV - Gängdimeter PL - Gwint ∅
NL - Schroefdraad- ∅ ET - Keere ∅
PT - rosca- ∅ LV - Vītne ∅
EL - Σπείρωµα LT - Sriegis ∅
DA - Gevind- ∅ MT - Hajta ∅
DE - Anziehdrehmoment FI - Vääntömomentti min
EN - Tightening torque CS - utahovací moment Eλάχ.
FR - Couple de serrage HU - Meghúzási nyomaték Min. 0,8 1,8 2,7 5,5 9 14 27

ES - Momento de par de apriete SL - Pritezni navor Lágmark
IT - Coppia di serraggio SK - Uťahovací moment
Nm
SV - Åtdragningsmoment PL - Moment docisku
NL - Aantrekmomenten ET - Pingutusmoment max
PT - Momento de aperto LV - Savilces griezes moments Μέγ 1,2 2,5 4 8 13 20 40
EL - Eλκτική ροπή περιστροφής LT - Užveržimo jėga maks.
DA - Tiltrækningsdrejningsmoment MT - Torque li jissikka Hámark
FIG. 2
DE - Ausschlagen der Öffnungen für Kabel und Leitungen im Anschlußkasten
BG 100...160L (1LA7/9, 1LP7/9, 1PP7/9)
EN - Knocking out the openings for cables and leads in the terminal box
FR - Rupture des membranes de fabrication aburant les entées de câbles et de
conducteurs sur la boîte á bornes
ES - Martillando las aberturas pasacables de la caja de bornes
IT - Asportare la pellicola per cavi e conduttori nella cassetta terminale
SV - Utslagning av öppningarna för kabel och ledningar i uttagslådan
NL - Het uitslaan van openingen voor kabels en leidingen in de aansluitkast
PT - Romper as passagens para cabos e condutores na caixa de ligação
EL - Ανοίγµατα για τοποθέτηση καλωδίων και αγωγών στο κουτί σύνδεσης
DA - Udslåning af åbningerne til kabler og ledninger i kabelkassen
FI - Liitäntälaatikon aukot lyödään auki johtoja varten
CS - Vyražení otvorů pro kabely a vedení ve svorkovnici
HU - A csatlakozódoboz kábel és vezetéknyílásainak megnyitása a
záródugók kiütésével
SL - Izbijanje odprtin za kable in priključke v priključni škatli
SK - Vyrazenie otvorov pre káble a vedenia v skrini svorkovnice DE - Ausbrechöffnung (Gußhaut)
PL - Wybijanie otworów na kable i przewody w puszce rozdzielczej EN - Cast iron skin
ET - Klemmikarbi läbiviiguavade avamine FR - Membrane de fabrication
LV - Kabeļu un pievadu atveru izsišana spaiļu kārbā ES - Membrana de fundición
LT - Skylių išgręžimas kabeliams ir šviesos diodams kontaktų blokelyje IT - Pellicola residua della colata
SV - Gjutskorpa
MT - Żarmar tal-ftuħ ta’ kejbils u wajers minn ġol-kaxxa tal-kurrent
NL - Het uitbreken van een opening (giethuid)
PT - Passagem (crosta de fundição) a romper
EL - Άνοιγµα (επιφάνεια χυτού)
DA - Åbning til at trykke ud (Støbehud)
FI - Irtimurrettava aukko (valupinta)
CS - Vylamovací otvor (“čepička”)
HU - Öntöttvas bevonat
SL - Škatla iz železne litine
SK - Odlievaný kovový povrch
PL - Powłoka metalowa
ET - Metallkesta ettevaltsitud (suletud) avad
LV - Čuguna apvalks
LT - Nulupkite geležinį apvalkalą
MT - Qoxra tal-fondut
22  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

575
FIG. 2.1
DE - Anziehdrehmoment der Kabelverschraubungen aus Metall (*) und Kunststoff (**) für direkten Anbau am Motor.
Bei weiteren Verschraubungen (z. B. Reduzierungen) sind die entsprechenden Momente gemäß Tabelle anzuwenden.
EN - Tightening torques of the cable screw connections made from metal (*) and plastic (**) for direct installation on the motor.
For other threaded attachments (e.g. reducers) the appropriate torques in the tables are to be used.
FR - Le couple de serrage des passe-câble à vis en métal (*) et en plastique (**) pour le montage direct sur le moteur.
Pour les autres raccords à vis (par ex. réductions), il faut utiliser les couples correspondants indiqués dans le tableau.
ES - Par de apriete de los racores para cables en metal (*) y plástico (**) para el montaje directo en el motor.
Tratándose de otras atornilladuras (p.ej., reductores), se tienen que aplicar los pares correspondientes de conformidad con el cuadro.
IT - Coppia di serraggio dei collegamenti a vite dei cavi in metallo (*) e materiale sintetico (**) per il montaggio diretto sul motore.
In caso di altri collegamenti a vite (p. es. riduzioni), applicare i momenti riportati nella tabella.
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för kabelförskruvningar av metall (*) och plast (**) för direkt montering på motorn.
För övriga förskruvningar (t ex reduceringar) gäller de i tabellen angivna åtdragningsmomenten
NE - Aanhaalkoppel van de kabelschroefverbindingen van metaal (*) en kunststof (**) voor de directe montage aan de motor.
Bij andere schroefverbindingen (bijv. reducties) dienen de desbetreffende koppels conform de tabel te worden gebruikt.
PT - Binários de aperto dos acoplamentos roscados de metal (*) e material sintético (**) para a montagem directa no motor.
Para os outros acoplamentos roscados (p.ex., reduções) devem ser empregados os respectivos binários, de acordo com a tabela.
EL - Ροπή σύσφιξης ενδεχοµένω πρόσθετων εξαρτηµάτων από µέταλλο (*) και πλαστικό (**) για απευθείας προσαρµογή στον κινητήρα.
Σε περίπτωση περισσοτέρων βιδωµάτων (π.χ. µειώσεις) να εφαρµόζετε τις ανάλογες ροπές σύσφιξης σύµφωνα µε τον πίνακα.
DA - Startmoment for kabelforskruninger af metal (*) og kunststof (**) for direkte tilbygning til motor.
Ved øvrige forskruninger (f.eks. reduceringer) anvendes momenterne i henhold til tabel.
FI - Kaapelien metallisten (*) ja muovisten (**) kierreliitäntöjen kiristysmomentit asennettaessa suoraan moottoriin.
Muille kierreliitännöille (esim. supistusosille) on käytettävä vastaavia momentteja taulukon mukaan.
ČS - Utahovací točivý moment kabelových šroubových spojení z kovu (*) a plastu (**) k přímé montáži na motor.
U dalších šroubových spojení (například redukcí) použijte příslušné momenty uvedené v tabulce.
HU - A kábel fém (*) és műanyag (**) csavarkötéseinek meghúzási nyomatékai közvetlenül a motoron.
A többi alkatrész (pl. reduktorok) csavarmenetes rögzítésénél a táblázatban megadott meghúzási nyomatékokat kell alkalmazni.
SL - Pritezni navori za vijačne kabelske priključke iz kovine (*) in plastike (**) za neposredno namestitev na motor.
Za druge navojne priključitve (kot so reduktorji) so ustrezni navori prikazani v tabeli.
SK - Uťahovacie momenty pre skrutky káblových spojov vyrobené z kovu (*) alebo umelej hmoty (**) pre priamu inštaláciu motora.
Pre ďalšie skrutkované doplnky (napr. redukcie) sú použité zodpovedajúce momenty uvedené v tabuľkách.
PL - Momenty docisku przykręcanych połączeń kabli z metalu (*) i plastiku (**) do bezpośredniej instalacji w silniku.
Dla innych połączeń gwintowych (np. reduktorów) należy stosować odpowiednie momenty podane w tabeli.
ET - Pingutusmomendid kaablite metallist (*) ja plastist (**) kruviühenduste jaoks otse mootorile paigaldamiseks.
Teiste keermeliidete (nt siirdemuhvid) puhul tuleb järgida tabelites toodud sobivaid pingutusmomente.
LV - Metāla (*) un plastmasas (**) kabeļu skrūvju savienojumu savilces griezes momenti, montējot tieši uz motora.
Citiem piederumiem ar vītni (piemēram, reduktoriem) ir jālieto tabulā norādītais atbilstošais griezes moments.
LT - Kabelio veržlės sujungimų, pagamintų iš metalo (*) ir plastiko (**) užveržimo jėga įdiegimui variklyje.
Kitiems sriegio prijungimams (pavyzdžiui, reduktoriams) naudojama atitinkama lentelėse nurodyta užveržimo jėga.
MT - Torques ta’ l-issikkar tal-konnessjonijiet invitati ta’ kejbil magħmula minn metall (*) u plastik (**) għal installazzjoni diretta fuq il-
magna. Għal tagħmir miżjud li fih kamin (p.e ridjuser) it-torques xierqa fit-tabelli jridu jintuaw.
DE - O-Ring-Dicke FI - O-renkaan paksuus

EN - O-Ring-Thickness CS - O-kroužek
FR - Joint torique HU - O gyűrű vastagsága
ES - junta tórica SL - Debelina tesnila
IT - Guarnizione a o-ring SK - Hrúbka O-krúžka
(*) (**)
SV - O-ring PL - Grubość O-Ring
NL - O-ring - dikte ET - O-rõngastihendi paksus
PT - Espessura de O-ring LV - Gredzena biezums
EL - ΠÜχοò δακτυλßου σε σχÞìα Ο LT - O-žiedo storumas
DA - O-ring – tykkelse MT - Hxuna ta' anell-O
Nm Nm
min max min max mm
M 12 x 1,5 4 6
M 16 x 1,5 5 7,5 2 3
M 25 x 1,5 6 9
M 32 x 1,5 2
8 12
M 40 x 1,5
4 6
M 50x 1,5
10 14
M 63 x 1,5
M 72 x 2 - - - - -

576
Fig. 3
DE - Anziehdrehmomente für Schrauben am elektrischen Anschlußkasten, Lagerschilden und Schutzleiter-Schraubverbindungen
EN - Tightening torques for screws at the electrical terminal box, end shields and screwed connections for protective conductors.
FR - Couples de serrage pour vis - sur l’armoire électrique, .flasques et raccords à vis de fils de protection
ES - Momentos de apriete para los tornillos en la caja de conexiones eléctricas, placas de los cojinetes y conexiones del conductor de
puesta a tierra y conexiones roscadas.
IT - Coppie di serraggio per avvitamenti alla scatola di giunzione elettrica, scudi e collegamenti a vite del conduttore di protezione
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för skruvar på kopplingsskåp, lagerskyltar och skyddsledaranslutningar
NL - Aantrekmomenten voor schroeven aan de elektrische aansluitkast, opslagborden en beschermgeleider-schroefverbindingen
PT - Momentos de aperto dos parafusos das caixas de terminais eléctricas, das placas dos rolamentos e das uniões aparafusadas dos
condutores de protecção.
EL - Ελκτικές ροπές περιστροφής γιά βίδες στο ηλεκτρικό κουτί σύνδεσης, πινακίδες αποθήκευσης και βιδωτές συνδέσης
προστατευτικών αγωγών.
DA - Tiltrækningsdrejningsmomenter til skruer på den elektriske kabelkassen, lagringsplader ogpreltråd-skrueforbindelser
FI - Sähköliitäntäkotelon, laakerikilpien ja maadoitusjohtimien ruuviliitosten vääntömomentit
ČS - Utahovací momenty šroubů v elektrickém přípojném pouzdře, ložisek ve štítu a šroubových spojení na ochranném vedení.
HU - A védőkábelek csavaros bekötéseinek meghúzási nyomatékai az elektromos csatlakozódoboznál és a zárópajzsoknál.
SL - Pritezni navori za vijake v škatli z električnimi priključki, končne ščitnike in vijačne priključke za zaščitne vodnike.
SK - Uťahovacie momenty pre skrutky na elektrickej svorkovnici, ukončenia krytov a skrutkované spoje pre ochranné uzemnenia.
PL - Momenty docisku śrub w puszce rozdzielczej, osłon końcówek oraz dokręcanych połączeń przewodników zabezpieczających.
ET - Ühendusklemmide kruviliidete, otsakaante ja kaitsemaandusjuhi kruviühenduste pingutusmomendid.
LV - Elektrospaiļu kārbas skrūvju, gala vāciņu un aizsargvadu skrūvējamo savienojumu savilces griezes momenti.
LT - Užveržimo jėga varžtams elektrinių kontaktų blokelyje, skydams ir suveržiamoms jungtims apsauginiuose konduktoriuose.
MT - Torques ta’ l-issikkar għal viti li jinsabu fil-kaxxa tal-kurrenti elettriċi, it-tarki ta’ protezzjoni li jinsabu fl-aħħar tal-wajers u
konnessjonijiet invitati għal kondutturi li jipproteġu.
DE - Gewinde ∅ FI - Kierre- ∅
EN - Thread- ∅ CS - Ø závitu
FR - ∅ du filetage HU - Menet- ∅
ES - ∅ de la rosca SL - Navoj-∅
IT - Diametro del filetto SK - Závit- ∅
M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
SV - Gängdimeter PL - Gwint ∅
NL - Schroefdraad- ∅ EST - Keere ∅
PT - rosca- ∅ LV - Vītne ∅
EL - Σπείρωµα LT - Sriegis ∅
DA - Gevind- ∅ MT - Hajta ∅
DE - Anziehdrehmoment FI - Vääntömomentti min
EN - Tightening torque CS - utahovací moment Eλάχ.
FR - Couple de serrage HU - Meghúzási nyomaték Min. 2 3,5 6 16 28 46 110 225

ES - Momento de par de apriete SL - Pritezni navor Lágmark
IT - Coppia di serraggio SK - Uťahovací moment Nm
SV - Åtdragningsmoment PL - Moment docisku max
NL - Aantrekmomenten ET - Pingutusmoment Μέγ
PT - Momento de aperto LV - Savilces griezes moments maks. 3 5 9 24 42 70 165 340
EL - Eλκτική ροπή περιστροφής LT - Užveržimo jėga Hámark
DA - Tiltrækningsdrejningsmoment MT - Torque li jissikka
DE - Die Anziehdrehmomente gelten soweit keine anderen Werte angegeben sind! Einwandfreie Werkzeuge sind zu verwenden!
EN - The tightening torques apply where other values are not indicated! Use only tools that are in perfect condition!
FR - Les couples de démarrage ci-dessus s’appliquent sauf indication d’autres valeurs! N’utilisez que des outils en parfait état de marche.
ES -¡Los momentos de par de apriete son válidos mientras no se indique otros valores! ¡Es necesario utilizar herramientas en perfecto
estado!
IT - Le suddette coppie di serraggio sono valide fintanto che non vengono indicati altri valori! Devono essere utilizzati utensili in
perfette condizioni!
SV - Ovanstående åtdragningsmoment gäller om ej andra värden angivits! Använd felfria verktyg
NL - Inzoverre geen andere waarden zijn vermeld, gelden de aantrekmomenten! Er moeten onbeschadigde werktuigen worden
gebruikt!
PT - Os momentos de aperto indicados são válidos, desde que não se indiquem valores diferentes! Utilizar sempre ferramentas em
bom estado!
EL - Οι ελκτικές ροπές περιστροφής ισχύουν εφόσον δεν έχουν δοθεί άλλες τιµές. Πρέπει να χρησιµοποιούνται άψογα εργαλεία.
DA - Tiltrækningsdrejningsmomenterne gælder for så vidt det er ikke opgitt andre værdier! Det skal bruges upåklagelige værktøj!
FI - Vääntömomentit ovat päteviä mikäli muita arvoja ei ole ilmoitettu! Käytä virheettömiä työkaluja!
ČS - Utahovací momenty platí, pokud nejsou udány jiné hodnoty! Používejte jen bezvadné nářadí!
HU - A meghúzási nyomatékokat akkor kell alkalmazni, ha más értékek nem lettek megjelölve! Csak hibátlan állapotú szerszámot
szabad használni!
SL - Pritezni navori veljajo povsod, kjer druga vrednost ni naznačena! Uporabljajte le brezzihna orodja!
SK - Uťahovacie momenty použite tam, kde nie sú určené iné hodnoty! Používajte iba náradie vo výbornom stave!
PL - Te momenty docisku obowiązują tam, gdzie nie podano innych wartości! Należy używać wyłącznie narzędzi w doskonałym stanie
technicznym!
ET - Need pingutusmomendid kehtivad juhul, kui väärtused on jäetud märkimata! Kasutage ainult täiesti korras tööriistu!
LV - Šie savilces griezes momenti jālieto, ja nav norādītas citas vērtības! Izmantojiet tikai nevainojamā stāvoklī esošus rīkus!
LT - Pateikta užveržimo jėga tinkama tik tada, kai kitos vertės nenurodytos! Naudokite tik tvarkingus įrankius!
MT - It-torques ta’ l-issikkar japplikaw fejn valuri oħra m’humiex indikati! Uża biss għodda li tinsab f’kundizzjoni perfetta.
Automation & Drives

Standard Drives
D-91056 Erlangen
Änderungen vorbehalten / Subject to change without prior notice
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bestell-Nr. / Order No.: 5 610 70000 38 006
DE / EN / FR / ES / IT / SV / NL / PT / EL / DA / FI / ČS / HU / SL / SK / PL / ET / LV / LT / MT
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
24  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 06.04 24
577
CHAPTER 7.R.9
SHUT-OFF FLAPS
578
CHAPTER 7.R.9.1
PNEUMATIC OPERATION
579
Butterfly valves Type PZR
with -pneumatic-actuators
Special Features
Butterfly valves of type PZR show the
following special features:
– Collar vulcanised onto carrier ring
– Multiple sealed spindle
– Disk in stainless steel 1.4408
(CF8M)
– Open/closed position indicator
– Direct-mounting control valve
Special types
The following spezial types can be
supplied on request:
– Corrosion resistant actuators
– Extended temperature range
– Seat seal made of Viton und Teflon
– Alternatively equipped with
electrical actuator (type EZR) or
manual lever/gear operation (type
HZR)
– LUG-type
Product Description
Single part butterfly valve centrally pivoted and flowfriendly dimensioned. Sealed closure
in both flow directions with exchangeable seal vulcanised onto a carrier ring.
The butterfly valve is pneumatically driven and available in double or single acting
construction. On customer request the butterfly valve will be configured with spring
loaded open or closed default position. The butterfly valve is designed for flange clamping
according to DIN 2501.
The pneumatic control of the actuator is selectable realised with either a direct mounted
or separate 5/2– as well as 3/2-way-valve, both being capable to be electrically,
pneumatically or manually activated.
The butterfly valve is suited for flow media such as neutral gases and fluids with a
viscosity up to 120 mm²/s. Please note that media whichlead to an increase of the
operation torque may require higher actuator force classification. With respect to
aggressive media please refer to our material resistance table ZXWBT343.
580
Technical Data
Nominal width DN 40 to DN 600
Mounting position random
Nominal-/Operating pressure DN 40 to DN 300 max. PN16
DN 350 to DN 600 max. PN10
Overall Length According to DIN EN 558-1 Series 20 (K1)
Operating Temperature Range with seat EPDM = -30° C to +120° C
with seat NBR = -20° C to +80° C
Valve materials
Housing: GGG40 (JS1030)
Collar: EPDM, vulcanised onto carrier ring, exchangeable
Disk: Stainless steel 1.4408 (CF8M)
Stem: Stainless steel 1.4021 (AISI420), one-piece
Flow direction random
Flow media neutral gases and liquids; viscosity up to 120 mm²/s
Pneumatic control choice of 5/2– as well as 3/2-way valves either directly mounted or separate both available with
electrical, pneumatic or manual operation
Dimensions of Butterfly Valves with bar Actuators

Control Pressure 5 bar • PN 16 (DN 40 – 300) • PN 10 (DN 350 – 600)
DN Antriebsgröße H2 H3 H5 W L9 L1 L2 ØD3 I M
40 D, A+C-058 125 71 229 68.5 132 33 34 91 10 /
D-058 244 68.5 132
50 140 78 43 44 105 10 /
A+C-078 270 92.5 161
D-068 270 80 137
65 152 84 46 48 124 10 /
A+C-088 290 99.5 179.5
D-068 277 80 137
80 159 95 46 48 137 10 /
A+C-088 297 99.5 179.5
D-078 308 92.5 161
100 178 108 52 54 175 10 /
A+C-098 325 110.5 209
D-088 328 99.5 179.5 10
125 190 125 56 57 197 /
A+C-110 360 120 222 14
D-098 350 110.5 209 14
150 203 141 56 57 222 /
A+C-115 373 120 292 20
D-115 408 120 292
200 238 167 60 62 279 20 /
A+C-143 466 172 337
D-127 458 137 298 20 /
250 268 200 68 70 340
A+C-185 553 224 420 28 80
D-143 534 172 332 20 /
300 306 235 78 79 410
A+C-185 591 224 420 28 80
D-163 571 172 377 28
350 343 294 78 81,4 446 /
A+C-210 628 224 462 32
D-185 660 224 420 28 /
400 375 322 102 105,4 508
A+C-250 707 272 603 32 120
D-185 679 224 420 28
450 394 346 114 118 543 /
A+C-250 726 272 603 32
D-210 711 224 462
500 426 384 127 130,6 600 32 /
A+C-254 758 272 683
D-250 824 272 603
600 492 459 154 158,4 718 32 /
A+C-300 912 360 683
581
DN40 - DN300 DN350 - DN600
582
CP-
001-
PS-
DT-
en
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
CP-
001-
PS-
BW-
en
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
CP-
001-
PS-
ES-
en
607
608
CP-
001-
PS-
KO-en
609
CP-
001-
PS-
HE-en
610
5/2-way NAMUR control valve
standard version, type NM-521-H
(Brand: bar)
Technical data
Type piston slide valve with differential piston (air spring)
Type of connection flange according to NAMUR, at 2 and 4
G1/4”, at 1, 3 and 5
Nominal width 7 mm
Operating pressure 1,5 to 10 bar
Temperature range –20° to +70°C, explosion proofed –10° to +50° C
Protective system, IP65 nach VDE 0470/EN 60529
– standard with plug for cabels Ø 6 - 8 mm; 0,75 - 1 mm²
– explosion proofed EEx m II T4 casted-on with cable, cable length 3,0 m,
type: H052V2V-3G1
Operating time 100%
Materials casing: aluminium
inner parts: brass, aluminium, synthetic
seals: NBR (perbunan)
Manual override standard
Standard voltages and standard version:
power consumption 230 V/AC: 5,0 [VA]
24 V/DC : 3,0 [W]
explosion proofed version (EEx m II T4):
230 V/AC: 5,1 [VA]
24 V/DC : 5,0 [W]
Characteristic features Fastening screws, code pin and seals belong to delivery Flange picture at actuator according to
range. NAMUR recommendation
Throttling of exhaust air possible at connection 3 and 5 Drillings „S“ are provided for code thread
pin that rises in a deepening of control
Order designation for throttles types SDR and FDS see page 42 valve.
The code pin ensures attitude controlled
coordination of valve connections in case
of exchange.
CP-001-MV-DT-en
611
Fig. 1: Mounting dimensions at standard versions Standard mounting of valves
B A
D
E
4 2
C
C
with NAMUR-valve adapter (VPN) directly mounted

for actuator sizes 046 to 096 for actuator sizes 110 to 300
Fig. 2: Mounting dimensions at explosion proofed version (EEx m II T4)

B A
E D
4 2
C
C
with NAMUR-valve adapter (VPN) directly mounted Information about mounting

for actuator sizes 046 to 096 for actuator sizes 110 to 300
at actuators
Normally mounting is done as above
and as shown in picture 1 and 2. (Drive
connection
for
actuator type valve version
Brand
thread DN A B C D E in basic position, piston inwards.)
A differing assembling has to be
GTD/GCD/ETD
standard bar 1/4“ 7 35 99 67 22 34 agreed on, especially at complete
046 to 300
mounting on valves.
GTD/GCD/ETD
explosion proofed bar 1/4“ 7 35 99 67 22 34
046 to 300
Standard version one sided electrically actuated

Designation Brand DN Operating pressure [bar]
NM-521-H-230/AC bar 7 1,5 to 10
NM-521-H-24/DC bar 7 1,5 to 10
NM-521-H-xx/xx bar 7 1,5 to 10
Explosion proofed (EEx = Explosion protection EEx m II T4)

NM-521-H-230/AC-EEx bar 7 1,5 to 10
NM-521-H-24/DC-EEx bar 7 1,5 to 10
NM-521-H-xx/xx-EEx bar 7 1,5 to 10
xx/xx = Special voltage, please indicate designation with voltage. Other valve types on request
Explosion proofed EEx ia II C T6 on request
612
CP-
001-
MV-
BW-
en
613
CP-
001-
MV-
KO-
en
614
CP-
001-
ER-
DT-
en
615
CP-
001-
ER-
BW-
en
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DESIGN
CONTROL VALVE
A VALVE : 24 V DC / 3 W A
2 1
230 V AC / 5 VA
(110) / 5 VA
PLUG
DESIGN S1 S2 -Y1
Umax = 250 V
B B
LIMIT SWITCH
Imax = 16 A
OPEN CLOSED
1 2
CP-STANDARD 1 2 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PLUG
C M20 Ø 7-13 mm M20 M16 C
DESIGN OPEN CLOSED

PROXIMITY SWITCH -Y1
Imax = 100 mA
PNP PNP
U = 10...30 V
1 2
+ - - +
D D
1 2 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DESIGN OPEN CLOSED

NAMUR SWITCH
Uo = 8 V
NAMUR NAMUR -Y1

E E
1 2
- + - +
1 2 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
F F
7 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm BUTTERFLY VALVE, DRIVE PNEU EBRO CLAUDIUS PETERS 442.0017.0031A/06.en Blatt 01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 626
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DESIGN
CONTROL VALVE
A A
VALVE : 24 V DC / 3 W VALVE : 230 V AC / 5 VA
2 1
(110) / 5 VA
(NM - 521-H-24/DC) (NM - 521-H-230/AC)
PLUG
B
DESIGN S1 S2 -Y1 S1 S2 -Y1 B
Umax = 250 V
Umax = 250 V
LIMIT SWITCH
Imax = 16 A
Imax = 16 A
OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED
(SC - M2) 1 2 PE
CP-STANDARD 1 2 PE 1 2 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PLUG M15 x 1,5
Ø 6-8 mm
C C
M20 Ø 7-13 mm M20 M20 DUMMY PLUG 0,75-1 mm²
DESIGN OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED -Y1

PROXIMITY SWITCH -Y1
Imax = 100 mA
Imax = 100 mA
PNP PNP PNP PNP
U = 10...30 V
U = 10...30 V
(SC - D2)
1 2 PE
D
+ - - + + - - + 1 2 PE D
1 2 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DESIGN OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED -Y1

NAMUR SWITCH
Uo = 8 V
Uo = 8 V
E NAMUR NAMUR -Y1 NAMUR NAMUR E
(SC - N2)
1 2 PE
- + - + - + - + 1 2 PE
1 2 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F F
7 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm BUTTERFLY VALVE, DRIVE PNEU BAR CLAUDIUS PETERS 442.0017.0031A/06.en Blatt 02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 627
CP-
001-
ER-
ES-
en
628
629
630
631
CP-
001-
ER-
KO-
en
632
CP-
001-
ER-
HE-
en
633
Automatic
Valves Actuators Accessories
Siemens SIPART PS2

Type 6DR5320-0NG00-0AA0 incl. 6DR4004-8J
Product description Picture with actuator double acting

The SIPART PS2 electropneumatic positioner is used to
control the final control element of pneumatic linear or
part-turn actuators. The electropneumatic positioner
moves the actuator to a valve position corresponding to
the setpoint. Additional function inputs can be used to
block the valve or to set a safety position. A binary input
is present as standard in the basic device for this
purpose.
Technical data positioner

Positioner PS2 double acting
manufacturer Siemens
type SIPART PS2
model 6DR5320-0NG00-0AA0
2/3/4-wire-connection
supply voltage 24V/DC
pressure 1,4 - 7bar
incl. mounting kit 6DR4004-8D
incl. mounting bracket out of stainless steel
incl. complete flexible tubing
more techn. Data on request
Function of the ly-modul

With the ly-module 6DR4004-8J the current actuator position can
be output as a two wire signal from 4 up to 20mA – potentially
isolated from the standard controller. The dynamic control of the
ly-module makes it also error self-reporting.
CP-001-SR-DT-en
634
Operating Instructions Edition 05/2003
sipart ps2
Elektropneumatischer Stellungsregler
Electropneumatic Positioner
6DR5axb (a=0,1,2,3 / b=0,1,2)
(deutsch/english)
635
SIPART PS2
6DR50x0-xxxxx 6DR50x1-xxxxx 6DR50x2-xxxxx

Ausgabe/Edition 05/2003
Betriebsanleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seite 3
Elektropneumatischer Stellungsregler
für Schub- und Schwenkantriebe
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 43
Electropneumatic Positioner for

Linear and Rotary Actuators
SIPART PS2 1
A5E00074600-05
636
Copyright e Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Haftungsausschluss
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Anleitung, Ver- Wir haben den Inhalt der Anleitung auf Übereinstimmung
wertung und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts ist nicht gestattet, so- mit der beschriebenen Hard--und Software geprüft. Den-
weit nicht ausdrücklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen noch können Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen wer-
verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, den, so dass wir für die vollständige Übereinstimmung
insbesondere für den Fall der Patenterteilung oder GM-- keine Gewähr übernehmen. Die Angaben in dieser Anlei-
Eintragung tung werden regelmäßig überprüft, und notwendige Korrek-
turen sind in den nachfolgenden Auflagen enthalten. Für
Siemens AG Verbesserungsvorschläge sind wir dankbar.
Bereich Automatisierungs-- und Antriebstechnik
Geschäftsgebiet Prozessinstrumentierung-- und Analytik e Siemens AG 2001
D--76181 Karlsruhe Technische Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten
Copyright e Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or We have checked the contents of this manual for agree-
its contents is not permitted without express written autho- ment with the hardware and software described. Since
rity. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, inclu- deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guaran-
ding rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility tee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are
model or design, are reserved. reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included
in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
Siemens AG welcomed.
Bereich Automation & Drives
Geschäftsgebiet Process Instrumentation and
Analytics e Siemens AG 2001
D--76181 Karlsruhe Technische Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten
2 SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05
637
Contents
Page
1 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.1 Meaning of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2 Scope of Delivery of Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.1.1 Information on the use of positioners in wet environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.1.2 Information for the use of positioners that are exposed to strong acceleration forces or vibration . . 47
3.2 Extension Kit ”Linear Actuator” 6DR4004--8V and 6DR4004--8L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.2.1 Assembly Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.3 Extension Kit ”Rotary Actuator” 6DR4004--8D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.3.1 Assembly Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4 Installation of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5 Electric Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6 Pneumatic Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.1 Purging air switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
6.2 Restrictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7 Commissioning (see Leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

7.1 Preparation for linear actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1.1 Automatic initialization of linear actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.1.2 Manual initialization of linear actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.2 Preparation for rotary actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.2.1 Automatic initialization of rotary actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.2.2 Manual initialization of rotary actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.3 Copying initialization data (replacing the positioner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.4 Fault correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.1 EC Conformity Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.2 EC Type Examination Certificate TÜV 00 ATEX 1654 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.3 Conformity Statement TÜV 01 ATEX 1786 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.4 FM -- Approval Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.5 CSA certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.6 Control Drawing A5E00065622D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Leaflet “Operation -- a concise overview” SIPART PS2 6DR5xxx--xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 43
638
1 Safety Information
1.1 Meaning of Terms
DANGER
! indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
! indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
! used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not
avoided, may result in an undesireable result or state.
. NOTE
indicates a reference to a possible advantage when this recommendation is followed.
1.2 Introduction
These Operating Instructions describe the basic steps for assembly, connection, and commissioning.
These Operating Instructions do not replace the Manual for the SIPART PS2 electropneumatic positioner. The
Manual contains more detailed information about assembly, function, and operation.
The Manual can be ordered under Order No.
A5E00074631 (English)
A5E00074630 (German)
from one of our Siemens offices or representatives.
Danger-free use
This device has left the factory in a perfect condition as regards safety. The notes and warnings in these Operating
Instructions must be observed by the user if this state is to be maintained and hazard-free operation of the device
assured.
SIPART PS2
44 A5E00074600-05
639
Qualified personnel
A qualified person in the sense of these Operating Instructions is one who is familiar with the installation,
commissioning and operation of the device and who has the appropriate qualifications, e.g.:
- Is trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with
established safety practices
- Is trained in the proper care of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices
- Is trained in first aid
- In the case of devices with explosion protection: is trained or authorized to carry out work on the electric
circuits of potentially explosive equipment.
WARNING
! The device must only be installed and operated by qualified personnel.
The device is designed for connection to functional or safety extra-low voltage.
The electric safety is determined by the power supply units alone.
High positioning forces are generated by pneumatic actuators. To prevent injury, installation and
operation must be carried out under strict observation of the safety regulations.
Reference is specifically made here to the observance of the applicable safety regulations for
potentially explosive equipment.
Correct and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper transport, storage and installation as well as
careful operation and maintenance.
2 Scope of Delivery of Positioner

- Positioner as ordered
- Operating Instructions, German/English (enclosed with device)
- Leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview”, German and English (in the device)
3 Assembly
3.1 General
DANGER
! The positioner and its option modules would be supplied as separate units and in different versions.
Positioners and option modules are available for operation in zones with and without an explosion
hazard. These versions are marked by a special rating plate.
When combining components, make sure that only positioners and option modules can be com-
bined that are approved for the zone where they will be used. This especially applies to safe opera-
tion of the positioner in zone in which the atmosphere might be subject to an explosion hazard
(Zones 1 and 2). In that case it is imperative to use categories (2 and 3) both of the device itself
and its options.
CAUTION
! It is essential that you observe the following sequence during assembly to avoid injuries or
mechanical damage to the positioner/extension kit:
1. Mechanical fitting of positioner See Chapter 3 (depending on version)
2. Connection of electric power supply See Chapter 5, page 54
3. Connection of pneumatic supply See Chapter 6, page 54
4. Put into operation See Chapter 7, page 57
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 45
640
In addition you must always ensure that no water can penetrate through an open housing or screw joint. This can
occur when the SIPART PS2 cannot not be assembled and connected immediately on site.
In general the SIPART PS2 may only be operated with dry compressed air. Therefore use the usual water
separator. In extreme cases, an additional drying unit may even be required. This is particularly important when
the SIPART PS2 is operated at low ambient temperatures. In addition, please ensure that the purging air
changeover switch (on the valve manifold, above the pneumatic terminal block) is in the position OUT.
For rotary actuators that are exposed to strong acceleration forces or vibrations, please use a sufficiently stable
console (e.g. sheet thickness > 4mm with backing) and the extension kit “linear actuator” or the integrated
mounting for linear actuators.
3.1.1 Information on the use of positioners in wet environments

This information is important for the assembly and operation of the SIPART PS2 positioner in wet environments
(frequent and heavy rain and/or long--term tropical condensation) for which the protection type IP 65 is no longer
sufficient and, in particular, when there is a danger that the water can freeze.
To prevent water from entering into the device during normal operation (e.g. through the exhaust vents) or to pre-
vent difficulties reading the display, please avoid the following unfavorable assembly positions.
Fig. 1 Favorable and unfavorable assembly positions
If circumstances force you to operate the SIPART PS2 in an unfavorable assembly position, it is possible to
prevent the penetration of water by means of additional measures.
CAUTION
! Never clean the SIPART PS2 with high--pressure water cleaning apparatus because the protection
type IP65 does not have sufficient protection for this.
The necessary additional measures against the penetration of water are dependent on the chosen assembly
position and the following items may be required in addition:
- Screw joint with sealing ring (e.g. FESTO: CK -1 / 4-PK-6)
- Plastic tubing approx. 20 to 30 cm (e.g. FESTO: PUN- 8X1.25 SW)
- Cable ties (number and length dependent on the local conditions)
Procedure
- Arrange the piping in such a way that rain water or condensed water running down the pipes can drip off
before reaching the terminal block of the SIPART PS2.
- Check the seals of the electrical connections for perfect seating.
- Check the seal in the housing cover for damage and soiling. If necessary, clean or replace.
- Mount the SIPART PS2 when possible so that the sintered bronze silencer on the underside of the housing
faces downwards (vertical assembly position). If this is not possible, the silencer should be replaced by a
suitable screw joint with plastic tubing.
SIPART PS2
46 A5E00074600-05
641
Assembly of the screw joint with plastic tubing
- Unscrew and remove the sintered bronze silencer from the exhaust vent on the underside of the housing.
- Screw the above--mentioned screw joint into the exhaust vent.
- Mount the above--mentioned plastic tubing onto the screw joint and check for a tight fit.
- Fasten the plastic tubing with a cable tie to the fitting so that the opening is facing downwards.
- Ensure that the tubing is not kinked and that the exhaust air can flow out unhindered.
3.1.2 Information for the use of positioners that are exposed to strong acceleration forces
or vibration
Fittings under heavy mechanical stresses such as from breakaway flaps, violently shaking or vibrating valves,
or steam jets can be exposed to strong acceleration forces far above those specified. This can result, in extreme
cases, to a shifting of the friction clutch.
For such cases the position controller equipped with a fixing device for the slip clutch with which adjustment due
to the above mentioned influences can be prevented.
The setting possibility is accessible below the black knurled wheel and is recognizable from slots on the yellow
wheel. The zero point adjustment and the setting possibility of the slip clutch are identified by symbols on an
additional plate.
Procedure
After you have mounted the position controller and commissioned it completely, you can set the slip clutch torque
as follows:
- Plug a conventional 4 mm wide screwdriver into a slot in the yellow wheel.
- Then turn the yellow wheel to the left with the screwdriver until it snaps in audibly. This increases the torque
of the slip clutch.
- A fixed slip clutch is recognizable from an approx. 1 mm wide gap between the yellow and black wheel.
- If you have to make a zero point setting, e.g. after changing the drive, please reduce the torque first by turning
the yellow wheel to the right stop. After the zero point setting, you can fix the slip clutch as described above.
I P65
NEMA
D--7 6181 Kar lsruhe Type 4x
SIPART PS2 i/p Posit ioner
6DR5010--0NG00--0AA0
Iw = 4...20mA O
Ta = --30 ... +80 C
Iy module
p = 1,4 ... 7bar SIA module
F--Nr. N1--P212 --12 34567 Made in France Alarm module
Fig. 2 Fixing device for the slip clutch
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 47
642
External position sensor
There are potential cases for which the above--mentioned measures are not sufficient. This could be, for example,
in the presence of strong and lasting vibrations, increased or too low ambient temperatures, and in the presence
of nuclear radiation.
In such cases, separate mounting of position sensor and control unit is helpful. For this, a universal component
is available that is suitable for both linear and rotary actuators.
You will need the following:
- The position sensor unit (order number C73451-A430-D78). This consists of a SIPART PS2 housing with
an integrated friction clutch, in-built potentiometer and various blind plugs and seals.
- The control unit, a SIPART PS2 positioner in any version.
- The EMC filter plate which is available in a set together with cable clamps and M-20 cable glands and has
the order number C73451--A430--D23. The EMC filter plate must be mounted in the SIPART PS2 positioner.
The Installation Instructions supplied with the EMC filter plate explains the assembly of the components.
- A three-pin cable to connect the components.
This upgrade set must also always be used for the control unit when any potentiometer (resistance value
10 kOhm) is mounted on the actuator instead of the position sensor unit C73451-A430-D78.
3.2 Extension Kit ”Linear Actuator” 6DR4004--8V and 6DR4004--8L

The following are included in the delivery of the extension kit ”Linear actuator IEC 534 (3 mm to 35 mm)” (see
Figure 3 for item Nos.):
Item No. Quantity Designation Remarks

1 1 NAMUR mounting brak- Standardized connection for mounting console with ledge, column
ket IEC 534 or plane surface
2 1 Pick-up bracket Guides the roll with driver pin and rotates the lever arm
3 2 Clamping assembly Mounting of pick-up bracket on actuator spindle
4 1 Driver pin Assembly with roll (5) on lever (6)
5 1 Roll Assembly with driver pin (4) on lever (6)
6 1 NAMUR lever For stroke range 3 mm to 35 mm
For stroke ranges > 35 mm to 130 mm (special delivery), lever
6DR4004--8L is also required
7 2 U-bolt Only for actuators with columns
8 4 Hexagon head screw M8 x 20 DIN 933--A2
10 6 Spring washer A8 -- DIN 127--A2
11 6 U-washer B 5.4 -- DIN 125--A2
12 2 U-washer B 6.4 -- DIN 125--A2
13 1 Spring VD--115E 0.70x11.3x32.7x3.5
14 1 Spring washer A6 -- DIN 137A--A2
15 1 Lock washer 3.2 -- DIN 6799--A2
16 3 Spring washer A6 -- DIN 127--A2
18 1 Hexagon nut M6 -- DIN 934--A4
19 1 Square nut M6 -- DIN 557--A4
21 4 Hexagon nut M8 -- DIN 934--A4
22 1 Guide washer 6.2x9.9x15x3.5
SIPART PS2
48 A5E00074600-05
643
3.2.1 Assembly Sequence
(see Figure 3, page 50)
1. Mount clamping assembly (3) with socket cap screws (17) and lock washers (16) on the actuator spindle.
2. Insert the pick-up bracket (2) into the recesses of the clamping assembly. Set the required length and
screw only so tight that the pick-up bracket can still be shifted.
3. The center of the pin (4) is set to the value of the stroke range specified on the actuator or set to the
next large scale value. The same value can be set later for 3.YWAY during start-up, to display the travel
in mm after initialization.
4. Push the lever onto the positioner shaft as far as possible, and secure with the socket cap screw (17).
5. Fit the mounting bracket (1) with two hexagonal head screws (9), lock washer (10) and flat washer (11)
on the rear of the positioner.
6. Selection of the row of holes depends on the width of the actuator yoke. The roll (5) should engage in the
pick--up bracket (2) as close to the spindle as possible, but must not touch the clamping assembly.
7. Hold the positioner with the mounting bracket on the actuator such that the roll (5) is guided within the
pick-up bracket (2).
8. Tighten the pick-up bracket.
9. Position the mounting parts according to the type of actuator.
-- Actuator with ledge: hexagonal head screw (8), flat washer (11) and lock washer (10).
-- Actuator with plane surface: four hexagonal head screws (8) with flat washer (11) and lock washer (10).
-- Actuator with columns: two U-bolts (7), four hexagonal nuts (21) with flat washer (11) and lock
washer (10).
10. Secure positioner onto the yoke using the previously positioned mounting parts.
. NOTE
Adjust the height of the positioner such that the horizontal lever position is reached as close as possible
to the center of the stroke. You can use the lever scale of the actuator for orientation. It must always
be guaranteed that the horizontal lever position is passed through within the stroke range.
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 49
644
17
2
16
12
16
19
18
14
12
6
17 22
3 13
1) 2) 45
15
11
10
9
1
11
3) 10
9
1 11 10
8
10
8
Mounting on yoke
Mounting on yoke
with plane surface
11 with ledge
11 10
Mounting on yoke
with columns
7
21
4)
As required
Fig. 3 Assembly sequence (linear actuator)
SIPART PS2
50 A5E00074600-05
645
3.3 Extension Kit ”Rotary Actuator” 6DR4004--8D

The following are included in the delivery of the extension kit ”Rotary actuator” (see Figure 4, page 52 for item
Nos.):
Item No. Quantity Designation Remarks

2 1 Coupling wheel Mounting on position feedback shaft of SIPART PS2
3 1 Driver Mounting on end of actuator shaft
4 1 Multiple scale Indication of actuator position, comprising 4.1 and 4.2
4.1 8 Scale Different divisions
4.2 1 Pointer Reference point for scale (adhesive label)
14 4 Hexagon head screw DIN 933 -- M6 x 12
15 4 Lock washer S6
16 1 Fillister head screw DIN 84 -- M6 x 12
17 1 Washer DIN 125 -- 6.4
18 1 Hexagon socket screw Premounted with coupling wheel
19 1 Allen key For item 18
3.3.1 Assembly Sequence

1. Place VDI/VDE 3845 mounting console ((9), actuator-specific, scope of supply of actuator manufacturer)
onto rear of positioner and secure using hexagon head screws (14) and lock washers (15).
2. Adhere pointer (4.2) onto mounting console in the center of the centering hole.
3. Push coupling wheel (2) onto positioner axis as far as possible, pull back by about 1 mm, and tighten hexagon
socket screw (18) using the supplied Allen key.
4. Place the driver (3) onto the end of the actuator shaft and secure using Fillister head screw (16) and washer
(17).
5. Carefully place positioner with mounting console onto the actuator such that the pin of the coupling wheel
engages in the driver.
6. Align the positioner/mounting console assembly in the center of the actuator and screw tight.
(Screws not included in delivery; they are part of the actuator mounting console!)
7. Following startup as described in Section 7: Drive actuator to end position and adhere scale (4.1) onto the
coupling wheel (2) according to the direction of rotation or the turning range. The scale is self-adhesive!
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 51
646
4.2
9
15
14
2
18
9
1) 2)
16
17
3
3)
2
4.1
2
0% 20 40 60 80 100%
4)
5)
Fig. 4 Assembly sequence (rotary actuator)
SIPART PS2
52 A5E00074600-05
647
4 Installation of Options
- Unscrew housing cover.

- Unscrew module cover (1).
- Jy module: Insert the Jy module (3) into the lower PCB slot guide of the container, make the electrical
connection with the accompanying ribbon cable (6).
- Alarm module: Insert the alarm module (4) into the upper PCB slot guide of the container, make the electrical
connection with the accompanying ribbon cable (5).
- SIA module (slot-type initiator alarm module)
1. Remove all electrical connections of the basic electronics (2).
2. Loosen the two fixing screws (2.1) of the basic electronics.
3. Unclip the basic electronics by carefully bending out from the four attachment points.
4. Guide the SIA module (7) from above until the upper PCB slot guide of the container is reached.
5. Push the SIA module approx. 3 mm to the right into the PCB slot guide of the container.
6. Screw in the special screw (7.1) through the SIA module into the shaft of the positioner (Torque: 2 Nm)
CAUTION
! The pins pushed into the control-gate valve bearing must be aligned shortly before contact with the
special screw. When screwing-in further, the control-gate valve bearing and the special screw must
be turned simultaneously so that the pins insert into the special screw. The SIA module may be da-
maged if you will not observe this.
7. Place the insulation cover (10) over the SIA module on one side under the seating area of the basic
electronics on the container wall. The openings on the insulation cover must fit onto the corresponding
studs on the container wall. By carefully bending the container walls, fit the insulation cover over the
SIA module.
8. Clip the basic electronics into the four attachment points and screw down the basic electronics with the
two fixing screws (2.1).
9. Make all the electrical connections between the basic electronics and options with the accompanying
ribbon cables and between the basic electronics and the potentiometer with the potentiometer cable.
10. Attach the supplied module cover instead of the standard cover with the two screws.
11. Select the plates from the accompanying set of plates to correspond with those that were already
present on the standard version of the module cover. Stick the selected plates onto the mounted module
cover in accordance with the standard version.
12. Make all the electrical connections.
Setting the two limits:
13. Move the actuator to the first desired mechanical position.
14. Adjust the upper adjustment screw (for output terminals 41, 42) by hand until the output level changes.
15. Move the actuator to the second desired mechanical position.
16. Adjust the lower adjustment screw (for output terminals 51, 52) by hand until the output level changes.
. NOTE
By rotating the adjustment screw past the level--changed value to the next level-changed value, you
can set a High-Low or a Low-High switch.
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 53
648
5 Electric Connection
(see Figure 10 to 21, page 98 to 103)
Electric connection: Screw terminals 2.5 mm2

Cable inlet: M20 x 1.5
Signal range
Setpoint w: 4 to 20 mA With 2-wire connection
0/4 to 20 mA With 3-wire or 4-wire connection
Power supply UH: 18 to 30 V
The plastic housing is metallize coated inside against high-frequency radiation. This shield is connected with the
female thread jacks on the back side (see figure 5).
Please note that one of them must at least be connected to ground.
Shield
Fig. 5 Ground plate
6 Pneumatic Connection
CAUTION
! If the electric supply is connected, the pneumatic supply must only be connected following
assembly if the positioner is switched to the input level ”P manual mode” (for the as supplied condi-
tions, see leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview”).
NOTICE
Ensure that the air quality is suitable! Grease-free industrial air, particulates < 30 μm, pressure dew
point 20 K below lowest ambient temperature.
The pneumatic connections are located on the right-hand side of the positioner (Figure 6).
SIPART PS2
54 A5E00074600-05
649
Positioning pressure Y1 for single and double--acting actuators

Feedback shaft
Inlet air PZ
Positioning pressure Y2 for double--acting actuators
Outlet air E with silencer on the underside of the instrument
Fig. 6 Pneumatic connection
Two pneumatic connections for the integrated installation of single--acting linear actuators are located on the rear
of the positioner:
- Positioning pressure Y1
- Air outlet E
These connections are locked with screws when supplied.
Outlet air E can be used to ensure a flow of dry instrument air through the pick--off area and the spring chamber
to prevent corrosion.
Procedure:
- Connect manometer for inlet air pressure and positioning pressure in necessary.
- Connection via female thread G 1/4 DIN 45141:
PZ Inlet air 1.4 to 7 bar
Y1 Positioning pressure 1 for single-action and double-action actuators
Y2 Positioning pressure 2 for double-action actuators
E Exhaust output (remove silencer if necessary)
- Safety setting on failure of electric supply:
single-action: Y1 Vented
double-action: Y1 Max. positioning pressure (inlet air pressure)
Y2 Vented
- Connect positioning pressure Y1 or Y2 (only with double-action actuators) according to desired safety
setting.
- Connect inlet air to PZ.
. NOTE
Spring return actuators need sufficient high supply pressure so that the complete stroke can be travelled
up to the end position of the actuator.
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 55
650
6.1 Purging air switchover
The purging air changeover switch above the pneumatic terminal block (Figure 7) on the valve manifold can be
accessed when the housing is open. When the switch is in position IN the interior of the housing is purged with
very small quantities of clean and dry instrument air. In position OUT the purging air is led directly out of the
instrument.
Fig. 7 Purging air changeover switch above the pneumatic terminal block, view of the device on the
pneumatic connection side with the cover open
6.2 Restrictors
To increase the positioning times for fast actuators when necessary, the air flow can be reduced with the restrictors
Y1 and Y2 (only for double-action valves) (Figure 8). Turning the restrictors in the clockwise direction reduces the
air flow until it is shut off. To set the restrictors we recommend closing them first and then opening them again
slowly (see Initialization RUN3). In case of double-action valves please note that both restrictors are set alike.
Hexagon socket 2.5 mm
Y1 Y2
Fig. 8 Restrictors
SIPART PS2
56 A5E00074600-05
651
7 Commissioning (see Leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview”)
Because of the numerous applications it can have, the positioner must be adapted to the actuator after assembly
(initialized). This initialization can be undertaken in three different ways:
- Automatic initialization
The initialization is automatic. The positioner determines sequentially the direction of action, the travel or the
rotational angle, the travel times of the actuator and adapts the control parameters to the dynamic behavior
of the actuator.
- Manual initialization
The travel or the rotational angle of the actuator can be set manually; the remaining parameters are automati-
cally determined as for automatic initialization. This function is required for soft end stops.
- Copying initialization data (replacing the positioner)
For devices with HART function, the initialization data of a positioner can be read out and transmitted to
another positioner. Therefore it is possible to exchange a defective device without interrupting the running
process by an initialization.
Before initialization, you only have to set a few parameters for the positioner. The remaining parameters are set
with default values that you do not normally have to alter. If you observe the following points, you will not have
any problem with commissioning.
. NOTE
You can return to the previous parameter by pressing the and keys simultaneously.
7.1 Preparation for linear actuators

1. Mount the positioner with the appropriate mounting kit (see Chapter 3.2, page 48).
NOTICE
The position of the leverage ratio switch in the positioner is especially important and on page 95 in
the Leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview” point 7 of figure “View of device”:
Stroke Lever Position of the leverage ratio switch

5 to 20 mm short 33° (i.e. below)
25 to 35 mm short 90° (i.e. above)
40 to 130 mm long 90° (i.e. above)
2. Push the driver pin (4, Figure 3, (page 50) 2) on the lever (6, Figure 3, 2) to the scale position corresponding
to the nominal stroke or the next highest scale position and screw the driver pin tight with the nut (18, Figure
3, 2).
3. Connect the actuator and positioner with the pneumatic cables and supply pneumatic power to the positioner
(see Chapter 6, page 54).
4. Connect a suitable current or voltage source (see Figure 10, page 98 to Figure 15, page 100).
5. The positioner is now in ”P manual” mode. On the upper line of the display, the current potentiometer voltage
(P) is displayed as a percentage, e.g. ”P37.5”, and on the lower line ”NOINI” is blinking:
Display:
6. Check that the mechanism is able to move freely over the entire setting range by moving the actuator into
each final position with the and keys.
. NOTE
You can move the actuator quickly by pressing the other direction key while you hold the first direc-
tion key down.
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 57
652
7. Now move the actuator into the horizontal position of the lever. The display should show a value between
P48.0 and P52.0. If that is not the case, adjust the friction clutch (8, Fig. 3) until ”P50.0” is shown when the
lever is horizontal. The more precisely you achieve that value, the more accurately the positioner can deter-
mine the displacement.
7.1.1 Automatic initialization of linear actuators

If you can move the actuator correctly, leave it in a central position, and start automatic initialization:
1. Press the mode key for more than 5 s. This takes you into Configuration mode.
Display:
2. Switch to the second parameter by pressing the mode key briefly.

Display: or
. NOTE
This value must match the setting of the leverage ratio switch (7, Leaflet ”Operation -- a concise
overview”) (33° or 90°)
3. Switch to the following display with the mode key :

Display:
You only have to set this parameter if you want to have the calculated total stroke displayed in mm at the
end of the initialization phase. To do that, select the same value in the display as the value to which you set
the driver pin on the scale of the lever.
Display:
5. Start initialization by pressing the key for more than 5 s.

Display:
During the initialization process ”RUN1” to ”RUN5” appear one after the other in the lower display.
. NOTE
The initialization process can take up to 15 min depending on the actuator.
SIPART PS2
58 A5E00074600-05
653
Initialization is complete when the following display appears:
After you have pressed the mode key briefly, the following display appears:
To exit Configuration mode press the mode key for more than 5 s. After about 5 s, the software version is
displayed. After you have released the mode key, the unit is in manual mode.
If you want to set further parameters, use the leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview” or the Manual.
You can start reinitialization from manual or automatic mode at any time.
7.1.2 Manual initialization of linear actuators

With this function, the positioner can be initialized without driving the actuator hard into the end stop. The start
and end positions of the travel are set manually. The remaining steps for initialization (optimization of the control
parameters) are automatically determined as for automatic initialization.
Sequence of steps for manual initialization for linear actuators

1. Carry out the preparations for linear actuators according to chapter 7.1, page 57. Ensure by driving manually
over the entire travel that the displayed potentiometer setting lies within the permissible range of P5.0 and
P95.0.
2. Press the mode key for longer than 5 s. This way you will enter Configuration mode.
Display:

Display: or the display
. NOTE
This value must agree with the setting of the transmission ratio selector (33_ or 90_).
4. Move to the following display with the mode key :

Display:
This parameter only has to be set if you wish to have the determined total stroke displayed in mm at the end
of the initialization phase. To do this, select the same value in the display that you have set with the driver
pin on the lever scale, or the next highest value for intermediate settings.
5. Move to the following display by pressing the mode key twice:
Display:
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 59
654
6. Start initialization by pressing the increment key for more than 5 s.
Display:
7. After 5 s, the display changes to:

Display:
(The display of the potentiometer setting is shown here and in the following as an example only).
Drive the actuator with the increment (+) and decrement (--) keys to the position that you wish to define as
the first of the two end positions. Then press the mode key . In this way the current position is taken over
as end position 1 and will switch to the next step.
. NOTE
If the message RANGE appears in the lower line, the selected end position is outside the
permissible measuring range. There are several options to correct this error:
S Adjust the friction clutch until OK appears and then press the mode key once more, or
S Drive to another end position with the increment and decrement keys, or
S Interrupt the initialization by pressing the mode key. Then you have to switch to P--Manual mode
and correct the travel and the position measurement according to step 1.
8. When step 7 has been completed successfully, the following display appears:
Display:
Now drive the actuator with the increment (+) and decrement (--) keys to the position that you wish to define
as the second end position. Then press the mode key . The current position will now be taken over as
the end position 2.
. NOTE
If the message RANGE appears in the lower line, the selected end position is outside the permitted
measuring range or the measuring span is too small. There several options to correct this error:
S Drive to another end position with the increment and decrement keys, or
S Interrupt the initialization by pressing the mode key. Then you have to switch to P--Manual mode
and correct the travel and the position measurement according to step 1.
. NOTE
If the message Set Middle appears, the lever arm must be moved to the horizontal position with the
increment and decrement keys and then the mode key pressed. This sets the reference point of the
sine correction for linear actuators.
9. The rest of the initialization occurs automatically. RUN1 through to RUN5 appear in the lower line of the dis-
play sequentially. When the initialization has been completed successfully, the following display appears:
Display:
SIPART PS2
60 A5E00074600-05
655
In the first line, the determined stroke in mm will appear in additional if the set lever length has been entered
with the parameter 3.YWAY.
After briefly pressing the mode key , 5.INITM appears once more in the lower line. This means that you
are now in Configuration mode once more.
To leave Configuration mode, press the mode key for more than 5 s. After approx. 5 seconds, the software
version will be displayed. After releasing the mode key, the device will be in Manual mode.
7.2 Preparation for rotary actuators
. NOTE
Especially important: Switch the leverage ratio switch (7, leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview”)
in the positioner into position 90° (usual adjustment angle for rotary actuators).
1. Mount the positioner with the appropriate mounting kit (see Chapter 3.3, page 51).
2. Connect the actuator and positioner with the pneumatic cables and supply pneumatic power to the positioner
(see Chapter 6, page 54).
3. Connect a suitable current or voltage source (see Figure 10, page 98 to Figure 15, page 100).
4. The positioner is now in ”P manual” mode. On the upper line of the display, the current potentiometer voltage
(P) is displayed as a percentage, e.g. ”P37.5”, and on the lower line
”NOINI” is blinking:
5. Check that the mechanism is able to move freely over the entire setting range by moving the actuator into
each final position with the and keys.
. NOTE
You can move the actuator quickly by pressing the other direction key while you hold the first direc-
tion key down.
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 61
656
7.2.1 Automatic initialization of rotary actuators
Once you can move the actuator through its setting range correctly, leave it in a central position and start automatic
initialization:
1. Press the mode key for more than 5 s. This takes you into Configuration mode.
Display
2. Set the parameter to ”turn” with the key:

Display:

The second parameter is set to 90° automatically.
Display:

Display:
5. Start initialization by pressing the key for more than 5 s.

Display:
During the initialization process ”RUN1” to ”RUN5” appear one after the other in the lower display.
. NOTE
The initialization process can take up to 15 min depending on the actuator.
Initialization is complete when the following display appears:
The upper value shows the total angle of rotation of the actuator (example 93,5°).
After you have pressed the mode key briefly, the following display appears:
To exit Configuration mode press the mode key for more than 5 s. After about 5 s, the software version is
displayed. After you have released the mode key, the unit is in manual mode.
If you want to set further parameters, use the leaflet ”Operation -- a concise overview” or the Manual.
You can start reinitialization from manual or automatic mode at any time.
SIPART PS2
62 A5E00074600-05
657
7.2.2 Manual initialization of rotary actuators
With this function, the positioner can be initialized without driving the actuator hard into the end stops. The start
and end positions of the travel are set manually. The remaining steps for initialization (optimization of the control
parameters) are automatically determined as for automatic initialization.
Sequence of steps for manual initialization for rotary actuators

1. Carry out the preparations for rotary actuators according to chapter 7.2, page 61. Ensure by driving manually
over the entire travel that the displayed potentiometer setting lies within the permissible range of P5.0 and
P95.0.
2. Press the mode key for longer than 5 s. This way you will enter Configuration mode.
Display:
3. Set the parameter YFCT to turn with the decrement key (--).
Display:

Display:
. NOTE
Ensure that the transmission ratio selector is at 90°.
5. Move to the following display by pressing the mode key twice:

Display:
The following steps are identical to the steps 6) to 9) for the initialization of linear actuators.
After successful initialization, the determined rotation range appears in degrees on the upper display.
After pressing the mode key briefly, 5.INITM appears in the lower display line. You are now once more
in Configuration mode.
To leave Configuration mode, press the mode key for more than 5 s. After approx. 5 seconds the software
version will be displayed. After releasing the mode key, the device will be in Manual mode.
7.3 Copying initialization data (replacing the positioner)

With this function, you have the possibility to commission positioners without having to carry out the initialization
procedure. This enables, for example, a positioner to be replaced on running equipment when an automatic or
manual initialization cannot be carried out without interrupting the process.
. NOTE
The initialization (automatic or manual) should be performed as soon as possible afterwards
because only then is the positioner optimally adjusted to the mechanical and dynamic characteris-
tics of the actuator.
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 63
658
The transfer of data from the positioner to be replaced to the replacement device takes place via the HART
communication interface.
To replace a positioner, the following steps must be carried out:
1. Read the device parameters and the initialization data (determined during initialization) from the positioner
to be replaced with PDM or HART Communicator and store. This step is not necessary if the device has
been parameterized with PDM and the data are already saved.
2. Fix the actuator in its current position (mechanically or pneumatically).
3. Read the current position value from the display of the positioner to be replaced and note. If the electronics
are defective, determine the current position by measurement of the actuator or valve.
4. Dismount the positioner. Mount the lever arm of the positioner onto the replacement device. Mount the re-
placement device onto the fittings. Place the transmission ratio selector at the same position as on the defec-
tive device. Read in the device data and initialization data from PDM or Handheld.
5. If the displayed current value does not agree with the noted value from the defective positioner, set the cor-
rect value with the friction clutch.
6. The positioner is now ready for operation.
The precision and the dynamic behavior could be limited in comparison to that from a correct initialization.
In particular the position of the hard stops and the corresponding service data could show deviations. There-
fore an initialization must be performed at the next possible opportunity.
7.4 Fault correction
Diagnostics indicator
see Table
In which operating mode did the fault occur?

• Initialization 1
• Manual mode and automatic mode 2 3 4 5
Under which circumstances and conditions did the fault occur?

• Wet environment (e.g. heavy rain or constant condensation) 2
• Vibrating fittings 2 5
• Under impact or shock (e.g. steam jets or breakaway flaps) 5
• Damp (wet) compressed air 2
• Dirty (contaminated with solid particles) compressed air 2 3
When does the fault occur?

• Constantly (reproducibly) 1 2 3 4
• Sporadically (not reproducible) 5
• Usually after a certain operating period 2 3 5
Fault description (symptoms) Possible cause(s) Corrective actions

• SIPART PS2 comes to a halt in • Initialization started from the final • Up to 1 min. waiting time required
RUN 1 stop and • Do not start initialization from an
• Reaction time of max. 1 min. not end stop
waited • Confirm network pressure
• Network pressure not connected or
too low
• SIPART PS2 comes to a halt in • Transmission ratio selector and • Check settings:
RUN 2 parameter 2 (YAGL) and true stroke • See leaflet: Figure Device view (7)
did not correlate and parameters 2 and 3
• Stroke on the lever incorrectly set • Check stroke setting on the lever
• Piezo valve(s) do not switch (see • see Table 2
Table 2)
SIPART PS2
64 A5E00074600-05
659

• SIPART PS2 comes to a halt in • Actuator positioning time too long • Open restrictor fully and/or set
RUN 3 pressure PZ(1) to the highest
permissible value
• Use booster if necessary
• SIPART PS2 comes to a halt in • Play in the positioner, actuator, • Linear actuator:
RUN 5, does not reach FINISH fittings system Check seating of the stud screw of
(waiting time > 5 min) the coupling wheel
• Rotary actuator:
Check seating of the lever on the
positioner shaft
• Correct any other play between the
actuator and the fittings
Table 1

• CPU test blinks in the display of the • Water in the valve manifold (from • At the early stages the fault can be
SIPART PS2 (ca. every 2 secs) wet compressed air) corrected by subsequent operation
• Piezo valve(s) do not switch with dry air (when necessary, in a
temperature cupboard at 50 to
• Actuator cannot be moved in • Dampness in the valve manifold
70 °C)
manual or automatic mode, or only
• Otherwise: Repair at CSC (see
in one direction
page 66)
• Piezo valve(s) do not switch (no • Screw between cover hood and the • Tighten screw, or release cause of
soft clicking can be heard when the valve manifold is not tight or the jamming when necessary
+ or -- keys are pressed in manual hood is jammed
mode)
• Dirt (swarf, particles) in the valve • Repair at CSC1) or new device with
manifold integrated fine filter which can be
replaced and cleaned
• Deposits on the contact(s) between • Clean all contact surfaces with alco-
the electronics board and the valve hol: when necessary bend the valve
manifold can occur from abrasion manifold contact springs back into
through continuous stresses from place
strong vibrations
Table 2

• Actuator does not move • Compressed air < 1.4 bar • Set inlet air pressure to > 1.4 bar
• Piezo valve(s) do not switch (al- • Restrictor(s) closed down • Open restrictor screw(s) (see leaf-
though a soft clicking can be (screw(s) at the right end stop) let, Figure “View of device (6)”) by
heard when the + or -- keys are turning to the left
pressed in manual mode)
• Dirt in the valve manifold • Repair at CSC1) or new device
with integrated fine filter which can
be replaced and cleaned
• One piezo valve constantly • Pneumatic leak in the positioner, • Fix leak in the actuator and/or
switches in stationary automatic actuator system, start leak test in supply line
mode (constant setpoint) and in RUN 3 (Initialization) !!! • If the actuator and supply line are
manual mode intact:
Repair of SIPART PS 2 at CSC1)
or new device
• Dirt in the valve manifold (see • See above

above)
Table 3
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 65
660

• The two piezo valve constantly • Static friction on the packing glands • Reduce static friction or increase
switch alternately in stationary au- of the fittings or actuator too high dead zone of SIPART PS2
tomatic mode (constant setpoint), (parameter dEbA) until the
actuator oscillates around a oscillating movements stop.
middle point
• Play in the positioner, actuator, • Linear actuator:
fittings system Check seating of the stub screw of
the coupling wheel
• Rotary actuator:
Check seating of the lever on the
positioner shaft
• Correct any other play between the
actuator and fittings
• Actuator too fast • Increase positioning times by
means of restrictor screws
• If fast positioning times are
required, increase dead zone
(parameter dEbA) until the
oscillating movements stop.
• SIPART PS2 does not drive the • Supply pressure too low • Increase supply pressure
valve up to the end stop (at • Load of the supply controller or • Intermediate burden converter
20 mA) system output too low; required • Select 3/4 wire operation
load potential.
Table 4

• Zero point shifts sporadically • Such high accelerations have oc- • Shut off the cause of the shocks
(> 3 %) curred through impact or shock that • Reinitialize the positioner
the friction clutch has shifted (e.g. • Upgrade at CSC1): mount reinforced
through steam jets in the steam pipe- friction clutch (order number
lines) C73451-A430-D14)
• Device function breaks down • Insufficient electrical supply • Check electrical supply
totally: no display With very high continuous stresses by
vibrations, the following can occur:
• Screws of the electrical terminals can • Tighten screws and secure with seal-
loosen ing varnish
• The electrical terminals and/or elec- • Repair at CSC1)
tronic modules can be shaken loose • Prevention: Mount the SIPART PS2
on rubber metal
Table 5
1) CSC Address (Customer Support Center)
Siemens Production
Automatisation S. A. CSC
1, chemin de la Sandlach
B. P. 189
F--67506 Haguenau CEDEX
-- France --
Tel. 0033--38890--6677
Fax 0033--38890--6688
e-mail: Hotline.ADPA1--2@khe.siemens.de
SIPART PS2
66 A5E00074600-05
661
8 Certificates
The SIPART PS2 positioner with the accompanying options will be approved as standard in zone 1 as EEx ia/ib
(see EC Type Examination Certificate) and for zone 2 as Ex n (see Conformity Statement).
WARNING
! Since the maximum values of normal operation may be violated in the event of a fault when using
the positioner and its options in zone 2, the EEx n device and its options must never be used again
subsequently in zone 1.
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 67
662
663
8.1 EC Conformity Declaration
SIPART PS2
68 A5E00074600-05
8.2 EC Type Examination Certificate TÜV 00 ATEX 1654
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 69
664
665
SIPART PS2
70 A5E00074600-05
666
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 71
667
SIPART PS2
72 A5E00074600-05
668
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 73
669
SIPART PS2
74 A5E00074600-05
670
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 75
671
SIPART PS2
76 A5E00074600-05
8.3 Conformity Statement TÜV 01 ATEX 1786 X
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 77
672
673
SIPART PS2
78 A5E00074600-05
674
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 79
8.4 FM -- Approval Report
SIPART PS2
80 A5E00074600-05
675
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 81
676
SIPART PS2
82 A5E00074600-05
677
8.5 CSA certificate
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 83
678
679
SIPART PS2
84 A5E00074600-05
8.6 Control Drawing A5E00065622D
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 85
680
681
SIPART PS2
86 A5E00074600-05
682
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 87
SIPART PS2
88 A5E00074600-05
683
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 89
684
SIPART PS2
90 A5E00074600-05
685
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 91
686
SIPART PS2
92 A5E00074600-05
687
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 93
688
SIPART PS2
94 A5E00074600-05
689
SIPART PS2 6DR5xxx-xx ATTENTION: See Operating
Leaflet "Operation - a concise overview" Instructions for safety instructions !
Configuring Possible messages
(Order No. A5E00074611-02)
1 Input: supply air PZ
View of device (cover open) 2 Output: Positioning Display Meaning Measures
14 3 pressure Y1
90o 3 Display
15
4 Output: Positioning Acknowledge message
pressure Y2 *)
2W 3/4W 90° 5 Input keys Actuator does using
33 O
2
2 2
6 Restrictor Y1 (simultaneously) (simultaneously) not move
3
18 ...
30V 3
6.1 Restrictor Y1 *)
)
Check restrictor (6) and open
4 4 6.2 Restrictor Y2 *
7 Transmission ratio if necessary
4 ... 20mA
5 5
0/4 ... 20mA

selector
6 6 1 Drive actuator to working
13 7 7 8 Sound absorber
8 8 9 Adjustment wheel
range using
9 9
BE1 for slipping clutch
O
10 10
90
10 Terminals for basic
up to
Restart initialization
unit
o 4 11 Terminals for option
33
33° (simultaneously) (simultaneously)
modules Change gearing (7)
12 Plug
12 13 Cable glant Down tolerance
14 >5s Continue using
Label
(on module cover)
band violated
15 Purging air selector
6.1 6.2 or adjust sliding clutch up
11 10 9 7 8 6 5
*) With double-action actuators to display
Changing the input level Automatic initial start-up (starting with factory setting)
Mode Display Step Meaning then only
Continue using
1.)
P-manual mode Potentiometer Part-turn Linear actuator:
setting [%] actuator Once the slipping Set pick-up lever into vertical
Change position clutch has been
using position using
Not initialized
adjusted
Linear actuator
(can be reached Continue using
using preset)
PRST
Acknowledge message
Configure >5s Press for > 5 s using
Parameter
Change parameter value
2.) Up tolerance band Set the next highest travel
Remaining steps carried out automatically
name using violated value on the lever
Parameter
number Restart initialization
Change value >5s
Parameter Additionally possible with rotary
using
name actuators:
3.) Direction of action is determined
>5s >5s
Manual mode Adjust using up to
Position [%]
display:
Checking of travel and adjustment
(The gray values in the top display line are examples)
Change position Error code 4.) of zero and stroke

using (from stop to stop)
Mode and
>5s
Setpoint [%] Determination and Display of positioning Continue using
5.) time down (dxx.x), up (uxx.x) Stop with
1x 1x Acknowledge message
Automatic Position [%] Pressing the key initiates leakage measurement
Up/down span using
violated Set the next lowest travel
Error code Determination of minimum value on the lever
6.) increment length
Mode and Restart initialization
Setpoint [%]
+ + Adjust positioning time using
Actuator does
Diagnosis >2s >2s
7.) Optimization of transient response not move restrictor(s)
Diagnosis value Positioning Continue using or
+ + time is possible
>2s Initialization terminated successfully to adjust
Diagnosis (travel in mm for linear actuators)
number 8.) (angle of rotation for part-turn
Diagnosis name actuators) Continue using: See Manual for further messages
690
Parameter name Display Function Parameter values Unit Factory setting Customer setting
1.YFCT Type of actuator turn (part-turn actuator) WAY

WAY (linear actuator)
LWAY (linear actuator
without sine correction)
ncSt (part-turn actuator with NCS)
-ncSt (ditto, inv. direction of action)
ncSL (linear actuator with NCS)
1) Rated angle of rotation of feedback 90°
2.YAGL Set transmission ratio selector (7) appropriately Degrees 33°
33°
(see view of device)
2) Stroke range (optional setting) OFF
OFF mm OFF
5 | 10 | 15 | 20
When used, the value must correspond with (short lever 33°)
3.YWAY
the set of the leverage ratio on the actuator
25 | 30 | 35
(short lever 90°)
Driver pin must be set to the value of the actuator
travel or, if this value is not scaled, to the next 40 | 50 | 60 | 70 | 90 | 110 | 130
larger scale value. (long lever 90°)
noini | no / ###.# | Strt no

4.INITA Initialization (automatically)
5.INITM Initialization (manually) noini | no / ###.# | Strt no
6.SCUR Current range of setpoint 0 to 20 mA 0 MA 4 MA

4 to 20 mA 4 MA
rising riSE
7.SDIR Setpoint direction falling riSE
FALL
8.SPRA Setpoint for start of split range 0,0 to 100,0 % 0,0
9.SPRE Setpoint for end of split range 0,0 to 100,0 % 100
Auto
10.TSUP Setpoint ramp up s 0
0 to 400
11.TSDO Setpoint ramp down 0 to 400 s 0
Setpoint function Linear Lin
Equal-percentage 1:25, 1:33, 1:50 1- 25 1 - 33 1 - 50
12.SFCT Lin
Inverse equal-percentage 1:25, 1:33, 1:50 n1 - 25 n1 - 33 n1 - 50
Freely adjustable FrEE
13.SL0 Setpoint turning point at 0% 0.0
14.SL1 5% 5.0
usw. bis 3) to 0,0 to 100,0 % etc. to
(example)
32.SL19 95% 95.0
33.SL20 100% 100.0
Auto
34.DEBA Dead zone of controller 0,1 to 10,0 % Auto
35.YA Start of manipulated variable limiting 0,0 to 100,0 % 0,0
36.YE End of manipulated variable limiting 0,0 to 100,0 % 100,0

Standardization of To mech. travel MPOS
37.YNRM MPOS
manipulated variable To flow FLOW
Direction of manipulated Rising riSE
38.YDIR Falling riSE
variable for display FALL
Tight closing with Without no
manipulated variable Top only uP
39.YCLS do no
Bottom only
Top and bottom uP do
40.YCDO Value for tight closing, bottom 0,0 to 100,0 % 0,5

41.YCUP Value for tight closing, top 0,0 to 100,0 % 99,5
Function of BI 1 None OFF
Only message on -on
Block configuring bLoc1
NO contact
NC contact
4) OFF
42.BIN1 Block configuring and manual bLoc2
Drive valve to position up uP -uP
Drive valve to position down doWn -doWn
Block movement StoP -StoP
Function of BI 2 None OFF
4) -on
NO contact
Only message on
NC contact
43.BIN2 OFF
Drive valve to position up uP -uP
Drive valve to position down doWn -doWn
Block movement StoP -StoP
Alarm function Without OFF

5) A1=min. A2=max
inverted
normal
44.AFCT OFF
A1=min. A2=min
A1=max. A2=max
45.A1 Response threshold of alarm 1 0,0 to 100,0 % 10,0
46.A2 Response threshold of alarm 2 0,0 to 100,0 % 90,0
Function of alarm output on fault

inverted
5)
normal
47. FCT Fault + not automatic

Fault + not automatic + BI
("+" means logical OR operation)
Monitoring time for fault message Auto
48. TIM s Auto
“control deviation” 0 to 100
Response threshold for fault message Auto
49. LIM % Auto
“control deviation” 0,0 to 100,0
Limit for stroke integral OFF OFF
50. STRK
1 to 1.00E9
Limit for direction change OFF OFF
51. DCHG
1 to 1.00E9
Limit for end stop monitoring, bottom OFF % OFF
52. ZERO
0,0 to 100,0
Limit for end stop monitoring, top OFF % OFF
53. OPEN
0,0 to 100,0
Limit for dead zone monitoring OFF % OFF
54. DEBA
0,0 to 10,0
Preset (factory setting)
"no" nothing activated no
55.PRST "Strt" start of factory setting after pressing key for 5 s Strt
"oCAY" display following successful factory setting oCAY
CAUTION: preset results in "NO INIT"
1) If "turn" is selected, you cannot set 33° 4) NC contact means: action with opened switch or Low level
2) Parameter does not appear if 1.YFCT=turn has been selected NO contact means: action with closed switch or High level
3) Turning points only appear wih selection 12.SFCT = FrEE 5) Normal means: High level without fault
Inverted means: Low level without fault
691
Betriebsanleitung/Operating instructions
Anhang
Appendix
Einbau der Optionen
Installation of options
6 1 1.1
5
2.1
2.1
1.1
10
4 7
9
8
7.1
1 Baugruppenabdeckung 1 Module cover
1.1 Befestigungsschrauben 1.1 Fixing screws
2 Grundelektronik 2 Basic electronics
2.1 Befestigungsschrauben 2.1 Fixing screws
3 Jy--Modul mit Bandkabel (6) 3 Jy module with ribbon cable (6)
4 Alarm--Modul mit Bandkabel (5) 4 Alarm module with ribbon cable (5)
7 SIA-Modul 7 SIA module
7.1 Spezialschraube 7.1 Special screw
8 Verstellrad Rutschkupplung 8 Adjustment wheel for slipping clutch
9 Getriebeübersetzungsumschalter 9 Transmission ratio selector
10 Isolierabdeckung 10 Insulation cover
Bild 9 Einbau der Optionsmodule

Fig. 9 Installation of options
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 97
692
Elektrischer Anschluss Grundgerät
Electric connection of basic device
+ 4 bis/to 20 mA E
6 Stellungsregler 6DR5010-xNxxx
A Positioner 6DR5020-xNxxx
7
6DR5011-xNxxx
J 8 6DR5110-xNxxx
9 6DR5120-xNxxx
Binäreingang 1
10 6DR5111-xNxxx
Binary input 1
Nur für
Only for
HART-Communicator 6DR5110-xNxxx
6DR5120-xNxxx
6DR5111-xNxxx
Bild 10 2-Leiteranschluss nicht Ex

Fig. 10 2-wire connection not explosion-proof
Nicht explosions- Explosionsgefährdeter Bereich Zone 1 oder Zone 2

gefährdeter Bereich Hazardous area zone 1 or division 2
Non-hazardous
area
+ 4 bis/to 20 mA E
EEx Stellungsregler
6 6DR5010-xExxx
A Positioner 6DR5020-xExxx
7
J 8 6DR5011-xExxx
9
Binäreingang 1
Eigensichere Speise- 10
Binary input 1
quelle
Approved associated
apparatus or barrier
Bild 11 2-Leiteranschluss, EEx i, EEx n

Fig. 11 2-wire connection, EEx i, EEx n
SIPART PS2
98 A5E00074600-05
693
+ 4 bis/to 20 mA Positioner 6DR5320-xNxxx
3
4
5
J
E
6 A
7
8
9 Binäreingang 1
10 Binary input 1
Bild 12 2-Leiteranschluss, nicht Ex

Fig. 12 2-wire connection, not explosion-proof
+ 18 bis/to 35 V
Positioner 6DR5320-xNxxx
3
4
U
5
+ 0/4 bis/to 20 mA E
*) 6 A
*) 7
J 8
9 Binäreingang 1
10 Binary input 1
*) Nur für 3-Leiteranschluss

For 3 wire connection use only
Bild 13 3/4-Leiteranschluss, nicht Ex

Fig. 13 3/4-wire connection, not explosion-proof
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 99
694

Non-hazardous
area
2 Stellungsregler 6DR5210-xExxx
+ 4 bis/to 20 mA
EEx Positioner 6DR5220-xExxx
3
6DR5211-xExxx
4
5
J
Eigensichere Speise- E
6 A
quelle
Approved associated 7
apparatus or barrier 8
9 Binäreingang 1
10 Binary input 1
HART-Communicator
Bild 14 2-Leiteranschluss, EEx i, EEx n

Fig. 14 2-wire connection, EEx i, EEx n

Non-hazardous
area
+ 18 bis/to 30 V
EEx 2 Stellungsregler 6DR5210-xExxx
Positioner 6DR5220-xExxx
3
6DR5211-xExxx
4
U
5
EEx + 0/4 bis/to 20 mA E

*) 6 A
*) 7
J 8
9 Binäreingang 1
10 Binary input 1
Eigensichere Speise-
quellen HART-Communicator
Approved associated
apparatus or barrier
*) Nur für 3-Leiteranschluss

For 3 wire connection use only
Bild 15 3/4-Leiteranschluss, EEx i, EEx n

Fig. 15 3/4-wire connection, EEx i, EEx n
SIPART PS2
100 A5E00074600-05
695
Elektrischer Anschluss Optionen
Electric connection of options
+
61 E
UH
62 J
+
Jy-Modul
Jy module
6DR4004-8J
Bild 16 Jy--Modul, nicht Ex

Fig. 16 Jy module, not explosion-proof
Nicht explosionsgefährdeter Bereich Explosionsgefährdeter Bereich Zone 1 oder Zone 2

Non-hazardous area Hazardous area zone 1 or division 2
+
EEx +
61 E
UH U 62 J
J
Jy-Modul
+
Jy module
6DR4004-6J
Eigensichere Speisequellen
Approved associated apparatus or
barrier
Bild 17 Jy-Modul, EEx i, EEx n

Fig. 17 Jy module, EEx i, EEx n
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 101
696
Alarmmodul
Alarm module
6DR4004-8A
+13 V +
11
12 ≥1 BE2
+4.5 V
21 +3 V
22
+ 1K
31 Störmeldung
24 V
32 Alarm
+ 1K
41 Grenzwert A1
24 V
42 Limit A1
+ 1K
51 Grenzwert A2
24 V
52 Limit A2
Bild 18 Alarmmodul, nicht Ex

Fig. 18 Alarm module, not explosion-proof
Alarmmodul
Alarm module
6DR4004-6A
≤25.2 V 11
EEx 12 ≥1 BE2
21 + 3V
Eigensicherer 22
Schaltverstär- 2K1
ker nach +
EN 50227 31 Störmeldung
8.2 V 10K
Approved EEx 32 Alarm
associated
apparatus or 2K1
barrier +
41 Grenzwert A1
8.2 V 10K
EEx 42 Limit A1
+ 2K1
51 Grenzwert A2
8.2 V 10K
EEx 52 Limit A2

Bild 19 Alarmmodul, EEx i, EEx n

Fig. 19 Alarm module, EEx i, EEx n
SIPART PS2
102 A5E00074600-05
697
SIA-Modul
SIA module
6DR4004-8G
+ 2K1
31 Störmeldung
10K
32 Alarm
+
41 Grenzwert A1
42 Limit A1
+
51 Grenzwert A2
52 Limit A2
Bild 20 SIA-Modul, nicht Ex

Fig. 20 SIA module, not explosion-proof
SIA-Modul
SIA module
6DR4004-6G
Eigensicherer
Schaltverstär-
ker nach EN + 2K1
50227 31 Störmeldung
8.2 V 10K Alarm
Approved EEx 32
associated
apparatus or
barrier +
41 Grenzwert A1
8.2 V Limit A1
EEx 42
+
51 Grenzwert A2
8.2 V Limit A2
EEx 52

Bild 21 SIA-Modul, EEx i, EEx n

Fig. 21 SIA module, EEx i, EEx n
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 103
698
Hebel NAMUR
NAMUR lever
90°
25 30 35
1
5 10 15 20
33°
90° 40 50 60 70 90 110 130
Bild 22 Hebel NAMUR 3 mm bis 35 mm (1), Hebel NAMUR > 35 mm bis 130 mm (2)
Fig. 22 NAMUR lever 3 mm to 35 mm (1), NAMUR lever > 35 mm to 130 mm (2)
Maßbilder
Dimension drawings
60
50 x 4 x M6 Y1
29,5 29,5
7
2
Y1
65
37
E 33 PZ
80
95
72
48
9 tief Y2
M8, 9 tief
29
M8, 9 deep 9 deep

23
58 11,2
182 Alle Luftanschlüsse G 1/4 oder NPT
All pneumatic connections G1/4 or NPT
13,5
M20 x 1,5 oder/or NPT Adapter

96,6
8
h9
1
15
7 14,5
38,5
88,5
Bild 23 Maßbild Ausführung Kunststoffgehäuse

Fig. 23 Dimension drawing of plastic housing version
SIPART PS2
104 A5E00074600-05
699
90
79,5
50
20,5
9,5
14
*)
*) 3 x G1/4 oder/or NPT
9
25
12
2xM6
29,5
58,75
82
M4
Gewindetiefe 5,5
Thread depth 5.5
10
3,5
5
5,3 5
9,5
Bild 24 Maßbild Anschlussleiste für Kunststoffgehäuse

Fig. 24 Dimension drawing of terminal block for plastic housing
12
50 x 4 x M6 6,5 Y1
9 tief
9 deep
29,5
84
2
27,5 29
65
29,5
Y1
59
7
34,5
E
14
M8, 9 tief
PZ
23
58 11,2
182 Alle Luftanschlüsse G 1/4 oder NPT
All pneumatic connections G1/4 or NPT
13,5
96,6
8 M20 x 1,5 oder/or NPT-Adapter

h9
1
15
7 14,5
38,5
88,5
Bild 25 Maßbild Ausführung Metallgehäuse

Fig. 25 Dimension drawing of metal housing version
SIPART PS2
A5E00074600-05 105
700
4 019169 077842
@1PA5E00075600@
1P A5E00074600
Siemens AG
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschäftsgebiet Process Instrumentation and Analytics
D-76181 Karlsruhe
A5E00074600-05
701
CHAPTER 7.R.9.2
MANUAL OPERATION
702
Butterfly valves Type HZR
Special Features
Butterfly valves of type HZR show the
following special features:
– Collar vulcanised onto carrier ring
– Multiple sealed spindle
– Disk in stainless steel 1.4408
(CF8M)
– Open/closed position indicator
– Direct-mounting control valve
Special types
The following spezial types can be
supplied on request:
– Corrosion resistant actuators
– Extended temperature range
– Seat seal made of Viton und Teflon
– Alternatively equipped with
electrical actuator (type EZR) or
pneumatic actuator (type PZR)
– LUG-type
Product Description
Single part butterfly valve centrally pivoted and flowfriendly dimensioned. Sealed closure
in both flow directions with exchangeable seal vulcanised onto a carrier ring.
The butterfly valve is pneumatically driven and available in double or single acting
construction. On customer request the butterfly valve will be configured with spring
loaded open or closed default position. The butterfly valve is designed for flange clamping
according to DIN 2501.
The pneumatic control of the actuator is selectable realised with either a direct mounted
or separate 5/2– as well as 3/2-way-valve, both being capable to be electrically,
pneumatically or manually activated.
The butterfly valve is suited for flow media such as neutral gases and fluids with a
viscosity up to 120 mm²/s. Please note that media whichlead to an increase of the
operation torque may require higher actuator force classification. With respect to
aggressive media please refer to our material resistance table ZXWBT343.
703
Technical Data
Nominal width DN 40 to DN 300 more on request (up to DN 600)
Mounting position random
Nominal-/Operating pressure DN 40 to DN 300 max. PN16
DN 350 to DN 600 max. PN10
Overall Length According to DIN EN 558-1 Series 20 (K1)
Operating Temperature Range with seat EPDM = -30° C to +120° C
with seat NBR = -20° C to +80° C
Valve materials
Housing: GGG40 (JS1030)
Collar: EPDM, vulcanised onto carrier ring, exchangeable
Disk: Stainless steel 1.4408 (CF8M)
Stem: Stainless steel 1.4021 (AISI420), one-piece
Flow direction random
Flow media neutral gases and liquids; viscosity up to 120 mm²/s
Pneumatic control choice of 5/2– as well as 3/2-way valves either directly mounted or separate both available with
electrical, pneumatic or manual operation
Dimensions of Butterfly Valves

Control Pressure 5 bar • PN 16 (DN 40 – 300) • PN 10 (DN 350 – 600)
DN H2 H3 H F SW L1 L2 ØD3 ØL ØM
40 125 71 ca. 219 17 14 34 ca. 226 91 - F05
50 140 78 ca. 241 17 14 44 ca. 226 105 F05 F07
65 152 84 ca. 259 17 14 48 ca. 226 124 F05 F07
80 159 95 ca. 277 17 14 48 ca. 226 137 F05 F07
100 178 108 ca. 309 20 17 54 ca. 279 175 F05 F07
125 190 125 ca. 338 20 17 57 ca. 279 197 - F07
150 203 141 ca. 367 20 17 57 ca. 279 222 - F07
200 238 167 ca. 428 24 22 62 ca. 375 279 F07 F10
250 268 200 ca. 491 24 22 70 ca. 375 340 F10 F12
300 306 235 ca. 564 29 27 79 ca. 362 410 F10 F12
704
705
CP-
001-
ER-
DT-
en
706
CP-
001-
ER-
BW-
en
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
CP-
001-
ER-
ES-
en
717
718
719
720
CP-
001-
ER-
KO-
en
721
CP-
001-
ER-
HE-
en
722
CHAPTER 7.R.10
PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
723
Electronic
Pressure Measurement
Pressure Transmitter
Model ECO-1
WIKA Data Sheet PE 81.14
Applications
n Mechanical engineering
n Hydraulics
n General industrial applications
Special Features
n Pressure ranges from 0 ... 1 bar to 0 ... 1000 bar
n Current or voltage output signals
n Case and wetted parts of stainless steel
n Medium temperature -40 °C ... +100 °C
n Wiring with L-connector or flying leads
Fig. Pressure Transmitter ECO-1
Description
Wide range of applications Reliable signal acquisition
The pressure transmitter model ECO-TRONIC  has been With various standard output signals like 4 ... 20 mA
designed for all fields of industrial pressure measurement. (2-wire), or 0 ... 10 V, 1 ... 5 V and 1 ... 6 V (3-wire), the
Typical applications are in mechanical engineering, plant transmitter can be easily integrated into different systems.
construction and automation industry as well as in the RFI/EMI-characteristics according to EN 61 326 guarantee
refrigeration and air conditioning industry. signal integrity even under difficult environmental
conditions.
Reliable measurement technology
Pressure ranges from 0 ... 1 bar up to 0 ... 1000 bar cover Interesting price/performance ratio
the measuring ranges of the most applications. The sensors The excellent performance characteristics and the good
made by WIKA, with high accuracy, long-term stability and price/performance ratio of the ECO-TRONIC make it the
repeatability, have been well established in industrial perfect choice for applications with medium and large
pressure measurement for decades. Depending on the volumes.
pressure range, the suitable sensor, either piezoresistive or
metallic thin film, will be utilized.
WIKA Data Sheet PE 81.14 · 09/2006 Page 1 of 4
Pressure transmitter ECO-1 Model ECO-1

for Shipbuilding and Off-Shore (891.14.300 / 891.24.310) see data sheet PE 81.18
Pressure transmitter for mobile hydraulic applications Model MH-2 see data sheet PE 81.37
OEM-Pressure Transmitter with
ceramic thick film technology Model OC-1 see data sheet PE 81.41
724
Specifications Model ECO-1
Pressure ranges bar 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 10 16 25

Over pressure safety bar 5 10 10 17 35 35 50 50
Burst pressure bar 6 12 12 20.5 42 42 80 80
Pressure ranges bar 40 60 100 160 250 400 600 1000
Over pressure safety bar 80 120 200 320 500 800 1200 1500
Burst pressure bar 200 300 500 800 1250 1300 1800 3000
{Absolute pressure: 0 ... 1 bar abs to 0 ... 16 bar abs}
Materials
n Wetted parts Stainless steel
n Case Stainless steel
1)
Internal transmission fluid Synthetic oil
1)
Not for models with pressure ranges > 16 bar
Power supply UB UB in DC V 10 < UB ≤ 30 (14 ... 30 with output signal 0 ... 10 V, 1 ... 6 V)
Signal output and 4 ... 20 mA, 2- wire RA ≤ (UB – 10 V) / 0.02 A
Maximum load RA RA in Ohm 0 ... 10 V, 3-wire RA >10000
1 ... 5 V, 3-wire RA > 5000
1 ... 6 V, 3-wire RA > 6000
Response time (10 ... 90 %) ms ≤ 5 (≤ 10 ms at medium temperature < -30 °C for pressure ranges up to 16 bar)
2)
Dielectric strength DC V 500
2)
Use NEC Class 02 power supply (low voltage and low current max. 100 VA even under fault conditions.
Accuracy % of span ≤ 0.5 (BFSL)
≤ 1.0
3)
% of span
3)
Including non-linearity, hysteresis, non-repeatability, zero point and full scale error (corresponds to error of
measurement per IEC 61298-2). Adjusted in vertical mounting position with lower pressure connection.
Non-linearity % of span ≤ 0.4 (BFSL) according to IEC 61298-2
1-year stability % of span ≤ 0.3 (at reference conditions)
Permissible temperature of
n Medium
4)
-40 ... +100 °C -40 ... +212 °F
n Ambience
4)
-30 ... +80 °C -22 ... +176 °F
4)
n Storage -30 ... +100 °C -22 ... +212 °F
Compensated temp range 0 ... +80 °C 32 ... +176 °F
4)
Also complies with EN 50178, Tab. 7, Operation (C) 4K4H, Storage (D) 1K4, Transport (E) 2K3
Temperature coefficients within
compensated temp range
n Mean TC of zero % of span ≤ 0.4 / 10 K
n Mean TC of range % of span ≤ 0.3 / 10 K
a- conformity 89/336/EEC interference emission (class B) and immunity see EN 61 326
97/23/EG Pressure equipment directive
Wiring protection Protected against reverse polarity and short circuiting on the instrument side
Mass kg Approx. 0.15
{} Items in curved brackets are optional extras for additional price.
Page 2 of 4 WIKA Data Sheet PE 81.14 · 09/2006
725
Dimensions in mm
Ingress Protection IP per IEC 60 529
L-connector Circular connector Flying leads with 1.5 m of cable,
DIN EN 175301-803, Form A M 12x1, 4-pin conducter cross section 0.5 mm² ,
for conducter cross section up to IP65 AWG 20 with end splices,
max. 1.5 mm², Order code: M4 conducter outer diameter 6.6 mm,
conducter outer diameter 6 to 8 mm IP67
IP 65 Order code: DL
Order code: A4
Pressure connections
G 1/4 1/4 NPT
EN 837 per Nominal size for US standard
Order code: GB tapered pipe thread NPT
Order code: NB
Others on request
For installation and safety instructions see the operating instructions for this product.
For tapped holes and welding sockets please see Technical Information IN 00.14 for download at
www.wika.de -Service
Wiring details
2-wire system 3-wire system
L-connector
Circular connector
M 12x1
Flying leads
brown brown
white
Legend:
green
green
WIKA Data Sheet PE 81.14 · 09/2006 Page 3 of 4
726
Further pressure transmitter from our OEM production
Fig. Pressure transmitter ECO-1 for Shipbuilding Industrie Fig. Pressure transmitter MH-2 with thinfilm technology
and Off-Shore with international approvals for mobile hydraulic applications
see data sheet PE 81.18 see data sheet PE 81.37
Further information
You can obtain further information (data sheets, instructions, etc.) via Internet address
www.wika.de
uctions
perating Instr
O
Specifications and dimensions given in this leaflet represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
Modifications may take place and materials specified may be replaced by others without prior notice.
Page 4 of 4 WIKA Data Sheet PE 81.14 · 09/2006

9078215 09/2006 GB
WIKA Alexander Wiegand GmbH & Co. KG

Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30
63911 Klingenberg/Germany
727
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
48
+ SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
B 1 B
DC 24 V
PG 11 -
3
C
+ - C
75
SIGNAL
EVALUATION
MEASURING RANGE 0 ... 1 bar

D D
SW 19 OUTPUT 4 ... 20 mA
MAX. BURDEN 700 Ω
15
SUPPLY DC 24 V
VOLTAGE
E E
G 1/4 A
TYPE : ECOTRONIC
F F
5 Datum 05.05.2006 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 0017_
4 Bearbeiter Mol
R. Änderung Datum Name Norm SILO PROCESS CONTROL, PRESSURE TRANSMITTER CLAUDIUS PETERS 619.0017.1000A/03.en Blatt 01
728
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759

02 1 155478 152 A 00 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

02 1 155478 152 A 00 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

02 1 155478 152 A 00 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

APR: Wülbern, Stefan // DES: CIBS Gesellschaft fü, // 04.12.

Client : ISHIKAWAJIMA-HARIMA HEAVY

Installation site : BIM SON, VIETNAM

CPP key word : IHI FOR BIM SON II

CPP order no. : 02-1/155.478/572

Year of construction : 2007

Document file no. : 02-1-155478-152-A-00.en

Suppliers : Claudius Peters Projects GmbH

TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION: OPERATION

Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date

7 R 2 FLOW CONTROL GATE - TYPE PCD

7 R 6 1 3 STORAGE- AND PRESERVATION REGULATIONS Aerzen TNO 1175 A XA 00 30.11.2007

7 R 6 1 5 BLOWER STAGE 3SG-4647/ 48: SPARE PARTS Aerzen 3SG-4647 00 30.11.2007

02-1-155478-153-A-00.en.xls 1/2 03.12.2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENTATION: OPERATION

Chapter Title / Content Drawing/Document Rev Date

02-1-155478-153-A-00.en.xls 2/2 03.12.2007

PRINCIPAL SAFETY REFERENCES

Principal safety references

• maintenance (servicing, inspection, repair)

2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in

Information, orders or prohibitions to protect persons and to protect

Special information, orders or prohibitions to prevent damage!

3.3 Organisational Procedures

Safety equipment must never be dismantled or taken out of operation.

3.5.1 Normal Operation

• lock the main command equipment and withdraw the keys

• affix a warning sign at the main switch.

3.6 References to Particular Dangers

3.6.1 Electrical Energy

3.6.2 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke

Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).

Wear prescribed ear muffs.

3.6.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials

Be careful when using hot process materials (burning or scalding hazard).

Do not enter or work in the area underneath a suspended load!

During transport it is important to ensure that components reach the

Secure the load reliably. Use appropriate attachment points.

Nominate an experienced instructor for the lifting work.

Proceed only in accordance with the instruction manual to restart operation.

Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety.

Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).

Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.

Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.

Be careful when using hot process materials (burning or scalding hazard).

The following regulations must be observed for assembly in the Ex area:

Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety.

Under no circumstances must safety equipment be prevented from operating.

• lock the main command equipment and withdraw the keys

• affix a warning sign at the main switch.

Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.

Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.

Be careful when using hot process materials (burning or scalding hazard).

SR Coal Dust (SR-Kohlestaub)

1. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine

2. a source of ignition with sufficient energy

3. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.

3.8.3.1 Primary Explosion Protection

A. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine

" # $ % & ' ! ( ) + , -* &